JP7809891B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines capable of playing games have existed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-195760 A

However, in conventional gaming machines, there was room for improvement in the programs used for control, etc., from the perspective of increasing program speed, reducing program capacity (size), and improving program development efficiency.

Therefore, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine with an improved program.

In one exemplary embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine equipped with game control means capable of executing a game, the game control means comprising: first storage means for storing a first program for game control in a first program storage area and a second program for non-game control in a second program storage area, second storage means including a first working area readable and writable by the first program but readable and unwritable by the second program to serve as a working area for game control, a second working area readable and unwritable by the first program but readable and writable by the second program, and an unused area, arithmetic processing means for executing predetermined arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program and configured to be able to execute first and second branch instructions for jumping the address of an instruction executed in the first storage means, and a plurality of registers for storing values when performing the arithmetic processing, the first branch instruction being a branch instruction of a predetermined instruction length, and the second branch instruction being a branch instruction of a shorter instruction length than the first branch instruction with a limited range of addresses that can be branched to. and a branch instruction that performs branching by judging a specific flag, the first program includes a first processing routine and a first specific subroutine called from the first processing routine, the second program includes a second processing routine, the first processing routine is arranged in an area including a first address and a second address, the second address is an address after the first address, a second branch instruction that can jump processing to the second address is arranged at the first address, a first call instruction that calls the first specific subroutine is arranged between the first address and the second address without arranged a save instruction that saves a specified register and a restore instruction that restores the specified register, the second processing routine has a second call instruction that calls the second specific subroutine arranged between a third address where the save instruction is arranged and a fourth address after the third address where a restore instruction is arranged, and the second storage means arranges an unused area between the first working area and the second working area .

One aspect of the present invention provides a gaming machine with improved programming.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of the gaming machine from the front side. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control system of a gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a presentation control system of a gaming machine. 1 is a flowchart (part 1) showing a procedure of a main process. 10 is a second flowchart illustrating the procedure of the main process. 10 is a flowchart (part 3) showing the procedure of the main process. A diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of a gaming microcomputer. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device information initialization process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a performance display editing process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an output process. A flowchart showing the steps of the prize slot switch/status monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fraud and winning monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the number of winnings counter. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of a gaming machine status check process. A flowchart showing the steps of the probability setting change/confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special game processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the start port switch monitoring process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for common processing of the special chart start port switch. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for a specific area switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special chart normal processing. This is a flowchart showing the steps for the special chart 1 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps for the special chart 2 change start processing. This is a flowchart showing the steps for setting the jackpot flag 1. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot determination process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the small hit determination process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the support hit determination process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of a special chart information setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of the variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a two-byte allocation process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a distribution process. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of the fluctuation start information setting process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during special chart change. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a time-saving end setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the presentation mode information check process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the first half of the processing during special chart display. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the latter half of the processing during special chart display. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a support operation setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing a bonus game. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of reels. A flowchart showing the steps for processing the end of a jackpot. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end setting process 1. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end setting process 2. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for general game processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for gate switch monitoring processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the regular power winning switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the normal map change processing transition setting process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during normal map changes. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during normal map display. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during a normal hit. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a normal power operation transition setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing normal residual balls. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal hit end processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of an external information editing process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process. 10 is a time chart showing the transmission of external information or a test signal. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device-related process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an outside-area integration process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a performance display device control process. A flowchart showing the steps of the difference ball confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device operation monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a received command check process. 10 is a flowchart showing a received command analysis process. 10 is a flowchart showing a single command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading symbol command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead variation command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pattern command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable performance setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing a hit-related command. 10 is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions in game states. 10 is another example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions in game states. This is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reserves corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart change display game. This is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation. This is a timing chart showing the game status, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol status, normal power status, number of special symbol 2 reserved, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot of symbol A. This is a timing chart showing the game status, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol status, normal power status, number of special symbol 2 reserved, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot of symbol B. This is a timing chart showing the game status, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol status, normal power status, number of special symbol 2 reserved, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot of symbol F. 10 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, this is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified remaining number of reservations corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart variable display game. This is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, this is a timing chart showing the game state, special chart change display game (special chart change), normal chart state, normal power state, number of special chart 2 reservations, etc., from the time-saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (normal game state in which remaining reservations are consumed). FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, this is a table showing the number of time reductions and the specified number of remaining reservations (specified number of remaining reservations) corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart variable display game. This is a table summarizing the operation status of time-saving when a new trigger for time-saving operation occurs from each game state in the third embodiment. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating the display of a collective display device according to a third embodiment. A figure showing the features of the general map variation display game in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the features of normal power operation in the third embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart information setting process according to the third embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing the steps of the variation pattern setting process according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the variable start information setting process according to the third embodiment. This is a table showing the setting status of the variable pattern table in the third embodiment for each game state and special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2). FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rendering screen of a display device according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment. This is a time chart showing the on/off state of the jackpot 1 to 4 signals as external information in the third embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing the output of a test signal to a test firing test device in the third embodiment. This is a diagram illustrating examples of easy-to-win state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium support and high support in the third embodiment. 11 is a table showing the output of a launch position designation signal according to the third embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing the output of a launch position designation signal according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, this is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large prize opening and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid in the case of a small win result in the special chart 1 variable display game. This is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large prize opening and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid in the third embodiment in the case of a small win result in the special chart 2 variable display game. 13 is a table showing the state of a performance-related device according to the state of a safety device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment (part 1); FIG. 20 is a second example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment; 13 is another example (Example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment. This is a screen transition diagram illustrating different operation notification displays depending on the game status in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an example of an operation preview display before and after a reach during a variable display in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation advance notice display while waiting for customers in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, a display screen of the display device in a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is illustrated. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example (example 1) of a specific model display displayed other than as a video in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a specific model display displayed other than as a video in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of a CPU according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a flag register according to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a memory map according to the fifth embodiment. 10 is an instruction table (example 1-1) illustrating an LD instruction for transferring 1 byte of data among transfer instructions. 10 is a command table (example 1-2) illustrating an LD command that transfers two bytes of data among transfer commands. The instruction table (example 1-3) illustrates an LDW instruction that transfers two bytes of immediate value among the transfer instructions, and the instruction table (example 1-4) illustrates other transfer instructions (LDD instruction, LDY instruction). 10 is an instruction table (Example 2-1) illustrating a CP instruction, among comparison instructions, that compares one byte of data with another. 10 is an instruction table (Example 2-2) illustrating a CP instruction that compares two bytes of data among comparison instructions. 10 is an instruction table (example 2-3) illustrating a CPJ instruction among comparison instructions. 10 is an instruction table (example 2-4) illustrating a CPW instruction, among comparison instructions, that compares two bytes of data. 3-1 is an instruction table illustrating a JRR instruction that jumps to a nearby address, and FIG. 3-2 is an instruction table illustrating a JR instruction that can jump to a distant address. An instruction table (Example 4-1) illustrates a CALL instruction that can call a subroutine at any address, and an instruction table (Example 4-2) illustrates a CALLT instruction and a CALLR instruction that cannot call a subroutine at any address. 5A and 5B are instruction tables (Example 5-1 and Example 5-2) illustrating return instructions for returning from a subroutine, an interrupt process, etc. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an output process according to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of outside-area integration processing according to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a test signal output process according to the fifth embodiment. 1 is a program listing showing the program structure of a part of a main processing program. 10 is a program listing showing the program structure of a timer interrupt processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of a special game processing program and a program list explaining a special game sequence branch table. This is a program list showing the program structures of a 2-byte decrement processing program, a 2-byte data acquisition processing program, a 1-byte data acquisition processing program, and a special drawing status check processing program. 10 is a program listing showing a program structure of a part of a start port switch monitoring processing program. 10 is a program listing showing the program structure of a hardware random number acquisition processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of the special chart start port switch common processing program. This is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special chart reservation information determination processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of the jackpot determination processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of the special normal processing program. This is a program list showing the program structure of part of the processing program during special chart display. This is a program list showing the program structure of another part of the special chart display processing program. 10 is a program listing showing the program structure of a start port signal editing processing program. 10 is a program listing showing a program structure of a safety device-related processing program. 10 is a program listing showing the program structure of an outside-area integration processing program. 10 is a program listing showing a program structure of a test signal output processing program. This is a program listing showing the program structure of a portion of the difference ball confirmation processing program. 10 is a program listing showing a program structure of a safety device operation monitoring processing program. 10 is a command table illustrating comparison commands executed by a CPU of a performance control device.

[First embodiment]
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Preferred embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the terms front, back, left and right refer to directions as seen by a player playing a game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via hinges 16 and can be rotated open and closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15 (front frame unit). The left end of the opening/closing frame is the shaft-mounted end attached to the hinge, and the right end is the open end that opens when rotated. The frame 11 and front frame 12 form an outer frame unit 17.

The game board 30 (see Figure 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that allows the game area 32 (see Figure 2) formed on the game board 30 to be viewed. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14. The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds the transparent member.

The front frame 12 and glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Furthermore, by opening the front frame 12 without opening the glass frame 15, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see Figure 3) and other devices located on the back side of the game board 30.

Various frame components are arranged around the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

Decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c that can emit light depending on the game status are arranged in the upper center and on the right and left sides of the glass frame 15. Decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c house lighting elements such as LEDs inside and are used to emit light depending on the game status. The lighting elements arranged inside these decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c form part of the frame decorative device 18 (see Figure 4).

The decorative device 18a is a top unit that extends from the left to the right of the gaming machine 10 above the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame) and protrudes diagonally upward toward the front. The decorative device 18a has a generally flat front surface 456 that bears various markings such as the model name. In this embodiment, the decorative device 18a is fixed and does not move, but to reduce the sense of oppression felt by the player, it may protrude from its retracted initial position (normal position) to a forward, upward, or diagonal operating position only when necessary, or move forward and backward or up and down. When the decorative device 18a (here, the top unit) operates (moves), it becomes a frame effect device (movable gadget) that can move from its initial position to an operating position.

Decorative device 18b is a protruding performance unit (front frame light-emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. Decorative device 18c is a protruding performance unit (front frame light-emitting unit) that extends vertically on the left side of glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. Decorative devices 18b and 18c emit light toward the player toward the center (inside) of gaming machine 10, and light leaks out of gaming machine 10 through multiple openings.

Upper speakers 19a are located in the upper right and upper left corners of the glass frame 15. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are located in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speakers 19a and lower speakers 19b emit sound effects, alarms, notification sounds, etc. The left and right upper speakers 19a are covered by right and left speaker decorative members 470, respectively.

Attached to the bottom of the glass frame 15 is an upper tray unit 20 having an upper tray 21 capable of storing gaming balls (gaming media). The upper tray 21 is formed in a box shape with an opening at the top. The gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to the ball launcher.

The upper tray unit 20 further includes a performance operation device that accepts input operations from the player, a ball dispensing operation device that accepts input operations from the player, and a decorative device 22 that produces lighting effects and other effects depending on the game status.

The effect operation device is an operation device including the effect button 25, the cross key switch 450, and the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and is located at the top center and to the left of the upper tray unit 20 for easy operation by the player. The effect button 25 is placed within the opening of the operation panel 490 so that it is surrounded by the operation panel 490. The operation panel 490 is capable of reflecting light by metal plating its surface or being made entirely of metal, and has a metallic luster, for example, a silver (silver) color. When the effect button 25 emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 490, creating an effective light-emitting effect for the effect button 25.

The effect button 25 may include a built-in effect button switch 25a and a touch panel 25b provided on the surface.

The volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b are located on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the upper tray unit 20 and are used to increase or decrease (+/-) the volume of the speakers 19 (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b). The cross key switch 450 (cross key SW) is located on the upper left side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20 adjacent to the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b and is used to adjust, for example, the brightness of the LEDs for effects. The cross key switch 450 may also be called a directional key switch and may be a general type consisting of multiple (e.g., four) switches arranged in the front, back, left, right, etc. For example, in a specified state, such as while waiting for customers and/or during play (game), the volume of the speaker 19 may be adjusted by pressing the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and the light intensity (brightness, luminance) of the LEDs for effects may be adjusted by pressing the switches in front or behind the cross key switch 450. It is also possible to adjust the volume of the speaker 19 by pressing the left or right switch of the cross key switch 450, without providing the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b.

By operating the effect operation device (particularly the effect button 25), the player can intervene in effects such as the special symbol variable display game displayed on the display device 41 (see Figure 2), allowing for player interaction. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a preview effect that foretells the outcome of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes the special symbol variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special symbol variable display game.

In addition, the presentation pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being played, but also when the game is not being played, by the player operating the presentation operation device.

The game state when a variable display game is executed consists of multiple game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. Special game states include, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the probability of a special result (e.g., a jackpot) occurring in a variable display game is high (probability variable state, probability variable state), a jackpot state (special game state), and a small jackpot game state (small jackpot state). In this way, the gaming machine 10 has multiple game states with different probabilities of special results occurring, and the game control device 100 (game state selection means, setting means) can select (set) one game state from the multiple game states to set it as the current game state.

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) can be one that continues until the next jackpot occurs (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games have been played (number-stop type, ST), or one that continues until a predetermined probability of falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not a special state will occur may not be determined by the jackpot symbol random number, but may be set so that a special state will always occur when a jackpot occurs.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing gaming balls, and is located on the upper right side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20. The ball lending operation device is equipped with a balance display unit 490a, a ball lending button 27, and a return button 28. The balance display unit 490a is a display area that displays the balance of a prepaid card, etc. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing gaming balls, and the return button 28 is a button operated by a player when ejecting a prepaid card, etc. from a card unit (not shown) located adjacent to the gaming machine 10.

The decorative device 22 houses lighting components such as LEDs inside and is a device that provides lighting effects depending on the game status, and is installed on the upper tray unit 20. The lighting components arranged inside the decorative device 22 form part of the frame decoration device 18 (see Figure 4).

Below the glass frame 15 containing the above-mentioned upper tray unit 20, etc., and at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is provided an operating handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown), and a lower tray unit 29 containing a lower tray 23, etc., in which game balls can be stored. The lower tray unit 29 and the upper tray unit 20 are compatible in shape and are arranged side by side, stacked vertically. By operating the upper tray operating part 435 of the upper tray unit 20, game balls on the upper tray 21 can be caused to flow down to the lower tray 23.

The operating handle 24 is located at the bottom right of the front frame 12, below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball launcher launches game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game balls launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the rotation amount of the operating handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launcher can change the launch force, which is the force (speed) with which the game balls are launched into the game area 32, in response to the player's operation of the operating handle 24, and can launch game balls in various launch modes with different launch forces. Launch modes include a left hit (normal hit), in which the game balls flow down the left side of the game area 32, and a right hit, in which the game balls flow down the right side of the game area 32.

The lower tray 23 of the lower tray unit 29 is positioned below the upper tray unit 20 at a predetermined distance. The lower tray 23 has a ball ejection hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower tray 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball ejection hole 23a. By operating the opening/closing operation part 23b to open the ball ejection hole 23a, the player can eject the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 to the outside through the ball ejection hole 23a.

Also located behind the front frame 12 are a power supply unit 400 that supplies power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed on the island equipment, and a payout device (payout unit) that pays out game balls that flow down from the upper tank 448 onto the upper tray 21.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 30 comprises a flat gaming board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various components. The gaming board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a gaming area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front of the gaming board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured so that games are played by launching gaming balls from a ball launcher into the gaming area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31. The gaming area 32 is equipped with windmills, obstacle spikes, and other components that change the flow direction of the gaming balls, and the launched gaming balls flow down the gaming area 32 while changing their rolling direction due to these components.

Attached approximately in the center of the play area 32 is a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as the display area for the variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40 is a display device 41 that serves as a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) multiple pieces of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, an LCD display, and is positioned so that the display content can be seen from the front side of the play board 30 through the window in the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to one that includes an LCD display, and may also include a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 has multiple variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that create the variable display game. In addition, the display screen displays images based on the progress of the game (jackpot display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.).

The center case 40 also has an inlet 40a to a warp passage 40e that guides game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the inside of the center case 40, and a stage section 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. The stage section 40b of the center case 40 is located above the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, making it easier for game balls rolling on the stage section 40b to win the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.

An upper performance unit 40c and a side performance unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper performance unit 40c and the side performance unit 40d form part of the board decoration device 46 (see Figure 4) and the board performance device 44 (see Figure 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal symbol start gate 34 is a gate switch (SW) 34a (see Figure 3) for detecting game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start gate 34. When a game ball shot into the game area 32 passes through the normal symbol start gate 34, a normal symbol change display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is located in the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, and another general winning opening 35 is located in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. The entry of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see Figure 3) provided on the general winning openings 35.

A start winning port (start winning port 1, first start winning area) 36 is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40, which sets the conditions for starting the special symbol variable display game. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric device, normal electric) equipped with a second start winning port (start winning port 2, second start winning area) is provided below the normal symbol start gate 34. The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that rotates forward to change the state to make it easier for game balls to flow in. When the movable member 37b is in a closed state, game balls cannot win in the normal variable winning device 37. When a game ball wins the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special symbol variable display game is played as an auxiliary game. Furthermore, game balls are more likely to enter the starting winning slot 36 when hit from the left, and game balls are more likely to enter the normal variable winning device 37 when hit from the right.

Moveable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type normal electric device that opens via normal solenoid 37c (see Figure 3) when the result of the normal variable display game reaches a predetermined stop display mode, changing to an open state (an easy-to-win state that is advantageous to the player) that makes it easier for game balls to flow into normal variable winning device 37. When movable member 37b is not in the open state (easy-to-win state), it changes to a closed state (a non-easy-to-win state, a difficult-to-win state) that makes it difficult for game balls to flow into normal variable winning device 37. Note that in this embodiment, unlike normal variable winning device 37, starting winning port 36 does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state), although a configuration with a movable member (opening/closing member) is also possible.

Moving member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game or by making the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game higher than normal, or by lengthening the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state compared to the easy-to-win state that occurs in normal gameplay when no special play is performed, thereby generating the time-saving state (normal power support state) as the specific game state mentioned above. Note that the time-saving state (normal power support state) also occurs overlappingly in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state).

The game area 32 to the right of the starting prize opening 36 is equipped with a first special variable prize opening device 38 (special electric device) having an attacca-style door 38c that opens the lower large prize opening by retracting from the front to the back using a lower large prize opening solenoid 38b (see Figure 3). The first special variable prize opening device 38 converts the large prize opening from a closed state (a blocked state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (a game state favorable to the player) based on the results of the special symbol variable display game, facilitating the flow of game balls into the lower large prize opening, thereby awarding the player a predetermined game value (e.g., prize balls or the number of time-saving/probable-change events after a jackpot). A lower large prize opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided within the lower large prize opening as a detection means for detecting game balls that enter the large prize opening. In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is more likely to have the game ball win when hit from the right.

A second special variable prize winning device 39 is located in the game area 32 above the normal variable prize winning device 37. The second special variable prize winning device 39 has an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper large prize winning port by pivoting its upper end to the right using an upper large prize winning port solenoid 39b (see Figure 3). The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the large prize winning port from a closed state (a blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player) based on the results of the special variable prize display game, facilitating the flow of game balls into the large prize winning port, thereby awarding the player a predetermined game value (e.g., prize balls or the number of time-saving/probability-change events after a jackpot). An upper large prize winning port switch 39a (count switch) (see Figure 3) is located within the large prize winning port as a detection device for detecting game balls that enter the large prize winning port. The second special variable prize winning device 39 facilitates game balls entering the large prize winning port when hit from the right. Additionally, the lower large prize opening switch 38a and the upper large prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the large prize opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V entry port) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. A big win is confirmed when a gaming ball enters the specific area 86 (V entry port) after the opening/closing door 39c is opened by a small win. The specific area 86 may be open for a long period of time only during a small win, allowing gaming balls to pass through easily. The gaming control device 100 can detect the passage of a gaming ball into the specific area 86 (V entry) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described below), etc., and upon detecting a V entry, it determines that a transition to a big win state will occur after the small win ends, and sends information indicating a V entry (such as a specific area passage command) to the presentation control device 300 described below. The presentation control device 300 can then report the V entry on the display device 41, etc.

In other words, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called Type 1/Type 2 hybrid machine (Type 1+2 machine). In this embodiment, when a small win opens the second special variable winning device 39, the gaming ball V-enters a specific area 86 (V winning hole) within the second special variable winning device 39, resulting in a big win.

When a gaming ball enters a large winning slot of the general winning slot 35, the starting winning slot 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, the payout control device 200 (see Figure 3) discharges a number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning slot from the payout device to the upper tray 21. The lower gaming area 32 also has an outlet 30b for collecting gaming balls that do not enter a winning slot. The general winning slot 35, the starting winning slot 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, or their vicinity, are also equipped with LEDs (part of the board decoration device 46, described below) that can emit light when a gaming ball enters a winning slot.

In addition, outside the play area 32, in the lower right corner of the playboard main body 30a, there is a collective display device 50 that runs the special chart change display game (special chart 1 change display game, special chart 2 change display game) and the regular chart change display game. The collective display device 50 is equipped with display units 51-60 made up of LED lamps (light-emitting units, light-emitting members) that display information such as the current game status.

The collective display device 50 has a first special chart change display unit 51 (special chart 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special chart change display unit 52 (special chart 2 display, lamp D2) for the change display game, which are composed of 7-segment displays (LED lamps), a change display unit 53 (normal chart display, lamps D8, D10, D18) for the normal chart change display game, and memory display units (special chart 1 hold display 54, special chart 2 hold display 55, normal chart hold display 56) for notifying the start (hold) memory number of each change display game. The special chart 1 hold display 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special chart 2 hold display 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal chart hold display 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

The collective display device 50 also has a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp D7) that indicates whether it is a right-hand hit (when a right-hand hit is required) or a left-hand hit (when a normal hit is required), a second game status display unit 58 (second game status indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time-saving state is activated to indicate the occurrence of the time-saving state, a third game status display unit 59 (third game status indicator, probability status display unit, lamp D9) that indicates that the probability state for a jackpot is high when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) that indicates the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable prize-winning devices 38, 39 are opened and closed).

In the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display that repeatedly turns on and off (flashes) the identification information (e.g., the center segment). Note that the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 are not limited to such segment-type displays, and may be composed of a collection of multiple LEDs. When executing the variable display, all LEDs provided as the display may be turned on and off (all LEDs flashing simultaneously), or may be circulating (starting with any one LED turning on and off in a predetermined sequence at predetermined intervals), or a predetermined number of LEDs among the multiple LEDs may be turned on and off (flashes) or circulate. In the normal chart display 53, the variable display game is also executed by a variable display (flashes) that repeatedly turns on and off lamps D10 and D18. The normal chart display 53 can also be configured appropriately in the same way as the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 has lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform a variable display (flashing) that alternately lights up and turns off the symbols (the fourth special symbol and fourth symbol described below), and lamp display units 3-6 (LEDs) that notify the start (hold) and number of memories for each special symbol variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the performance control device 300 (described below).

Lamp display units 1 and 2 flash at a predetermined flashing cycle (e.g., 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. In other words, lamp display units 1 and 2 switch between turning on and off at half the flashing cycle (e.g., 100 msec). While the variable display time of the special chart 1 display unit 51, special chart 2 display unit 52, and regular chart display unit 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the variable display time of lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 is measured by the performance control device 300 (described below).

Lamp displays 3 and 4 (Special Chart 1 Pending LED 1, Special Chart 1 Pending LED 2) display the number of Special Chart 1 pending (first start memory number) through a combination of off, on, and flashing states. Similarly, lamp displays 5 and 6 (Special Chart 2 Pending LED 1, Special Chart 2 Pending LED 2) display the number of Special Chart 2 pending (second start memory number) through a combination of off, on, and flashing states. Lamp displays 3-6 stop displaying the pending number when a jackpot occurs, but continue to display the pending number when not in a jackpot state (including when a reach, as described below, has occurred on display device 41).

Next, we will explain the game flow on the gaming machine 10, as well as details of the regular chart change display game and the special chart change display game.

In gaming machine 10, games are played by launching gaming balls from a ball launcher (not shown) toward gaming area 32. The launched gaming balls flow down gaming area 32, changing their rolling direction due to obstacles and windmills placed throughout gaming area 32, and either win or enter a normal start gate 34, a normal winning opening 35, a start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, or flow into outlet 30b located at the bottom of gaming area 32 and are discharged from gaming area 32. When a gaming ball wins a normal winning opening 35, a start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning opening are discharged into upper tray 21 via a payout device.

The normal map start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see Figure 3) that detects game balls that have passed through the normal map start gate 34. When a game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and a normal map variation display game is executed based on the result of the random number value for winning determination extracted at this time.

When the normal map variation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variation display game is already being played and has not finished, or when the normal map variation display game has resulted in a win and the normal variation winning device 37 has been converted to an open state, if the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, and the normal map start memory number (normal map reserve number) is less than the upper limit, the memory number will be incremented (+1).

The normal map start memory (normal map reserve) stores a random number value for determining whether the normal map fluctuation display game is a win or a loss. If this random number value for determining whether the game is a win or a loss matches the judgment value, the normal map fluctuation display game is a win and a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed on the normal map display device 53 provided on the collective display device 50. The normal map display device 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a win when lit as normal identification information (normal map) and a loss when unlit; the LED flashes to display variations in the normal identification information, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the LED is turned on or off to display the result.

If the normal symbol random number value extracted when passing through the normal symbol start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol (normal symbol) displayed on the normal symbol display 53 stops in a winning state, indicating a winning state. At this time, the normal symbol solenoid 37c (see Figure 3) is driven, converting the movable member 37b to an open state for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds x 2 times), allowing the game ball to enter the normal variable winning device 37.

The entry of game balls into the start entry slot 36 and the entry of game balls into the normal variable entry device 37 are detected by the start entry slot 1 switch 36a (see Figure 3) and the start entry slot 2 switch 37a (see Figure 3). Game balls that enter the start entry slot 36 are detected as start entry balls for the special chart 1 variable display game and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit, while game balls that enter the normal variable entry device 37 are detected as start entry balls for the special chart 2 variable display game and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the starting winning ball of the special symbol variation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random number value, the random number values for each variation pattern, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored a predetermined number of times (for example, up to a maximum of eight times) as special symbol starting winning memories in the special symbol reserve memory area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100. The number of special symbol starting winning memories stored is displayed on the special symbol 1 reserve indicator 54 and the special symbol 2 reserve indicator 55, which are used to notify the number of starting winnings on the collective display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

The gaming control device 100 executes a special symbol 1 variable display game on the special symbol 1 display 51 based on a win in the start winning slot 36 or the first start memory (special symbol 1 start memory, special symbol 1 reserve). The gaming control device 100 also executes a special symbol 2 variable display game on the special symbol 2 display 52 based on a win in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special symbol 2 start memory, special symbol 2 reserve).

The special symbol 1 variable display game (first special symbol variable display game) and the special symbol 2 variable display game (second special symbol variable display game) are played by displaying the identification information (special symbol, special symbol) on the special symbol 1 display 51 and the special symbol 2 display 52 in a variable manner, followed by a fixed display of a predetermined result pattern.

In addition, the display device 41 runs a decorative special symbol variable display game that displays multiple types of identification information (e.g., numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner corresponding to each special symbol variable display game.

The decorative special symbol variation display game on display device 41 begins by displaying (scrolling) the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the aforementioned numbers, etc., in the order of left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and center (third special symbol). After a predetermined time, the varying symbols are stopped sequentially to display the results of the special symbol variation display game. Display device 41 also displays a variety of effects, such as the appearance of characters, to enhance entertainment value. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, another decorative special symbol (identification information) is the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol), which varies by repeatedly turning on and off (flashing) in lamp display units 1 and 2 of lamp display device 80. After a predetermined time from the start of the display, the varying display on lamp display units 1 and 2 stops at "off" if there is a miss, or "on" if there is a big win or small win.

When a game ball enters the start entry slot 36 or the normal variable entry device 37 at the specified timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of entry detection is a jackpot value), a specific result state (special result state) is derived from the displayed symbols as the result of the special symbol variable display game, and a jackpot state (special game state) is entered. Correspondingly, the display state of the display device 41 becomes a special result state (for example, a state in which the numbers "7, 7, 7" are lined up).

At this time, the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 convert the large prize opening from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) by energizing the large prize opening solenoid (38b, 39b) (see Figure 3). In other words, the large prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls have entered, granting the player the privilege of winning many game balls during this time.

When a game ball enters the first start entry slot 36 or the normal variable entry device 37 at the specified timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of entry detection is a small jackpot value), a specific result mode (small jackpot result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols as the result of the special symbol variable display game, and a small jackpot state is reached. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small jackpot result mode. Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a small jackpot, but the small jackpot value (small jackpot determination value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot determination value).

At this time, the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 convert the large prize opening from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined short period of time by energizing the large prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b (see Figure 3). Note that the full open time of the large prize opening is shorter in the small win state (small win game state) than in the big win state (special game state), so the player can acquire less game value (number of balls acquired) in the small win state than in the big win state. Note that while the large prize opening is open in both the small win state and the big win state, the big win state may be referred to as the first special game state, and the small win state as the second special game state. For simplicity, this embodiment describes a configuration in which only the special variable prize winning device 39 (upper large prize opening) is converted to an open state in the small win state, and only the special variable prize winning device 38 (lower large prize opening) is converted to an open state in the big win state (including the big win state due to V entry during a small win).

Here, we will explain the difference between a big hit and a small hit.

A jackpot is a special result that accompanies the activation of a conditional device, while a small jackpot is a specific result that does not accompany the activation of a conditional device. The conditional device is activated when a jackpot occurs in a special variable display game (when the jackpot symbol stops displaying). The activation of the conditional device means, for example, that a jackpot state occurs and a specific flag is set to activate the special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39, which are special electric devices. The activation of the conditional device may also mean that a game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V prize). The non-activation of the conditional device means that the specific flag described above is not set, for example, when a small jackpot lottery is won. However, as described later in this embodiment, the conditional device will be activated if a V prize occurs during a small jackpot state. The "conditional device" may be a software means, such as a flag that is turned on and off by software, or a hardware means, such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Furthermore, the term "conditioning device" is commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines to refer to a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of an electric device, and is used in this specification as a term with the same meaning.

Specifically, in the case of a big win, the big win flag is set and the special variable prize winning device is opened, whereas in the case of a small win, the small win flag is set and the special variable prize winning device is opened.

The special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or as the same display, but are set so that the special chart change display games are not executed simultaneously. The special chart 2 change display game is executed with priority over the special chart 1 change display game, and there is a start memory for the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game. When the special chart change display game is ready to be executed, the special chart 2 change display game is executed (special chart 2 reserved consumption priority, special chart 2 change priority).

With regard to the decorative special chart change display game on the display device 41, the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or may be executed on the same display device or display area. In this case, the decorative special chart change display games corresponding to the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game may not be executed simultaneously.

In the following explanation, when there is no distinction between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, they will simply be referred to as the special chart variable display game.

In addition, although not limited to these, the start slot 1 switch 36a in the start slot 36, the start slot 2 switch 37a in the normal variable slot 37, the gate switch 34a, the slot switch 35a, and the count switches (38a, 39a) use non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) that have a magnetic detection coil and detect game balls by utilizing the phenomenon in which the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. In addition, microswitches with mechanical contacts can be used for the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, etc., and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12, etc.

[Game control device]
3 is a block diagram of the gaming control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a gaming control device 100 (main board), which is a main control device (main board) that controls the overall game, and is composed of a CPU section 110 having a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111, an input section 120 having input ports, an output section 130 having output ports, drivers, etc., and a data bus 140 that connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111, also known as an amusement chip (IC), and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113, which is equipped with an oscillator such as a quartz crystal resonator and generates the CPU's operating clock, timer interrupts, and the clock that serves as the reference for the random number generation circuit. The gaming control device 100 and electronic components driven by the gaming control device 100, such as solenoids and motors, are powered by a DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as DC 32V, DC 12V, or DC 5V, generated by the power supply unit 400, enabling them to operate.

The power supply unit 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 that includes an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates lower level DC voltages such as DC 12V or DC 5V from DC 32V; a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power outage; and a control signal generation unit 430 that includes a power outage monitoring circuit and generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, i.e., on the main board. Since the game board 30 and game control device 100 are subject to replacement when changing models, by providing the backup power supply unit 420 and control signal generation unit 430 on a board separate from the power supply unit 400 or the main board, as in this embodiment, they are not subject to replacement, thereby reducing costs.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of a single large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control device 100, so that data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the 32V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, and if it drops below 17V, for example, detects a power outage and changes the power outage monitoring signal, while outputting a reset signal after a predetermined time has passed. It also outputs a reset signal after a predetermined time has passed from the time the power is turned on or when the power is restored.

The gaming control device 100 is also provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process is performed to forcibly initialize the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Although not limited to this, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power outage monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game control device 100 (main board) also includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93, when turned on by the operator through a rotation operation or the like, enables the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the settings related to the game conditions (game) to be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value in response to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the probability of winning, such as the probability of a big win or a small win. However, other game conditions (such as effects) other than probability can also be changed according to the probability setting value. For example, the higher the probability setting value, the higher the probability of winning. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting change means (setting change device 42, setting means) that can change the settings related to the game conditions (probability setting value). Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value change switch, or a dedicated setting value change switch may be provided.

The setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are located on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, and are therefore positioned in an inaccessible position where they cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. In other words, ordinary players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (recovered from a power outage, power restored), the gaming machine 10 can transition to various states, such as a setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed (set), and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, depending on the on/off state of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112.

In this embodiment, the probability setting values are defined in six stages, for example: probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the setting that is most unfavorable to the player, and setting 6 is the setting that is most favorable to the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

During the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed as follows: setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, during the setting change state (setting change mode), working setting values 0-5 are set to correspond to probability setting values 1-6, respectively; however, the working setting values and probability setting values may be treated as the same by aligning them to the same numerical range (i.e., 0-5 or 1-6) (making the working setting value and probability setting value the same numerical value).

In addition, instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position. The probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected working setting value of 0 to 5 is displayed on the performance display device 152, which is, for example, a four-digit, seven-segment display (eight-segment display including the dot Dp). Information about setting values such as the display probability setting value (for example, a display that can read probability setting values 1 to 6) may also be displayed on the front of the gaming machine (for example, the collective display device 50). Information about setting values such as the display probability setting value may also be displayed on the front of the gaming machine (for example, the collective display device 50) not only during the setting variable state or setting confirmation state, but also during game control execution (during execution of the game processing described below).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is equipped with a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

ROM 111b stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) in a non-volatile manner. RAM 111c is used as a working area for CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. It stores information related to games (game information) and serves as a storage means that can retain stored information even in the event of a power outage. ROM 111b or RAM 111c may be an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM.

ROM 111b also stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that stipulates, for example, the execution time of the special chart variation display game, the presentation content, and whether or not a reach state occurs. The variation pattern table is a table that CPU 111a uses to determine a variation pattern by referencing variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory. The variation pattern table also includes a miss variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a miss, and a jackpot variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot. These pattern tables also include tables (such as a second-half variation group table and a second-half variation pattern selection table) for determining second-half variation patterns, which are variation patterns after a reach state is reached, and tables (such as a first-half variation group table and a first-half variation pattern selection table) for determining first-half variation patterns, which are variation patterns before a reach state is reached.

Here, "reach" (reach state) refers to a display state in a gaming machine 10 that has a display device with a variable display state, which derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and in which the gaming state becomes advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the multiple display results become a predetermined special result pattern. This state refers to a display state in which the display results already derived and displayed satisfy the conditions for becoming a special result pattern, even when some of the multiple display results have not yet been derived and displayed. Alternatively, a "reach state" refers to a display state in which the display device's variable display control has progressed to a stage just before the display results are derived and displayed, but still meets the display conditions for becoming a special result pattern. For example, a "reach state" also includes a state in which multiple variable display areas are displayed while maintaining a set of special result patterns (a so-called "full rotation reach"). Additionally, a reach state refers to the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage just before the display result is derived and displayed, and when at least some of the display results of the multiple variable display areas determined before the display result is derived and displayed meet the conditions for a special result mode.

So, for example, if a decorative special symbol variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special symbol variable display game displays multiple identification information for a predetermined period of time in each of the left, center, and right variable display areas on the display device, and then stops the display in the order of left, right, and center to display the result state, the reach state will be a state in which the left and right variable display areas stop displaying the information when the conditions for a special result state are met (for example, the same identification information) in the left and right variable display areas. Alternatively, once the display of all variable display areas has been stopped, the reach state may be a state in which the conditions for a special result state are met in any two of the left, center, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information, excluding the special result state), and the remaining variable display area may be displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes multiple reach effects, and the reach effects have different possibilities (different expectations) for leading to a special result mode (jackpot mode), and are classified as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach. The expected probability (expected value) of a jackpot increases in the following order: no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach < premium reach. The reach state is included in the variable display modes when a special result mode is derived (a jackpot occurs) in at least the special chart variable display game. In other words, it may also be included in the variable display modes when it is determined that a special result mode will not be derived (a miss occurs) in the special chart variable display game. Therefore, a state in which a reach state has occurred is more likely to result in a jackpot than a state in which a reach state does not occur.

The expected probability of a particular effect (preview) indicates the probability of a jackpot if that effect is selected, and can be calculated based on the selection rate of that effect when a jackpot is reached and the selection rate of that effect when a jackpot is not reached (when a miss occurs).

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoids and display devices, thereby controlling the entire gaming machine 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is equipped with a random number generation circuit for generating a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in the special symbol variable display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, a small jackpot pattern random number for determining the small jackpot pattern, a support hit pattern random number for determining the time-saving pattern (stop pattern for a support hit) described below, and a fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol variable display game (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and no reach variable displays), and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that provides update timing for the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.

In addition, in processing related to the special chart variation display game, CPU 111a acquires one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b. Specifically, CPU 111a selects and acquires one of the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the game result of the special chart variation display game (jackpot or loss), the probability state of the special chart variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of start memories, etc. Here, when playing the special chart variation display game, CPU 111a serves as a variation allocation information acquisition means that acquires one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and controls the drive of the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to pay out prize balls in accordance with prize ball payout commands (commands and data) from the game control device 100. The payout control device 200 also controls the drive of the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to pay out prize balls based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit 600.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 is connected to a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects radio waves emitted to the gaming machine, the gate switch 34a of the normal start gate 34, the start gate 1 switch 36a in the first start entry gate 36, the start gate 2 switch 37a in the second start entry gate 37 (normal variable entry device), the entry gate switch 35a of the normal entry gate 35, and the large entry gate switches 43 (lower large entry gate switch 38a, upper large entry gate switch 39a) of the special variable entry devices 38, 39. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided that receives negative logic signals, such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V, supplied from these switches and converts them into positive logic signals of 0V-5V.

Furthermore, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball outlet switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage (V entry) of a game ball into the specific area 86 (V entry port). The remaining ball outlet switch 73 detects game balls that have passed through the remaining ball outlet, which discharges game balls from the special variable entry devices 38, 39. The out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls that have been launched into the game area and have finished playing (i.e., all game balls that have passed through the entry port or out port 30b).

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the prize port switch 35a, and the large prize port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124.

Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, remaining ball outlet switch 73, or out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

In addition, the second input port 123 receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud, which is provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10; a signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10; a signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) or the like; and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibrations of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, the second input port 123 receives a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Furthermore, of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As mentioned above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. To enable this level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply unit 400 in addition to the voltage, such as 5 V, required for normal IC operation.

The data held in the third input port 124 can be read by the gaming microcontroller 111 asserting (changing to an active level) the enable signal CE2 by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 (described below).

The input unit 120 also has a first input port 122 that receives signals output from the payout control device 200, such as an invalid frame radio signal, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, a touch switch signal based on input from a touch switch provided on the operating handle 24, and a signal from the RAM initialization switch 112, and supplies these signals to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 has more than a predetermined amount of game balls stored therein (is full). The invalid frame radio signal is a signal that is output when a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) detects radio waves, and the payout busy signal is a signal that indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands.

The input unit 120 is also provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply unit 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc. The Schmitt buffer 125 has the function of removing noise from these input signals. The power outage monitoring signal from the power supply unit 400 is first input to the first input port 122 and then taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches mentioned above. This is because there are restrictions on the number of terminals on the gaming microcomputer 111 that can receive external signals.

Meanwhile, the reset signal RST, from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125, is input directly to the reset terminal provided on the gaming microcontroller 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Furthermore, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing device.

The reset signal RST may also be configured to be output to the test firing device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set by the gaming microcomputer 111 to each port of the output unit 130 immediately before the reset signal RST is received must be reset to prevent system malfunction, but the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is received is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the presentation control device 300 and the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is sent from the gaming control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 and the payout control device 200 via serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication, preventing signals from being input from the presentation control device 300 to the gaming control device 100.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is configured to be able to mount a buffer 133 that is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs data informing the certification agency's test firing device (not shown) of special symbol information for the variable display game, signals indicating the probability of a jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the actual pachinko gaming machine (mass-produced product) installed in an amusement parlor. Note that detection signals from switches that do not require processing, such as the start switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 are supplied to the test firing device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied directly to the test firing device, such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and radio wave sensor 62, are first taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, and then supplied to the test firing device from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and relay board 70 as an error signal indicating, for example, that the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot be controlled.

The relay board 70 is also provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing device, as well as a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without passing through the buffer. The port on the relay board 70 is also supplied with the chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111, and the signal from the port selected and controlled by this signal CE is supplied to the test firing device.

The output unit 130 also has a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 for outputting opening/closing data for the solenoid (normal solenoid) 37c that opens the normal variable winning device 37, the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening solenoid 1) that opens the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86.

The output unit 130 also has a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data for the segment lines to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected, depending on the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and a fourth output port 136 for outputting on/off data for the digit lines to which the cathode terminals of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 are connected.

The output unit 130 also has a sixth output port 141 for outputting on/off data for the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected, depending on the content to be displayed on the performance display device 152, and a seventh output port 142 for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the performance display device 152 is connected.

The output unit 130 also has a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is equipped with a photorelay and can be connected to an external device installed in the gaming facility (such as an information collection terminal or an internal gaming facility management device (hall computer)), so that information about the gaming machine 10 can be supplied to the external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a launch permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

The output unit 130 further includes a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals from the regular solenoid 37c and the special prize slot solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, generates and outputs solenoid drive signals, a second driver 138b that outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment lines on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, a third driver 138c that outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit lines on the current draw side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71 to be supplied to an external device such as a management device.

Furthermore, the output section 130 is provided with a performance display segment driver 150a that outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the performance display device 152 output from the sixth output port 141, and a performance display digit driver 150b that outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current sink side of the performance display device 152 output from the seventh output port 142.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply unit 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The second driver 138b, which drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50, is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to the display data, so the power supply voltage can be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b, which outputs 12V, injects current into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c, which outputs ground potential, extracts current from the cathode terminal via the digit line, allowing power supply voltage to flow through the LEDs selected sequentially by dynamic drive in the collective display device 50, lighting them up. The performance display segment driver 150a, which outputs 12V, injects current into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the performance display digit driver 150b, which outputs ground potential, extracts current from the cathode terminal via the digit line, allowing power supply voltage to flow through the LEDs selected sequentially by dynamic drive in the performance display device 152, lighting them up. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a 12V level. The buffer 133, second output port 134, first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, i.e., on the relay board 70 side, rather than on the main board.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data via serial communication with the inspection device 500. Note that this data transmission and reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111, just like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore no ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are provided.

In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 consists of multiple (four) 7-segment (8-segment including dot Dp) displays (LED lamps), and the performance display drivers 150a and 150b are LED drivers, but this is not limited to this.

The performance display device 152 is installed on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be installed elsewhere. For example, the performance display device 152 can display the display probability setting value, the ratio of special features, the payout rate, and the number of balls dispensed.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls), and is the sum of the number of game balls that passed through the winning opening (number of winnings) and the number of game balls that passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting signals from the out ball detection switch 74, etc. In this embodiment, the winning openings include the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start opening 1), the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start opening 2), and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings).

The payout rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of prize balls to the number of dispensed balls (or the number of shot balls introduced into the play area 32), and is calculated as (number of acquired balls ÷ number of dispensed balls) x 100 (%). In other words, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 dispensed balls.

For example, the role ratio is the percentage (%) (= so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by each role) acquired by winning a large prize slot during a jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) acquired by winning a prize slot during a specified period (e.g., from when the gaming machine 10 was powered on to the present). The role ratio may also be the percentage (= large prize slot ratio) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot (during a jackpot state and a small prize state) out of the total number of prize balls, or it may also be the percentage (= commonly used role ratio (total role ratio)) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot and a regular variable prize slot 37 (second start prize slot).

The game control device 100 also functions as a safety device. The safety device is a game stopping means (stopping means) that, when activation conditions (predetermined conditions) based on the number of safe balls and the number of ejected balls are met, can generate a game stop state (a state where play is not possible, a state where play is prohibited) in which games such as the special symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, and round play (play during a big win or small win) cannot be played. In the game stop state, new special symbol variation display games and new normal symbol variation display games cannot be started. The safety device can take appropriate countermeasures against fraud in cases where the number of safe balls is abnormally high due to fraud, and may also be able to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. When addiction is reduced, players can play with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the safety device is a function implemented by software (program) in the game control device 100, and is also called a complete function (or ending function, stop function). Of course, the safety device may also be provided as hardware such as an electrical circuit or circuit board.

In this embodiment, the activation conditions for the safety device are (1) the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls reaches a ball difference reference value (a predetermined value), and (2) neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot is occurring. The difference is calculated by subtracting the number of discharged balls from the number of safe balls (difference in balls = number of safe balls - number of discharged balls). Thus, the activation conditions for the safety device consist of two conditions (1) and (2). As primarily described in this embodiment, the difference in balls for condition (1) can be simply the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls from the time of power-on to the present, with the value at zero at the time of power-on. However, the difference in balls for condition (1) can be the difference in balls over a predetermined period from the time of the lowest difference in balls to the present, i.e., the difference in balls based on the minimum value (the increase in the number of balls from the minimum value), or it can correspond to the maximum increase in the difference in balls during a single day of operation (so-called MY). Other activation conditions are also possible. For example, condition (1) can be configured as the number of safe balls reaching a predetermined value. Condition (2) can also be configured to mean that the special variable prize device is not operating, or that the large prize opening is not open.

In this embodiment, the number of safe balls is the total number of prize balls (number of acquired balls, number of paid balls) that have been determined to be paid out during a specified period (for example, the period from when the power is turned on to the present). If there is an error in the payment of prize balls (game balls), the total number of prize balls that have been determined to be paid out will not be equal to the total number of prize balls that have actually been paid out to the upper tray 21 via the payout device; however, the total number of prize balls that have actually been paid out can be measured using a detection switch or the like and used as the number of safe balls. In addition, the number of discharged balls (number of out balls) is the number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area 32 during a specified period, and can be counted by counting the signal from the out ball detection switch 74.

In addition, the number of fired balls, which is the number of fired balls that were fired and introduced into the play area 32, may be used instead of the number of ejected balls, and the difference in the number of fired balls may be calculated as the number of safe balls minus the number of fired balls. The number of fired game balls and the number of ejected balls may be collectively referred to as the number of used balls (difference in the number of used balls = number of safe balls - number of used balls). Foul balls that were fired by the ball launcher but did not reach the play area 32 are excluded from the number of fired balls, and the difference in the number of used balls is decremented by -1 for each game ball fired by the ball launcher and incremented by +1 for each foul ball. A detection switch (detection sensor) for counting the number of fired balls may be provided at the entrance of the game balls to the play area 32, i.e., near the top end of the guide path for launched game balls on the game board 30.

[Performance control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The performance control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, which is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111; a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312, which acts as a graphics processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311; and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output to play various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 19.

Connected to the main control microcomputer 311 are program ROM 321, which consists of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, RAM 322, which provides a working area, FeRAM 323, which can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage, and RTC (real-time clock) 338, which serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.). The main control microcomputer 311 also has an internal RAM that provides a working area.

The main control microcomputer 311 is also connected to a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the display content, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, as well as instructing the sound source LSI 314 on the sound to be played, turning on decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing the presentation time.

VDP 312 is equipped with RAM 312a, which provides a working area, and a scaler 312b, which enlarges and reduces images. Also connected to VDP 312 is an image ROM 325, which stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 326, which is used to expand and process image data such as characters read from image ROM 325.

Although not limited to this, the main control microcomputer 311 and VDP 312 are configured to send and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

The VDP 312 inputs to the main control microcomputer 311 a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC, which synchronizes the image on the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps on the glass frame 15 and game board 30, and a synchronization signal STS, which indicates the timing of data transmission. In addition, the VDP 312 also inputs to the main control microcomputer 311 interrupt signals INT0-n, which notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing to VRAM, and a wait signal WAIT, which notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands or data.

The performance control device 300 is equipped with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude digital signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 consisting of an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided in the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided in the front frame 12, and the audio generated by the sound source LSI 314 is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

The presentation control device 300 is also provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands sent from the game control device 100. Commands for the number of decorative special symbols on hold, commands for decorative special symbols, fluctuation commands, stop information commands, etc. sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 are received via the command I/F 331 as presentation control command signals (presentation commands). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates on DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the presentation control device 300 operates on DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The presentation control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 equipped with LEDs (light-emitting diodes) on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (such as frame decoration device 18) equipped with LEDs (light-emitting diodes) on the glass frame 15, and a board presentation movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls a board presentation device 44 (such as a movable gadget that enhances the presentation effect in cooperation with the presentation display on the display device 41) on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

These control circuits 332-334, which drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. In addition, a frame effect movable body control circuit may be provided to drive and control the frame effect device (e.g., the top unit) of the motor, etc., provided in the glass frame 15 (such as the motor that moves the top unit).

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 has the function of detecting the on/off state of the performance button switch 25a built into the performance button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the performance button 25, the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and the performance element switch 47 (performance motor switch) which detects the initial position of the motor within the board performance device 44, and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. The performance control device 300 is also provided with a switch input circuit 336 which detects the state of the volume adjustment switch 335 provided on the performance control device 300 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply unit 400 is configured to generate DC 32V to drive motors and solenoids, DC 12V to drive the display device 41 consisting of an LCD panel, motors and LEDs, DC 5V as the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and DC 15V to drive motors, LEDs and speakers in order to supply the desired level of DC voltage to the performance control device 300 configured as described above and the electronic components controlled by it.

Furthermore, if an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC converter for generating DC 3.3V or DC 1.2V based on DC 5V is provided in the performance control device 300. Note that the DC-DC converter may also be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply unit 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, resetting the device. It is also output from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRETSET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., resetting them. A cooling fan 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is also connected to the presentation control device 300, and is designed to operate when the presentation control device 300 is powered on.

Next, we will explain the game control performed by these control circuits. The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for determining whether the normal game is a hit based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided on the normal game start gate 34, compares it with the determination value stored in ROM 111b, and determines whether the normal game is a hit or a miss in the normal game change display game.

Then, the normal map display 53 displays a normal map variation display game in which the identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then a stationary display is displayed. If the result of the normal map variation display game is a win, a special result pattern is displayed on the normal map display 53, and the normal power solenoid 37c is operated, and control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds x 2 times) as described above. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a loss result pattern on the normal map display 53.

In addition, a start winning (start memory) is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start winning port 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning port 36, and based on the start memory, a random number value for determining a jackpot in the special chart 1 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in ROM 111b to determine whether the special chart 1 variable display game has been a win or a miss.

In addition, a start memory is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided on the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the start memory, a random number value for determining a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in ROM 111b to determine whether the special chart 2 variable display game has been a win or a miss.

The CPU 111a of the game control device 100 then outputs a control signal (presentation control command) including the determination results of the special symbol 1 variable display game and the special symbol 2 variable display game to the presentation control device 300. The special symbol 1 display 51 and the special symbol 2 display 52 then display a special symbol variable display game in which the identification symbol is displayed variably for a predetermined period of time, and then displayed stationary. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on the entry of a game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the start winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37).

In addition, the presentation control device 300 displays a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the presentation control device 300 performs processing such as setting the presentation state, outputting sound from speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs based on a control signal from the game control device 100. In other words, the presentation control device 300 serves as a presentation control means for controlling presentations related to games (variable display games, etc.).

If the result of the special symbol variable display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result status on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52 and generates a special game state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control, for example, to open the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 using the large prize opening solenoid 39b, allowing game balls to flow into the large prize opening.

Then, one round (R) is defined as the process of opening the large prize opening until either a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) enter the large prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (e.g., 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened. This is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (e.g., 15, 11, or 2 times) (cycle play). In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a large prize opening opening/closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the large prize opening when the stop result pattern becomes a special result pattern. Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the loss result pattern on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result status of the special chart variable display game. A high probability state (probability variable state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special chart variable display game is higher than in the normal probability state. Furthermore, whether the high probability state is reached based on the result status of either the special chart 1 variable display game or the special chart 2 variable display game, both the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game will be in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the outcome of the special game variation display game. In the time-saving state, the normal game variation display game and the normal game variation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time-saving operating state, and the normal game variation winning device 37 is controlled so that the open time per unit time is substantially longer than in the normal game state where no special game is performed, resulting in a normal power support state. Note that even in high-probability states (normal probability variable states) other than the latent probability variable state, the time-saving state is overlapped and normal power support is executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the special chart change display game (special chart change time) can be shortened more than usual, and time-shortened changes in the special chart change display game can also be implemented.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state, for one winning result of the normal map variable display game, the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 opens (normal power opening number) can be set to a second opening number (e.g., four times) that is greater than the first opening number (e.g., two times). Also, in the time-saving state, the probability of a winning result in the normal map variable display game (normal map probability, normal map winning probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time-saving state, the time required for the normal variable winning device 37 to switch to the open state is extended by changing one or more of the normal symbol variation time, normal symbol stop time, normal power release count, normal power release time, and normal symbol probability. This makes it easier to win the normal variable winning device 37 in the time-saving state than in the normal game state where no special play is performed, and the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed per unit time can be increased compared to the normal game state. It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states that change different things. It is also possible to set the movable member 37b not to open in the normal operation state (normal symbol probability is 0). Furthermore, when a win occurs, either the first or second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probability for the first and second opening modes may be different. The high-probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently, and both can occur simultaneously, or only one can occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on or off, and the device transitions to one of four states (modes).

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and setting key switch 93 are turned on, the system will transition to a setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (settable) (see A1030-A1039 in Figure 5B and Figure 15).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, the system will enter a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (see A1034-A1039 in Figure 5B and Figure 15).

Also, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the device will enter the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) will be executed, and the RAM 111c will be initialized (see A1045-A1047 in Figure 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the device will enter the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), in which power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of a main process shown in Figures 5A, 5B, and 5C, and a timer interrupt process shown in Figure 9, which is performed at a predetermined time interval (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. Figures 5A, 5B, and 5C are flowcharts showing the procedure for the main processing by the game control device 100. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In the flowcharts of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the step symbols (numbers) are represented as "A****".

As shown in Figure 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main processing, it first executes processing to prohibit interrupts (A1001). It then executes stack pointer setting processing to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where values of registers, etc. are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Next, register bank 0 is specified as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a specified register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address is in the range 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a launch prohibition signal and sets the launch permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of game balls from the ball launcher is prohibited. The game control device 100 then reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). In other words, it reads the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value for the power delay timer, a standby time (e.g., 3 seconds) is set for the slave control means (e.g., the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the gaming control device 100, which constitutes the master control means, to wait until their programs are properly started. This prevents the slave control devices (e.g., the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300) from failing to receive the command if the gaming control device 100 starts up first when the power is turned on and sends a command to the slave control devices before they start up. In other words, the gaming control device 100 serves as standby means that delays the start-up of the master control means (gaming control device 100) when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined standby time for the slave control devices (e.g., the payout control device 200, the presentation control device 300, etc.) to start up.

In addition, the power delay timer is timed using a memory area (such as a RAM area or register not subject to validity check) that is not subject to RAM validity check (checksum calculation). This eliminates the need to exclude part of the RAM area when calculating check data such as a checksum for the RAM area, preventing complicated control when powering on.

Furthermore, by reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time begins, it is possible to reliably detect operation of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112. In other words, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 were read after the standby time had elapsed, it would be necessary to wait for the standby time to elapse before operating the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112, or to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 from power-on until the standby time had elapsed. However, by reading the states before the standby time begins, it is possible to avoid such cumbersome operations and prevent situations where operation of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 performed when powering on is not accepted.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 performs processing to measure the standby time and monitor for the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power outage monitoring process begins, the gaming control device 100 first determines whether a power outage has occurred by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and data bus (A1008). If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the gaming machine waits until its power supply is cut off.

If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009) and determines whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the game control device 100 returns to processing in step A1008.

In other words, the gaming control device 100 acts as a power outage monitoring means that monitors for power outages during a specified standby time. This makes it possible to respond to power outages that occur during the period when the startup of the gaming control device 100, which serves as the main control means, is delayed, and allows for appropriate handling of malfunctions when the power is turned on. Furthermore, because access to RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time and the contents stored at the time of the previous power outage remain retained, there is no need to perform backup processing if a power outage occurs at this time. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, reducing the burden on control.

On the other hand, if the timer value is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, if the waiting time has ended, the game control device 100 allows access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (A1011) and outputs off data to all output ports (setting them to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets up a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which in this embodiment is used for communication with the presentation control device 300 and payout control device 200) (A1013).

Next, the gaming control device 100 activates the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency divider circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (e.g., 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal, and a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c) (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an abnormality is temporarily set in a specified register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it determines whether the value of power outage inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of power outage inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process (A1018) to calculate a checksum of a specified area within the RWM (for example, the work area within the area), and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power outage (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating a RAM abnormality is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Furthermore, if the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), or if the checksums do not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), it proceeds to processing of step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). If both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 transitions to a setting variable state (setting change mode) and executes the processing during the probability setting change in steps A1030-A1040.

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c) is set (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it determines whether the probability setting change flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting change flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it executes the probability setting confirmation processing (in setting confirmation state, in setting confirmation mode) of steps A1034-A1040, the RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) of steps A1044-A1047, or the normal power-on (power restoration) processing of steps A1044, A1048-A1051.

When the probability setting change in progress flag is set (result of A1023 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sends a main abnormality error notification command to the presentation control device 300 to notify that there has been an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main circuit board) (A1024). Upon receiving the main abnormality error notification command, the presentation control device 300 notifies that there has been an abnormality in the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 then outputs the 7-segment display data ("E1" error display data) at the time of game stop to the drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 to display on the performance display device 152 (A1025). It then outputs security signal ON data to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device (such as the amusement facility internal management device (hall computer) or information collection terminal) of the abnormality (A1026). Even if information about the jackpot remains in RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, remain OFF. It then waits, repeating the processing of steps A1025 and A1026, and again performs a setting change operation (turns on both the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) to wait for the power to be turned on. Furthermore, while the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, interrupts remain prohibited (A1001), and the timer interrupt processing (Figure 9) that can execute the special chart 1 and 2 game processing and the regular chart game processing cannot be executed, so games (special chart change display game, regular chart change display game, round game, etc.) cannot be executed.

In this way, if the probability setting change in progress flag is set even though no setting change operation has been performed (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 have been turned on), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and processing A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is complete), the probability setting change in progress flag may be set even though no setting change operation has been performed.

On the other hand, even if the RAM abnormality flag is set (result of A1022 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sends a main abnormality error notification command to the presentation control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) (A1024), outputs the 7-segment display data at the time of game stop (data displaying the "E1" error) to drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and outputs security signal ON data to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As mentioned above, even if information related to a jackpot remains in RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state.

Then, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (A1027), and if no power outage has occurred (the result of A1027 is "N"), the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and the machine waits. On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has occurred (the result of A1027 is "Y"), off data is output to all output ports (A1028), and access to readable and writable RWMs (read/write memories) such as RAM and EEPROM is prohibited (A1029). The machine then waits until the power to the gaming machine is cut off.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 begins processing during the probability setting change (setting variable state) and first determines whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1030). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1030 is "Y"), it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct. Therefore, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of RAM 111c is cleared to its initial value (e.g., the minimum setting value "1") (A1031), and then the probability setting change in progress flag is set (A1032), indicating that the probability setting is being changed. If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1030 is "N"), the probability setting value is not cleared, and the probability setting change in progress flag is set (A1032). Next, a command during the probability setting change is sent to the presentation control device 300 (presentation control board) (A1033), and processing proceeds to step A1037. When the performance control device 300 receives a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed, it notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), and the probability setting change in progress flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1034). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) process begins, setting the probability setting confirmation in progress flag (A1035), indicating that the probability setting is being confirmed. Then, a probability setting confirmation command is sent to the presentation control device 300 (presentation control board) (A1036), and processing proceeds to step A1037. Upon receiving the probability setting change in progress command, the presentation control device 300 notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1033 or step A1036, the game control device 100 executes steps A1037 to A1043 as common processing during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (a predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area (A1037) in order to output a security signal while the probability setting is being changed and while the probability setting is being confirmed. Note that the counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (Figure 15) described below, but if the probability setting change or probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1319). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and while the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 permits an interrupt (A1038). This allows the timer interrupt process (Figure 9) to be executed. Then, it determines whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1039). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1039 is "N"), it determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1040). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1040 is "N"), the process returns to step A1039. On the other hand, if a power outage has occurred (the result of A1040 is "Y"), the process for when a power outage occurs, steps A1063-A1069, is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and there is no power outage, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, will continue.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1039 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1041) and sends a command to end the notification to the presentation control device 300 (presentation control board) (A1042). Upon receiving the command to end the notification, the presentation control device 300 ends the notification that the probability setting is being checked or that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting change in progress flag is set, i.e., whether the probability setting has been in the process of being changed (A1043). If the probability setting change in progress flag is set (the result of A1043 is "Y"), i.e., if the probability setting has been in the process of being changed, it executes the RAM initialization process (described below) of steps A1045-A1047. On the other hand, if the probability setting change in progress flag is not set (the result of A1043 is "N"), i.e., if the probability setting has been in the process of being confirmed, it executes the normal process when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) from step A1048 onwards.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1034 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1044). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1044 is "Y"), RAM areas in RAM 111c other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value are cleared to zero (A1045). That is, the game information stored in RAM 111c is cleared to zero, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. The aforementioned probability setting change flag is also cleared here. The acquired game ball count area, which stores the number of acquired game balls (the total number of prize balls acquired within a predetermined time period (here, within one timer interrupt), is also cleared to zero. The safety device activation flag area, which stores the safety device activation flag indicating whether the safety device (described above) is activated, is also cleared to zero (safety device activation flag = 0), and the safety device is deactivated. In step A1045, the safety device is deactivated by clearing the safety device activation flag area to 0 in either the case of RAM clearing with a setting change (when the result of A1043 is "Y") or without a setting change (when the result of A1044 is "Y"), but deactivation of the safety device may be limited to one of the two cases. In other words, when clearing RAM in step A1045, the safety device activation flag area may not be cleared to 0.

In addition, here, in addition to the probability setting value area, it is possible to configure the stack area and unused area not to be cleared, and it is also possible to not clear the performance display work area (part of the out-of-area work area) and stack area (out-of-area stack area) related to performance information and its display (performance display). Note that performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and includes, for example, the payout rate, base value (payout rate in normal gameplay), feature ratio, and number of balls dispensed.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial values used at RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1046). Then, it sends the RAM initialization command to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1047) and proceeds to processing in step A1052. Note that areas not cleared to 0 in step A1045 are excluded from the areas to be initialized.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1044 is "N"), the game control device 100 starts normal power-on processing (when power is restored after a power outage) because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, and saves the initial values for when power is restored (when power is restored) in the areas to be initialized as part of the power outage recovery processing (A1048). The areas to be initialized here include the power outage inspection area 1, power outage inspection area 2, and checksum area in the in-area work area (Figure 6). In addition, because all errors are re-monitored during normal power-on, the areas to be initialized include areas related to errors or error monitoring (such as areas for test signal output data related to errors) in both the in-area work area and the out-area work area (Figure 6). The aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared (initialized) here. Additional areas to be initialized in step A1048 may be added as needed. Unlike when RAM is initialized, when the power is turned on normally, the safety device activation flag area in the internal work area (Figure 6) is not cleared (initialized) and its value is maintained so that the safety device is not deactivated.

In addition, the safety device-related work areas related to safety devices in the outside work area (safety device counter area, safety device activation information area, and previous activation information area, described below) are not initialized in step A1048, but are initialized in the safety device information initialization process (A1053), described below. Note that by initializing the safety device counter value (information related to the difference in the number of balls) in the safety device counter area, it is possible to increase the margin (tolerance for the difference in the number of balls, limit on the difference in the number of balls) before the safety device is activated (occurrence of a game stop state) in terms of the difference in the number of balls. The work area for performance display in the outside work area is also not initialized in step A1048, but may be initialized in the performance display editing process (A1059), described below.

In addition, in step A1048 during normal power-on without RAM initialization (when power is restored after a power outage), the ceiling counter area (described below) in which the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special chart variable display game has been executed in a state other than the special chart variable state after power-on or the end of a jackpot is stored may also be maintained without being cleared (initialized) so as not to disadvantage the player. As described below, when the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling number of times, the time-shortened state is entered (Figure 36B), but by not clearing (initializing) the ceiling counter value, the number of games remaining (up to the ceiling number of times) until the time-shortened state occurs does not change when power is turned on, and the player is not disadvantaged.

When this number of executions (i.e., ceiling counter value) or the remaining number of games until the ceiling (ceiling number of executions - number of executions) is displayed on the display device 41 using the variable number of executions display 677 (see Figures 92, 100, etc.) described below, the performance control device 300 may, upon normal power-on, align the variable number of executions display 677 with the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area, or may not align the variable number of executions display 677 and display it as an initial value of 0. When no alignment is achieved, the variable number of executions display 677 will display a value that does not reflect the ceiling counter value.

Similarly, in step A1048, to avoid any disadvantage to the gaming parlor (amusement store), the time-saving variation count 1 area, which stores time-saving variation count 1 (described below) corresponding to the remaining number of runs of the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) in the time-saving state, and the time-saving variation count 2 area, which stores time-saving variation count 2 (described below) corresponding to the remaining number of runs of the special chart 2 variation display game in the time-saving state, may be maintained without being cleared (initialized). Furthermore, in machines with a limited-time (ST) probability variable state, to avoid any disadvantage to the gaming parlor, the high-probability variation count area (ST counter), which stores the high-probability variation count corresponding to the remaining number of runs of the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) in the probability variable state, may be maintained without being cleared (initialized). Additionally, in machines where a limit is placed on the number of consecutive jackpots (which may be the number of consecutive wins, as described below), the jackpot count area, which stores the number of consecutive jackpots, may be left unchanged without being cleared (initialized), so as not to disadvantage the gaming facility.

Next, a command for when power is restored corresponding to the processing number prepared to rationally execute the special game processing described below is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1049), and processing proceeds to step A1050.

The commands sent during RAM initialization in step A1047 and during power recovery in step A1049 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special chart 1 reserve number command and a decorative special chart 2 reserve number command indicating the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2, a probability information command indicating the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, a performance count information command indicating the number of times a special chart variation display game has been executed in a specified performance mode, and a power recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the commands for RAM initialization and power outage recovery include setting value information commands (probability setting value information commands) that indicate setting value information (setting information), which is information on the probability setting values (setting values) of the gaming machine 10. The gaming control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the presentation control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter the presentation control device 300 can refer to the setting value information stored therein to control the presentation.

The command for RAM initialization also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). When the performance control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command, it will, for example, display a customer waiting demo on the display device 41 and issue a RAM initialization (RAM clear) notification for 30 seconds using the LEDs and speaker of the board decoration device 46, etc. The command for power recovery also includes a screen specification command that specifies the content to be displayed on the screen of the display device 41. The screen specification command is a customer waiting demo command when normal processing is in progress for both special charts 1 and 2 (when neither a variation nor a win has occurred), and can be a recovery screen command at all other times. The command for power recovery may also include a command indicating the ceiling counter value in order to align the variation count display 677 with the ceiling counter value, as described above.

Next, it is determined whether the safety device is in operation (A1050). For example, if the safety device in operation flag "1", indicating that the safety device is in operation, is saved in the safety device in operation flag area, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation (safety device in operation flag = 1). If the safety device is in operation (the result of A1050 is "Y"), a safety device in operation command indicating that the safety device is in operation is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1051), and processing proceeds to step A1052. If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A1050 is "N"), processing proceeds directly to step A1052.

Then, the information (value) of the flag register is pushed to the internal stack area (A1052), and a safety device information initialization process is executed (A1053) to initialize safety device information related to the safety devices (such as the safety device counter value, safety device activation information, and old activation information, which will be described later). The information in the flag register is then restored (POP) (A1054). Note that, except when game play is stopped due to a RAM abnormality (A1025-A1026), safety device information (such as the safety device counter value) is unconditionally initialized (cleared) when the power is turned on; however, if a count continuation switch is provided and the power is turned on while pressing the count continuation switch, the safety device information does not need to be initialized (cleared).

As described below, when transitioning to the safety device information initialization process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-area stack area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (performance information display). At this time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer storage area of RAM 111c, the flag register information is saved in advance in step A1052. The flag register is an 8-bit flag, with each bit taking a value of 0 or 1. Flag registers that can be used include those disclosed in JP 2013-233299 A, JP 2018-94101 A, etc.

Next, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1055). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a specified register (CTC update permission register) within the random number generation circuit. It also sets a bit transposition pattern for the hard random numbers generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit. In this embodiment, the random number generation circuit generates the jackpot random number, winning symbol random number (jackpot symbol random number, small win symbol random number, support win symbol random number, etc.), normal symbol winning random number, and variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 as random numbers updated only by hardware. These random numbers may be so-called "high-speed counters" that are updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the operating clock.

A bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how the bit arrangement of an extracted random number (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) is rearranged in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row).

In this embodiment, by swapping the bits of the random numbers according to a bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers and increase the confidentiality of the random numbers. The bit permutation pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from multiple patterns prepared in advance. It may also be possible for the user to set the pattern as desired.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1056) and determines whether gameplay is currently stopped (A1057). It can be determined that gameplay is currently stopped if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 (described below) has occurred that requires gameplay (such as a special game with a variable display, a regular game with a variable display, or a round game) to be stopped.

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1057 is "N"), the game control device 100 pushes (PUSHes) the flag register information (value) to the in-area stack area (A1058) and executes a performance display editing process to calculate performance information such as the base value (ball payout rate) (A1059). Here, performance information (such as the ratio of game devices and ball payout rate) may be calculated. Furthermore, if there is an abnormality in the performance display work area (part of the out-of-area work area) related to the performance information or its display (performance display), this may be cleared. The flag register information is then restored (POP) (A1060) and an interrupt is permitted (A1061). In addition to when no error has occurred, if an error other than strong error 2, such as a weak error (described below) or strong error 1 (described below), has occurred, game play is not stopped, and steps A1058-A1060, including the performance display editing process, are executed. It is also possible to configure the system so that steps A1058-A1060 are not executed if a weak error or strong error 1 occurs.

As described below, when transitioning to the performance display editing process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-of-area stack area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). At this time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) will change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer save area of RAM 111c, the flag register information is saved in advance in step A1058.

On the other hand, when game play is stopped (the result of A1057 is "Y"), the game control device 100 allows an interrupt (A1061) without executing the performance display editing process, etc. In other words, when the safety device is activated or when strong error 2 occurs, the performance display editing process (particularly the base value calculation process during the performance display editing process) is not executed, so performance information such as base values is not newly calculated and remains unchanged. Note that it is also possible to configure the device to execute the performance display editing process, etc., without stopping game play, even when strong error 2 occurs. Furthermore, allowing an interrupt makes it possible to execute the timer interrupt process (Figure 9).

In this embodiment, errors are categorized into three types: weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2. When the performance control device 300 receives an error/illegal command, it can set and execute error notifications of different strengths corresponding to weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2 in the error/illegal setting process (B1316).

For example, the presentation control device 300 may increase the volume of the error notification sound from the speaker or the brightness (brightness) of the LED (the presentation LED of the board decoration device 46 or frame decoration device 18) that lights up to notify errors in the order of weak error < strong error 1 ≦ strong error 2. The speaker volume or LED brightness for strong error 1 and strong error 2 may be the same. Furthermore, the presentation control device 300 may set the volume of the notification sound to the volume adjusted in the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011) (below the maximum volume) when a weak error occurs, and set the volume of the notification sound to the maximum volume when strong error 1 or strong error 2 occurs.

Weak errors include a shoot ball out error, in which a shoot ball out switch signal is generated in response to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow error, in which an overflow switch signal is generated in response to the lower tray 23 being full. In the case of a weak error, an external information signal is not output to the external information terminal 71 (see Figure 54A). Weak errors may also include a switch abnormality error and a payout abnormality error, in which a status signal indicating a payout abnormality is generated.

Strong error 1 is a frame opening error related to frame opening, and includes a glass frame opening error and a main frame opening error (front frame opening error). In the case of strong error 1, a door/frame opening signal (A9305) is output to the external information terminal 71 as an external information signal (see Figure 54A).

Strong Error 2 is a fraud-related error that preferably results in game suspension, and includes magnetic fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal ejection error, V-pass error, large prize slot fraud, and regular power fraud. Strong Error 2 causes a security signal (A9322) to be output to the external information terminal 71 as an external information signal (see Figure 54A). Strong Error 2 may also include a remaining ball error. When Strong Error 2 occurs, gameplay (such as the special chart change display game and regular chart change display game, and round play) is suspended, and it can be determined that gameplay is suspended (A1057). Furthermore, when Strong Error 2 occurs, a game suspension state (unplayable state, play prohibited state) can be generated in which games such as the special chart change display game, regular chart change display game, and round play (play during a jackpot or small jackpot) cannot be performed, just as when a safety device is activated.

After step A1061, the game control device 100 determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1062). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1062 is "N"), the process returns to step A1056. This causes the loop processing of steps A1056-A1062 to be repeated until a power outage occurs. Until a power outage occurs, performance information such as base values can be repeatedly calculated in the performance display editing process (A1059) unless game play is stopped, i.e., unless a safety device is activated or severe error 2 occurs.

The repetition period of the loop process is much shorter than the timer interrupt period (a predetermined time period, for example, 4 msec), so the performance display editing process is executed multiple times during the interrupt period. Therefore, if a game ball wins or the number of balls ejected changes (a game ball entering the outlet 30b), performance information such as base values can change immediately.

When a power outage occurs (the result of A1062 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts processing for when a power outage occurs, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1063), and outputs off data to all output ports (A1064). It then saves power outage inspection area check data 1 in power outage inspection area 1 (A1065) and power outage inspection area check data 2 in power outage inspection area 2 (A1066). It then executes a checksum calculation process to calculate a checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1067), and then saves the calculated checksum in the checksum area (A1068). Finally, it executes processing to prohibit access to the RWM (A1069) and waits until the gaming machine's power is cut off.

In this way, by saving check data in the power outage inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power outage, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power outage has been correctly backed up when the power is turned back on.

The main processing has been described above, but for example, if the setting key switch and RAM initialization switch are turned on during the processing of steps A1056-A1062, a determination process similar to step A1021 may be performed, and the probability setting change flag may be set as in step A1032, making it possible to switch to the setting variable state (setting change mode) any number of times while the gaming machine 10 is running.

[Example of RAM area configuration]
6 is a diagram showing the configuration (memory map in address space) of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 6, the following are arranged in the address space starting from the top address of the RAM 111c: an in-area work area, an unused area, an in-area stack area, an unused area, an out-area work area, an unused area, and an out-area stack area. The unused area between the in-area work area and the in-area stack area (gaming control stack area, in-area stack area) and the unused area between the out-area work area and the out-area stack area (out-area stack area) may not be necessary.

The RAM's in-area work area (game control work area, first area) is a work area for game control that is read and written by in-area programs and read by out-area programs. The in-area work area includes a probability setting value area, test signal output data area (including the area for error-related test signal output data), random number area, switch control area, segment area, power outage inspection area 1, power outage inspection area 2, checksum area, etc., as well as a safety device activation flag area that indicates whether the safety device is activated (or has activated), and a number of acquired game balls area that stores the number of game balls acquired as prize balls within one timer interrupt (e.g., 4 msec).

The RAM's out-of-area work area (second area) is an area that is read and written by out-of-area programs and read by in-area programs. The out-of-area work area includes a safety device counter area that stores the safety device counter value (difference in balls + initial value) corresponding to the difference in balls, a safety device activation information area that stores safety device activation information corresponding to the safety device state, and a previous activation information area that stores previous activation information, and is capable of storing safety device information related to the safety device. The safety device counter area (3 bytes in size) is generally not read by in-area programs, but may be read and referenced by in-area programs when the safety device counter value or information on the difference in balls is sent to the performance control device 300 using a difference in ball command. In this embodiment, the safety device counter value is a value obtained by adding a predetermined initial value (100,000) to the difference in balls, in proportion to the difference in balls (safety device counter value = difference in balls + 100,000). However, the safety device counter value is not limited to this, as long as it is associated with the difference in balls and indicates the difference in balls. Furthermore, by separating the external work area from the internal work area, program development efficiency can be improved and it becomes easier to initialize these areas separately.

Furthermore, the out-of-area work area includes a performance display work area related to performance information and performance display, and can store information related to performance information and performance display. The out-of-area work area may also store information related to test signals and information related to error monitoring. In the out-of-area work area, the safety device-related work area related to safety device information (including the safety device counter area, safety device activation information area, and previous activation information area) and the performance display work area related to performance information and performance display may be clearly separated or may be mixed.

The external stack area is shared when processing performance information and performance displays, and when processing safety devices. The external stack area is also used when processing test signals and error monitoring.

Note that in-area programs (in-area processing programs) and out-area programs (out-area processing programs) are arranged in this order from the top address in the address space of ROM 111b, and are distinguished by an unused area between the in-area program area and the out-area program area. ROM in-area programs consist of game control programs and game control data, etc., and include a main program corresponding to the main processing (Figures 5A-5C) and an interrupt processing program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing described below. An unused area may be arranged between the game control program area and the game control data area (data area). Subroutines of the main program or interrupt processing program are generally in-area programs (unless otherwise specified), but may exceptionally be out-area programs. ROM out-area programs include a safety device information initialization program corresponding to the safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program corresponding to the performance display editing processing, and an out-area integration processing program corresponding to the out-area integration processing described below.

[Safety device information initialization process]
Next, the safety device information initialization process (A1053) in the main process will be described in detail. Fig. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device information initialization process. In the safety device information initialization process, the safety device counter area, the safety device activation information area, and the old activation information area are initialized or cleared, and safety device information such as the safety device counter value, safety device activation information, and old activation information is set to its initial value (initial information). Note that the safety device activation information is information indicating the current state, and the old activation information indicates the state from the previous time (mainly one interrupt before).

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (A1101), and then sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) to the stack pointer as the value of the external stack area (external stack area) (A1102). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) to the external stack area (A1103). Only the registers to be protected (registers used in the safety device information initialization process) may be saved, or all general-purpose registers may be saved. To save all general-purpose registers, save (PUSH) them to both register bank 0 and register bank 1.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value (100,000) in the safety device counter area, and the safety device counter value becomes the initial value (A1104). Because the safety device counter value (= difference in balls + initial value) may become smaller than the initial value if the difference in balls decreases from 0, such as when no jackpot occurs, the initial value is set to a value greater than 0, but may be a value other than 100,000. Note that, as described above, the safety device counter value is initialized (cleared) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on) to prevent any disadvantage to the player. However, the ceiling counter value, which indicates the number of times the special chart variable display game has been executed outside of the special chart variable state, does not need to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored unless the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. When the safety device counter value (information regarding the difference in balls) is initialized (cleared), the margin (tolerance and limit of the difference in balls) before the safety device is activated (the game stops) regarding the difference in balls can be increased, to the player's benefit. On the other hand, as mentioned above, because the ceiling counter value is not cleared (initialized) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the number of games remaining (up to the ceiling number) before the time-saving state occurs does not change when the power is turned on, resulting in a profit for the player. Then, safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to the safety device's non-operation state (normal state) is saved as safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (A1105). Furthermore, safety device non-operation information (value 0) is saved as old operation information in the old operation information area (A1106).

Next, the game control device 100 restores the saved registers (A1107), loads them from the stack pointer storage area, sets the stack pointer (A1108), and ends the safety device information initialization process. The set stack pointer will indicate the address of the stack area within the area.

In the above safety device information initialization process, if information is written directly to RAM without using a register, the register is not saved/restored. In this case, the register is not saved to RAM, so stack pointer-related processing (A1101, A1102, A1103, A1107, A1108) is also unnecessary. In addition, saving/restoring the flag register (A1052, A1054) before and after the safety device information initialization process is also unnecessary.

In this embodiment, when the safety device counter value is 0 to 189,999 (safety device counter = 0 to 189,999), the safety device activation information becomes safety device non-activation information (value 0), which corresponds to an inactive state in which the safety device is not activated (normally) (activation notice state, activation warning state, or normal state where the safety device is not activated). When the safety device counter value is 190,000 to 194,999 (safety device counter = 190,000 to 194,999), the safety device activation information becomes safety device activation notice information (value 1), which corresponds to an activation notice state that warns of the safety device activation.

Also, if the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000 (safety device counter = 195,000) but is not yet in a state where gameplay can be stopped, the safety device activation information becomes safety device activation warning information (value 2), which corresponds to an activation warning state that warns of the activation of the safety device. In this case, even if the difference in number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) reaches the difference in ball reference value of 95,000, the player is in a big win or small win, so this corresponds to a case where the aforementioned condition (1) is met but condition (2) is not met, and the activation condition for the safety device is not met.

Furthermore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 (safety device counter = 195,000) and gameplay is stopped, the safety device activation information becomes safety device activation information (value 3), which corresponds to the activation state in which the safety device is activated (activated state). In this case, the difference in number of balls has reached the difference in balls reference value of 95,000, and the game is neither a big hit nor a small hit, so both of the above-mentioned conditions (1) and (2) are met, which corresponds to a case in which the activation conditions for the safety device are met.

[Performance display editing process]
Next, the performance display editing process (A1059) in the main process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (A1201), and then sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) as the external stack area value in the stack pointer (A1202). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the external stack area (A1203). It is preferable to save all general-purpose registers here. Then, a validity check is performed to determine the validity of the performance display work area within the external work area. If the work area is invalid and abnormal, the performance display work area is initialized (including setting the initial value) (A1204).

The validity assessment can determine that a value stored in the performance display work area is invalid if it is a value that is not possible in the design or deviates from the design value (if it is outside a specified range). For example, it determines whether a specific value (e.g., 5Ah) is stored in the performance display RAM initialization flag, which indicates that the performance display work area has been initialized; determines whether the number managing the progress of the division process used to calculate the base value is within a specified range; determines whether the switch counter value is within a range equal to or less than the number of monitored switches; determines whether the display period management number indicating the current display period is within the range of the number of periods (0-3); and determines whether the time interval number indicating the current time interval is within the range of the number of intervals (0-4). In this way, the validity assessment preferably determines whether the value of the area used as a pointer to the data table is within a specified range. This prevents the program from running out of control by obtaining an out-of-range value. It is also effective because the validity assessment is performed for each performance display editing process.

In addition, a validity check is performed each time the performance display editing process is executed, so if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be immediately initialized, preventing abnormal performance displays (such as the display of abnormal base values) as much as possible.

In addition, when initializing the work area for performance display (including setting initial values), the area other than the stack pointer storage area is initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. In this embodiment, the out-of-area stack area is not initialized, but it may be initialized. Even when initializing the out-of-area stack area, the register values saved in the out-of-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the work area for performance display is performed separately from the initialization of the in-area work area (work area for game control) and the in-area stack area (stack area for game control), so it does not affect the in-area work area or the in-area stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether it is time to switch the counting period for counting the data (such as the number of normal balls out and the number of normal prize balls) that is the basis for calculating the base value (ball payout rate) (A1205). A counting period is set for the total number of balls out (total number of dispensed balls, total number of outs) since the power was turned on, and the counting period is switched every time the total number of balls out reaches one of several predetermined numbers (for example, every time it increases by 60,000).

For example, the timing for switching time windows is when the total number of balls out since power-on reaches a predetermined number: 300, 60,300, 120,300, 180,300, etc. That is, the width of each time window is generally 60,000, except for the first time window, where the first time window is 0-300, the second time window is 300-60,300, the third time window is 60,300-120,300, the fourth time window is 120,300-180,300, the fifth time window is 180,300-240,300, etc. The time window numbers for the first through fifth time windows are 0-4, respectively, and the time window number remains at 4 for the sixth time window and beyond. The current time window number is stored in the performance display work area.

When it is time to switch counting intervals (the result of A1205 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the counting interval to switch (A1206). When setting the counting interval to switch, the game control device 100 clears the total out counter, which counts the total number of out balls (total outs), the normal out counter, which counts the number of normal out balls (normal outs), which is the number of out balls (number of discharged balls) within each counting interval, and the normal prize ball counter, which counts the number of normal prize balls, which is the total number of prize balls (number of acquired balls) within each counting interval, and shifts (moves) the final base value (or latest base value) of each counting interval to the base value storage area of the adjacent counting interval.

If it is not time to switch the counting period (the result of A1205 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a switch input to the input port being monitored (A1207). In this embodiment, the input ports being monitored are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 (see Figure 3).

Here, the switch rising edge information copied to the performance display work area for each monitored input port (copied in step A9603 in Figure 58) is checked. For each monitored input port, there is an 8-bit area for storing the copied switch rising edge information. If the switch rising edge information for all monitored input ports is all 0, it can be determined that there is no input; in all other cases, it can be determined that there is input. Note that, unless masked during copying, the switch rising edge information has a bit set to 1 corresponding to a switch that has received new input (detection) in the input process (A1303), and a bit set to 0 corresponding to a switch that has not received new input.

When there is a switch input to the monitored input port (the result of A1207 is "Y"), the game control device 100 checks the input of the switch (target switch) corresponding to the switch counter and obtains the input information (A1208). The target switches in this case include the lower large prize entrance switch 38a of the first special variable prize entry device 38, the upper large prize entrance switch 39a of the second special variable prize entry device 39, the start entrance 1 switch 36a of the first start prize entry device 36, the start entrance 2 switch 37a of the second start prize entry device 37 (normal variable prize entry device), the prize entrance switch 35a (left prize entrance switch, right prize entrance switch) of the general prize entry device 35, and the out ball detection switch 74, which can change the base value (or ball payout rate) based on the detection of game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the target switch is in its valid period (A1209). Note that if a special prize slot or regular power slot fraud occurs and a win at the special prize slot or second start prize slot 37 is invalid, that is, the special prize slot switches 38a, 39a and start slot 2 switch 37a are invalid, the switch may not be valid. There are also switches that are always valid, such as the first start prize slot 36 and the out ball detection switch 74.

If the target switch is in its valid period (the result of A1209 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the target switch corresponding to the switch counter (A1210). If the target switch is not in its valid period (the result of A1209 is "N") or if there is no input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A1218.

When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the input information (1 bit) of the bit corresponding to the target switch (A1211) and determines whether or not it is in the normal base state (A1212). The normal base state (low base state) is a period during which the base value can be calculated and updated, and is the normal game state in this embodiment.

When the game control device 100 is in the normal base state (normal game state) (the result of A1212 is "Y") and the target switch is a switch that awards prize balls, it updates the normal prize ball count, which is the total number of prize balls within the counting period, by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the target switch (A1213). Next, if the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, it updates the normal out ball count (normal out count, normal discharged ball count), which is the number of out balls within the counting period, by adding 1 (A1214). Next, if the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, it updates the total out ball count (total out count, total discharged balls) by adding 1 (A1215).

In this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32 (i.e., all game balls that pass through the winning opening or the out opening 30b). Not only game balls that enter the out opening 30b, but also game balls that enter the winning openings (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37, large winning opening, or general winning opening 35) are guided to the out ball detection switch 74 via a passageway or the like (not shown) and detected.

When the game control device 100 is not in the normal base state, which is the normal game state (the result of A1212 is "N"), it updates only the total number of out balls (A1215) without updating either the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls. Therefore, in a high base state that is not the normal base state (second game state, time-saving state, special game state, or special game state), neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls are updated, and the base value calculated from the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls (number of normal prize balls ÷ number of normal out balls) is not updated and remains unchanged. It is also possible to eliminate the determination process regarding the normal base state in step A1212 and make the base value updateable (changeable) as the ball payout rate in all game states.

Next, the game control device 100 increments the switch counter by +1 (A1216) to change the target switch to the next one in the next performance display editing process. Note that due to the loop processing in the main processing, the performance display editing process is executed at intervals (e.g., several microseconds) that are significantly shorter than the timer interrupt period (predetermined time period, e.g., 4 msec). Therefore, the performance display editing process is repeatedly executed during the interrupt period, and the switch counter (e.g., 0 to 7) covers all switch bits (e.g., bits 0 to 7) for each monitored input port. Furthermore, the switch counter is updated to 0 after the final value (e.g., 7), and the switch input for the next monitored input port begins to be checked. For example, the switch input for the third input port 124 is first checked, and then the switch input for the fourth input port 126 is checked.

On the other hand, if there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports (the result of A1207 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a base value calculation process (predetermined process) to calculate a base value (A1217). Note that there may be no switch input to any of the monitored input ports from the beginning. On the other hand, even if there is initially a switch input to some or all of the monitored input ports, after the switch input has been checked for all monitored input ports, the input information for the target switches that have had an input is cleared (A1211), so there will be no switch input to any of the monitored input ports.

In the base value calculation process, the base value is the ratio of the number of normal prize balls to the number of normal out balls, and is calculated as the number of normal prize balls divided by the number of normal out balls. Therefore, when a ball lands in the starting prize slot (starting prize slot 36, normal variable prize slot 37), the large prize slot, or the general prize slot 35, in the first stage, the number of normal prize balls is updated and changed by input (detection) from the switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, and 39a of the prize slot to which the prize ball is awarded, thereby changing the base value. In the second stage, the number of normal out balls is updated and changed by input (detection) from the out ball detection switch 74, thereby changing the base value. In other words, when one game ball lands in a prize slot, the base value changes (is affected) in two stages. When a ball lands in the out slot 30b, which opens into the game board 30, the number of normal out balls is updated and changed by input (detection) from the out ball detection switch 74, thereby changing the base value. On the other hand, if a ball lands at the normal start gate 34, the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated or changed by the ball itself, so the base value remains unchanged. Even if a ball lands at the normal start gate 34, no prize balls are awarded, so the number of normal prize balls is not updated.

Regardless of whether the base value has changed, the processing in steps A1624-A1630 of the output process will output the base value as a performance display on the performance display device 152. However, if the safety device is activated and game play is stopped, or if a strong error 2 occurs and game play is stopped, the performance display device 152 will output off data and turn off.

As a special example, the base value may be calculated only during the real-time value display period when the real-time value (bL.) of the base value is displayed. In this special example, the normal number of winning balls and the normal number of out balls are updated until the real-time value display period arrives, but the base value is not calculated and does not change.

After step A1216 or A1217, the game control device 100 restores the saved registers (A1218), loads from the stack pointer storage area, sets the stack pointer (A1219), and terminates the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer will indicate the address of the stack area within the area.

In addition, in Figure 8, it is also possible to configure the processing of step A1217 to be performed immediately after step A1214, so that the base value calculation processing is performed immediately after the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls is updated, without waiting for the input check of all switches of the monitored input port.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. Figure 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process (interrupt process program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When timer interrupt processing begins, the game control device 100 first specifies register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301) and sets the upper address of the RAM starting address in a specified register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, this is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing begins, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing to receive inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, i.e., to read the status of each input port (A1303). Next, it determines whether the probability setting is being changed or confirmed based on the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), it executes probability setting change/confirmation processing to change or confirm the probability setting value (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing nor checking the probability setting (the result of A1304 is "N"), it executes output processing (A1306) to perform drive control of actuators such as solenoids (e.g., the large prize opening solenoid 39b) and drive control of LEDs (light emission control) based on the output data set in various processes. Note that if a launch prohibition signal was output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, this output processing can output a launch permission signal, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands (such as payout commands) that have been set in the transmission buffer during various processes to the payout control device 200. After that, it executes a payout port switch/status monitoring process (A1308) that monitors whether normal signals are being input from the start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, prize port switch 35a, and large prize port switch 39a, and monitors for errors (such as whether the front frame or glass frame is open).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether game play is currently stopped (A1309). It can determine that game play is currently stopped if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 has occurred that requires game play to be stopped.

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1309 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes special game processing (A1310), accessory game processing (A1311), regular game processing (A1312), and segment LED editing processing (A1313). It then executes the processing from step A1314 onwards. In addition to when no errors have occurred, the game control device 100 also executes special game processing (A1310), accessory game processing (A1311), regular game processing (A1312), and segment LED editing processing (A1313) when a weak error or strong error 1 has occurred.

The segment LED editing process executes settings related to the operation of some of the segment LEDs that make up the collective display device 50 (such as the memory display section and round display section: LED lamps D3-D7, D11-D17). Settings related to the operation of other parts of the collective display device 50 (variation display section: LED lamps D1, D2, D8, D10, D18) are executed in the pattern variation control process (A2615, A2617, A7615). Settings related to the operation of another part of the collective display device 50 (probability status display section: LED lamp D9) are executed in the power outage recovery process (A1048), etc.

When game play is stopped (the result of A1309 is "Y"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing from step A1314 onwards without executing the special game processing (A1310), bonus game processing (A1311), regular game processing (A1312), or segment LED editing processing (A1313). In this way, when the safety device is activated or when strong error 2 occurs and game play is stopped, the special game processing (A1310) and regular game processing (A1312) are not executed, so the number of reserved special games (A2906, A4611) and the number of reserved regular games (A7707, A7918) do not change. On the other hand, when a weak error or strong error 1 occurs, play is not stopped and the special game processing (A1310) and regular game processing (A1312) are executed, so the number of special reserved games (A2906, A4611) and the number of regular reserved games (A7707, A7918) can be changed by updating by +1 (when a reservation is made) or -1 (when a reservation is consumed).

In addition, depending on the type of error, such as weak error, strong error 1, or strong error 2, it is also possible to configure the system to execute some of the special game processing (A1310), bonus game processing (A1311), regular game processing (A1312), and segment LED editing processing (A1313), but not the others. For example, if strong error 2 occurs, only the segment LED editing processing may be executed.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes safety device-related processing, which can send safety device activation information corresponding to the state of the safety device to the performance control device 300 as a performance command and set a safety device activation flag (A1314). It then executes magnet fraud monitoring processing, which checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there are any abnormalities (A1315). It also executes radio wave fraud monitoring processing (board radio wave fraud monitoring processing), which checks the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there are any abnormalities (A1316).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process that monitors for fraud caused by vibration based on input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, it executes an abnormal discharge monitoring process that monitors for abnormal discharge from the large prize opening (A1318). The abnormal discharge monitoring process monitors for abnormal discharge from the special variable prize winning device 39 based on input from the large prize opening switch 39a, specific area switch 72 (V prize opening switch), and remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 in the special variable prize winning device 39, and sets an abnormal discharge flag if an abnormal discharge occurs. Game balls that pass through the large prize opening switch 39a of the special variable prize winning device 39 are discharged by passing through the specific area switch 72 (V prize opening switch) or remaining ball discharge opening switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process that sets signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, as in step A1309, etc., it determines whether game play is stopped (A1320).

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1320 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the flag register to the in-area stack area (A1321) and executes out-of-area integration processing, which updates the safety device counter value (calculates the difference in the number of balls) and controls the display of the performance display device 152 (A1322). It then restores the flag register (A1323) and ends the timer interrupt processing. When the safety device is not activated and strong error 2 has not occurred, game play is not stopped and steps A1321-A1323, including out-of-area integration processing, are executed.

As described below, when transitioning to the out-of-area integration process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-of-area stack area. At this time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer save area of RAM 111c, the flag register is saved in advance in step A1321.

On the other hand, when game play is stopped (the result of A1320 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the timer interrupt process without executing the out-of-area integration process, etc. In other words, when the safety device is activated (when the safety device activated flag = 1) or when strong error 2 occurs, the out-of-area integration process is not executed, so the safety device counter value is not updated and the displayed contents of the performance display, such as the base value, are not updated. This makes it possible to omit unnecessary control while game play is stopped.

In contrast to the above, even if a strong error 2 occurs, it is also possible to configure the system so that play does not stop, but instead executes special game processing (A1310), bonus game processing (A1311), regular game processing (A1312), and segment LED editing processing (A1313). It is also possible to configure the system so that, even if a strong error 2 occurs, out-of-area integration processing, etc. is executed.

In addition, when the timer interrupt processing returns, the interrupt disable state and register bank designation are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, processing to enable interrupts and to return the register bank designation to register bank 0 may also be performed after the external information editing processing.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (A1306) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described in detail. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

The game control device 100 first outputs off data to the output port 135 (segment output port) (see Figure 3) that outputs segment data for the collective display device (LED) 50, resetting the output port 135 (A1601). Next, it sets off output data for all solenoids (large prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 86b, and normal power solenoid 37c) (A1602). Then, as in step A1309, it determines whether game play is currently stopped (A1603). It can determine that game play is currently stopped if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag = 1) or if a severe error 2 has occurred that requires game play to be stopped.

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1603 is "N"), the game control device 100 combines the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134, which outputs data for the special prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 86b, and the normal power solenoid 37c (A1604). Then, it outputs the data to the solenoid output port 134 (A1605). When game play is stopped (the result of A1603 is "Y"), it does nothing and proceeds to processing in step A1605, outputting off data (A1602) to the solenoid output port 134. As a result, when game play is stopped, the operation of all solenoids stops, and the special prize opening, specific area 86, normal variable prize opening 37, etc. are closed and enter a closed state. In this way, when game play is stopped, the special prize opening is closed, and round play (play during a jackpot or small jackpot) cannot be performed.

The game control device 100 then updates the value of the digit counter, which is used to sequentially scan the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50, by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (it only adds 1, but updates to 0 after 3) (A1606). Furthermore, it acquires the digit output data for the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value (A1607). It then combines the acquired digit output data with the external information data (A1608) and outputs the combined data to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1609).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off data as the segment output data for the segment line (A1610). Then, it sets output data prohibiting firing (A1611). Furthermore, as in step A1603, etc., it determines whether game play is stopped (A1612).

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1612 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads segment output data from the segment area in RAM 111c corresponding to the value of the digit counter to the segment line (A1613), sets the output data for firing permission (A1614), and outputs the loaded segment output data to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615). Note that this segment area may be included in the in-area work area (game control work area).

In this way, when game play is not stopped, each time the digit counter value is incremented by +1 within the range of 0 to 3, a new digit line is selected and segment output data is output to the eight segment lines of the digit to which this digit line is connected. Digits 0 to 3 (digits 0 to 3) are selected sequentially, realizing a dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting control) for the collective display device 50.

On the other hand, when game play is stopped (the result of A1612 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs off data (A1610) to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615) without processing steps A1613 and A1614. As a result, when the safety device is activated (when the safety device activation flag = 1) or when game play is stopped and strong error 2 has occurred, the collective display device 50 turns off. As a result, the special chart variation display game and the regular chart variation display game cannot be executed when game play is stopped. Then, a player who looks at the collective display device 50 can recognize that game play is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that strong error 2 (an illegal error) has occurred.

The game control device 100 then loads and combines the external information data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1616), then combines the combined external information data with the launch permission or launch prohibition output data (A1617), and finally outputs the combined data to the external information/launch permission signal output port 137 (A1618). Note that if game play is not stopped, the output data becomes launch permission data (A1614), and if game play is stopped, the output data becomes launch prohibition (launch stop) data (A1611). This prevents the ball launcher from launching game balls in a game stop state when the safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 occurs, while allowing the ball to be launched from the ball launcher when game play is not stopped. Note that it is also possible to configure the ball launcher to allow the ball to be launched from the ball launcher even in a game stop state, without prohibiting (stopping) launching.

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 (A1619). After that, it loads and combines the data to be output to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 (A1620).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 (A1621). Furthermore, it loads and combines data to be output to test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 (A1622). Then, it loads and combines data to be output to test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70, which outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 (A1623).

Next, the game control device 100 outputs off data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2), which outputs data for the segment of the performance display device (LED) 152, and resets the output port 141 (A1624). Next, the value of digit counter 2, which sequentially scans the digit lines of the performance display device 152, is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (it only adds 1, but after 3 it is updated to 0) (A1625). Furthermore, it acquires the digit output data for the LED digit line corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (A1626). Then it outputs the acquired digit output data to output port 142 (digit output port 2) (A1627).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether game play is currently stopped (A1628), as in step A1603, etc. If game play is not currently stopped (the result of A1628 is "N"), it loads segment output data from the performance display device segment area in RAM 111c corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (A1629). The performance display device segment area is included in the performance display work area related to performance information and its display (performance display). The loaded segment output data is then output to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for the performance display device 152 (A1630), after which the output process ends.

On the other hand, if game play is stopped (the result of A1628 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the output processing without executing the processing of steps A1629 and A1630. Therefore, if the safety device has been activated and game play is stopped (if the safety device activated flag = 1) or if game play is stopped due to the occurrence of strong error 2, the segment output data of the performance display device segment area cannot be output to output port 141, so the off data of step A1624 is output directly to output port 141 for the performance display device 152. In this case, when the value of digit counter 2 cycles through the range of 0 to 3, all LEDs on the performance display device 152 are forcibly turned off and the display becomes invisible, allowing the amusement facility manager or staff member who sees the performance display device 152 to recognize that game play is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that strong error 2 (a fraudulent error) has occurred.

It is also possible to configure the system so that even if strong error 2 occurs, game play is not stopped, and processing such as steps A1629 and A1630 is executed.

[Winning port switch/status monitoring process]
Next, the details of the winning slot switch/status monitoring process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be explained. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first clears the acquired game ball count area included in the in-area work area to 0 (A2001). As a result, the acquired game ball count area becomes an area that stores the acquired game ball count, which is the total number of prize balls acquired within one interrupt (within a specified time period). The number of acquired game balls is equal to the increase in the number of safe balls within one interrupt. Next, a prize opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper large prize opening switch 39a in the upper large prize opening (special variable prize opening device 39) is prepared (A2002). Then, even though the upper large prize opening is not open, the system executes an illegal and winning monitoring process that monitors for illegal winnings at the upper large prize opening and detects normal winnings (A2003).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a prize opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower large prize opening switch 38a in the lower large prize opening (special variable prize opening device 38) (A2004). Then, even though the lower large prize opening is not open, it monitors for any illegal prizes at the lower large prize opening and executes an illegal/winning monitoring process to detect legitimate prizes (A2005).

The game control device 100 then prepares a prize slot monitoring table corresponding to the start slot 2 switch 37a in the normal variable prize slot device 37 (A2006). It then executes a fraudulent and prize slot monitoring process to monitor for fraudulent prize slots and detect normal prize slots (A2007). Next, it prepares a prize slot monitoring table for prize slot switches that allow prize slots at all times and do not require fraud monitoring (A2008). Prize slot switches that allow prize slots at all times include the start slot 1 switch 36a and the general prize slot 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a win count counter update process to update the number of wins (A2009). Then, it updates a status scan counter to specify, in order, which of the multiple switches and signals whose states should be monitored will be the target of this monitoring (A2010). The status scan counter is updated within the range of 0 to 3.

Then, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2011). Then, it executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2012).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the status scan counter value is 0, monitoring of the status (switch abnormality error) based on the abnormality detection signal output when a switch connector becomes unplugged, etc. is set; if the status scan counter value is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball out error) based on the chute ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the status scan counter value is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set; and if the status scan counter value is 3, monitoring of the status (payout abnormality error) based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. In this way, weak errors are monitored in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2013). Then, it executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2014).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch (glass frame open error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch (main frame open error, front frame open error) is set. Also, if the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave illegal signal (frame radio wave illegal) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (A2015). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2015 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A2017.

Furthermore, if the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2015 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process (A2016) to set the busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 is able to start payout control, and proceeds to processing of step A2017.

Note that step A2016 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter, which is updated with each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. In other words, if a timer interrupt occurs every 4 ms, step A2016 is executed every 16 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a V-passing timing monitoring process to monitor whether the game ball has passed through the specific area switch 72 at an inappropriate timing (A2017). In the V-passing timing monitoring process, if a detection signal for the specific area switch 72 is generated at an inappropriate timing, a V-passing error is detected.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a remaining ball monitoring process to monitor whether any game balls remain in the specific area switch 72 (A2018), and then ends the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

Note that the V-pass timing monitoring process and remaining ball monitoring process in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process are necessary for so-called Type 1/Type 2 mixed machines (Type 1+Type 2 machines) like this embodiment, and may not be necessary for regular Type 1 pachinko machines.

[Fraud and winning monitoring processing]
12 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fraud and winning monitoring process, which is executed in steps A2003, A2005, and A2007 of the winning port switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.

The fraud and winning monitoring process is performed on the lower large winning slot switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning slot switch 39a in the special variable winning device 39, and the winning slot switch (starting slot 2 switch 37a) in the regular variable winning device 37. The second starting winning slot (regular variable winning device 37) and the large winning slot (special variable winning devices 38, 39) are prone to fraud, whereby players forcefully open the opening/closing member to insert game balls and pay out prize balls, so in addition to detecting winnings, they are also monitored for fraud.

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the prize slot switch being monitored for errors (A2101) and determines whether or not it is currently in a fraud monitoring period (A2102). For example, a fraud monitoring period is a period during which the prize slot switch being monitored for errors would not normally detect game balls, and is a period other than the special game state in which the special variable prize slot device 38 is opened when the prize slot switch is the lower large prize slot switch 38a.

If it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the target winning slot switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2103 is "N"), it loads the target alarm timer update information (A2112). Also, if there is an input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2103 is "Y"), it updates the target number of fraudulent wins by +1 (A2104), and determines whether the number of fraudulent wins after the increment is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrences to be monitored (for example, 5) (A2105).

The reason for setting the number of judgments to five is to prevent fraud from being judged as occurring in cases such as when a game ball gets caught in the door member of the large prize opening when the opening is switched from an open state to a closed state, and the game ball enters the game after the count switch's validity period has expired, or when noise is present in the signal, and to prevent fraud from being easily judged as an error even when there is no fraud.

If the number of illegal wins is less than the number of determinations (the result of A2105 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning slot monitoring table for the target winning slot switch (A2110). If the number of illegal wins is greater than the number of determinations (the result of A2105 is "Y"), the game control device 100 keeps the number of illegal wins at the number of illegal wins determined (A2106) and saves an initial value (e.g., 60,000 ms) in the target illegal win notification timer area (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraud occurrence command as a presentation command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud win occurrence flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "N"), it prepares the winning slot monitoring table for the target winning slot switch (A2110) and executes the winning slot counter update process to set the prize balls (A2111). Details of the winning slot counter update process will be described later.

The game control device 100 then loads the target alarm timer update information (A2112) and determines whether or not the alarm timer is permitted to be updated (A2113). If the alarm timer is not permitted to be updated (the result of A2113 is "N"), the fraud and winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the alarm timer is permitted to be updated (the result of A2113 is "Y"), the target alarm timer is updated by -1 if it is not 0 (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the alarm timer is set to 0.

Updating the alarm timer is permitted if the prize slot switch being monitored for errors is the prize slot switch (starting slot 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable prize slot device 37. Also, if there are two prize slot switches in one special variable prize slot device (large prize slot), updating the alarm timer is permitted if one of the prize slot switches is being monitored for errors, but not permitted if the other prize slot switch is being monitored for errors. This prevents the alarm timer from being updated twice as frequently for an incorrect notification for one special variable prize slot device, causing it to time out in half the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms).

The game control device 100 then determines whether the value of the alarm timer is 0 (A2115), and if the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), i.e., if the timer has not yet run out, ends the fraud and winning monitoring process. Also, if the value of the alarm timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is "Y"), i.e., if the timer has run out or has already run out, it prepares the target fraud release command as a presentation command (A2116) and prepares an fraud win release flag as a fraud flag (A2117). It then determines whether the moment has come when the value of the alarm timer reached 0 (A2118).

When the value of the alarm timer reaches 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the alarm timer reaches 0 during this fraud and winning monitoring process, the game control device 100 clears the number of fraudulent winnings (A2119).

Furthermore, after the processing of step A2119 is completed, or if the value of the alarm timer has not reached 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), that is, if the value of the alarm timer reached 0 during the previous or previous fraud and winning monitoring process, the game control device 100 compares the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value in the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the fraud and winning monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared fraud flag does not match the value in the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared fraud flag in the target fraud flag area (A2121) and executes the effect command setting process (A2122). Then, the fraud and winning monitoring process ends.

Through the above processing, a fraud occurrence command is sent to the performance control device 300 when fraud occurs, and a fraud cancellation command is sent to the performance control device 300 when fraud is cleared, thereby setting the start and end of fraud notification.

[Winning number counter update process]
13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the winning number counter. The winning number counter update process is executed in step A2009 of the winning port switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG. 11 and in step A2111 of the fraud and winning monitoring process shown in FIG. 12.

The game control device 100 first determines whether game play is currently stopped (A2201). It can determine that game play is currently stopped if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 has occurred that requires game play to be stopped.

When game play is not stopped (result of A2201 is "N"), the game control device 100 obtains the number of winning slot switches to be monitored from the winning slot monitoring table (A2202) and determines whether there is an input to the target winning slot switch (A2203). The winning table in the winning slot monitoring table defines the number of prize balls, the address of winning slot counter area 1, the address of winning slot counter area 2, etc. for each winning slot switch to be monitored. If there is no input (result of A2203 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2215) and a determination is made as to whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2216).

On the other hand, if there is an input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2203 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the number of acquired game balls from the acquired game ball count area (A2204), adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the target winning slot switch to the number of acquired game balls (A2205), and saves the added value in the acquired game ball count area (A2206). As a result, the number of acquired game balls stored in the acquired game ball count area is updated for each winning slot switch, and the number of acquired game balls ultimately becomes the number of prize balls acquired within one interrupt (total).

The area for the number of winning game balls is located in the work area within the area, and is written by the program for updating the winning number counter (part of the program within the area), and is only read by the program for checking the difference in balls (described below) (part of the program outside the area). Even if input is made to all winning slot switches at the same time, the total number of winning balls will not reach 255 (1 byte), so no upper limit check is made on the number of winning game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2207) and updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208). It then determines whether an overflow will occur due to the updated value (A2209). The winning number counter area 1 is 2 bytes in size (0 to 65535).

If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2209 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in prize count counter area 1 (A2210). After processing step A2210 is completed, or if an overflow has occurred (the result of A2209 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target prize count counter area 2 (A2211).

Then, the gaming control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2212) and determines whether the updated value will cause an overflow (A2213). If an overflow will not occur (the result of A2213 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the number of wins counter area 2 (A2214). The number of wins counter area 2 is 1 byte (0-255) in size.

After completing step A2214, or if an overflow occurs (the result of A2213 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the table address to the address of the next record (A2215). Then, it determines whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2216).

If the game control device 100 has not finished monitoring all switches (the result of A2216 is "N"), it returns to step A2203, which determines whether there is an input to the target winning slot switch. If the monitoring of all switches has finished (the result of A2216 is "Y"), it ends the winning number counter update process. As a result, steps A2203-A2216 are repeated until the monitoring of all switches has finished, obtaining the number of acquired game balls, which is the total number of prize balls acquired within one interruption. Winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winnings at each winning slot (each winning area) within one interruption, and winning information is stored.

When game play is stopped (the result of A2201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the winning number counter update process. As a result, while game play is stopped, the detection of game balls by the winning slot switch is disabled, the number of acquired game balls is not updated, and winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are not updated, so winning information is not stored and no prize balls are obtained (paid out). Note that the payout of prize balls based on winning information stored before the game stopped (i.e., when game ball detection by the winning slot switch was valid) continues even while game play is stopped.

The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to send payout commands (prize ball commands) to the payout control device 200 to instruct the payout of prize balls, and stores winning data corresponding to prize balls for which a payout command has not yet been sent. In other words, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter that can store information related to prize ball commands.

The winning number counter area 2 is an area used to transmit a main prize ball signal to an external device each time the number of prize balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning balls entering the winning slot reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case), and stores winning data corresponding to prize balls for which the main prize ball signal generation process has not been performed. In other words, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main prize ball signal counter that can store information related to the main prize ball signal.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each winning slot (for example, 3 prize balls, 2 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls), and the count in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the number of prizes won at the winning slot. In other words, winning information can be stored per prize win at the winning slot. Winning number counter area 1 (2 bytes) is allocated a larger area than winning number counter area 2 (1 byte), allowing for the storage of more winning data. This is because, while the main prize ball signal can be sent regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200, which is the destination, resulting in the accumulation of a large amount of unsent data.

[Gaming machine status check process]
14 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gaming machine status check process. The gaming machine status check process is executed in steps A2012, A2014, etc. in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first obtains the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter (A2301). The status scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game status. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as explained in the prize slot switch/status monitoring process.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the signal to be checked is on (A2302). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2302 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, it prepares a status off flag as a status flag (A2303) and acquires and prepares the target status off command (A2304). It then acquires the target status off monitoring timer comparison value (A2305). The status off flag indicates a normal state for error-related signals, and indicates a no-touch state for touch switch signals.

On the other hand, if the signal being checked is on (the result of A2302 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a status on flag as a status flag (A2306), acquires and prepares the target status on command (A2307). Furthermore, it acquires the target status on monitoring timer comparison value (A2308). The status on flag indicates an abnormal or invalid state for error-related signals, and indicates a touched state for touch switch signals.

When processing of step A2305 or step A2308 is completed, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the acquired signal state (A2309). If they match (the result of A2309 is "Y"), it proceeds to processing of step A2312. If they do not match (the result of A2309 is "N"), it saves the acquired signal state in the target signal control area (A2310) and clears the target state monitoring timer (A2311).

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the target status monitoring timer by +1 (A2312). Furthermore, it determines whether the value of the updated status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2313). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2313 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the updated status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2313 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and leaves it at the timer comparison value -1 (A2314). Furthermore, it determines whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2315). If they match (the result of A2315 is "Y"), the gaming machine status check process ends.

On the other hand, if the prepared status flag does not match the value of the target status flag area (the result of A2315 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared status flag in the target status flag area (A2316). Finally, it executes a presentation command setting process to set a presentation command (A2317), and ends the gaming machine status check process.

The presentation command here is either a status off command or a status on command. If the status on command is an error command, it causes the presentation control device 300 to start issuing an error alert. Status on commands that cause the presentation control device 300 to start issuing an error alert include commands that correspond to payout errors (included in weak errors) related to the payout of game balls, such as a shot ball out error, overflow error, or abnormal payout error, as well as commands that correspond to frame open errors (included in strong error 1), such as a glass frame open error or main frame open error, and commands that correspond to frame radio wave irregularity errors (included in strong error 2).

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the probability setting change/confirmation process. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area included in the work area within RAM 111c.

If the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402) and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via drivers 150a and 150b (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via drivers 150a and 150b (A2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data on the display probability setting value displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. Note that, to prevent confusion among hall personnel such as the amusement facility manager or attendants, if the probability setting values are different but the jackpot probability (and small win probability) is the same, the display probability setting value may be made the same in correspondence with the jackpot probability (and small win probability). In other words, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small win probability).

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 128 ms (predetermined time) in step A1037. Next, it outputs security signal ON data to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device (such as the gaming facility internal management device (hall computer)) of an abnormality (A2406). Note that at this time, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as a jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting change in progress flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting change in progress flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change/confirmation process without doing anything.

When the probability setting change in progress flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), i.e., when the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 determines whether this is the first timer interrupt processing since power-on (A2408). If this is the first timer interrupt processing since power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation processing ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated if the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

If this is not the first timer interrupt process since power-on (the result of A2408 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there has been input to the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409). If there has been no input to the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (the result of A2409 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the working setting value in the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or register) by +1 within the possible range, and updates the probability setting value in the probability setting value area by +1 corresponding to the working setting value (A2410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. The probability setting change/confirmation process then terminates. Note that when entering setting change mode, the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or register) that stores the working setting value may store a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the probability setting value). Note that if the working setting value is updated by +1 when it is 5 (probability setting value 6), it can return to working setting value 0 (probability setting value 1). Therefore, probability setting values 1 to 6 can be switched by repeatedly updating by +1. Additionally, the possible range of the working setting value is, for example, 0-1 or 0-5 in the case of a multi-stage setting where there are multiple probability setting values, but only 0 in the case of a single-stage setting. In the case of a multi-stage setting, the working setting value and probability setting value are updated to different values each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but in the case of a single-stage setting, they remain the same even when updated (they are updated to the same value).

Furthermore, a command (setting value information command) informing the presentation control device 300 of the setting value may be sent each time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc. Similarly, a test signal may be output to an external test firing device each time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc. It is preferable to suspend these transmissions and outputs if there is an abnormality in the game control device 100, such as a main abnormality. In addition, a command (setting value information command) informing the presentation control device 300 of the setting value may be sent when the game state is switched to a probability variable state, time-saving state, jackpot state, etc., or at the start of a special chart variable display game, or a test signal may be output to an external test firing device.

In the above, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the working setting value each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. However, it is also possible to store the probability setting value (working setting value) during the setting change in the working setting value area of RAM 111c, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1039 is "Y"), the value corresponding to the working setting value in the working setting value area is stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs during the setting change (the result of A1040 is "Y"), it is possible to prevent the probability setting value (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, presentation control, etc. from being changed to an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be explained. Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game processing. In the special symbol game processing, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special symbol variable display game is controlled, and the display of the special symbol is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a start port switch monitoring process (A2600) to monitor the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, which constitutes the start winning port 36 or the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted, and a game result advance determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning before the start of the special chart variable display game based on the winning. Details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, a specific area switch monitoring process is executed to monitor the entry (entry) of a game ball into the specific area 86 (V entry port) (A2601). Details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the upper large prize opening switch monitoring process (A2602). The upper large prize opening switch monitoring process monitors the detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable prize opening device 39.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special symbol game processing timer by -1 (subtracts 1) if it is not 0 (A2603). By updating the special symbol game processing timer by -1, the timer will count for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process. The minimum value of the special symbol game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special symbol game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special symbol game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A2619.

If the special game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), i.e., if the timer is up or has already timed out, the game control device 100 sets in a register a special game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number (A2605). Furthermore, the game control device 100 obtains the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special game processing number using the special game sequence branch table (A2606). Next, it makes a subroutine call using the special game processing number and executes the game branch processing corresponding to the special game processing number (A2607).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the special chart change display game, and executes the special chart normal processing (A2608), which sets the start of the special chart change display game, the effects, and the information required for processing during the special chart change. Details of the special chart normal processing will be described later.

If the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes special pattern change processing (A2609), which sets the stop display time of the special pattern and sets information necessary for processing while the special pattern is displayed. For example, in the special pattern change processing, necessary information such as the pattern stop command indicating the stop of the special pattern and the stop display time corresponding to the stopped pattern pattern is set, and the processing number for the special pattern change processing is set to "2" and saved in the special pattern game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes special chart display processing, which sets the information necessary to transition to a big win state or a small win state (A2610). For example, in the special chart display processing, if the result of the special chart variation display game is a big win, condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set in the condition device operation information area, and the processing number for special chart normal processing is set to "0" and saved in the special chart game processing number area. If the result of the special chart variation display game is a small win, necessary information such as the small win fanfare command and the time before the small win is released is set, and the processing number for pre-small win release processing is set to "3" and saved in the special chart game processing number area. If the result of the special chart variation display game is a miss, the processing number for special chart normal processing is set to "0" and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes pre-small win opening processing (A2611). For example, in the pre-small win opening processing, the opening time of the large prize opening due to a small win (small win opening time, for example, 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, on data is saved in the upper large prize opening solenoid output data area, the small win opening command is set as the performance command, and the processing number "4" for the small win opening processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small win release processing (A2612). For example, in the small win release processing, the small win remaining ball processing time (e.g., 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number for small win remaining ball processing, "5," is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small win remaining ball processing (A2613). For example, in the small win remaining ball processing, the processing number for the special chart normal processing is set to "0" and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

When processing based on the special symbol game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special symbol 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations in the special symbol 1 display 51 (A2614), and then executes pattern fluctuation control processing related to the special symbol 1 display 51 (A2615). Then, after preparing a special symbol 2 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations in the special symbol 2 display 52 (A2616), it executes pattern fluctuation control processing related to the special symbol 2 display 52 (A2617). Next, it executes lever solenoid control processing (A2618) that controls the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b so that it is opened during a small win, and then ends the special symbol game processing.

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2600) in the special game process will be described. Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the start winning slot 36 (starting slot 1) (A2701), executes a hardware random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether there has been a winning at the start winning slot 36 (A2703). If there has been no winning at the start winning slot 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), it executes the process from step A2709 onwards. On the other hand, if there has been a winning at the start winning slot 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it determines whether the game is in a right-hit state (A2704).

If the game control device 100 determines that the game state is not for right-hitting (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing from step A2707 onwards. On the other hand, if the game state is for right-hitting (the result of A2704 is "Y"), it prepares a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A2705) and executes presentation command setting processing (A2706). In the presentation command setting processing, the presentation command is written to the serial transmission buffer and transmitted to the presentation control device 300.

In other words, in the normal power support state (time-saving state), regardless of the probability state of the variable display game (high probability state/low probability state), a right-hit instruction notification command is prepared and the presentation command setting process is executed. In this embodiment, left-handed hits are more likely to win at the start winning slot 36, while right-handed hits are required to win at the normal variable winning device 37. Furthermore, the game ball will not pass through the normal game start gate 34 unless it is hit with the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time-saving state), right-handed hits are more advantageous than left-handed hits, but if a win occurs at the start winning slot 36 during the normal power support state (i.e., if a left-handed hit is made during the normal power support state), a right-hit instruction notification command is sent to the presentation control device 300, and the presentation control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit with the right on the display device 41, etc., via a right-hit instruction display.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting hold information from the start winning slot 36 (starting slot 1) (A2707), and then executes the special starting slot switch common processing (A2708). Then, it prepares a winning monitoring table for the second starting slot (normal variable winning device 37) (A2709), executes the hard random number acquisition processing (A2710), and determines whether or not there has been a winning at the second starting slot (A2711). If there has been no winning at the second starting slot (the result of A2711 is "N"), it terminates the starting slot switch monitoring processing.

On the other hand, if there is a win in the second start winning slot (the result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal electric device (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state allowing game balls to win (A2712). If the normal electric device is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, if the normal electric device is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether normal power fraud is occurring (A2713). It determines that normal power fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent wins into the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). When the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, game balls cannot win; game balls can only win when it is in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, this indicates that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there are game balls that win in such a closed state, the number of such game balls is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, if the number of fraudulent wins counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined fraud determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If normal power fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting hold information by the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714), then executes special chart start port switch common processing (A2715), and terminates the start port switch monitoring processing. Also, if A2713 determines that normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring processing is terminated. In other words, no further second start memories are generated.

[Special diagram starter switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special drawing start port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring processing will be explained. Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing start port switch common processing. The special drawing start port switch common processing is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

The gaming control device 100 first loads the start gate signal output count, which is the number of times information regarding the number of wins on the monitored start gate switch, either the start gate 1 switch 36a or the start gate 2 switch 37a, is output to an external management device of the gaming machine 10 (A2901), updates the loaded value by +1 (A2902), and determines whether the output count will overflow (A2903). If the output count will not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start gate signal output count field of the RWM (A2904), and processing proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count will overflow (the result of A2903 is "Y"), processing proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, the start gate signal output count field can store values from "0" to "255." If the loaded value is "255," the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the output count will overflow.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols to be updated (start memory number) corresponding to the monitored start symbol switch, between the start symbol 1 switch 36a and the start symbol 2 switch 37a, is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (A2905). If the number of reserved special symbols to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special symbol start symbol switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of reserved special symbols to be updated is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of reserved special symbols to be updated (the number of reserved special symbols 1 or the number of reserved special symbols 2) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target start symbol winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start switch and the number of reserved special symbols to be monitored (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2909). Next, it extracts the jackpot pattern random number of the special symbol variation display game that starts upon detection of the start switch to be monitored, and saves it in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2910). Next, it extracts the small jackpot pattern random number of the special symbol variation display game that starts upon detection of the start switch to be monitored, and saves it in the small jackpot pattern random number storage area (A2911). It also extracts the support jackpot pattern random number used to determine the time-saving symbol, and saves it in the support jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2912).

In this embodiment, as mentioned above, a big win will definitely occur when a V win occurs after a small win, so there is no need to use a small win symbol random number, and step A2911 is optional and does not need to be executed. Also, since there are no small win results in the special symbol 1 variable display game, if the start port switch to be monitored is start port 1 switch 36a, there is no need to extract a small win symbol random number.

The small win symbol random number, support win symbol random number, and jackpot symbol random number are used in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) and special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) described below to determine the stop symbol number for a small win, the stop symbol number for a support win, or the stop symbol number for a jackpot, and the small win stop symbol pattern, support win stop symbol pattern, or jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to these stop symbol numbers.

In this embodiment, to avoid confusion, the small win symbol random number, support win symbol random number, and jackpot symbol random number are each set independently; however, to reduce the random number storage area in the RWM, one random number (common random number) may be shared to allocate small win symbols (symbol number that stops at a small win, small win stop symbol pattern), support win symbols (symbol number that stops at a support win, support hit stop symbol pattern), and jackpot symbols (symbol number that stops at a jackpot, jackpot stop symbol pattern). In other words, when determining small win symbols, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each small win symbol; when determining support win symbols, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each support win symbol; and when determining jackpot symbols, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each jackpot symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2913), and executes a special symbol pending information determination process (pre-determination process, look-ahead process) that can determine the outcome of the fluctuation display game (game result) in advance (A2914). The special symbol pending information determination process sets, as performance commands, look-ahead stop pattern commands corresponding to stop symbol information (jackpot stop symbol, small hit stop symbol, time-saving stop symbol, miss stop symbol) based on the saved jackpot random number and hit symbol random number (jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, support hit symbol random number), and look-ahead fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (pre-reach fluctuation number) and second half fluctuation number (post-reach fluctuation number) based on the saved fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3. Then, a decorative special symbol reserve number command corresponding to the monitored start port switch and special symbol reserve number is prepared as an effect command (A2915), the effect command setting process (A2916) is executed, and the special symbol start port switch common process is terminated. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes a pre-determination means that can determine the outcome of the variable display game based on the start memory before the game is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) serves as a start memory means that extracts predetermined random numbers based on the flow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning slot 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and stores the extracted random numbers up to a predetermined number as start memory, which constitutes the right to play the variable display game. The start memory means (game control device 100) also stores various random number values extracted based on the entry of game balls into the first start winning slot (start winning slot 36) up to a predetermined number as first start memory, and stores various random number values extracted based on the entry of game balls into the second start winning slot (normal variable winning device 37) up to a predetermined number as second start memory.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described in detail. Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the specific area switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a small win is occurring (A3001). If the special game processing number is "4" or "5", it can be determined that a small win is occurring. If a small win is occurring (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it determines whether a condition device is operating (A3002). If condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set, it can be determined that the condition device is operating.

If the condition device is not in operation (the result of A3002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003). If there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is "Y"), that is, if there is a win (V win) in the specific area 86, the game control device saves the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation in the condition device operation information area (A3004), and ends the specific area switch monitoring process.

If there is no small win (the result of A3001 is "N"), if the condition device is operating (the result of A3002 is "Y"), or if there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is "N"), the specific area switch monitoring process ends without doing anything.

[Special chart normal processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol normal processing (A2608) in the special symbol game processing will be described. Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the normal reel processing of the reel game processing described below is in progress and whether the remaining ball counter for the large prize opening is 0 (A3200). If the normal reel processing is not in progress or the remaining ball counter for the large prize opening is not 0 (the result of A3200 is "N"), the special chart variable display game is not started and the process proceeds to step A3215.

When the game device is in normal processing mode and the remaining ball counter for the large prize slot is 0 (the result of A3200 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols 2 (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it determines whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206). Then, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it determines whether the customer waiting demo has started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3211 is "N"), it sets the customer waiting demo in progress flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3212).

The game control device 100 then prepares a customer waiting demo command as a presentation command (A3213), performs presentation command setting processing (A3214), and proceeds to processing in step A3215. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A3211 (the result of A3211 is "Y"), the processing number is set to "0" for the special game normal processing (A3215), the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (A3216), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large prize slot fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special game normal processing ends.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special chart 2 variation start process (A3202), prepares a decorative special chart reservation number command (decorative special chart 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the reserved number of special charts 2 as a presentation command (A3203), and executes the presentation command setting process (A3204). Then, it executes the special chart variation processing transition setting process for special chart 2 (A3205), and ends the normal special chart processing.

In the special chart 2 special chart fluctuation processing transition setting process, the processing number is set to "1", the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the fluctuation flag is saved in the special chart 2 fluctuation control flag area.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special charts 1 is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special chart 1 variation start process (A3207), prepares a decorative special chart reservation number command (decorative special chart 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the reserved number of special charts 1 as a presentation command (A3208), and executes the presentation command setting process (A3209). Then, it executes the special chart variation processing transition setting process for special chart 1 (A3210), and ends the normal special chart processing.

In the special chart 1 special chart fluctuation processing transition setting process, the processing number is set to "1", the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the fluctuation flag is saved in the special chart 1 fluctuation control flag area.

In this way, by checking the number of reserved special charts 2 before checking the number of reserved special charts 1, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is not 0, the special chart 2 variation start process (A3202) will be executed. In other words, the special chart 2 variation display game will be executed in priority over the special chart 1 variation display game (special chart 2 reservation priority consumption). In other words, if the second start memory is stored in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the gaming control device 100 serves as a priority control means that executes the variation display game based on the second start memory in priority over the variation display game based on the first start memory. Note that when special chart 1 reservation priority consumption is used, in which the special chart 1 variation display game is executed in priority over the special chart 2 variation display game, the determination in step A3201 can be made by determining whether the number of reserved special charts 1 is ≠ 0.

[Special Chart 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 variation start process (A3207) in the special chart normal process will be explained. Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 variation start process. The special chart 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special symbol 1 change flag, which indicates the type of special symbol change display game to be executed (special symbol 1 in this case), in the change symbol discrimination area (A3401). Next, it executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402), which sets miss information or jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 to determine whether the special symbol 1 change display game is a jackpot. Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) to set the special symbol 1 stop symbol (symbol information) for the special symbol 1 variable display game. The special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process saves the stop symbol number for a miss, a support hit, or a jackpot, and the corresponding miss stop symbol pattern, support hit stop symbol pattern, or jackpot stop symbol pattern. The stop symbol number for a support hit or a jackpot is determined in accordance with the support hit symbol random number and jackpot symbol random number, respectively.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special chart information setting process to set special chart information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special chart 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table containing information for referencing various information related to setting the variation pattern of the special chart 1 variation display game (A3405).

Then, the gaming control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set a variation pattern (variation pattern number), which is the variation mode in the special chart 1 variation display game (A3406). Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a variation start information setting process to set information on the start of variation in the special chart 1 variation display game (A3407), and ends the special chart 1 variation start process. In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is obtained and saved in the special chart game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as a presentation command, and the presentation command setting process is executed. Furthermore, in the variation start information setting process, the number of reserved special charts related to the special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2) of the special chart variation display game that is about to start is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special Chart 2 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special chart normal process will be explained. Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 variation start process. The special chart 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the special chart 1 variation start process shown in Figure 21, but for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the special symbol 2 variable flag, which indicates the type of special symbol variable display game to be executed (special symbol 2 in this case), in the variable symbol discrimination area (A3501). Next, it executes the jackpot flag 2 setting process, which sets miss information or jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 to determine whether the special symbol 2 variable display game is a jackpot or not (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special chart 2 stop pattern setting process to set the special chart 2 stop pattern (pattern information) for the special chart 2 variable display game (A3503). Furthermore, it executes a special chart information setting process to set the special chart information, which is a parameter for setting the variable pattern (A3504). Next, it prepares a special chart 2 variable pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information is set for referencing various information related to setting the variable pattern of the special chart 2 variable display game (A3505).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set the variation pattern of the special chart 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, it executes a variation start information setting process to set information on the start of variation of the special chart 2 variation display game (A3507), and ends the special chart 2 variation start process.

[Jackpot flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special chart 1 variation start process will be described. Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves miss information in the jackpot flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, it loads and prepares a jackpot random number from the RWM's special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A3602), and clears the special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A3603). Note that reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special chart start memory that is first in the consumption order (in this case, the first of special chart 1). It then executes a jackpot determination process that determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3604).

If the result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3601 (A3606), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "N"), an optional support hit determination process is executed (A3607) to determine whether the special symbol variable display game is a support hit based on the obtained jackpot random number value, and the result of the determination is determined to be a support hit or not (A3608). Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for both the support hit determination and the jackpot determination). Here, a support hit (time-saving hit) in a special symbol variable display game refers to a time-saving result (specific result) that enters a time-saving state from the next special symbol variable display game, and in response to this time-saving result, the presentation control device 300 can display a time-saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decorative special symbol variable display game.

If the special chart variable display game is a support hit (the result of A3608 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3601 (A3609), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the special chart variable display game is not a support hit (the result of A3608 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

As such, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game will be either a "big hit," a "support hit (time-saving hit)," or a "miss," and there is no "small hit." Note that steps A3607-A3609 are optional, and they may be omitted so that a "support hit (time-saving hit)" does not appear in the result of the special chart 1 variable display game. It is also possible to configure the result of the special chart 1 variable display game to include a "small hit."

In the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area, but since jackpots and support hits do not overlap, the support hit information can also be saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Jackpot Flag 2 Setting Process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be explained. Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot flag 2 setting process. This process is the same as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in Figure 23, but is performed on the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves miss information in the jackpot flag 2 area, small hit flag 2 area, and support hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, it loads and prepares a jackpot random number from the RWM's special chart 2 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A3702), and clears the special chart 2 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A3703). Note that reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special chart start memory that is first in the consumption order (in this case, the first of the special chart 2). It then executes a small hit determination process that determines whether or not a small hit has occurred based on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (A3704).

If the result of the small hit determination process (A3704) is a small hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3706), and ends the big hit flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a support hit determination process to determine whether the special symbol variable display game is a support hit based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3707), and determines whether the determination result is a support hit (A3708). Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for both the support hit determination and the jackpot determination). Here, a support hit (time-saving hit) in a special symbol variable display game refers to a time-saving result (specific result) that enters a time-saving state from the next special symbol variable display game, and in response to this specific result, the presentation control device 300 can display a time-saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decorative special symbol variable display game.

If the special chart variable display game is a support hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the support hit information in the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701 (A3709), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (A3707) is not a support hit (the result of A3708 is "N"), an optional jackpot determination process may be executed (A3710) to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. If the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3710) is a jackpot (the result of A3711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3712), and terminates the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3710) is not a jackpot (the result of A3711 is "N"), the game control device 100 terminates the jackpot flag 2 setting process while leaving the miss information saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

In this way, in this embodiment, the result of the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game will be either a "small hit," a "support hit (time-saving hit)," or a "miss," but it is also possible to optionally configure the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game to result in a "big hit."

In the jackpot flag 2 setting process, small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area, and support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area. However, since jackpots, support hits, and small hits do not overlap, small hit information and support hit information may also be saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process (A3604, A3710) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process will be explained. Figure 25A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. Note that the jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets an upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3800), then sets a lower limit judgment value for the jackpot judgment value (A3801), and determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3802). A jackpot occurs when the jackpot random number matches the jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a jackpot is determined to occur when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value. The upper limit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the special probability state) and the high probability state (special probability state).

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the judgment result to "miss" (other than jackpot) (A3804) and ends the jackpot judgment process.

The game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3803). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "Y"), it sets a miss (other than a jackpot) as the judgment result (A3804). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), it sets a jackpot as the judgment result (A3805). Once the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3704) in the big hit flag 2 setting process will be explained. Figure 25B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3900), and determines whether the value of the target (special chart 2) jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A3901). A small hit occurs when the jackpot random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a small hit is determined when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the small hit judgment values, and is equal to or less than the small hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment values. The small hit upper limit judgment value may differ between low probability states (normal probability states other than the special probability state) and high probability states (special probability state).

Naturally, to avoid the result of the same special chart variable display game being both a small hit and a big hit, the range of small hit determination values (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) does not overlap with the range of big hit determination values mentioned above (between the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value). Note that in this embodiment, a unique small hit random number is not set, and the big hit random number is also used to determine small hits, but a configuration in which a unique small hit random number is set is also possible.

If the value of the jackpot random number for the target (special chart 2) is less than the small jackpot lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the judgment result to "miss" (A3903) and ends the small jackpot judgment process.

Furthermore, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the jackpot random number for the target (special chart 2) is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A3902). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a miss as the judgment result (A3903). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a small hit as the judgment result (A3904). Once the judgment result is set, the small hit judgment process ends. Note that in this embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability is 1/8 (= 12.5%), but the small hit probability may be other values.

[Support hit determination processing]
Next, details of the support hit determination process (A3607, A3707) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process will be explained. Figure 25C is a flowchart showing the procedure of the support hit determination process. Note that the support hit determination process is a process common to the support hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets an upper support hit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A7001). Next, it sets a lower limit judgment value for the support hit judgment value (A7002) and determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7003). A support hit occurs when the jackpot random number matches the support hit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value and the game state. The support hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a support hit is determined when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the support hit judgment value, and equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the support hit judgment value. The upper support hit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the special probability state) and the high probability state (special probability state).

Naturally, to avoid the result of the same special chart variable display game being both a support hit and a big hit, or a support hit and a small hit, the range of support hit determination values (between the support hit lower limit determination value and the support hit upper limit determination value) does not overlap with the range of the big hit determination value and small hit determination value mentioned above. Note that in this embodiment, a unique support hit random number is not set, and the big hit random number is also used to determine a support hit, but a configuration in which a unique support hit random number is set is also possible.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value for a support hit (the result of A7003 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the judgment result to "miss" (other than a support hit) (A7005) and ends the support hit judgment process.

Furthermore, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A7003 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (A7004). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A7004 is "Y"), it sets a miss (other than a support hit) as the judgment result (A7005). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A7004 is "N"), it sets a support hit as the judgment result (A7006). Once the judgment result is set, the support hit judgment process ends.

In the support hit determination process, a support hit determination (time-saving determination) is made by lottery using a jackpot random number value. In the support hit determination (time-saving determination) as a lottery, if the jackpot random number value matches the support hit determination value (time-saving determination value), a support hit result (time-saving result, specific result) is obtained as the determination result, and the time saving is set. The support hit determination value is different from the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value.

To add variety, the winning probability of a support hit (range of support hit determination values ÷ range of jackpot random numbers) may be different for each probability setting value, or for simplicity, the winning probability of a support hit may be the same for each probability setting value. The winning probability of a support hit may be set so that setting 1 (or the low setting side) is more likely to win a support hit and setting 6 (or the high setting side) is less likely to win a support hit, thereby mitigating the disadvantages of a low setting, or it may be set in the opposite direction to match the expectations of players who expect that a support hit is more likely to be won with the high setting side. The winning probability of a support hit may also change monotonically from setting 1 to setting 6, or it may not be monotonous, such as changing every two settings. The winning probability of a support hit may be made different between even and odd settings to increase the player's interest in estimating the probability setting value.

In addition, the probability of winning a support hit may be different during low jackpot probability periods (outside of the special probability state) and high jackpot probability periods (during the special probability state) to add contrast, or it may be the same for simplicity. The probability of winning a support hit may be set so that it is easier to win during low jackpot probability periods (outside of the special probability state) and harder to win during high jackpot probability periods (during the special probability state), thereby mitigating the disadvantage during low jackpot probability periods, or it may be set in the opposite direction to suit the expectations of players who expect that it is easier to win a support hit during high jackpot probability periods. For example, the probability of winning a support hit may be set so that it is only possible to win a support hit during low jackpot probability periods (the probability of winning a support hit is zero during high jackpot probability periods), thereby mitigating the disadvantage during low jackpot probability periods.

In addition, the winning probability of a support hit may be different between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game to add emphasis, or may be the same for simplicity. For example, to increase the number of support hits in the normal power support state (time-saving state or special rate state), the winning probability of a support hit in the special chart 2 variable display game may be made higher than in the special chart 1 variable display game. Conversely, to increase the interest in the game in the normal game state, the winning probability of a support hit in the special chart 1 variable display game may be made higher than in the special chart 2 variable display game. In short, the winning probability of a support hit in one of the special chart 1 variable display games or the special chart 2 variable display game may be set to zero, so that a support hit occurs only in the other special chart variable display game.

If the result of the special chart variation display game is a support hit result (time-saving result), the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503) sets the time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern) as the stop pattern (stop pattern number, stop pattern), and the time-saving state is entered from the next special chart variation display game. In other words, in this case, the time-saving state is suddenly entered without going through a jackpot (sudden time-saving). Also, in this case, a decorative special chart command corresponding to the time-saving pattern is sent to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device 300 displays the time-saving pattern (decorative time-saving pattern) as a decorative stop pattern on the display device 41.

The time-saving symbols displayed on the display device 41 can be, for example, "1, 1, 3," where only the left and center symbols are aligned. There are no restrictions on the time-saving symbols as long as they are decided in advance, but symbols with a pattern, such as "1, 2, 3," where the numbers are arranged in order, or "1, 3, 1," where only the left and right symbols are aligned, are preferred as they are easier for players to remember. Multiple time-saving symbols can be prepared, and the number of special symbol variable display games that will continue the time-saving state (number of time-saving times) can be determined for each time-saving symbol.

When a time-saving result (time-saving pattern) occurs, lamp display units 1 and 2 of lamp display device 80 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern), unlike when a jackpot result or small jackpot result occurs. For example, lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red when a jackpot result or small jackpot result occurs, and may emit light in a neutral or cool color such as green or blue (i.e., a color other than a warm color) when a time-saving result (time-saving pattern) occurs. Furthermore, they are turned off in the event of a miss. Therefore, when a time-saving pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that a jackpot has occurred, and it is easier for the player to understand that they have won the time-saving effect.

In addition, if the number of times the special chart variation display game (excluding the number of times in the special jackpot state) played after the end of the jackpot state reaches a predetermined number (the so-called ceiling number of times, time-saving ceiling), the game will enter a time-saving state (Yu-time) even if it does not win a support jackpot. At this time, if the result of the special chart variation display game is a miss, lamp display units 1 and 2 will be unlit, and if it is a small hit or a jackpot, they will emit warm colors. In addition, at this time, if there is neither a small hit nor a jackpot, lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit cool colors as the fourth symbol to make it easier for the player to recognize that they are entering a time-saving state. The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times. In this case, a miss symbol (which may be a time-saving symbol) or a small hit symbol (if it is a small hit without a V win) will be displayed as the stopping symbol on the special chart display or display device 41, and the game will enter a time-saving state from the next special chart variation display game. In this case, the time-saving symbols displayed on the display device 41 may be, for example, "3, 3, 5" where only the left and center symbols are aligned ("1, 1, 3" may also be used, as in the case of time-saving symbols resulting from a support win).

[Special chart 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special chart 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special chart 1 variable start process will be described. Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, i.e., whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4001). If jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "Y"), it loads a jackpot pattern random number from the special chart 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4002). Next, it sets the special chart 1 jackpot pattern table (A4003), obtains the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot pattern random number, and saves it in the special chart 1 stop pattern number area of the RWM (A4004). This process selects the type of special result.

The game control device 100 then sets the special 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4005), obtains the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is used to set the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 display 51) and the stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, it obtains round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the special symbol 1 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (A4007), and obtains fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the fanfare information area (A4008). This information is used to set the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4009). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not a time reduction state is in effect after the jackpot ends (time reduction or no time reduction), and is used in the special symbol 1 jackpot end processing and special symbol 2 jackpot end processing described below. Next, the game control device 100 saves presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number, symbol A described below) (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 does not indicate a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 optionally determines whether the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (A4011). If the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (the result of A4011 is "Y"), a random number is loaded from the special chart 1 support hit pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4012) and the special chart 1 support hit pattern table is set (A4013). Then, the special chart 1 support hit pattern table is referenced to obtain the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded random number and saved in the special chart 1 stop pattern number area (A4014). Next, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the stop pattern pattern area (A4015). Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4016), and the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is saved (A4017). Then, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 does not indicate a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N") and the support hit flag 1 does not indicate a support hit (the result of A4011 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4018) and saves the loss stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A4019). The game control device then proceeds to processing in step A4020. Note that if the support hit-related processing (A3607-A3609) is not executed during the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and the jackpot flag 1 does not indicate a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A4018 without executing steps A4011-A4017.

After steps A4010, A4017, and A4019, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern and saves the decorative special symbol 1 command as a performance command in the decorative special symbol 1 command area (A4020). Through the above processing, the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game is set.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4021). As a result, the decorative special chart 1 command is sent to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A4022) and clears the special pattern 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A4023). The special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process then ends. Furthermore, the aforementioned pattern variation control process causes the special pattern 1 display 51 to display the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, time-saving pattern, loss pattern, etc.) corresponding to the stop pattern pattern or stop pattern number.

[Special chart 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit, i.e., whether small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A4101). If the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), it loads a jackpot pattern random number from the special chart 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4102). Next, it sets the special chart 2 jackpot pattern table (A4103), obtains the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot pattern random number, and saves it in the special chart 2 stop pattern number area of the RWM (A4104). This process selects the type of special result.

In this embodiment, when a small win occurs, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, causing the game ball to enter a V, and a big win occurs immediately after the small win. Therefore, even if the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win (small win flag 2 is a small win), the big win pattern random number is loaded. However, it is also possible to configure the small win pattern random number (A2911) to be loaded and the stopping pattern number corresponding to the small win pattern random number to be obtained. In this configuration, when a V win occurs (when the result of A3003 in Figure 19 is "Y"), the big win pattern random number may be loaded, the stopping pattern number may be obtained, and the processing from steps A4107 to A4110 may be executed.

The game control device 100 then sets the special 2 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4105), obtains the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is used to set the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special 2 display 52) and the stop symbol on the display device 41. Note that in the case of a small win, the special 2 small win stop symbol information table may be used instead of the special 2 jackpot stop symbol information table. Then, round count upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special 2 round count upper limit information area of the RWM (A4107), and fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the fanfare information area (A4108). This information is used to set the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4109). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not a time reduction state is in effect after the jackpot ends (time reduction or no time reduction), and is used in the special symbol 1 jackpot end processing and special symbol 2 jackpot end processing described below. Next, it saves presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number, symbols B-G described below) (A4010). After that, it proceeds to processing in step A4121.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 does not indicate a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 2 indicates a big hit, i.e., whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A4111). If the big hit flag 2 indicates a big hit (the result of A4111 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4102 and subsequent steps, but a special chart 2 big hit symbol table and special chart 2 big hit stop symbol information table different from those used in the case of a small hit may be used.

If the jackpot flag 2 does not indicate a jackpot (the result of A4111 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (A4112). If the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (the result of A4112 is "Y"), a random number is loaded from the special chart 2 support hit pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4113) and the special chart 2 support hit pattern table is set (A4114). Then, the special chart 2 support hit pattern table is referenced to obtain the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded random number and saved in the special chart 2 stop pattern number area (A4115). Next, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the stop pattern pattern area (A4116), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (A4117). After that, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is saved (A4118), and processing proceeds to step A4121.

If the small win flag 2 does not indicate a small win (the result of A4101 is "N"), the big win flag 2 does not indicate a big win (the result of A4111 is "N"), and the support win flag 2 does not indicate a support win (the result of A4112 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop pattern number at the time of loss in the special chart 2 stop pattern number area (A4119) and saves the loss stop pattern in the stop pattern area (A4120). Then, it proceeds to processing of step A4121.

In this embodiment, since a "jackpot" is not set as the result of the special chart 2 variable display game, the processing of step A4111 is optional and does not need to be executed. In other words, if jackpot flag 2 is not a small jackpot (the result of A4101 is "N"), step A4111 may not be executed and the process may proceed to step A4112.

After steps A4110, A4118, and A4120, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern and saves the decorative special symbol 2 command as a performance command in the decorative special symbol 2 command area (A4121). Through the above processing, the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 2 variable display game is set.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4122). The decorative special chart 2 command is sent to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A4123) and clears the special chart 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A4124). Furthermore, if a small jackpot pattern random number (A2911) is extracted, the special chart 2 small jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) may be cleared to 0. The special chart 2 stop pattern setting process then ends. Furthermore, the aforementioned pattern variation control process causes the special chart 2 display 52 to display the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, time-saving pattern, loss pattern, etc.) corresponding to the stop pattern or stop pattern number.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution means that executes the special chart 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the first start winning port 36, and executes the special chart 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the normal variable winning device 37. The game control device 100 also serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special drawing information setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart information setting process (A3404, A3504) in the special chart 1 variation start process and the special chart 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special chart information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the allocation of variations, but the presentation mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the allocation of variations. One presentation mode is set from multiple presentation modes depending on the probability state, whether or not a time saving state is in effect, the progress of the special chart variation display game, etc. Note that variations may also be directly allocated based on the probability state, whether or not a time saving state is in effect, the progress of the special chart variation display game, etc.

The gaming control device 100 first sets a first half variable group selection pointer table (A4201) and acquires a first half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A4202). Next, it sets a first half variable group selection offset table (A4203) and acquires offset data corresponding to the target special symbol reservation number (special symbol 1 reservation number or special symbol 2 reservation number) and the stopping symbol pattern (A4204).

Next, the gaming control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and offset data (A4205) and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable allocation information 1 area (A4206). As a result, variable allocation information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of reserved symbols, and the presentation mode is saved in the variable allocation information 1 area. This variable allocation information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variable (variation pattern before the start of a reach), and is later used to select a variable group. However, depending on the specifications of the machine, the variable time is shortened only in the case of a miss when there are many reserved symbols, so in cases other than a miss, the number of reserved symbols does not affect the allocation of the first half variable. Note that a variable group contains multiple variable patterns, and when determining a variable pattern, first a variable group is selected, and then one variable pattern is selected from this variable group.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a second-half variable group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires a second-half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A4208). Next, it sets a second-half variable group selection offset table (A4209) and acquires offset data corresponding to the target special reserved number and stopping pattern pattern (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half variable group selection pointer and offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable allocation information 2 area (A4212), and ends the special symbol information setting process. As a result, variable allocation information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of reserved symbols, and the presentation mode is saved in the variable allocation information 2 area. This variable allocation information 2 is a table pointer for allocating second half variables (type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a variable group. However, since the probability of reach occurring changes depending on the number of reserved symbols only in the case of a miss (the probability of reach occurring decreases when the number of reserved symbols is large), in cases other than a miss, the number of reserved symbols does not affect the allocation of second half variables.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special chart 1 fluctuation start process and the special chart 2 fluctuation start process will be described. Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation pattern consists of a first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special chart fluctuation display game until the reach state is reached, and a second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state is reached until the end of the special chart fluctuation display game. The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, followed by the first half fluctuation pattern.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection address table (A4301), obtains and prepares the address of the latter variable group table corresponding to the variable allocation information 2 (A4302), and loads and prepares the variable pattern random number 1 from the target variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the latter variable group table differs for wins and losses. Specifically, the latter variable group table is 1 byte in size for wins and 2 bytes in size for losses. Since the rate of wins is lower than the rate of losses and 1 byte is sufficient, the former is 1 byte in size from the perspective of saving data capacity. Therefore, when a win occurs, only the lower value of the 2-byte variable pattern random number 1 is used. Furthermore, since the rate of losses is higher than the rate of wins and more diverse effects are desired to appear, the latter variable group table is 2 bytes in size.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special chart variable display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), it performs a 2-byte allocation process (A4305) and proceeds to processing in step A4307. If it is not a loss (the result of A4304 is "N"), it performs an allocation process (A4306) and proceeds to processing in step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains and prepares the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the allocation (A4307), and loads and prepares the variation pattern random number 2 from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4308). Then, it executes the allocation process (A4309), obtains the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation, and saves it in the second half variation number area (A4310). This process sets the second half variation pattern.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets a first-half fluctuation group table (A4311) and calculates a table selection pointer based on the fluctuation allocation information 1 and the second-half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, it obtains and prepares the address of the first-half fluctuation selection table (first-half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer (A4313), and loads and prepares fluctuation pattern random number 3 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4314). It then performs a distribution process (A4315), obtains the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution, and saves it in the first-half fluctuation number area (A4316), thereby terminating the fluctuation pattern setting process. This process sets the first-half fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the special chart fluctuation display game is set. In other words, the gaming control device 100 serves as a fluctuation pattern setting means for selecting from multiple fluctuation patterns, which are the game execution modes.

[2-byte allocation process]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variable pattern setting process will be explained. Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte allocation process. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special chart variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variable pattern random number 1.

The gaming control device 100 first checks whether the first data in the selection table (the second half fluctuation group table prepared in A4302) is a code for no allocation (i.e., "0") (A4401). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined allocation value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table. However, in the case of a second half fluctuation group table that specifies only second half fluctuation selection tables whose second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is a miss), no allocation is necessary, so the allocation value "0", i.e., the code for no allocation, is specified at the beginning.

If the first data in the selection table (second half variable group table) is a code without allocation (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address to the data corresponding to the allocation result (A4407) and terminates the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second half variable group table) is not a code without allocation (the result of A4402 is "N"), it obtains the first allocation value specified in the selection table (second half variable group table) (A4403).

Next, the allocation value obtained in step A4403 is subtracted from the random number value prepared in step A4303 (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random number value (A4404), and it is determined whether the newly calculated random number value is less than "0" (A4405). If the new random number value is not less than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address is updated to the next allocation value (A4406), and processing proceeds to step A4403 for subsequent processing. That is, the next allocation value specified in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is obtained (A4403), and then a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the allocation value from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405 (A4404), and it is determined whether the newly calculated random number value is less than "0" (A4405).

The above process is executed until step A4405 determines that the new random number value is less than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). This selects one of the latter half variation selection tables from at least one of the latter half variation selection tables defined in the selection table (later half variation group table). Then, if step A4405 determines that the new random number value is less than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the allocated result is updated (A4407), and the 2-byte allocation process is terminated.

[Allocation process]
Next, details of the allocation process (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be explained. Figure 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the allocation process. The allocation process is a process for selecting a second half fluctuation pattern of the special chart fluctuation display game from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or for selecting a first half fluctuation pattern of the special chart fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table prepared in step A4302, the second half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A4313) is a no-allocation code (i.e., "0") (A4501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, and first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined allocation value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). However, for selection tables that do not require allocation, the allocation value "0", i.e., the no-allocation code, is specified at the beginning.

If the first data in the target selection table (second half variable group table, second half variable selection table, or first half variable selection table) is a code for no allocation (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (A4507) and terminates the allocation process. On the other hand, if the first data in the target selection table (second half variable group table, second half variable selection table, or first half variable selection table) is not a code for no allocation (the result of A4502 is "N"), the game control device 100 obtains the first allocation value specified in the target selection table (second half variable group table, second half variable selection table, or first half variable selection table) (A4503).

Next, the game control device 100 subtracts the allocation value obtained in step A4503 from the random number values (values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 to calculate a new random number value (A4504), and determines whether the new calculated random number value is less than "0" (A4505). If the new random number value is not less than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), it updates the address to the next allocation value (A4506), and then proceeds to processing in step A4503 to carry out subsequent processing.

That is, the allocation value next specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table) is obtained (A4503), and then a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the allocation value from the random number value determined in the previous step A4505 (A4504), and it is determined whether the newly calculated random number value is less than "0" (A4505). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is less than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table).

Then, in step A4505, if the game control device 100 determines that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocated result (A4507) and terminates the allocation process.

[Variable start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special chart 1 fluctuation start process and the special chart 2 fluctuation start process will be described. Figure 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the variable display game to be started is a special chart 2 variable display game (A4600a). If the variable display game to be started is not a special chart 2 variable display game but a special chart 1 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), it clears the random number storage area for the target variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, it sets a first half variable time value table (A4602) and obtains the first half variable time value corresponding to the first half variable number (A4603). Furthermore, it sets a second half variable time value table (A4604) and obtains the second half variable time value corresponding to the second half variable number (A4605).

The game control device 100 then adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606) and saves the added value (total fluctuation time value) in the special symbol game processing timer area (A4607). After that, it prepares a fluctuation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A4608), prepares a fluctuation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half fluctuation number as a presentation command (A4609), and performs presentation command setting processing (A4610). Next, it updates the special symbol reserve number corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag indicating the symbol of the starting fluctuation (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) by -1 (A4611), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag (A4612). Next, it shifts the random number storage area (A4613), clears the free space after the shift (A4614), and terminates the fluctuation start information setting processing.

When the variable display game to be started is the special chart 2 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "Y"), the game control device 100 first determines whether the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (A4600b). When the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (the result of A4600b is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A4601 onwards, just as when the variable display game to be started is the special chart 1 variable display game. Note that, unlike this embodiment, the configuration may also execute the processing from step A4601 onwards even when the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a support win.

If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is neither a small win nor a big win (the result of A4600b is "N"), i.e., if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a miss, the game control device 100 saves the variable time value (total variable time value) corresponding to the number of special chart 2 variations (number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed) after the big win ends in the special chart game processing timer area (A4615).

Therefore, the variable time value of the special chart 1 variable display game and the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the event of a small hit or a big hit are time values that are set by allocation (lottery) and are not fixed, while the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the event of a miss is a fixed time value that is set for each number of special chart 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit. In other words, the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game is controlled by the number of spins. It is also possible to configure the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the event of a small hit or a big hit to be a fixed time value.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation time value as a presentation command (A4616) and executes processing from step A4610 onwards.

In addition, when the support state (support state, normal power release pattern) related to the mode (content) of normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below, the fluctuation time value may be set not only according to the number of times Special Chart 2 fluctuates after the end of a jackpot, but also according to the support state.

The above processing sets information related to the start of the special symbol variable display game. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a judgment means for judging various random number values stored in the start memory means (game control device 100). The game control device 100 also serves as a variation pattern determination means that can determine the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game based on the judgment information in the start memory.

Information relating to the start of these special symbol variation display games is then later transmitted to the performance control device 300, which, based on the information received regarding the start of the special symbol variation display game, sets detailed performance content for the decorative special symbol variation display game in accordance with the determined variation pattern. Information relating to the start of these special symbol variation display games includes a decorative special symbol reserve number command containing information regarding the start memory number (reserved number), a decorative special symbol command containing information regarding the stop symbol, and a variation command containing information regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display game, and the commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special symbol command before the variation command, processing in the performance control device 300 can be carried out more efficiently.

[Special chart change processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation process (A2609) in the special symbol game process will be described. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether special symbol 2 is currently changing (the special symbol 2 change display game is running) (A4801). If special symbol 2 is not currently changing, that is, if special symbol 1 is currently changing (the special symbol 1 change display game is running) (the result of A4801 is "N"), it sets the display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (A4802).

On the other hand, if the special chart 2 is changing (the result of A4801 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special chart 2 change display game is a small win or a big win (A4803). If the result of the special chart 2 change display game is a small win or a big win (the result of A4803 is "Y"), it sets a display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (A4802). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stopped symbol (stop display), which is the result of the change display game. Note that, unlike this embodiment, the configuration may proceed to processing in step A4802 even if the result of the special chart 2 change display game is a support win.

If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is neither a small win nor a big win, i.e., if it is a miss (the result of A4803 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the number of special chart 2 variations (the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed) after the big win ends (A4804).

Therefore, the display time of the special chart 1 variable display game and the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the event of a small win or a big win are not fixed times based on the stopping symbol pattern set by lottery, while the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the event of a loss is set to a fixed time for each number of special chart 2 changes (number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed) after the end of a big win. It is also possible to configure the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the event of a small win or a big win to be set to a fixed time.

In addition, as described below, if the support state (support state, normal power release pattern) related to the mode (content) of normal power support is variable, the display time (stop display time) may be set not only according to the number of times Special Chart 2 changes after the end of a jackpot, but also according to the support state.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the display time set in step A4802 or A4804 in the special chart game processing timer area (A4805). Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether normal power support is in progress (time-saving mode) (A4806). If normal power support is not in progress (the result of A4806 is "N"), it proceeds to processing of step A4813. If normal power support is in progress (the result of A4806 is "Y"), it determines whether the special chart 1 variable display game has changed (A4807). If the special chart 1 variable display game has changed (the result of A4807 is "Y"), it proceeds to processing of step A4810.

If the change is in the special chart 2 change display game (the result of A4807 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the time-shortening change count 2 by -1 (decreases it by 1) (A4808) and determines whether the time-shortening change count 2 is 0 (A4809). If the time-shortening change count 2 is 0 (the result of A4809 is "Y"), it executes a time-shortening end setting process to set the end of the time-shortening (A4812).

If the time reduction variation count 2 is not 0 (the result of A4809 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the time reduction variation count 1 by -1 (decreases it by 1) (A4810) and determines whether the time reduction variation count 1 is 0 (A4811). If the time reduction variation count 1 is not 0 (the result of A4811 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A4813. On the other hand, if the time reduction variation count 1 is 0 (the result of A4811 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a time reduction end setting process to set the end of the time reduction (A4812). Then, the game control device 100 executes the presentation mode information check process described below (A4813).

Then, the game control device 100 executes the process transition setting process during special chart display (A4814). In the process transition setting process during special chart display, the process number "2" related to the process during special chart display is set and the process number is saved in the special chart game process number area, the stop flag related to the stop of fluctuation on the special chart 1 display 51 is saved in the special chart 1 fluctuation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the stop of fluctuation on the special chart 2 display 52 is saved in the special chart 2 fluctuation control flag area. Then, the process during special chart fluctuation is terminated.

[Time-saving end setting process]
Next, the details of the time-saving end setting process (A4812) in the special chart change process will be described. Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time-saving end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the time-saving function in the external information output data area of the RWM (A4901). Here, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving function is the off data of the jackpot 2 signal. As a result, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving function is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71.

In addition, during normal game play, because the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 is very short or the probability of winning the normal chart variable display game is very low, there is no winning in the normal variable winning device 37 and the second start memory is not generated. For this reason, if the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory, special chart 2 reserve) remains as a remaining reserve at the time the time-saving feature ends, the output of ON data for the jackpot 2 signal can continue (no inconvenience will arise even if this is done), and when the variable display of the special chart variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops, the output of OFF data for the jackpot 2 signal (a signal related to the end of the time-saving feature) can be output to an external device.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal indicating the end of the time-saving feature in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4902). This outputs the signal indicating the end of the time-saving feature as a test signal to the test firing device. Examples of signals indicating the end of the time-saving feature include: off data for the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal; off data for the special symbol 2 variable time shortening state signal; off data for the normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal; off data for the normal electric device 1 extended opening state signal; and off data for the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. The game control device 100 then saves a no-time-saving feature number in the game status display number area of the RWM (A4903), saves a normal symbol low probability & no-time-saving feature flag in the normal symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (A4904), and saves a special symbol low probability & no-time-saving feature flag in the special symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (A4905).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation count 1 area of the RWM where time reduction variation count 1 is stored (A4906), and clears the time reduction variation count 2 area of the RWM where time reduction variation count 2 is stored (A4907). It then saves a signal related to the left-hit instruction in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4908), and saves the number in the left-hit state in the game status display number 2 area of the RWM (A4909).

Then, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area of the RWM (A4910). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating the normal gaming state, which is the period for calculating the base value (the payout rate in normal gaming state). Then, the time-saving end setting process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the time-saving end setting process, it is possible to appropriately transition from the time-saving state (a state with a low probability of special symbols and normal power support) to the normal game state (a state with a low probability of special symbols and no normal power support).

[Performance mode information check process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode information check process (A4813) in the special chart change process will be described. Fig. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the presentation mode information check process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5001). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the presentation mode information check process ends. In this case, the presentation mode is not changed according to the number of special chart variable display games that have been played, and for example, a presentation mode that continues until the next jackpot has been selected.

Furthermore, if the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the remaining number of spins for the special symbol variable display game, which is the number of times the game can be played before the presentation mode is changed, by -1 (A5002), and determines whether the remaining number of spins for the special symbol variable display game has reached 0 (A5003). Here, the remaining number of spins for the special symbol variable display game is updated by -1 only if the game played this time is the main special symbol variable display game, but it can also be configured to update by -1 if it is a non-main variable display game.

Depending on the game status, etc., one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game is designated as the main variable display game. For example, the main variable display game (main variable display game) is the one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game that is executed more frequently, and the non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is the one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game that is executed less frequently. The game control device 100 and/or the presentation control device 300 may store information indicating the main variable display game (special chart 1 or special chart 2) depending on the game status, etc.

If the number of remaining spins for the effect is not 0 (the result of A5003 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the number of remaining spins for the effect is 0 (the result of A5003 is "Y"), i.e., if the effect mode will be changed from the next special chart change display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5004) and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode change information is obtained (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the presentation mode number of the presentation mode to be transitioned to and saves it in the presentation mode number area in the RWM (A5006), acquires the remaining number of presentation rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be transitioned to and saves it in the remaining number of presentation rotations area in the RWM (A5007), acquires the next mode transition information of the presentation mode to be transitioned to and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5008).

When the presentation mode is changed upon the end of the time-saving state (time-saving variation count 1 or 2 = 0), the remaining number of presentation spins (initial value) for the presentation mode to be changed to may be set to a specified remaining reserve number (for example, 4 to 9). The remaining reserve number is the number of special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) that will be consumed after the time-saving state ends, and is the number of special chart 2 variations after the time-saving state ends. Remaining reserves are generated by winning the normal variation winning device 37, which is opened by a normal chart win during the time-saving state. In this way, the remaining reserve consumption mode (Fig. 54) can be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of remaining reserves (special chart 2 reserves, special chart 2 start memory).

Alternatively, when the presentation mode is switched upon completion of the opening of the normal variable prize winning device 37, which is opened by a normal win during the time-saving state (corresponding to the later opening described below), the number of remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation mode to be switched to may be set to the number of reserved special prize winning devices 2 at that time. This allows the normal power release end mode (Fig. 71A) to be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of reserved special prize winning devices 2 after completion of the opening of the normal variable prize winning device 37, which is opened by a normal win during the time-saving state. Furthermore, in this case, the remaining spins (initial value) of the presentation mode to be switched to upon completion of the time-saving state (time-saving variable number 1 or 2 = 0) can be set to a predetermined value corresponding to the number of time-saving times (for example, 6 minus the number of time-saving times), to set the mode before the normal power release end mode (Fig. 71A).

Furthermore, when switching presentation modes upon the end of the time-saving state (time-saving fluctuation count 1 or 2 = 0), the number of remaining presentation spins (initial value) of the presentation mode to be transitioned to may be set to the number of special chart 2 reserved at that time, or a predetermined number less than the number of special chart 2 reserved. In this way, the time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode (Fig. 71B) can be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the number of special chart 2 reserved at the end of the time-saving state, or while the predetermined number of remaining reserves (special chart 2 reserve, special chart 2 start memory) are consumed. The number of remaining presentation spins (initial value) of the presentation mode to be transitioned to after the time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode can be set to the specified number of remaining reserves (e.g., 10) minus the number of remaining reserves consumed in the time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode (excess reserve number). In this way, the excess reserve consumption mode (Fig. 71B) can be set as the presentation mode after the time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode.

The game control device 100 then prepares a probability information command (including information on the probability state, information on whether time-saving is enabled, and information on the presentation mode) corresponding to the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (A5009), and determines whether the prepared probability information command matches the value in the command area to be sent when power is restored (A5010). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the command area to be sent when power is restored (the result of A5010 is "Y"), i.e., if the probability information command has not changed, the presentation mode information check process ends.

Furthermore, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the command area to be sent when power is restored (the result of A5010 is "N"), the prepared probability information command is saved in the command area to be sent when power is restored (A5011), and a performance command setting process is executed to set the probability information command as a performance command (A5012).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation count command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for presentation as a presentation command (A5013), and executes a presentation command setting process (A5014). This allows the presentation control device 300 to obtain the remaining number of rotations for presentation. Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to time reduction variation count 2 is prepared as a presentation command (A5015), and executes a presentation command setting process (A5016). This allows the presentation control device 300 to obtain time reduction variation count 2. Note that the game control device 100 may also prepare time reduction variation count 1 as a presentation command and execute the presentation command setting process.

Next, when a new presentation mode number is acquired in step A5006, the game control device 100 determines whether the new presentation mode is a left-hit mode (A5017), and if it is not a left-hit mode (the result of A5017 is "N"), it terminates the presentation mode information check process. Also, if it is a left-hit mode (the result of A5017 is "Y"), it prepares a left-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A5018), executes the presentation command setting process (A5019), and terminates the presentation mode information check process.

In addition, in the above, regardless of the determination result (A5003) of whether the remaining number of spins for the effect is 0 or not, the effect rotation count command corresponding to the updated remaining number of spins for the effect (A5002) and the time reduction variation count command corresponding to the updated time reduction variation counts 1 and 2 (A4808, A4810) may also be prepared as effect commands, and the effect command setting process may be executed.

[Processing during special chart display]
Next, the details of the special chart display process (A2610) in the special chart game process will be described. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart display process. Figure 36A shows the first half of the special chart display process, and Figure 36B shows the second half of the special chart display process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the current execution is a variation of special symbol 1 (A5101). That is, it determines whether the display of the stopped symbol (stop display) is related to the special symbol 1 variation display game. If the current execution is a variation of special symbol 1 (the result of A5101 is "Y"), it loads jackpot flag 1 (A5102), clears the jackpot flag 1 area (A5103), and determines whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A5104).

If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A5104 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating in the condition device operation information area (A5105) and proceeds to processing of step A5106. If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A5104 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing of step A5111.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the special chart normal processing transition setting process (A5106). In the special chart normal processing transition setting process, the processing number for the special chart normal processing is set to 0, the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared. After that, the special chart display processing ends.

On the other hand, if the current execution is a variation of special chart 2 (the result of A5101 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads jackpot flag 2 (A5107) and clears the jackpot flag 2 area (A5108). It determines whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A5109). If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A5109 is "Y"), it saves condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating in the condition device operation information area (A5110), and proceeds to processing of step A5106. If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A5109 is "N"), that is, if it is a small jackpot or a miss, it proceeds to processing of step A5111.

In this embodiment, since there is no "jackpot" as a result of the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game, the processing of steps A5107 to A5110 is optional and does not need to be executed. In other words, after step A5101, the processing may proceed to step A5111.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the special chart is currently in a high probability state (in a special chance state) (A5111). If the special chart is not in a high probability state (the result of A5111 is "N"), it determines whether there is a ceiling-reached flag indicating that the number of times the special chart change display game has been played has reached the ceiling number of times (time-saving ceiling) (A5112).

If there is no ceiling-reached flag (the result of A5112 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area of the RWM by +1 (increases it by 1) (A5113). Then, it determines whether the number of times (i.e., the ceiling counter value) that the special chart variable display game (including the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game) has been executed in a state other than the special variable state has reached the ceiling number of times (A5114). For example, the ceiling number of times is 500 times. If the ceiling number of times has been reached (the result of A5114 is "Y"), it sets (on) a ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating that a ceiling time-saving will occur and a ceiling-reached flag indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached (A5115). Note that it is also possible to combine the ceiling time-saving activation flag and the ceiling-reached flag into a single flag.

The ceiling reached flag is cleared when a jackpot occurs, but is not cleared unless a jackpot occurs. Therefore, if the ceiling number of plays is reached and the time-saving number of plays ends without a jackpot, the ceiling reached flag will remain set (on), meaning that no further ceiling time-saving will occur and the ceiling counter value will not be updated.

On the other hand, if the special chart has a high probability of winning (in a special chance state) (the result of A5111 is "Y"), if there is a ceiling-reached flag (the result of A5112 is "Y"), or if the ceiling count has not been reached (the result of A5114 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small win flag 2 indicates a small win (A5116).

Next, if the small win flag 2 indicates a small win (the result of A5116 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a small win fanfare command as a presentation command (A5117) and executes the presentation command setting process (A5118). Then, it loads and prepares the decorative special chart 2 command from the decorative special chart 2 command area as a presentation command (A5119) and executes the presentation command setting process (A5120). After that, it executes the small win release pre-processing transition setting process (A5121) and ends the processing during special chart display.

In the small win release pre-processing transition setting process, 3 is set as the processing number for the small win release pre-processing, the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area, and the time before the small win release (e.g., 300 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area. In addition, a signal related to the start of small win play (e.g., turning on the big win 1 signal (output on big win or small win)) is saved in the external information output data area.

On the other hand, if the small win flag 2 is not a small win, i.e., if it is a miss (the result of A5116 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating that a ceiling time-saving state will occur (A5122). If there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag (the result of A5122 is "Y"), the initial values for the ceiling time-saving count (the number of times time-saving is achieved by ceiling time-saving) are saved in the time-saving fluctuation count 1 area and the time-saving fluctuation count 2 area (A5123). The initial values for time-saving fluctuation count 1 and time-saving fluctuation count 2 in the case of ceiling time-saving, as mentioned above (for example, 704 times and 700 times), are saved here. The initial values may be determined by lottery. Next, a support activation setting process is executed to activate the time-saving state by ceiling time-saving (A5127), a special chart normal processing transition setting process is executed (A5128), and the special chart display processing is terminated. During the special chart normal processing transition setting process, the processing number for special chart normal processing is set to "0" and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that ceiling time reduction will occur (the result of A5122 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (A5124). If the support hit flag 2 does not indicate a support hit (the result of A5124 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (A5125).

If either Support Hit Flag 1 or Support Hit Flag 2 indicates a support hit (the result of A5124 or A5125 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the initial values corresponding to the time reduction judgment data in the Time Reduction Variation Count 1 area and the Time Reduction Variation Count 2 area (A5126). The initial values of Time Reduction Variation Count 1 and Time Reduction Variation Count 2 in the case of a support hit result (sudden time reduction) as described above (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 104 times and 100 times) are saved here. Next, the support activation setting process is executed to generate a time reduction state (sudden time reduction) using the time reduction symbol (A5127), the special symbol normal processing transition setting process is executed (A5128), and the special symbol display processing is terminated.

In addition, since the time reduction determination data is set corresponding to the stop pattern number in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) and special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503), the initial value (i.e., the number of time reductions) in the case of a support hit result is determined by lottery using the support hit pattern random number.

If both support hit flag 1 and support hit flag 2 are not support hits (the results of A5124 and A5125 are "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the support activation setting process to set the time reduction, but executes the special chart normal processing transition setting process (A5128), and ends the special chart display processing.

As described above, during the special chart display process, settings for time reduction are made, such as setting the number of time reductions (i.e., the initial value for the number of time reduction fluctuations) for ceiling time reductions and sudden time reductions. Furthermore, for time reductions due to a jackpot, i.e., time reductions that begin when the jackpot state ends, settings for time reductions, such as setting the number of time reductions, are made during the jackpot end process.

Incidentally, the processing during special chart display is executed when the special chart game processing timer, to which the stop display time (A4805) is set, reaches 0 (A2604, A2610), and is therefore executed when the display of the stop result of the special chart variation display game ends (or when it ends: including when it ends or just before it ends). Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special chart variation display game ends (approximately the same as when the next special chart variation display game starts, if one is to start), the number of time-shortening variations (A5123, A5126) is set, and the time-shortening state due to the ceiling time-shortening and sudden time-shortening begins.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, the details of the support operation setting process (A5127) in the special chart display process will be described. Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the support operation setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of time-saving in the external information output data area (A5301). As a result, when ceiling time-saving is initiated due to reaching the ceiling number of times or when sudden time-saving is initiated due to a time-saving symbol (support hit), the signal related to the start of time-saving is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and ultimately to an external device (such as a hall computer). Here, the signal related to the start of time-saving is the on data of the jackpot 2 signal. Then, the game control device 100 saves a timer initial value (e.g., 128 msec) in the time-saving signal control timer area (A5302). This timer initial value becomes the time for outputting the jackpot 3 signal by the external information editing process described below.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area (A5303). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction start, a signal related to the start of time reduction is output as a test signal to the test firing device. The signals related to the start of time reduction here are, for example, on data for the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, on data for the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, on data for the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, on data for the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and on data for the normal electric device 1 extended opening state signal. Then, a time reduction number is saved in the game status display number area (A5304), a normal symbol high probability & time reduction flag is saved in the normal symbol game mode flag area (A5305), and the special symbol time reduction flag is combined with the special symbol game mode flag area (A5306). Next, a signal related to the right-hit instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5307), and the number in the right-hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5308).

The game control device 100 then sets a presentation mode information address table corresponding to the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction (A5309), obtains the address of the table corresponding to the presentation mode transition information set in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503) (A5310), and obtains and saves the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode based on the table (A5311). This allows the presentation mode to be transitioned to when the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction starts to be selected.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains and saves the number of remaining spins (initial value) for the presentation mode based on the table (A5312). For example, the number of remaining spins (initial value) for the presentation mode is the number of time-saving cycles (initial value of time-saving variation count 1 or time-saving variation count 2). This allows the same presentation mode to continue until the time-saving cycle ends, for example.

Next, the gaming control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about the transition from the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving presentation mode to the next mode, based on a table (A5313). Then, it prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag and the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (A5314), saves the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A5315), and executes a presentation command setting process to set the probability information command as a presentation command (A5316). Here, the probability information command includes information about the probability state, whether or not time-saving (normal power support) is enabled, and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation count command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for the presentation as a presentation command (A5317) and executes the presentation command setting process (A5318). Then, it prepares a time reduction variation count command corresponding to each of time reduction variation count 1 and time reduction variation count 2 (here, the initial value of the time reduction count) as a presentation command (A5319) and executes the presentation command setting process (A5320).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction determination data area (A5321), clears the presentation mode transition information area (A5322), and ends the support activation setting process. It may also clear the ceiling time reduction activation flag area, in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored, because the ceiling time reduction has been activated.

[Gem game processing]
Next, the details of the bonus game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the bonus game process. In the bonus game process, the entire process related to the jackpot state is controlled.

The game control device 100 first executes the lower large prize opening switch monitoring process (A5601). The lower large prize opening switch monitoring process monitors the detection of game balls by the count switch 38a provided in the special variable prize opening device 38.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the bonus game processing timer by -1 (subtracts 1) if it is not 0 (A5602). By updating by -1, the bonus game processing timer will count only the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. The minimum value of the bonus game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the bonus game processing timer is 0 (A5603). If the bonus game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A5603 is "N"), the bonus game processing is terminated.

If the bonus game processing timer is 0 (the result of A5603 is "Y"), i.e., if the timer is up or has already timed out, the game control device 100 sets in a register a bonus game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to the processing corresponding to the bonus game processing number (A5604). Furthermore, the bonus game sequence branch table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the bonus game processing number (A5605). Next, a subroutine call is made using the bonus game processing number, and game branch processing corresponding to the bonus game processing number is executed (A5606).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A5606, the game control device 100 executes normal reel processing, which performs settings such as those for when a jackpot starts (A5607). For example, in the normal reel processing, the processing number "1" related to fanfare processing is set in a predetermined case and saved in the reel game processing number area. Details of the normal reel processing will be described later in Figure 39.

If the game processing number is "1" in step A5606, the game control device 100 executes fanfare processing (A5608). For example, in fanfare processing, the processing number for interval processing is set to "2" and saved in the bonus game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step A5606, the game control device 100 executes interval processing (A5609). For example, the interval processing updates the number of rounds by +1, saves the lower large prize opening time in the special feature game processing timer area, saves on data in the lower large prize opening solenoid output data area, sets the round command as a presentation command, and sets the processing number "3" for the jackpot opening processing to save it in the special feature game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A5606, the game control device 100 executes jackpot opening processing (A5610), which sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, or an ending command if it is the final round, and sets information necessary for jackpot remaining ball processing. For example, in the jackpot opening processing, necessary information such as an interval command and ending command is set, and processing number "4" for jackpot remaining ball processing is set and saved in the bonus game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A5606, the game control device 100 executes remaining jackpot ball processing (A5611), which sets the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot opening to be ejected if the jackpot round is the final round, and sets the information necessary for jackpot termination processing. For example, in the remaining jackpot ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the bonus game processing timer area, and processing number "2" for the interval processing is set and saved in the bonus game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the bonus game processing timer area, and processing number "5" for the jackpot termination processing is set and saved in the bonus game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A5606, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process (A5612) that sets the information necessary to execute normal reel processing. For example, in the jackpot end process, necessary information such as the normal power support state (time-saving state) after the jackpot state ends is set based on the time-saving determination data, which includes information on whether or not a time-saving state is in effect after the jackpot ends (time-saving or not), and the processing number for normal reel processing is set to "0" and saved in the reel game processing number area.

[Normal processing of accessories]
Next, the details of the normal feature processing (A5607) in the above-mentioned feature game processing will be explained. Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal feature processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the condition device is in operation (A5801). If the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004, A5005, A5010), that is, if there is jackpot information in jackpot flag 1 or jackpot flag 2, or if there is a win in specific area 86 (V winning slot) (input to specific area switch 72, V win), it can be determined that the condition device is in operation. If the condition device is not in operation (the result of A5801 is "N"), the normal reel processing ends.

When the condition device is operating (the result of A5801 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value area (A5802). Next, it saves the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round LED output pointer area (A5803), prepares a probability information command (normal) as a presentation command (A5804), and executes the presentation command setting process (A5805).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as a presentation command (A5806) and executes the presentation command setting process (A5807). Then, it loads a decorative special symbol command (decorative special symbol 1 command or decorative special symbol 2 command) from the decorative special symbol command area of the special symbol that resulted in the current big win or small win, prepares it as a presentation command (A5808), and executes the presentation command setting process (A5809).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the conditional device operation information in the external information output data area (A5810), and saves a signal corresponding to the conditional device operation information in the test signal output data area (A5811). It then saves an initial value in the number of rounds area (A5812). The initial value is 0 if the conditional device is operating due to jackpot information, and 1 if the conditional device is operating due to a win in the specific area 86 (V win).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the fanfare processing transition setting process (A5813) and ends the normal reel processing. For example, in the fanfare processing transition setting process, the processing number for the fanfare processing is set to "1" and saved in the reel game processing number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the reel game processing timer area.

During the fanfare processing transition setting process, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation count 1 area where time reduction variation count 1 is stored, the time reduction variation count 2 area where time reduction variation count 2 is stored, the ceiling counter area where the ceiling counter value is stored, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area where the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored, and the ceiling reached flag area where the ceiling reached flag is stored. It also saves the normal low probability & no time reduction flag in the normal game mode flag area, and the special game mode flag area where the special probability & no time reduction flag is saved. The ceiling counter area where the ceiling counter value, which indicates the number of times the special game variation display game has been executed in a state other than the special probability state, is cleared here when a jackpot occurs, but as mentioned above, it does not need to be cleared when a normal power outage is restored (RAM initialization switch 112 is not on).

Furthermore, during the fanfare processing transition setting process, the game control device 100 saves signals related to the start of a jackpot (special game state) (for example, turning on the jackpot 1 signal (output for a jackpot or small jackpot), turning on the jackpot 4 signal (output for a jackpot)) in the external information output data area. It also saves signals related to the end of the high probability state and time-saving state (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, turning off the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal, turning off the special symbol 2 variable time shortening state signal, turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, turning off the normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal, and turning off the normal electric device 1 extended opening state signal) in the test signal output data area.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (A5612) in the bonus game process will be explained. Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the time-shortening determination data (A4009, A4109) indicates time-shortening data (A6001). Data indicating time-shortening indicates that the time-shortening state (normal power support state) will be entered after the jackpot state ends. Data indicating no time-shortening indicates that the time-shortening state (normal power support state) will not be entered after the jackpot state ends.

When the time reduction determination data indicates no time reduction, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting process 1 to transition to a normal game state after the jackpot ends (A6002). When the time reduction determination data indicates time reduction, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting process 2 to transition to a time reduction state (normal power support state) after the jackpot ends (A6003).

The game control device 100 sets a presentation mode information address table (A6004), obtains the address of the table corresponding to the presentation mode transition information (A4010, A4110) set in the stop 1 symbol setting process or stop 2 symbol setting process (A6005), and obtains and saves the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode to be set after the jackpot state ends (A6006). This allows the selection of the presentation mode to transition to after the jackpot ends.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of remaining spins (initial value) for the presentation mode that will be set after the special game state ends (A6007). For example, the number of remaining spins (initial value) for the presentation is the number of time-saving cycles (initial value for the number of time-saving cycles), or the total number of time-saving cycles and the specified number of remaining reserves (e.g., 10 times). This allows the same presentation mode to continue after a jackpot ends, for example, until the time-saving cycle ends, or until all of the special chart 2 variable display games related to the remaining reserves have been executed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about the transition from the presentation mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state to the next mode (A6009). Then, it prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag and the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (A6009), saves the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A6010), and executes a presentation command setting process to set the probability information command as a presentation command (A6011). Here, the probability information command includes information about the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, whether or not time reduction (normal power support) is enabled, and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation count command corresponding to the number of remaining rotations for the presentation as a presentation command (A6012) and executes a presentation command setting process (A6013). Then, it prepares a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the number of time reduction variations (here, the initial value for the number of time reduction variations, for example, 5 or less or 99) as a presentation command (A6014) and executes a presentation command setting process (A6015).

The game control device 100 then clears the presentation mode transition information area (A6016), executes the normal reel processing transition setting process (A6017), and ends the jackpot end process. In the normal reel processing transition setting process, in order to transition to normal reel processing, the process number for normal reel processing is set to "0", the process number is saved in the reel game processing number area, the condition device operation information area is cleared, and the time reduction judgment data area is cleared.

[Jackpot End Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in the jackpot end process will be explained. Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6201), and then saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6202). For example, as external information to be output to an external device via the external information terminal 71, off data for the jackpot 1 signal, off data for the jackpot 2 signal, off data for the jackpot 3 signal, and off data for the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Since jackpot end setting process 1 is a process for when there is no time reduction after the end of the jackpot state, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off. The normal number is saved in the game status display number 2 area as display data for the second game status display unit 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6204), saves a special game mode flag without time reduction in the special game mode flag area (A6205), clears the time reduction variation count area (A6206), saves the number in the left-hit state in the game state display number 1 area as display data for the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D7) of the collective display device 50 (A6207), and ends the jackpot end setting process 1.

[Jackpot End Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6003) in the jackpot end process will be explained. Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6401), and then saves the signal related to the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6402). For example, as external information to be output to an external device via the external information terminal 71, off data for the jackpot 1 signal, off data for the jackpot 3 signal, and off data for the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal related to the start of time-saving is saved in the external information output data area (A6403), and a signal related to the start of time-saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6404). Since jackpot end setting process 2 is a process for entering the time-saving state (normal power support state) after the end of the jackpot state, on data for the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area as a signal related to the start of time-saving. (In this embodiment, the jackpot 2 signal is output during the jackpot state, so the on state of the jackpot 2 signal continues.)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number during time-saving in the game status display number 2 area as display data for the second game status display unit 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6405), saves a high probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6406), and saves a special time-saving flag in the special game mode flag area (A6407).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game has resulted in a jackpot after the time-saving period has ended, i.e., whether the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game related to the remaining reserve has resulted in a jackpot (A6408). If the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game has resulted in a jackpot or if the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game has resulted in a jackpot during the time-saving period (the result of A6408 is "N"), the time-saving variable display count initial value (time-saving count) corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number, symbols A-F described below) is saved in the time-saving variable count area (A6409), and processing from step A6411 onwards is executed. Here, the time-saving variable display count initial value (time-saving count) becomes the initial value for time-saving variable display count 2 (the first predetermined number described below). Note that in step A6409, in addition to the time-saving variable display count initial value (time-saving count) for time-saving variable display count 2, the initial value for time-saving variable display count 1 (the second predetermined number described below) is also saved. For example, the initial value of Time Reduction Change Count 1 may be the initial value of Time Reduction Change Count 2 plus the maximum value (e.g., 4) of the Special Chart 1 Reserve Count (first start memory count).

If the special symbol 2 variable display game results in a jackpot after the time-saving period ends, i.e., if the special symbol 2 variable display game related to the remaining reserve results in a jackpot (the result of A6408 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the time-saving variable count initial value (time-saving count, here 99) in the time-saving variable count area (A6410). Here, the time-saving variable count initial value (time-saving count) becomes the initial value for time-saving variable count 2 (the first predetermined count described below). Note that in step A6410, in addition to the time-saving variable count initial value (time-saving count) for time-saving variable count 2, the game control device 100 also saves the initial value for time-saving variable count 1 (the second predetermined count described below). For example, the initial value for time-saving variable count 1 may be the initial value for time-saving variable count 2 plus the maximum value (e.g., 4) of the special symbol 1 reserved count (first start memory count).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the type of support state (support state, normal power release pattern), which is the state (state) of normal power support, in the support state area corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbols A-G described below) (A6411). Note that the processing of step A6411 is optional and is executed when the support state related to the state (content) of normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number in the right-hit state in the game state display number 1 area as display data for the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D7) of the collective display device 50 (A6412), prepares a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A6413), executes the presentation command setting process (A6414), and ends the jackpot end setting process 2.

[General game processing]
Next, the details of the normal map game processing (A1312) in the timer interrupt processing will be explained. Figure 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal map game processing. The normal map game processing monitors the input of the gate switch 34a, controls the overall processing related to the normal map variable display game, sets the display of the normal map, etc.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process to monitor input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process that monitors input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602). Details of the normal power winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, if the normal game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to 0. The game control device 100 then determines whether the value of the normal game processing timer has reached 0 (A7604).

If the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), i.e., if the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets in a register the normal game sequence branch table to be referenced in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal game processing number (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 obtains the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal game processing number based on the set normal game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, it makes a subroutine call using the normal game processing number and executes the game branch processing corresponding to the normal game processing number (A7607).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation in the normal map fluctuation display game, and executes normal map normal processing (A7608), which sets the start of fluctuation in the normal map fluctuation display game, sets the presentation, and sets the information necessary to perform normal map fluctuation processing. Details of the normal map normal processing will be described later.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal map change processing (A7609), which sets the information necessary to perform the normal map display processing. For example, in the normal map change processing, in order to transition to the normal map display processing, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal map display processing (A7610) to set the normal power release time and set the information necessary to perform normal map win processing if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win. For example, in the normal map display processing, if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win, the game processing number is set to "3" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map win processing, while if the result is a loss, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map normal processing.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the normal winning processing or executes normal winning processing to set information necessary for normal remaining ball processing (A7611). For example, in the normal winning processing, after making settings to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, the game processing number is set to "4" and saved in the normal game processing number area in order to transition to normal remaining ball processing.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal power remaining ball process (A7612), which sets the information necessary to perform the normal power end process. For example, in the normal power remaining ball process, in order to transition to the normal power end process, the game processing number is set to "5" and saved in the normal power game processing number area, and the normal power ending time is saved in the normal power game processing timer area.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal win termination process (A7613) that sets the information necessary to perform normal map normal processing (A7608). For example, in the normal win termination process, in order to transition to normal map normal processing, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal map game processing number area.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 53 (A7614). Then, it executes a symbol fluctuation control process for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) by the normal symbol display device 53 (A7615), and ends the normal symbol game process.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), i.e., if the timer has not yet expired, the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A7614 onwards.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "Y"), it determines whether the game state is for right-hitting (A7702). The game state for right-hitting is the jackpot state or the time-saving state (normal power support state). If the game state is for right-hitting (the result of A7702 is "Y"), it proceeds to processing in step A7705. If the game state is not for right-hitting (the result of A7702 is "N"), it prepares a left-hit instruction notification command (left-hit instruction command) as a presentation command (A7703) and executes presentation command setting processing (A7704). Upon receiving the left-hit instruction notification command, the presentation control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing left-hitting on the display device 41, etc., by displaying a left-hit instruction.

Next, the gaming control device 100 obtains the number of reserved normal maps and determines whether the number is less than the upper limit (1 in this embodiment) (A7705). If the number of reserved normal maps is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the normal map fluctuation display game is fluctuating (running) or in a normal map winning state (A7706). If the normal map fluctuation display game is not fluctuating or in a normal map winning state (the result of A7706 is "N"), the number of reserved normal maps is updated by +1 (A7707). In this way, the number of reserved normal maps is updated by +1 only when the normal map fluctuation display game is not fluctuating or in a normal map winning state, and as soon as it is updated by +1, the reserved normal maps are consumed, so the reserved normal maps do not actually accumulate and only momentarily become 1 immediately before the normal map fluctuation display game starts (the number of reserved normal maps is essentially 0).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved regular symbols (A7708). It then extracts the winning random number and saves it in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7709), extracts the winning symbol random number and saves it in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7710), and terminates the gate switch monitoring process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 terminates the gate switch monitoring process if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), if it is determined that the number of reserved normal figures is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "N"), or if the normal figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating or in a normal figure winning state (the result of A7706 is "Y").

[Regular power entry switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the normal power winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the normal game process will be explained. Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power winning switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a normal win is occurring, that is, whether the normal win display game is in a winning state and the normal win device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations (A7801). If a normal win is occurring (the result of A7801 is "Y"), it then determines whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the normal power counter is incremented by +1 (A7803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the count number of the updated normal power counter has reached an upper limit value (e.g., 10) (A7804). If the count number has reached the upper limit value (the result of A7804 is "Y"), it loads the win end pointer value (e.g., 2) from the normal win end pointer area in the RWM and saves it in the normal win control pointer area in the RWM (A7805).

Finally, the normal game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the normal winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if a normal winning occurs that exceeds the upper limit during a normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal winning processing control pointer area at that point, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed, ending the normal winning state prematurely.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 determines that a normal win is not occurring (the result of A7801 is "N"), if it determines that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N"), or if it determines that the count number has not reached the upper limit (the result of A7804 is "N"), it terminates the normal win switch monitoring process.

[Normal processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (A7608) in the normal game process will be explained. Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the number of reserved normal symbols is 0 (A7901). If the number of reserved normal symbols is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), it loads a winning random number from the RWM's normal symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1), loads a winning symbol random number from the RWM's normal symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1), and clears the loaded normal symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and normal symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A7902). It then determines whether the probability of a winning result in the normal symbol variable display game is higher than normal (high probability state), i.e., whether the game is in a time-saving state (normal power support state) (A7903). In this embodiment, the winning random number range is 0 to 250, the high probability of a normal winning is 251/251, and the low probability of a normal winning is 0/251. However, this is not limited to this, and the low probability of a normal winning can be a value greater than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).

If the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of a normal game (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251), which is the lower limit judgment value for the low probability of a normal game (A7904); if the game control device 100 is in the high probability of a normal game (the result of A7903 is "Y"), it sets the high probability lower limit judgment value (here, 0), which is the lower limit judgment value for the high probability of a normal game (A7905), and proceeds to processing in step A7906.

The game control device 100 determines whether the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (here, 251) (A7906). Note that this upper limit judgment value is the same for both normal high probability and normal low probability games. If the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), i.e., if it is a loss, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it determines whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

If the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), i.e., if it is a loss, the game control device 100 saves the loss information in the win flag area (A7908). Furthermore, it sets the losing stop pattern number as the normal stop pattern number (A7909), saves the losing pattern information in the normal stop pattern information area (A7910), and proceeds to processing in step A7914.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "N"), i.e., if there is a win, the game control device 100 saves the winning information in the win flag area (A7911), sets the winning stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded winning pattern random number (A7912), saves the winning stop pattern information corresponding to the winning stop pattern number in the normal stop pattern information area (A7913), and proceeds to processing in step A7914. Note that here, there is only one type of winning stop pattern (normal winning pattern), but there may be several types in the modified example described below.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stopping symbol number in the normal symbol stopping symbol area (A7914), saves the stopping symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shifts the normal symbol random number storage area (A7916), clears the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7917), and then updates the normal symbol pending number by -1 (A7918).

In other words, as the regular map fluctuation display game for the oldest regular map reserved number 1 is played, the ranks of regular map reserved numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after regular map reserved number 1 are moved up by one. This process clears the value for regular map reserved number 1 in the random number storage area per regular map and sets it to 0, and the regular map reserved number is decremented by 1 to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 loads information on the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) (A7919). Note that the processing of step A7919 is optional and is executed when the support state, which is the state (mode) of normal power support, is variable, as in the modified example described below.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal map fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal map game processing timer area (A7920). Note that if the support state (support state, normal power opening pattern), which is the state (state) of normal power support, is variable as in the modified example described below, a variable normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the support state is set and saved in the normal map game processing timer area. Then, the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed (A7921), and the normal map normal processing is terminated. Note that the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process will be described later.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved normal maps is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for transitioning to normal normal map processing (A7922) and saves the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A7923). It then saves the fraud monitoring period flag in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924) and terminates normal normal map processing.

[Normal map change processing transition setting processing]
47 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process. The normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed in step A7921 in the normal map normal processing.

The game control device 100 first sets "1" as the processing number for transitioning to normal game fluctuation processing (A8101), and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8102).

Then, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal pattern 1 fluctuation signal is on) in the test signal output data area (A8103), and saves a fluctuation flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is fluctuating in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (A8104). Then, it saves the blinking control timer initial value, which is the initial value of the timer for the blinking period of the normal map display, in the normal map blinking control timer area (A8105), and saves the initial value (here, 0) in the normal map fluctuation pattern number area (A8106). Then, the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map fluctuations]
Next, the details of the normal map fluctuation process (A7609) in the normal map game process will be explained. Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal map fluctuation process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number to "2" as a setting process to transition to processing during normal map display (A8301), and saves the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A8302). The game control device 100 then saves the normal map display time (normal map stop time, e.g., 48 msec), which is the display time of the results of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display, in the normal map game processing timer area (A8303).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the normal symbol fluctuation (normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, it saves a stop flag indicating that the normal symbol fluctuation display game is stopped in the normal symbol fluctuation control flag area (A8305), and ends the normal symbol fluctuation processing.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process during normal map display (A7610) in the normal map game process will be explained. Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing (A8401) and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A8402). It then determines whether hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

When the win flag is set to win information (the result of A8403 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the win processing setting table (A8404), obtains the win start pointer value (here, 0) corresponding to the normal stop pattern information, and saves it in the normal win control pointer area (A8405). It also obtains the win end pointer value corresponding to the normal stop pattern information and saves it in the normal win end pointer area (A8406). Next, it obtains the normal power release time (e.g., 3000 msec) corresponding to the normal stop pattern information and saves it in the normal game processing timer area (A8407). The above processing sets the release mode of the normal variable winning device 37 during the time-saving state, allowing, for example, two releases. There is only one type of winning normal stop symbol (normal winning symbol), and the win start pointer value, win end pointer value, and normal power release time are fixed, but if the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) related to normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below, the win start pointer value, win end pointer value, and normal power release time corresponding to the support state can be set and saved in the normal game processing timer area.

Next, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the processing number for transitioning to normal symbol win processing (A8408) and saves the processing number in the normal symbol game processing number area (A8409). After that, it saves a signal related to a win in the normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol 1 win signal is turned on) and a signal related to the start of normal power operation (normal electric device 1 operation signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area (A8410). Furthermore, it saves on data in the normal power solenoid output data area to output a signal to drive (turn on) the normal power solenoid (A8411).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal power count area that stores the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), and clears the information in the normal power fraudulent winning number area that stores the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal power fraud monitoring period (A8413). Finally, a flag that specifies the time outside the fraud monitoring period for the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

If the winning flag does not contain winning information (the result of A8403 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for transitioning to normal gameplay processing (A8415) and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8416). It then saves the fraud monitoring period flag in the normal game fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417) and terminates the normal gameplay display processing.

[Normal processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal winning process (A7611) in the normal game process will be explained. Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal winning process.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the normal hit control pointer (A8601), and then determines whether the value of the loaded normal hit control pointer has reached the normal hit control pointer upper limit value (win end pointer value) (A8602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during normal hit has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal hit (the hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the control pointer during normal hit by +1 (A8603). Furthermore, it executes the normal power operation transition setting process (A8604) and ends the normal hit processing. Details of the normal power operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during a normal hit reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during a normal hit (the hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the normal power operation transition setting process (A8604) and ends the normal hit processing without executing the process of updating (+1) the normal hit processing control pointer area in step A8603.

[Normal power operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (A8604) during the normal winning process will be explained. Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal power operation transition setting process. The normal power operation transition setting process is a process that controls the drive of the normal power solenoid 37c to open and close the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched depending on the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the processing depending on the value of the control pointer (normal win control pointer) (A8701). Note that here, the control pointer uses the value before it was updated in step A8603. An example of the control pointer is shown in Figure 73, described below. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the processing proceeds to step A8702, and in order to control the blocking of the normal variable winning device 37, the wait time after blocking of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer (normal power interval time, for example, 60,000 msec) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8702). Note that if the support state (support mode, normal power opening pattern) for normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below, the wait time (normal power interval time) may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A8704 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, and saves the normal power opening time, which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, in the normal game processing timer area (A8704). The normal power opening time here may be the same as the value set in step A8407 (e.g., 3000 msec). Furthermore, on data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (A8705), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, if the value of the control pointer is the winning end pointer value, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8706, ends the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37, and executes the normal remaining ball processing (A7612), by setting the processing number to "4" (A8706) and saving the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8707).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the normal power remaining ball processing time (e.g., 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A8708). After that, it saves off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to set the normal power solenoid 37c to off (A8709), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process. Note that if the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) for normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below, the normal power remaining ball processing time may be set in accordance with the support state.

[Handling of remaining normal electric bulbs]
Next, the details of the remaining normal ball processing (A7612) in the normal game processing will be explained. Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the remaining normal ball processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number "5" for the normal winning end processing (A8901) and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8902). It then saves the normal game ending time (e.g., 100 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A8903). Note that if the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) for normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below, the normal game ending time may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (turning off the normal electric device 1 operation signal) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Next, it clears the normal electric count number area, which counts the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 (A8905), and further clears the normal winning control pointer area (A8906). After that, it clears the normal winning end pointer area (A8907), and ends the normal electric remaining ball processing.

[Normal map end processing]
Next, the details of the normal winning end process (A7613) in the normal winning game process will be explained. Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal winning end process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number "0" for normal symbol normal processing (A9101), and then saves the processing number in the normal symbol game processing number area (A9102). After that, it saves a signal related to the end of the normal symbol variable game win (turning off the signal during a normal symbol win) in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 saves a flag (fraudulent monitoring period flag) that specifies the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and then terminates the normal winning end processing.

[External information editing processing]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1319) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. Figures 54A and 54B are flowcharts showing the procedure for the external information editing process. Figure 54A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and Figure 54B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1307), the prize slot switch/status monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316), information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or an internal gaming facility management device, or to a test firing test device, is created and set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9301). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9301 is "N"), it determines whether a main frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9302). If a main frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9302 is "N"), it saves the off data of the door/frame opening signal in the external information output data area (A9303), and saves the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9304).

If a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9301 is "Y") or if a main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9302 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 saves the ON data of the door/frame opening signal in the external information output data area (A9305) and saves the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9306).

After steps A9304 and A9306, the game control device 100 increments the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A9307), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the timer has timed out) (A9308). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (e.g., 256 msec) when the data stored in RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or the like (A1046 of the main processing). The security signal control timer then begins timing from the time the RAM is initialized.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9308 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the security signal on data in the external information output data area (A9309) and proceeds to processing of step A9310. In other words, the fact that the data stored in RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

If the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9308 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether magnetic fraud is occurring (A9310). Note that if there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnetic fraud is occurring. If there is no magnetic fraud occurring (the result of A9310 is "N"), it further determines whether board radio wave fraud is occurring (A9311). Note that if there is a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio wave fraud is occurring.

If board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9311 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9312). If a frame radio wave fraud signal is present, it can be determined that frame radio wave fraud is occurring. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9312 is "N"), it further determines whether large prize slot fraud is occurring (A9313). Note that if the prize slot switch/status monitoring process has saved an illegal winning occurrence flag for the large prize slot in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that large prize slot fraud is occurring. If large prize slot fraud is not occurring (the result of A9313 is "N"), it further determines whether normal power fraud is occurring (A9314). Note that if the prize slot switch/status monitoring process has saved an illegal winning occurrence flag for the second start prize slot of the normal variable winning device 37 in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that normal power fraud is occurring.

If normal power fraud is not occurring (the result of A9314 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether vibration fraud is occurring (A9315). Note that if a detection signal is received from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that vibration fraud is occurring. If vibration fraud is not occurring (the result of A9315 is "N"), it determines whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A9316). Note that if the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

If an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (the result of A9316 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether a V passing error is occurring (A9317). If a detection signal from the specific area switch 72 is generated at an inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passing error is occurring. If a V passing error is not occurring (the result of A9317 is "N"), it determines whether a remaining ball error, which is an error related to remaining balls, is occurring (A9318). If a remaining ball error is not occurring (the result of A9318 is "N"), it determines whether the safety device is operating based on the safety device operation flag (A9319). If the safety device is not operating (the result of A9319 is "N"), it determines whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9320).

If a switch abnormality error, such as a disconnected switch connector, is not occurring (the result of A9320 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 saves the OFF data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9321). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A9320 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 saves the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9323).

On the other hand, if magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9310 is "Y"), board radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9311 is "Y"), frame radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9312 is "Y"), large prize slot fraud is occurring (the result of A9313 is "Y"), normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A9314 is "Y"), vibration fraud is occurring (the result of A9315 is "Y"), an abnormal discharge error is occurring (the result of A9316 is "Y"), a V passage error is occurring (the result of A9317 is "Y"), a remaining ball error is occurring (the result of A9318 is "Y"), or the safety device is activated (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9322) and the on data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9323). By setting the security signal to on data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. In this embodiment, the safety device is in operation when the safety device operation flag = 1.

In this way, when the safety device is activated (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the security signal is turned on and output to an external device such as a hall computer (A9322), allowing the amusement facility manager or staff to recognize that the safety device is activated. In addition to a configuration in which the security signal is continuously output to an external device while the safety device is activated, it is also possible to configure the security signal to be output to an external device for just one pulse (e.g., 256 ms) when the safety device is activated. Furthermore, external information may be provided specifically for the safety device, instead of or in combination with the security signal, and this dedicated external information may be output to the external device while the safety device is activated.

Also, if the safety device is activated (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, and the gaming machine error state signal is output as a test signal to the test firing device. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that the test signal (gaming machine error state signal) corresponding to the safety device being activated is not output. Alternatively, a test signal separate from the gaming machine error state signal may be output to the test firing device.

After steps A9321 and A9323, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process to edit the winning signal of the start port (A9324). Next, it executes a main prize ball signal editing process to set information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9325), and executes a pattern confirmation count signal editing process to output to an external device a pattern confirmation count signal generated when the stopped pattern of the special pattern variable display game is confirmed (A9326).

Next, if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (A9327) and determines whether the time-saving signal control timer is 0 or not (A9328). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9328 is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated. If the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9328 is "N"), the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9329), and the external information editing process is terminated.

In this way, when the ceiling time reduction due to reaching the ceiling number of times or the sudden time reduction due to the time-saving symbol (support hit) begins, the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is output to an external device such as an amusement facility's internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. Here, the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is output for the duration of the timer initial value (e.g., a fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time-saving signal control timer area in step A5302 of the support operation setting process described above. While conventional jackpot 1 to 4 signals were output during the period of a jackpot, the output of the jackpot 3 signal is an output for a fixed time (e.g., 128 msec) that is much shorter than the period of a jackpot. Therefore, the external device (hall computer, etc.) can recognize that the time reduction has occurred due to the ceiling time reduction due to reaching the ceiling number of times or the sudden time reduction due to the time-saving symbol, without confusing it with a jackpot or the time reduction following a jackpot.

As mentioned above, the Jackpot 2 signal is output to an external device as external information for a long period of time during a jackpot state and in the time-saving state following the jackpot state (time-saving state due to a jackpot, first specific game state, first time-saving state). The Jackpot 3 signal, which has the short fixed duration (e.g., 128 msec), is output to an external device as external information indicating the occurrence of a time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving (second specific game state, second time-saving state), distinguished from external information indicating a time-saving state due to a jackpot (long-term Jackpot 2 signal), and is not confused by the external device.

In another configuration, the Jackpot 3 signal may be output for a fixed time only when the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction starts. To distinguish between the occurrence of a ceiling time reduction and a sudden time reduction, both the Jackpot 3 signal and the Jackpot 4 signal may be output for a fixed time when the time reduction starts for one of the time reductions, while only the Jackpot 3 signal may be output for the other time reduction. For example, the Jackpot 3 signal and the Jackpot 4 signal may be output for the ceiling time reduction, and only the Jackpot 3 signal may be output for the sudden time reduction (or vice versa). To distinguish between the occurrence of a ceiling time reduction and a sudden time reduction, the Jackpot 3 signal (or the Jackpot 4 signal) may be output for the ceiling time reduction and the Jackpot 4 signal (or the Jackpot 3 signal) may be output for the sudden time reduction at the start of the time reduction. In this way, the Jackpot 3 signal and the Jackpot 4 signal may be appropriately combined to distinguish between the occurrence of a ceiling time reduction and a sudden time reduction so that an external device can recognize them.

[External information or test signal transmission]
FIG. 55 is a time chart showing the transmission of external information or test signals.

Figure 55 (A) shows a case where the ceiling number of times is reached or the time-saving symbol stops in the last special symbol change display game (the special symbol change display game in which the number of time-saving attempts is reached) in the previous time-saving state, and the next special symbol change display game transitions to a later time-saving state (a time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving attempt or sudden time-saving attempt).

In this case, in this embodiment, the timing at which the previous time-saving state ends is when the time-saving end setting process (A4812, Figure 33) is executed within the special chart change process, i.e., when the change display of the previous special chart change display game stops. Furthermore, the timing at which the subsequent time-saving state (ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving) begins is when the number of time-saving changes (A5123, A5126) is set within the special chart display process, i.e., when the display of the stop result of the previous special chart change display game ends (approximately the same as the start timing of the next special chart change display game, if any).

Furthermore, at the timing when the variable display of the previous special symbol variable display game stops, the time-saving end setting process within the special symbol variable processing sets the OFF data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal regarding the end of the time-saving period in the external information output data area and outputs it to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A4901), and also sets the OFF data of the variable time shortening state signals (special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortening state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal) as signals regarding the end of the time-saving period in the test signal output data area and outputs it to the test firing device (A4902). Therefore, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as a test signal go to the OFF state after the variable display of the previous special symbol variable display game stops (after the previous time-saving period ends).

Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special symbol variation display game finishes, the support operation setting process sets ON data for the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area and outputs it to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A5301), and also sets ON data for the variation time reduction status signals (special symbol 1 variation time reduction status signal, special symbol 2 variation time reduction status signal, normal symbol 1 variation time reduction status signal) as signals related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area and outputs it to the test firing device (A5303). Therefore, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variation time reduction status signal as a test signal turn ON after the display of the stop result of the previous special symbol variation display game finishes.

In this way, it becomes clear that the time-saving feature has ended when the special symbol variation display game (the aforementioned special symbol variation display game) that ends the time-saving feature reaches the ceiling number of plays or stops on the time-saving feature. Furthermore, by turning the output of external information (jackpot 2 signal) and test signals (variation time reduction status signal, etc.) off for the duration of the display (stop display time) of the stop result (stopped feature), the on state of the output of external information and test signals can be clearly identified when the time-saving feature resumes.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 55 (B), in conventional gaming machines, the time reduction ends by the time reduction end setting process within the special chart display processing when the display of the stop result of the previous special chart variable display game ends. In the time reduction end setting process, off data for the jackpot 2 signal is set in the external information output data area as a signal regarding the end of the time reduction and is output to an external device (such as a hall computer), and off data for the variable time reduction status signal, etc., is set in the test signal output data area as a signal regarding the end of the time reduction and is output to the test firing device.

For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, the Jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variable time reduction state signal as a test signal turn off after the display of the stop result of the previous special chart variable display game ends, but at this timing the Jackpot 2 signal and variable time reduction state signal immediately turn on due to the support activation setting process, so they do not actually turn off (they essentially remain in the on state). Therefore, unlike this embodiment, in conventional gaming machines, it is unclear when the time reduction has ended, and the on state of the external information and test signal output is unclear when the time reduction resumes.

[Safety device related processing]
Next, the safety device related processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be described in detail. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device related processing. The safety device related processing is an in-area processing and is executed as part of the above-mentioned in-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the in-area work area (A9401). If the safety device in operation flag = 1, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation. If the safety device is in operation (the result of A9401 is "Y"), the safety device-related processing is terminated.

If the safety device is not activated (the result of A9401 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads the safety device activation information from the safety device activation information area included in the external work area (A9402) and determines whether the safety device activation information is the value of the old activation information area (A9403). If the safety device activation information is the value of the old activation information area (the result of A9403 is "Y"), there is no change in the safety device activation information, so the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A9409 without setting (sending) a performance command.

If the safety device activation information is not a value in the old activation information area (the result of A9403 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a safety device activation-related command table that associates the safety device activation information with commands so that a presentation command can be set (sent) since there has been a change in the safety device activation information (A9404), and obtains the command (ACTION section) corresponding to the safety device activation information (A9405). It then determines whether or not a command is defined (A9406). Because the safety device activation-related command table does not define a command corresponding to safety device non-activation information (value 0) (because there is no command), if the safety device activation information is safety device non-activation information (value 0), it can be determined that no command is defined. If the command is not defined (the result of A9406 is "Y"), the game control device proceeds to processing in step A9409 without setting (sending) a presentation command.

If a command definition exists (the result of A9406 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a safety device activation-related command (MODE section) as a presentation command (A9407). It can be determined that a command definition exists if the safety device activation information is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activation information (value 3). Then, a presentation command setting process is executed to set (send) the presentation command (A9408). The presentation command consists of a MODE section and an ACTION section. It is also possible to define a command corresponding to safety device non-activation information (value 0) in the safety device activation-related command table, thereby omitting the determination of step A9406 and allowing a safety device activation-related command to be set (sent) even for safety device non-activation information (value 0).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the safety device activation information is safety device activation information (value 3) (A9409). If the safety device activation information is not safety device activation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is "N"), the safety device-related processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the safety device activation information is safety device activation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is "Y"), "1" indicating that the safety device is activated is saved as the safety device activation flag in the safety device activation flag area (A9410), and then the safety device-related processing is terminated. Note that if safety device activation information (value 3) was saved in step A9804 (described below) during the previous timer interrupt processing, the result of step A9409 will be "Y" during the next timer interrupt processing.

In this way, when the safety device activation information changes to safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activated information (value 3), a safety device activation-related command is sent to the performance control device 300, with the safety device activation information included in part (ACTION section). When the ACTION section is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activated information (value 3), the safety device activation-related command becomes an activation notice command corresponding to the activation notice state, an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state, or an activated command corresponding to the activated state, respectively.

By receiving the activation warning command, the performance control device 300 can display an activation warning message (for example, the words "Playing will end soon") on the display device 41 when the safety device is in an activation warning state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that play may be stopped, urging the player to end play and preventing the player from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. It can also surprise those who are cheating and encourage them to stop cheating.

By receiving the activation warning command, the performance control device 300 can display an activation warning message (for example, the words "Play will end after the win ends") on the display device 41 when the safety device is in an activation warning state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that play will be halted after a small win or a big win ends, warning the player that they will suffer disadvantages such as the end of a winning streak. A winning streak is, for example, a continuation of a big win state and a specific game state without going through normal mode (or normal game state). The activation warning state can also surprise anyone cheating and encourage them to stop cheating.

By receiving the operating command, the effect control device 300 can display an operating display 513 (for example, the words "Playing Stopped") on the display device 41 while the safety device is in an operating state (operating state). This prevents new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10, and can also stop any cheating that may be occurring.

Note that if the safety device activation information remains unchanged at 0, 1, 2, or 3 (no change from 0 to 0, 1 to 1, 2 to 2, or 3 to 3), safety device activation-related commands are not sent to the performance control device 300. Even when the safety device counter value becomes less than 190,000 after reaching 190,000 to 194,999 and the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 0 (a change from 1 to 0), safety device activation-related commands are not sent without a command definition. Note that changes in safety device activation information from 2 to 1 or from 3 to 2 (changes from 2 to 1, 3 to 2) are excluded by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device activation monitoring process described below.

When the safety device activation information changes from 0 to 1 (when it changes from 0 to 1), an activation warning command from among the safety device activation-related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. When the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 2 (when it changes from 1 to 2), an activation warning command from among the safety device activation-related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. When the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3 (when it changes from 2 to 3), an activation command from among the safety device activation-related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. Note that when the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3, the result of step A9403 becomes "Y" just once immediately afterwards, and the activation command is sent via steps A9404-A9410. The safety device activation flag is set to 1, so the safety device is activated (the result of A9401 is "Y"). In the subsequent timer interrupt processing, steps A9404-A9410 are not passed through, and no safety device activation-related command is sent.

Note that while the direct change in safety device activation information from 1 to 3 (the change from 1 to 3 itself) is eliminated by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device activation monitoring process described below, the safety device activation information can instantaneously change from 1 to 2 to 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and does not trigger an activation warning state, as described below). This change from 1 to 2 to 3 corresponds to the safety device counter value reaching 195,000 when there is neither a big win nor a small win, and the transition from the activation warning state to the activated state. Then, in response to the safety device transitioning from the activation warning state to the activated state, an activation command is sent to the performance control device 300 as a safety device activation-related command (A9405, A9407).

[Out-of-area integration processing]
Next, the details of the outside area integration process (A1322) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the outside area integration process. The outside area integration process is an outside area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned outside area program.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (A9501), and then sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) as the external stack area value in the stack pointer (A9502). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the external stack area (A9503). It is preferable to save all general-purpose registers here. Then, a performance display device control process is executed (A9504), which performs display control on the performance display device 152. Next, a ball difference confirmation process (A9505) is executed, which updates the number of balls difference (safety device counter value) and sets safety device activation information corresponding to the number of balls difference (safety device counter value). Next, a safety device activation monitoring process is executed (A9506), which monitors the activation of the safety device.

The game control device 100 then restores the saved registers (A9507), loads them from the stack pointer storage area, sets the stack pointer (A9508), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer will indicate the address of the stack area within the area.

[Performance display device control processing]
Next, the performance display device control process (A9504) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described in detail. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the performance display device control process. The performance display device control process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the out-of-area program described above.

The game control device 100 first performs a validity check to determine the validity of the performance display work area, and if it is invalid and abnormal, initializes the performance display work area (including setting initial values) (A9601). The processing of step A9601 is the same as the processing of step A1204 in Figure 8.

In addition, since a validity check is performed each time the performance display device control process is executed, if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be immediately initialized, preventing abnormal performance displays (display of abnormal base values, etc.) as much as possible.

In addition, when initializing the work area for performance display (including setting initial values), the area other than the stack pointer storage area is initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. In this embodiment, the out-of-area stack area is not initialized, but it may be initialized. Even when initializing the out-of-area stack area, the register values saved in the out-of-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the work area for performance display is performed separately from the initialization of the in-area work area (work area for game control) and the in-area stack area (stack area for game control), so it does not affect the in-area work area or the in-area stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an initial display timer update process (A9602). During the initial display timer update process, the timer is updated to perform full blinking control (initial display control), which blinks all LEDs on each digit of the performance display device 152 for approximately 5 seconds when performance display begins (after power is turned on).

Next, the game control device 100 copies the switch rising edge information of the input port that is the target of base value calculation to the performance display work area (A9603). The switch rising edge information is obtained during input processing and stored in the in-area work area (particularly the switch control area) (A1303). As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the input ports that are the target of base value calculation (input ports to be monitored) are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126. The copied switch rising edge information is used in the performance display editing process (Figure 8).

Note that detecting a game ball does not directly change the number of normal prize balls or normal out balls, and rising edge information (bits) of switches that are not subject to the calculation of the base value are copied in a cleared state (masked). For example, information on the gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72, and remaining ball outlet switch 73 is copied in a cleared state. This allows processing related to these switches (at least the clearing process for A1211) to be omitted in the performance display editing process.

If the normal number of out balls were updated by input (game ball detection) from the winning entry switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, 39a, gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72, or remaining ball discharge switch 73, this would overlap with the input from the out ball detection switch 74, which detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32, and the base value would be calculated to be an incorrect value. If the normal number of prize balls were updated by input (game ball detection) from the winning entry switches, gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72, or remaining ball discharge switch 73, which allow game balls to pass through, this would overlap with the input from the winning entry switches, and the base value would be calculated to be an incorrect value.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a performance display device display process (A9604). In the performance display device display process, segment output data (display data and lighting pattern data related to the base value) corresponding to the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 152 is set according to the type of display period and various other conditions. For example, the display periods may be a real-time value display period BL, a one-before-last display period B1, a two-before-last display period B2, and a three-before-last display period B3, and in each display period, segment output data corresponding to the real-time value during base value measurement, and the base value measured in the one-before-last tally interval, the two-before-last tally interval, and the three-before-last tally interval may be set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the timer for switching the display period and determines whether it is time to switch the display period (A9605). If it is time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "Y"), it executes the display period switching setting (A9606) and terminates the performance display device control processing. If it is not time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 terminates the performance display device control processing without executing the display period switching setting.

When switching the display period, you can set the display period information to switch from BL to B1 to B2 to B3 to BL, etc. You can also set the initial value of the timer for switching the period (for example, an initial value equivalent to a predetermined period of 5 seconds).

[Difference ball confirmation process]
Next, the details of the difference ball confirmation process (A9505) in the outside area integration process (Fig. 57) will be explained. Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the difference ball confirmation process. The difference ball confirmation process is an outside area process and is executed as part of the outside area program described above. In the difference ball confirmation process, the safety device counter value (difference ball number + 100,000) indicating the difference ball number is updated, and the safety device operation information indicating the state of the safety device is updated.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is activated based on the safety device activation flag in the safety device activation flag area included in the in-area work area (A9701). If the safety device is activated (the result of A9701 is "Y"), the ball difference confirmation process is immediately terminated, and the safety device counter value and safety device activation information are not updated. Note that in this embodiment, the out-area integration process program (a program related to the safety device) included in the out-area program is configured not to be executed while game play is stopped. If the safety device is activated and game play is stopped, the out-area integration process including the ball difference confirmation process is not executed (the result of A1320 is "Y"), so step A9701 may not be performed. Note that if step A9701 is not performed, the safety device activation flag area is read and written by the in-area program and becomes an area that is not read (an area that cannot be accessed) by the out-area program.

If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A9701 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the old operation information in the old operation information area included in the outside work area is 2 or more (old operation information area ≧ 2) (A9702). If the old operation information is 2 or more (the result of A9702 is "Y"), the difference ball confirmation process is terminated and the safety device counter value and safety device operation information are not updated.

If the old operation information is less than 2 (the result of A9702 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 based on the switch rising edge information in the switch control area (internal work area) for the fourth input port 126 (A9703). If there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "Y"), it determines whether the safety device counter value is 0 (A9704). If the safety device counter value is not 0 (the result of A9704 is "N"), the safety device counter value, which is the value in the safety device counter area, is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A9705). Therefore, in response to the input to the out ball detection switch 74 increasing the number of ejected balls by 1, the difference in the number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of ejected balls) and therefore the safety device counter value (= difference in the number of balls + 100,000) are decreased by 1 and updated. Next, the number of acquired game balls is loaded from the acquired game ball number area included in the internal work area (A9706).

If there is no input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "N"), or if the safety device counter value is 0 (the result of A9704 is "Y"), the game control device 100 maintains the safety device counter value without updating it by -1 and loads the number of acquired game balls (A9706).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the safety device counter value from the safety device counter area included in the outside work area (A9707) and adds the number of acquired game balls to the safety device counter value (A9708). The number of acquired game balls is the total number of prize balls acquired within one interruption, i.e., the increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption, so in step A9708, the difference in number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) and therefore the safety device counter value (= difference in number of balls + 100,000) are updated and increased by the number of acquired game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the safety device counter value is greater than or equal to the counter reference value (195,000) (whether the safety device counter is greater than or equal to 195,000) (A9709). If the safety device counter value is greater than or equal to the counter reference value (195,000) (the result of A9709 is "Y"), the upper limit value (195,000) is set to the safety device counter value so that the safety device counter value returns to the upper limit value (counter reference value of 195,000) (A9710), and the upper limit value is saved in the safety device counter area as the value after the addition (A9711). Note that the safety device counter value may exceed the upper limit value in step A9708 and become 195,000 + α. Here, α is less than the maximum number of game balls acquired (acquired within one interrupt) and is less than, for example, the total number of prize balls when all winning slot switches are input simultaneously.

On the other hand, if the safety device counter value is less than the counter reference value (195,000) (the result of A9709 is "N"), there is no need to limit it to the upper limit value, so the value after the addition process in step A9708 is saved as is in the safety device counter area (A9711). In this way, the safety device counter value in the safety device counter area is updated to the value after the addition (including the value limited to the upper limit value).

In addition, by limiting the safety device counter value to an upper limit of 19,500, the range of the safety device counter area (number of bytes or bits) becomes clear, which is convenient for developing game control programs.

Next, the game control device 100 sets an activation information number (here, 0 to 2) corresponding to the safety device counter value (A9712). For safety device counter values of 0 to 189999, safety device counter values of 190000 to 194999, and safety device counter values of 195000, the activation information number is set to "0," indicating an inactive state (normal state) of the safety device, "1," indicating an activation warning state, or "2," indicating an activation warning state. Note that the activation information number is not set to "3," indicating an activation state in which the safety device is activated. Here, as described above, if the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is set to the difference in the number of balls based on the minimum value (the difference in the number of balls during a predetermined period from the time of the minimum value to the present), in step A9709, it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting the lowest safety device counter value to date from the current safety device counter value is equal to or greater than the difference in the number of balls reference value of 95,000, and if it is equal to or greater than the difference in the number of balls reference value of 95,000, in step A9710 the difference in the number of balls may be set to 95,000. Then, in step A9712, the activation information number may be set to "0" indicating an inactive state (normal state) of the safety device, "1" indicating an activation notice state, or "2" indicating an activation warning state, corresponding to the difference in the number of balls of 0 to 89,999, the difference in the number of balls of 90,000 to 94,999, and the difference in the number of balls of 95,000 based on the minimum value. Furthermore, the above-mentioned minimum safety device counter value may be stored in the minimum value area of the out-of-area work area, and each time the current safety device counter value becomes smaller than the stored minimum safety device counter value, the minimum safety device counter value may be updated to the current safety device counter value. Furthermore, when the operation information number becomes "2," as described below, gameplay is halted immediately or after the end of a big win or small win. In this way, if the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is based on the minimum value, a gameplay halt can occur if the current difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the ball difference reference value of 95,000, and therefore the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is equivalent to the maximum increase in the difference in the number of balls during one day of business (so-called MY).

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads the current safety device activation information from the safety device activation information area included in the external work area and saves it in the old activation information area (A9713). It then determines whether the old activation information is 2 and the activation information number is 1 (old activation information = 2 and activation information number = 1) (A9714). If the old activation information = 2 and the activation information number = 1 (the result of A9714 is "Y"), the safety device activation information "2" (the loaded value) is maintained without saving the activation information number in the safety device activation information area, and the ball difference confirmation process is terminated. This prevents the safety device activation information from changing from "2" to "1" (preventing a change from 2 to 1). Since the old activation information is 2 (the result of A9702 is "Y"), the ball difference confirmation process is immediately terminated after the next timer interrupt, and the safety device counter value and safety device activation information are not updated, and the safety device activation information "2" is maintained.

On the other hand, if the old operation information is not 2 or the operation information number is not 1 (the result of A9714 is "N": old operation information ≠ 2 or operation information number ≠ 1), the game control device 100 saves the operation information number in the safety device operation information area and updates the safety device operation information area (A9715). Then, the difference ball confirmation process ends. Furthermore, even if "2" indicating an operation warning state is saved in the safety device operation information area, if there is neither a big hit nor a small hit, "3" indicating the operation state of the safety device is instantly saved in the safety device operation information area in the subsequent safety device operation monitoring process, and an operation warning state does not occur.

In this way, in the difference ball confirmation process, the safety device operation information is set to "0" (safety device non-operation information) indicating an inactive state (normal state) of the safety device, "1" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an operation warning state, or "2" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an operation warning state, corresponding to each of the safety device counter values of 0 to 189,999, 190,000 to 194,999, and 195,000.

The change pattern (including maintenance patterns) from the old safety device activation information (old activation information A9713) to the new updated information (A9715) will be one of the following: 0 → 0, 0 → 1, 1 → 0, 1 → 1, 1 → 2, 2 → 2; as mentioned above, a change from 2 to 1 is prevented (A9714).

The gaming control device 100 may send a ball difference command indicating the updated safety device counter value (A9711) or a ball difference command indicating the updated number of balls (= safety device counter value - 100,000) to the presentation control device 300 (sub-board), and the presentation control device 300 may display the safety device counter value or number of balls difference on the display device 41, etc. In this case, during the ball difference confirmation process, even if the old operation information in the old operation information area is 2 (safety device operation warning information) (A9702), the safety device counter value is updated, and steps A9709 and A9710 are omitted so that the safety device counter value is not limited to the upper limit of 19,500. However, for safety device counter values of 195,000 or greater, the safety device operation information is set to "2" (safety device operation warning information), indicating an operation warning state.

The above describes the difference ball confirmation process. Step A9706 of the difference ball confirmation process constitutes a first counting means capable of counting the payout number, which is the number of gaming media paid out or the number of gaming media decided to be paid out (the amount of gaming value awarded or the amount of gaming value decided to be awarded). Steps A9703-A9705 of the difference ball confirmation process constitute a second counting means capable of counting the number of uses, which is the number of gaming media used (e.g., the number of balls fired or the number of balls ejected). Step A9708 of the difference ball confirmation process constitutes a calculation means capable of calculating a calculation value (e.g., the safety device counter value or the difference ball number) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses.

[Safety device operation monitoring process]
Next, the safety device operation monitoring process (A9506) in the outside-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described in detail. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device operation monitoring process. The safety device operation monitoring process is an outside-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned outside-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device activation information is 2 or greater (safety device activation information ≥ 2) (A9801). If the safety device activation information is 2 or greater (the result of A9801 is "Y"), that is, if safety device activation warning information (value 2) or safety device activation information (value 3) is set, it determines whether a big win or small win is occurring (A9802). Here, whether a big win or small win is occurring can be determined, for example, based on the game processing number (special symbol game processing number, special feature game processing number). The game processing number is stored in the game processing number area (special symbol game processing number area, special feature game processing number area) of the in-area work area.

For example, if the game processing number for the jackpot fanfare matches the game processing number for the jackpot ending, it can be determined that a jackpot is occurring. In this embodiment, if the accessory game processing number is 1 to 5, it can be determined that a jackpot is occurring. Also, for example, if the game processing number for the start of a small jackpot (or small jackpot fanfare (only if present)) matches the game processing number for the remaining small jackpot ball processing (or small jackpot ending (only if present)), it can be determined that a small jackpot is occurring. In this embodiment, if the special symbol game processing number is 3 to 5, it can be determined that a small jackpot is occurring. It can also be determined that a small jackpot is occurring from the time the small jackpot symbol is derived, or from the time the jackpot symbol is derived. If a jackpot occurs due to a V winning during a small jackpot, it can also be determined that a jackpot is occurring from the time the V winning occurs.

If the game is neither a small win nor a big win (the result of A9802 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads the current safety device activation information from the safety device activation information area included in the outside work area and saves it in the old activation information area (A9803). Then, it saves the safety device activation information (value 3) in the safety device activation information area and updates the safety device activation information area (A9804).

On the other hand, if the safety device activation information is "0" or "1" which is less than 2 (the result of A9801 is "N"), or if a big win or small win is occurring (the result of A9802 is "Y"), the safety device activation monitoring process is immediately terminated, and essentially nothing is done in the safety device activation monitoring process.

As described above, when the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set and the safety device is in an activation warning state (condition (1) is met, but condition (2) is not met), if the big win or small win ends and the game is no longer in a small win or big win state (condition (2) is met), the safety device activation information is set to safety device activation information (value 3) (safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3) (A9804). This sets the safety device activation flag to "1" (A9410 of the safety device-related processing), creating an activated state (stopped state) in which the safety device is activated, i.e., a game stop state (unplayable state, play prohibited state) in which games such as the special chart change display game, the regular chart change display game, and round play cannot be played. In this way, the safety device activation flag can be set based on the safety device activation information in the safety device activation information area (part of the off-area work area). A safety device activation flag of "1" indicates that the safety device has been activated (is currently activated) based on the establishment of an activation condition (predetermined condition) and that a game-unavailable state has occurred. Based on a safety device activation flag of "1," the results of steps A1309, A1603, A1612, A2201, etc. will be "Y," resulting in a game-unavailable state.

By activating the safety device and preventing play, it is possible to take appropriate measures against cheating in cases where the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, and by limiting the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls, it may also be possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

Even if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set (A9712, A9715 of the difference ball confirmation process), if the game is neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot (the result of A9802 is "N"), the safety device activation information will instantly switch from the safety device activation warning information (value 2) to the safety device activation information (value 3) (A9804). In other words, in this case, before the activation warning command is sent to the presentation control device 300, the safety device activation warning information (value 2) in the safety device activation information area is overwritten and erased with the safety device activation information (value 3). Therefore, if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 when the game is neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot, the activation warning state warning of the safety device activation will not occur, and the safety device will immediately activate, causing a game stop state (a state where play is not possible, a state where play is prohibited). As mentioned above, this corresponds to the safety device activation information instantaneously changing from 1 to 2 to 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and does not result in an activation warning state), but in response to the transition from an activation warning state, which warns of the safety device activation, to an activation state, in which the safety device is in operation, an activation command is sent to the performance control device 300 as a safety device activation-related command (A9405, A9407).

Furthermore, if the safety device activation warning information (value 3) is set and the safety device has already activated, causing a game stop state, the out-of-area integration process will not be executed (the result of A1320 is "Y"), so the safety device activation information will remain as the safety device activated information (value 3) and the game stop state will continue.

In this embodiment, if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 during a small win and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set, whether before or after a V win, step A9804 sets the safety device activation information (value 3) after the end of the jackpot due to the V win, and gameplay is stopped (a jackpot occurs). However, as another example, if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) can be set immediately after the end of the small win, and gameplay is stopped (a jackpot does not occur), and if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set after a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) can be set after the end of the jackpot due to the V win, and gameplay is stopped (a jackpot occurs). As yet another example, even if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before or after a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) may be set immediately after the small win ends, causing the game to stop (a big win will not occur).

[Control of the production control device]
The following describes the control (processing) that the performance control device 300 executes using the performance control program.

[Main processing (performance control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the performance control device 300 will be explained. Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by the performance control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the processing executed by the performance control device 300, the step symbols (numbers) are represented as "B****".

When the main processing begins, the performance control device 300 first prohibits interrupts (B0001). Next, it performs initial settings for the CPU 311 and VDP 312 (B0002, B0003), and then permits interrupts (B0004). Once interrupts are permitted, it becomes capable of executing command reception interrupt processing, which receives commands sent from the game control device 100.

Next, the performance control device 300 allows the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41, etc. (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, it saves the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Next, the performance control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period of time has passed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Then, the performance control device 300 executes an RTC read process to read time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

The RTC reading process may be configured to read time information from RTC338 at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every two hours); it is not necessary to read time information each time processing proceeds to step B0009. The RTC reading process may be configured to be executed only once when power is applied to the presentation control device 300 (i.e., when power is applied to the gaming machine 10). (The RTC reading process may be executed at a different location, for example, between steps B0003 and B0004.) The presentation control device 300 may set a time timer (timekeeping means) that keeps time in a timer area in RAM, and adjust the time timer (timekeeping means) to match the time on RTC338 when time information is read from RTC338 at a predetermined cycle or when time information is read from RTC338 only once upon power-on. The presentation control device 300 may then use the time timer to execute various processes. This reduces the number of times the time is read from the RTC 338, thereby reducing the load on the CPU 311.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect button input processing to detect the player's operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal from the effect button switch 25a or touch panel 25b) and change the effect content (settings) in response to the detected signal (B0010). Next, it executes hall/player setting mode processing to accept operations by the gaming parlor (amusement store) manager, players, etc., such as changing the brightness and volume of the LEDs and LCD (display device 41, etc.). Operations include operating the cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, effect button 25, and volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the gaming machine. In the hall/player setting mode processing, players can customize the effects according to the effect points described below.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing to add or clear effect points (B0012). In the effect point control processing, effect points are added by executing effects or operations that are eligible for adding effect points. In addition, when a game ends or is stopped (when a game is stopped), information including effect point information, for example, is displayed on the display device 41 as a two-dimensional code called a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 during hall/player setting mode processing or safety device processing (when an operating command is received).

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process to update random numbers such as effect random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later in Figure 62.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process to edit and control the content of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and executes a power saving control process to control the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 while it is waiting for customers (B0016).

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance display editing process (B0017), which updates various data to match the content to be displayed on a display device (display means) such as the display device 41, and sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problems, as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 seconds (approximately 33.3 msec). Then, the performance control device 300 completes preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer and executes the drawing command preparation end setting (B0018).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether it is time to switch frames (B0019). If it is not time to switch frames (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until it is time to switch frames. If it is time to switch frames (the result of B0019 is "Y"), the display device 41 is instructed to draw the screen (B0020). Since the frame period in this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, frames are switched when a periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 seconds (1/2 the frame period). Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be increased even further.

In addition, the performance control device 300 executes sound control processing to control the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

The performance control device 300 also executes a decoration control process (B0022) that controls decorative devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) consisting of LEDs, etc. In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of decorative devices such as LEDs is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process (B0023) that controls performance devices (board performance device 44, frame performance device, etc.) such as movable props (electric props) driven by motors and solenoids. The movable body control process, for example, sets the performance of prop movements that drive motors.

Then, when the performance control device 300 completes the processing of B0023 described above, it returns to processing of B0008. Thereafter, it repeats the processing from B0008 to B0023.

[Received command check process]
Next, the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 61) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of RAM as the number of received commands to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). It then determines whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if no commands have been received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there are no commands to analyze, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, i.e., if a command is being received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 subtracts the number of received commands from the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area (B1103), and then copies the contents of the received command buffer in RAM to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, because the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Furthermore, even if a new command is received while copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the performance control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in command read index 0 to 31 order, and the received commands are read out in index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that once copying to the command area for analysis is complete, the storage area in the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The performance control device 300 determines whether copying of the number of commands received and loaded in step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N"), it repeats the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

When the presentation control device 300 receives a command sent from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are saved in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is incremented and updated. The received command buffer can store up to 32 commands, but analysis of the received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, once the contents of the received command are copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always having free space available in the received command buffer without directly analyzing the commands, it is possible to prepare for the reception of large volumes of commands.

Next, if the copying is complete (the result of B1106 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 loads the received command contents from the command area for analysis (B1107) and executes a received command analysis process to analyze the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later in Figure 63. The address of the command area for analysis is also updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether analysis of the number of commands received that were loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). If the analysis has not been completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the process of steps B1107 to B1110 is repeated. If the analysis has been completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process ends.

[Received command analysis process]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 62) will be described with reference to Fig. 63. Fig. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first separates the upper bytes of the received command into the MODE section and the lower bytes into the ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands sent from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 are composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and are usually sent consecutively starting with the MODE section, which indicates the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are composed of the MODE section and ACTION section, in that order.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it determines whether the MODE section, which indicates the type of command, is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE section is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it similarly determines whether the ACTION section is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it determines whether the ACTION section, which indicates the content of the command (specific performance instructions, etc.), is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION section is within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), it further determines whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it determines whether the value of the ACTION section is a possible value for the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), command processing according to the command system is executed in B1205 and subsequent processes.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the value in the MODE section is within the range of a variation command (B1205). A variation command is a command that instructs the variation pattern of a special decorative symbol, for example, a variation command. If the MODE section indicates a variation command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes variation command processing (B1206) and terminates the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a win command (B1207). Win commands are commands that instruct actions related to the performance during a big win or small win (such as displaying a fanfare screen or round screen), and examples include a fanfare command to command a fanfare screen, a round command to command a round screen, an interval command to command an interval screen, and an ending command to command an ending screen. If the MODE section represents a win command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes win command processing (B1208) and terminates the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a symbol command (B1209). Symbol commands include, for example, the decorative special symbol 1 command and the decorative special symbol 2 command, which correspond to the stopping symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes symbol command processing (B1210) and terminates the received command analysis process.

If the MODE section does not represent a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE section represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), it executes single-shot command processing (B1212) and terminates the received command analysis process.

If the MODE section does not represent a single command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a pre-reading symbol command (B1213). A pre-reading symbol command is, for example, a pre-reading stop symbol command. If the MODE section represents a pre-reading symbol command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes pre-reading symbol command processing (B1214) and terminates the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead pattern command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a look-ahead variation command (B1215). An example of a look-ahead variation command is a look-ahead variation pattern command. If the MODE section represents a look-ahead variation command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes look-ahead variation command processing (B1216) and terminates the received command analysis processing.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the performance control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in test mode), and therefore terminates the received command analysis process. Also, if the MODE section is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION section is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the ACTION section is not a correct combination for the MODE section (the result of B1204 is "N"), the performance control device 300 terminates the received command analysis process.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the one-off command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the one-off command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section represents a model specification command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section represents a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), it executes a model setting process to set the type of gaming machine (B1302), and then terminates the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes RAM initialization setting processing (B1304), such as notifying the user of RAM initialization, and terminates the single command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (B1305). For example, power outage recovery commands include a power outage recovery command and a recovery screen command. If the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes power outage recovery setting processing (B1306) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a power outage recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes customer waiting demo setting processing (B1308) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (B1309). If the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes special chart 1 reserved information setting processing (B1310) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (B1311). Then, if the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes the special chart 2 reserved information setting process (B1312) and terminates the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a probability information command (B1313). If the MODE section represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes probability information setting processing (B1314) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents an error/fraud command (B1315). Examples of error/fraud commands include a fraud occurrence command, a fraud release command, a status off command, a status on command, a magnetic fraud alert command (magnetic error command), and a board radio wave fraud alert command (board radio wave error command). Examples of fraud occurrence commands include commands indicating the occurrence of an illegal win based on the signals of the start gate 1 switch 36a, the start gate 2 switch 37a, the prize gate switch 35a, and the large prize gate switch 43. The fraud release command is a command indicating the release of the fraud. The prize gate switch/status monitoring process (A1308) monitors the occurrence of an illegal win and the release of the fraud, and the fraud occurrence command and the fraud release command can be sent. Status ON commands include commands indicating the occurrence of a shot ball out switch signal (shot ball out error), the occurrence of an overflow switch signal (overflow error), the occurrence of an abnormal payout status signal (abnormal payout error), the occurrence of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error), and the occurrence of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) (main frame open error, front frame open error). Status OFF commands also indicate the absence of errors. If there is detection from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (magnet fraud), a magnet fraud alert command is sent in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315). If there is detection from the radio wave sensor 62 (radio wave fraud), a board radio wave fraud alert command is sent in the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316).

If the MODE section indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error/illegal setting process is executed (B1316) to notify or cancel the error or illegality, and the single-shot command processing is terminated. The error/illegal setting process may, for example, generate an error or illegality notification sound, cause LEDs for effects provided on the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, to light up in a predetermined manner, or set the display device 41, etc., to display an error.

If the MODE section does not represent an error/invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a command for switching performance modes (set during processing while a special image is being displayed, etc.) (B1317). If the MODE section represents a command for switching performance modes (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a performance mode switching setting process (B1318) and terminates the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for switching the presentation mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a balls out command indicating the number of balls out (B1319). If the MODE section represents a balls out command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the presentation control device 300 executes processing when the number of balls out is received (B1320) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a ball count command (the result of B1319 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a count command (a large prize opening count command) (B1321). If the MODE section represents a large prize opening switch count command (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes count information setting processing (B1322) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a count command (the result of B1321 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is included in the command sent when power is restored in step A1049 of FIG. 5B and the command sent when RAM is initialized in the processing of step A1047. If the MODE section represents a setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes processing when the setting value is received (B1324) and terminates the single-shot command processing. In the processing when the setting value is received, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a memory section such as RAM, and the necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). An example of a setting change command is the probability setting change command (A1033). If the MODE section represents a setting change command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes setting change information setting processing (B1326) and terminates the single command processing. The setting change information setting processing stores the contents of the setting change command and executes processing corresponding to the command. For example, if a probability setting change command is received, the setting change information setting processing displays a setting change in progress message on the display device 41 to inform the player that a setting change is in progress.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (the result of B1325 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). An example of a setting confirmation command is the probability setting confirmation command (A1036). If the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes setting confirmation information setting processing (B1328) and terminates the single command processing. The setting confirmation information setting processing stores the contents of the setting confirmation command and executes processing corresponding to the command. For example, if a probability setting confirmation command is received, the setting confirmation information setting processing displays a setting confirmation in progress display on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being confirmed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting confirmation command (the result of B1327 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a safety device-related command (B1329). An example of a safety device-related command is a safety device activation-related command (A9407). When a difference ball command containing difference ball information such as the safety device counter value and the number of difference balls is sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, this difference ball command may be included in the safety device-related command. Then, if the MODE section represents a safety device-related command (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the presentation control device 300 executes safety device-related processing related to the safety device (B1330) and terminates the single-shot command processing. The safety device-related processing stores the contents of the safety device-related command and executes processing corresponding to the command.

In safety device processing, information contained in safety device-related commands can be displayed on the display device 41 as processing corresponding to the commands. For example, when a safety device activation-related command is received as a safety device-related command, safety device-related displays (activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, activation display 513) corresponding to the safety device activation information (safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), safety device activation information (value 3)) contained in the ACTION section of the safety device activation-related command are displayed on the display device 41. Also, for example, when a difference ball command is received as a safety device-related command, the difference ball number is displayed on the display device 41.

The display of the difference in balls (= safety device counter value -100,000) may be configured to display the entire range of values (e.g., 0 to 100,000 or -100,000 to +100,000) on the display device 41 in response to the received difference in balls command, or may display only a specified range of values (e.g., 90,000 to 100,000 after the activation warning state). Displaying the difference in balls only within this specified range can attract the player's attention by displaying it only when the difference in balls is important, while hiding the difference in balls when the difference in balls is not important makes the display device 41 easier to view. Predetermined ranges include the range corresponding to the activation warning state (90,000 to less than 95,000), the range corresponding to the activation warning state and the activated state (95,000 or more), the range corresponding to the activation warning state, the activation warning state, and the activated state (90,000 or more), or a value equal to or greater than the value immediately before or after entering the activation warning state (e.g., 89,000 or more, 91,000 or more). The difference in balls itself may also be displayed, or the difference in balls may be displayed indirectly in the form of the number of game balls (number of game media) remaining until the safety device is activated (limiting play). Furthermore, instead of the difference in the number of balls, the safety device counter value may be displayed, and when the safety device counter value is within a predetermined range (for example, 190,000 or more after the activation warning state), it may be displayed on the display device 41.

The difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in response to the difference ball number, which changes in units of 1. For example, the difference ball number indicated by the difference ball command can change in increments of 1, between 0 and 100,000 or between -100,000 and +100,000, just like the actual difference ball number. The difference ball command may be sent each time the safety device counter value and, therefore, the difference ball number, are updated (A9711).

The ball difference command may also be notified (transmitted and received) in response to the number of balls difference, which changes in predetermined increments. For example, the number of balls difference indicated by the ball difference command can change in increments of 1,000, and may be 0 (= actual number of balls difference 0-999), 1,000 (= actual number of balls difference 1,000-1,999), 2,000 (= actual number of balls difference 2,000-2,999), ... or 100,000 (= actual number of balls difference 100,000). In this case, to reduce the number of ball difference commands being sent, the ball difference command may be sent each time the safety device counter value, and therefore the number of balls difference, is updated in increments of 1,000 (A9711). The number of balls difference indicated by the ball difference command may also be a negative value.

If the MODE section does not represent a safety device-related command (the result of B1329 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1331). Symbol stop commands include, for example, a symbol stop command for special symbol 1 (decorative special symbol 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command for special symbol 2 (decorative special symbol 2 stop command). If the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (the result of B1331 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B1332).

If the command in the MODE section is normal (the result of B1332 is "Y"), the presentation control device 300 sets the stopping mode of the corresponding special symbol (B1333), and after all symbols have stopped, sets the game status flag to the normal state (B1334), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the processing of B1334, as an example, the game status flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this processing is executed, the game status flag is set to "fluctuating," "big hit," or "small hit."

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (the result of B1331 is "N"), or if the command in the MODE section is abnormal (the result of B1332 is "N"), the performance control device 300 terminates single-shot command processing.

In addition, the presentation control device 300 may execute processing for commands not listed in FIG. 64 in single-shot command processing. For example, the presentation control device 300 may receive a time-saving variation count command, a presentation rotation count command, a play instruction notification command (left-hit instruction notification command, right-hit instruction notification command), etc. from the game control device 100 and perform processing corresponding to the command. The presentation control device 300 can obtain the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state from the time-saving variation count command (time-saving variation count), etc., and can obtain the remaining rotation count for each presentation mode from the presentation rotation count command, etc., and can set presentations based on the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state and the remaining rotation count for each presentation mode. The presentation control device 300 can display (notify) a play instruction display (left-hit instruction display or right-hit instruction display) that instructs (suggests) the play instruction on the display device 41, etc., in response to a play instruction notification command (left-hit instruction notification command or right-hit instruction notification command).

[Predictive pattern command processing]
Next, the details of the pre-reading symbol command processing (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 65. Fig. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-reading symbol command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the latest reserved information is information about special chart 1 reserved (special chart 1 start memory), for example, whether the most recently received decorative special chart reserved number command is a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (B1601). If the latest reserved information is information about special chart 1 reserved (the result of B1601 is "Y"), it saves the look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 1 reserved number (B1602).

If the latest reserved information is not special chart 1 reserved information (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, if the most recently received decorative special chart reserved number command is a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command, the performance control device 300 saves the look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 2 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the performance control device 300 sets a look-ahead fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) to indicate that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command. This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead fluctuation system command are a set, so the look-ahead fluctuation system command is sent from the game control device 100 following the look-ahead symbol system command. Then, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead variable command processing (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 66. Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command) (B1701). If the aforementioned look-ahead fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command. If it is not waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (the result of B1701 is "N"), it terminates look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. If it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (the result of B1701 is "Y"), it clears the look-ahead fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1702).

Next, the performance control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) in the latest reserved information (B1703), and acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead fluctuation command (B1704). Next, it sets a look-ahead fluctuation ACT conversion table (B1705), and acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead fluctuation command (B1706).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the converted MODE and ACT sections (i.e., the MODE and ACT sections of the sub-sub look-ahead variable command) are both non-zero (B1707). A normal (valid) command is converted to a value other than 0. If the converted MODE and ACT sections are both non-zero (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE and ACT sections is saved in the look-ahead variable command area (special chart 1 look-ahead variable command area or special chart 2 look-ahead variable command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and number of pending items (B1708). Then, a look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709) to determine whether the combination of the converted MODE and ACT sections is normal (B1710).

The duration of the first half of the fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of reserved items when the reserved item starts the fluctuation display game. If there are no other reserved items when the reserved item starts the fluctuation display game, the first half of the fluctuation will be longer, but if new reserved items are generated and the number of reserved items is large, the first half of the fluctuation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half of the fluctuation changes, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted to the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Furthermore, because the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the ACT section of the sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command does not depend on the number of holds. However, because there are different types of reaches of the same type, if the performance control device 300 were to use the ACT section (value of the latter half of the fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation command as is without converting it, the number would increase, making checking difficult. For example, even within normal reaches, there are types such as normal reach -1 stop miss and normal reach +1 stop miss. Therefore, by converting the ACT sections indicating reaches of the same type into the same sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section, the number can be reduced, and the burden of checking processes such as look-ahead command consistency check processing can be reduced.

Next, if at least one of the converted MODE and ACT sections (i.e., the sub-internal look-ahead variable command MODE and ACT sections) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or if the combination of the converted MODE and ACT sections is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines that there is an abnormality in the converted command and terminates the look-ahead variable command processing.

If the combination of the MODE section and ACT section after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead from the read-ahead variable command area (B1711) and executes a read-ahead lottery process for the latest hold read-ahead effect (B1712). Examples of read-ahead effects (read-ahead notice effects) include continuous notice effects (including chance eye read-ahead effects), read-ahead zone effects, and hold change notices. Next, it determines whether or not a read-ahead effect for the latest hold (hold change notice, etc.) will occur (B1713). If a read-ahead effect for the latest hold will occur (the result of B1713 is "Y"), it sets point information corresponding to the selected read-ahead effect (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the anticipated effect (such as a hold change notification) to be generated is an effect that will start immediately (B1715). If the anticipated effect to be generated is an effect that will start immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), a display corresponding to the selected anticipated effect is set (B1716). If the anticipated effect to be generated is not an effect that will start immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), a display corresponding to the anticipated effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display moves or the number of holds decreases) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the anticipated change command processing is terminated. Note that the anticipated effect is an effect that notifies the expected jackpot probability (expected probability of a special result) by notifying information suggesting the result (game result) of the variable display game before the variable display game stops, but it may also be configured to notify information suggesting the set probability setting value (1 to 6). In other words, the effect control device 300 can perform an anticipated effect by changing the hold display (icon) of the anticipated object based on the expected jackpot probability or the probability setting value.

On the other hand, if the latest pending look-ahead performance does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), the performance control device 300 will simply terminate the look-ahead variation command processing.

[Pattern command processing]
Next, the details of the symbol command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 sets the special symbol type corresponding to the MODE section of the received symbol command (decorative special symbol 1 command or decorative special symbol 2 command) (B1801). The special symbol type is either special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE section and ACTION section (ACT section) of the symbol command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Because the symbol allocation ratio differs between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, a table is used to set the symbol type for each MODE. Note that in this embodiment, symbol types correspond to losing symbols, jackpot symbol A for special symbol 1, jackpot symbols B-F for special symbol 2, jackpot symbol G for remaining reserved symbols (special symbol 2 reserved), time-saving symbols (support winning symbols), etc.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 determines whether the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the received fluctuation command (fluctuation command) is undetermined (B1901). If the special symbol type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 terminates the fluctuation command processing. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received fluctuation command and symbol type is checked (B1902), and a determination is made as to whether the fluctuation command and symbol type are inconsistent (B1903). Here, "inconsistency" refers to a contradiction in the performance, such as when a fluctuation command for a losing symbol is received but a symbol type command for a winning symbol is received. If the fluctuation command and symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 terminates the fluctuation command processing.

If the fluctuation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) (B1904) and executes a fluctuation effect setting process to set the fluctuation effect, which is the effect that is currently fluctuating (B1905). Note that multiple effects can exist for the same fluctuation command. Next, the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) is set to "special symbol fluctuating" (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as consecutive effects is not 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variable performance setting processing]
Next, details of the variable performance setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 68) described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 69. Fig. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the fluctuation pattern type is a no-reach fluctuation (a fluctuation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). If the fluctuation pattern type is a no-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), it sets a first half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special symbol type, performance mode, and setting information (setting value) (B2002), and obtains the address of the first half preview distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) and the number of reserved special symbol types (B2003). In the case of a no-reach fluctuation, the greater the number of reserved symbols, the shorter the fluctuation time, so it obtains the address of the table corresponding to the number of reserved symbols.

If the variation pattern type is not a no-reach variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), i.e., if it is a reach variation, the performance control device 300 sets a first half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special symbol type, performance mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) (B2004), and obtains the address of the first half preview distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the performance control device 300 performs a lottery for the preview that will appear during the first half of the fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Next, it sets a second half of the preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special symbol type, performance mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) (B2007), obtains the address of the second half of the preview distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the fluctuation system command (B2008), and performs a lottery for the preview that will appear during the second half of the fluctuation (during the reach) (B2009). It then determines the content of the fluctuation performance that corresponds to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) (B2010). The fluctuation system command also reveals the fluctuation time and main reach content, etc.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (pre-announcement effect) corresponding to the result of the pre-announcement lottery (B2011). After that, the stopping pattern for the decorative special symbol variable display game is determined according to the variable effects such as reach effects and the content of the pre-announcement effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stopping pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattering pattern in the case of a losing pattern.

Next, the performance control device 300 sets the display for the variable performance (B2013) and the preview performance (B2014). Next, it sets the display for the hold reduction corresponding to the special symbol type; for example, it sets a display showing a decrease in the hold display corresponding to the decorative special symbol that is changing this time (hold shift display) (B2015). Next, it sets an audio number that determines the performance mode (sound output mode) using the speaker's audio, and a decoration number that determines the performance mode using the light emitted by the decoration device (B2016). The decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) have multiple decorative light-emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emit light in the light-emitting mode (color and light-emitting timing of each LED, etc.) determined by the decoration number.

It is also possible to set the audio numbers and decoration numbers based not only on the performance content but also on the setting information (setting values). In this way, players can enjoy guessing the setting information (setting values) of the gaming machine 10 from the light-emitting mode of the decoration device, i.e., the light-emitting mode of the decorative light-emitting unit (LED).

Next, the performance control device 300 performs display settings for decorative special symbol variations corresponding to the special symbol type (B2017), and performs display settings for a fourth symbol variation relating to a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) in addition to the aforementioned first to third special symbols that vary on the display device 41 (B2018). Note that the fourth symbol variation may be displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the aforementioned lamp display device 80 provided outside the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the MODE portion of the received winning command indicates fanfare (B2101). If the MODE portion of the winning command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), i.e., if the winning command is a big win fanfare command or a small win fanfare command, it executes a fanfare effect setting process to set a fanfare effect (B2102). In addition, in response to a big win fanfare command or a small win fanfare command, a play instruction (left-hit instruction or right-hit instruction) may be displayed (announced) on the display device 41 or the like. The fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for the current big win. Next, the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to "fanfare in progress" (B2103), and the winning command processing is terminated. The upper limit for the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (the special decorative symbol command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern).

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents a round (B2104). If the MODE section represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a round command or a small win open command, the presentation control device 300 executes a round presentation setting process, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "round in progress" (B2105, B2106), and terminates the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents an interval (B2107). If the MODE section represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an interval command, the presentation control device 300 executes interval presentation setting processing, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "interval in progress" (B2108, B2109), and terminates the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent an interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents an ending (B2110). If the MODE section represents an ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an ending command, the presentation control device 300 executes an ending presentation setting process to set an ending presentation, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and terminates the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent an ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the performance control device 300 will terminate the winning command processing without performing any processing.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 71A is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating transitions of game states in the first embodiment. The game state transitions (shifts) under the game control of the game control device 100. The game state transitions are particularly shown as being triggered by the occurrence of a jackpot, or by the passage of a predetermined number of games (number of spins, number of fluctuations). In FIG. 71A, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special game probability), the state of the normal game win probability (normal game probability), which is the probability of a win in the normal game variable display game, the presentation mode, the main variable display game (main variable display game, main variable), and the right- or left-hand shot firing mode are shown.

As mentioned above, the presentation mode (presentation stage) can be set by the game control device 100 through the jackpot end process (Figure 40) or presentation mode information check process (Figure 35), etc. However, this is not limited to this, and the presentation control device 300 can also set it based on the number of time-saving cycles, the specified number of remaining reserves, the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed after the jackpot ends, etc.

In addition, in Figure 71A, the specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) in the case of ceiling time-saving due to reaching the ceiling number of times and sudden time-saving due to time-saving symbols are omitted (similar to Figure 71B), but these will be explained in detail in the second embodiment (Figure 77) and third embodiment (Figure 82) described below.

In the first embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state, a specific game state, and a transition state. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state as a probability-changing state in which the probability of a jackpot is high.

Incidentally, because the probability of a jackpot and a regular win in the transition state is the same as in the normal game state, the transition state can be included in the normal game state in terms of probability. In other words, the transition state can be considered a normal game state in which the main variable display game becomes the special 2 variable display game. However, in the transition state, the special 2 variable display game is executed as the remaining reserved balls are consumed, and the special 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game, and a jackpot due to a small win or a V passage during a small win (the game ball passing through the V entry port, V entry) occurs with a small win probability of 1/8. For this reason, the transition state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than normal, and from this perspective, it can be considered a game state that can be distinguished from the normal game state. Furthermore, the transition state and the specific game state (time-saving state) can be collectively considered advantageous states that are advantageous to the player, or the specific game state (time-saving state) can be considered the first advantageous state and the transition state the second advantageous state.

First, we will explain each game state. In the normal game state, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot probability to low (special low probability) and the normal win probability to low (normal low probability). In this embodiment, the normal low probability state is considered to be a state without normal power support (no support state), and the normal high probability state is considered to be a state with normal power support (support state). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is opened due to a normal win in a support state, if the normal low probability is set at the time of opening, it will be in a no-support state. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the normal variable winning device 37 to be considered to be in a support state while it is open.

In addition, in normal game play, the presentation mode is normal mode. In normal game play, left-handed shots, which make it easier for the game ball to enter the first start winning slot 36, are more advantageous for the player than right-handed shots, and are recommended as the game ball launch mode. The main start area where the game ball is more likely to enter with the recommended launch mode is the first start winning slot 36, and the main variable display game (main variable special chart) is the special chart 1 variable display game. The secondary start area where the game ball is less likely to enter with the recommended launch mode is the normal variable winning device 37, and the secondary variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game.

In the specific game state (time-saving state), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot probability to be low, but the normal win probability to be high (normal high probability). In the specific game state, the normal variable winning device 37 is more likely to open as the game ball is launched, so a right hit aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning slot 36, so the main variable display game is the special variable 2 display game, and the secondary variable display game is the special variable 1 display game.

Furthermore, in a specific game state, there are cases where the number of time-saving times is less than or equal to a reference number (here, 5 times) (time-saving times≦5), and cases where it is greater than the reference number, 99 times (time-saving times=99). The presentation mode when the number of time-saving times≦5 is time-saving mode #1, and the presentation mode when the number of time-saving times=99 is time-saving mode #2. By differentiating the presentation modes of time-saving mode #1 and time-saving mode #2, the entertainment value of the game can be increased. Note that the reference number may be, for example, approximately the reciprocal of the small win probability of 1/8 (8 times), or may be 7 times, etc. The smaller the reference number, the more unlikely it is that a small win (a small win resulting in a big win state when a V passes through) will occur in time-saving mode #1, while the difference with presentation mode #2 will be greater, creating a more striking effect.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the end of a specific game state (time-saving state). In the transition state, remaining reserves created by winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) that is opened by a normal win during the specific game state are consumed, and the special power 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. The presentation mode of the transition state is the remaining reserve consumption mode. Furthermore, the remaining reserve consumption mode may be divided into a pre-normal power release end mode before the release of normal power due to a normal win during the specific game state ends, and a normal power release end mode after the release of normal power ends. In the pre-normal power release end mode, hitting with the right to aim for normal power is recommended, and in the normal power release end mode, hitting with the left is recommended since the normal power is closed.

If the remaining reserve consumption mode, which is the transition state presentation mode, is divided into a mode before the normal power release ends and a mode after the normal power release ends, it will be easier for players to understand whether the normal power is released (should they hit right) or closed (should they hit left). If it is not divided, it will be easier to recognize that the remaining reserve is being consumed throughout the transition state.

Also, as mentioned above, the transition state and the specific game state (time-saving state) can be collectively considered to be advantageous states that are advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the same presentation mode can be used instead of being separated. In this case, the advantageous state in which the special symbol 2 variable display game is the main variable display game can be used as a common presentation mode. As described below, if a special symbol win occurs when the remaining reserve is consumed (a jackpot when a V passes during a small win), the game value awarded to the player can be greater than if the special symbol win occurs during the specific game state. This allows the player to obtain greater game value, even though it is unclear from the common presentation mode whether the time-saving state or the remaining reserve is being consumed, which can please the player. Note that here, the game value (benefit) refers to the number of time-saving periods after the jackpot ends and the number of jackpots ultimately obtained.

Next, we will explain the transitions from each game state. First, in the normal game state, if a jackpot (not due to a V win) occurs in the special chart variable display game, the game will transition to the special game state after the jackpot state ends.

When a small win (a big win state occurs when a V passes) occurs during the special game mode, the game returns to the special game mode after the big win state ends. In this case, the game returns to time-saving mode #1, and the number of time-saving cycles as a game value (benefit) is equal to or less than the standard number (time-saving cycles ≦ 5).

When a predetermined transition condition is met, the specific game state transitions to the transition state. For example, the predetermined transition condition is met when any of the following occurs: (i) the number of times the special symbol 2 variable display game is played in the specific game state exceeds the time-saving count (first predetermined count, the initial value of time-saving count 2); (ii) the total number of times the special symbol 2 variable display game (special symbol 1 variable display game and special symbol 2 variable display game) is played in the specific game state exceeds a second predetermined count (initial value of time-saving count 1, for example, twice the time-saving count) that is greater than the time-saving count (first predetermined count); or (iii) the normal power release ends a predetermined number of times (for example, two times). The second predetermined count may be the time-saving count (first predetermined count) plus the maximum number of reserved special symbol 1 symbols (for example, 4). Condition (iii) is established as a countermeasure against stop-hitting.

The original specifications (performance) of the gaming machine 10 are such that in the specific gaming state, the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game, which is the master variable display game, can be executed a time-saving number of times. However, if the condition for transitioning from the specific gaming state were to be simply that the total number of times the Special Chart Variable Display Game is executed exceeds the number of times the time-saving number is executed, as in the past, the game would deviate from the original specifications of the gaming machine 10 to the extent that the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game, which is the subordinate variable display game, is executed. However, by setting the two conditions (i) and (ii), the execution of the subordinate variable display game can be treated as a bonus (benefit), allowing the player to play according to the original specifications without incurring any losses. Furthermore, if the player plays normally, the transition to the transition state will occur when condition (i) is met, and it is highly unlikely that condition (ii) will be met.

In addition, in time-saving mode #2 in the specific game state, it is possible to continue until the special chart 2 variable display game has been executed 99 times, so a small win will almost certainly occur (a jackpot state will occur when the V passes), and after the jackpot state ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode #1) will resume. Therefore, time-saving mode #2 becomes a next-time continuation confirmation mode (confirmation mode) in which the specific game state will definitely continue after the jackpot state ends.

In the transition state, when the special chart 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal game state, where the special chart 1 variation display game takes place. Meanwhile, if a small win occurs in the transition state (a jackpot state occurs when a V passes during a small win), the game transitions to the specific game state's time-saving mode #2 after the jackpot state ends, and 99 time-saving cycles are awarded. In other words, if a small win (a jackpot after a V passes) occurs in the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) where remaining reserves are consumed, the number of time-saving cycles will be greater than the number of time-saving cycles (≦5) that would occur if a small win (a jackpot after a V passes) occurred in the specific game state, and the game value awarded to the player will be greater. Furthermore, if a small win (a jackpot after a V passes) occurs in the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), a small win (a jackpot after a V passes) will almost certainly occur in the next time-saving mode #2, so a total of two jackpots will be secured as game value.

[Another example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
71B is another example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. The transition of the game state in FIG. 71B can also be applied to the second embodiment.

In Figure 71B, the remaining reserves, which are all Special Graphic 2 reserves that are consumed after the time-saving feature has ended, are divided into predetermined remaining reserves (first remaining reserves) and excess reserves (second remaining reserves). The remaining reserve consumption mode, which is a presentation mode corresponding to the transition state, is also divided into a time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode in which predetermined remaining reserves are consumed, and an excess reserve consumption mode in which excess reserves are consumed. Here, the predetermined remaining reserves are the first predetermined number of Special Graphic 2 reserves (all or part of the Special Graphic 2 reserves) that are generated during the time-saving feature and consumed after the time-saving feature has ended, and the excess reserves are Special Graphic 2 reserves (remaining reserves) that are consumed after the predetermined remaining reserves. The excess reserve consumption mode may include, for example, a mode in which a result screen showing the game results is displayed on the display device 41 or other special modes. Note that the time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode and the time-saving mode (time-saving mode #1 or time-saving mode #2) have in common the consumption of Special Graphic 2 reserves that occurred during the time-saving feature, and therefore may be treated as the same presentation mode with the same presentation style.

[Number of time-saving times and remaining reserved times corresponding to the pattern]
Figure 72 is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the specified number of remaining reserved times (specified remaining reserved times) corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol variable display game. The symbols are the symbols that result in a jackpot, and in this case, they are determined by a jackpot symbol random number, excluding time-saving symbols. The symbols are winning stopping symbols and may correspond to either stopping symbol numbers or stopping symbol patterns. (A) relates to the winning symbols in the special symbol 1 variable display game. The upper diagram in (B) relates to the winning symbols in the special symbol 2 variable display game during the normal symbol high probability state (time-saving state), and the lower diagram relates to the winning symbols (winning symbols in the remaining reserved times) in the special symbol 2 variable display game during the normal symbol low probability state.

Pattern A is a stopping pattern determined by a jackpot pattern random number, and is the stopping pattern for a jackpot in the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game. Patterns B-F are also stopping patterns determined by a jackpot pattern random number, but are the stopping patterns for a jackpot related to a V passing (V winning) in a small jackpot in the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game during a normal high probability state (time-saving state). Pattern G is also a stopping pattern determined by a jackpot pattern random number, but is the stopping pattern for a jackpot related to a V passing (V winning) in a small jackpot (small jackpot with remaining reserves) in the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game during a normal low probability state. Note that if there is a small jackpot pattern random number in addition to the jackpot pattern random number, patterns B-F and G can also be configured to be the stopping patterns for a small jackpot determined by the small jackpot pattern random number.

The allocation (selection rate) for pattern A is 100%, and pattern A is the only stopping pattern for a jackpot in the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game. Patterns B-F have allocations of 40%, 25%, 15%, 10%, and 10% for the jackpot random number, respectively. Pattern G has an allocation rate of 100%.

For pattern A, which is a type of jackpot in the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game, the number of time-saving cycles after a jackpot is one. Furthermore, for pattern A, the number of remaining reserved balls that can be consumed after the time-saving cycle ends is four. Therefore, the total number of reserved balls that can be consumed by playing the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game after the jackpot cycle ends is five (= 1 + 4) according to the regulations. For pattern A, with a small jackpot probability of 1/8, the continuation rate is {1 - (1 - 1/8) ⁵ } x 100% = 48.7%, and the transition rate to fixed mode is (1 - 1/8) x {1 - (1 - 1/8) ⁴ } x 100% = 36.2%.

For the B-F patterns, which are the types of jackpots in the Special 2 Variable Display game started during the normal high probability state, the number of time-saving cycles after a jackpot is 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, respectively. Also, for the B-F patterns, the specified remaining reserve numbers are 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, respectively. Therefore, the total number of Special 2 reserves that can be consumed by playing the Special 2 Variable Display game after the jackpot state ends is 10, according to the regulations, for all B-F patterns. For the B-F patterns, with a small jackpot probability of 1/8, the continuation rate is the same for each: {1 - (1 - 1/8) ¹⁰ } x 100% = 73.7%, and the transition rate to the fixed mode is 25.0%, 32.3%, 40.7%, 50.3%, and 61.2%, respectively.

For the G pattern, which is a type of jackpot (remaining reserve jackpot) in the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game started during the normal chart low probability state, the number of time-saving cycles after a jackpot is 99. Furthermore, for the G pattern, the specified remaining reserve number is four. Therefore, the total number of Special Chart 2 reserves that can be consumed by playing the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game after the jackpot state ends is 103. For the G pattern, with a small win probability of 1/8, the continuation rate is approximately 100% and the transition rate to fixed mode is approximately 0%. Therefore, for the G pattern, after a jackpot with remaining reserves ends, the game transitions to time-saving mode #2, ensuring another jackpot, and then the specific game state (time-saving state) continues. On the other hand, for the G pattern, the transition rate to fixed mode is approximately 0%, and the flow is almost always to transition from time-saving mode #2 in the specific game state via a jackpot to time-saving mode #1.

The continuation rate is the probability that the specific game state will continue due to the special symbol 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends (within 5 times for symbol A, within 10 times for symbol B-F, and within 103 times for symbol G), and is the probability of re-entering the specific game state without passing through the normal game state (normal mode). The fixed mode transition rate is the probability of transitioning from the remaining reserve consumption mode to time-saving mode #2 (fixed mode, next-time continuation fixed mode) due to the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the remaining reserves after the jackpot state ends.

The continuation rate depends on the total number of reserved special symbols 2 consumed after the jackpot state ends (i.e., the number of times the variable display game for special symbol 2 is played after the jackpot state ends), and the continuation rate for symbols B-F, which has a total of 10, is greater than the continuation rate for symbol A, which has a total of 5. Furthermore, as the number of time-saving cycles decreases and the specified remaining reserved number increases in the order of symbols B-F, the transition rate to fixed mode increases.

As described above, for symbols B-F, the number of time-saving times is set according to the symbol, which is the type of jackpot (type of special result). Therefore, the specific game state after the jackpot ends has a variable number of time-saving times (1-5) that is set by lottery (allocation) and changes randomly, increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, the remaining reserve number (5-9), which is the number of times the special symbol 2 variable display game is executed after the specific game state ends, changes according to the number of time-saving times. Therefore, the remaining reserve number is also random and variable, set by lottery, increasing the enjoyment of the game. In particular, if there is a difference in play value between a jackpot in a specific game state and a jackpot with remaining reserves, the player will be excited or disappointed by the remaining reserve number set by lottery, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, with regard to the winning symbols B-F in the main variable display game (special chart 2 variable display game) in the specific game state, even if the number of time-saving cycles and the number of remaining reserves are variable, the sum of the number of time-saving cycles and the number of remaining reserves is constant (10), so the continuation rate of the specific game state can be kept the same while the transition rate to the fixed mode can be made variable. As mentioned above, if the same presentation mode is executed in both the specific game state (time-saving mode) and the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) while the number of special chart 2 variable display games equal to the sum of the number of time-saving cycles and the number of remaining reserves is being played, it will be difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving cycle is in progress or whether the remaining reserves are being consumed, and the player will be surprised when they win a jackpot with the remaining reserves and receive significant game value (99 time-saving cycles), increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation]
Figure 73 is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation.

As shown in Figure 73 (A), there is only one type of winning symbol (winning stop symbol, normal winning symbol) in the normal symbol variation display game, and the same normal power release pattern is always obtained. When the normal symbol variation display game is in a winning state, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) always opens at the same timing.

The probability of winning a normal map is 0/251 (0%) in low probability states and 251/251 (100%) in high probability states. The normal map fluctuation display game always wins in high probability states and always loses in low probability states, eliminating randomness. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning a normal map can be a value greater than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)) in low probability states (normal gameplay state, etc.).

The start memory count (number of reserved normal symbols) for the normal symbol variation display game is essentially 0, and even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 during the winning state (normal power operation) and during the variation of the normal symbol variation display game, the normal symbol start memory for the normal symbol variation display game is not stored. The normal symbol variation display game can only be started while the stopped symbol is displayed, and if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 during the stopped display, a normal symbol start memory is generated, but it is immediately consumed and the normal symbol variation display game begins. In this way, the start memory for the normal symbol variation display game does not actually accumulate, so the normal symbol variation display game is played at a good tempo. Therefore, in a specific game state, the normal symbol variation display game or normal power operation and the special symbol variation display game are more likely to be linked without any discrepancies, and this also helps prevent strategy attempts.

The normal map fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, is 200 msec. Note that it may be 200 msec in a normal map high probability state and longer than 200 msec in a normal map low probability state. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 48 msec. In a specific game state (time-saving state, normal map high probability state), in order to link the normal map fluctuation display game (and thus the normal power operation) and the special map fluctuation display game without any discrepancy, it is preferable that the normal map fluctuation time and normal map stop time be as short as possible. Assuming that the launch speed of game balls is 100 balls per minute, game balls can pass through the normal map start gate 34 every 600 msec, so it is preferable that the time required for one normal map fluctuation display game, i.e., the sum of the normal map fluctuation time and normal map stop time, be less than 600 msec.

Also, the maximum count number (count upper limit) for regular power is 10.

Figure 73 (B) is a diagram showing the normal map start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power), and the surrounding configuration. The gaming machine 10 has the following configuration so that almost all game balls hit to the right in time with the opening of the normal power (normal power opening) pass through the normal map start gate 34 and win the normal power.

First, to ensure a consistent winning rate (the rate at which one game ball wins) for the normal variable winning device 37 when hitting the right side in time with the normal power release, obstacle pins 32a and structures are removed as much as possible from the playing area 32 around the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37, to prevent unevenness in the movement of the game balls. For example, no obstacle pins 32a or structures are placed between the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 or on either side in the playing area 32. Two rows of obstacle pins 32a, placed approximately directly above the normal map start gate 34, form a path for game balls, preventing game balls from leaking out. The path formed by the two rows of obstacle pins 32a is smoothly connected to the upper path 32c formed by a structure.

Furthermore, the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 are positioned so that a game ball that passes through the normal map start gate 34 will enter the normal variable winning device 37 as is. In other words, the normal variable winning device 37 is positioned directly below the normal map start gate 34. For example, if the normal variable winning device 37 is designed to open before a game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34 reaches the normal variable winning device 37, the distance L (the distance between the centers in the vertical direction) between the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 may be greater than the product of the average falling speed of the game ball and the time required for one normal map variable display game. However, the distance L should be short enough so that the game ball will enter the normal variable winning device 37 as is even if the falling direction of the game ball that passes through the normal map start gate 34 deviates from the vertical.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, to prevent unevenness in the number of wins in the normal variable prize winning device 37, it is preferable that the normal variable prize winning device 37 be a so-called tongue type that can rotate so that the movable member 37b can fall forward.

Figure 73 (C) shows the opening pattern (normal power opening pattern) of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) of this embodiment. The normal power opening pattern indicates the operating mode of the normal power due to a single normal hit. The normal power opening pattern after the jackpot state ends is the same regardless of the jackpot patterns A-G (i.e., the type of jackpot). The number enclosed in the square frame is the value of the control pointer (Figure 51, etc.) during a normal hit.

In this embodiment, in a normal power release pattern per normal map, the normal power is released twice. Note that the normal power may be released multiple times, more than twice. The normal power release is divided into a first half release and a second half release, separated by a long interval in which the normal power is closed. The normal power interval time (wait time), which is the interval time, is 60,000 msec, and the normal power release time for both the first half release and the second half release is 3,000 msec.

For example, if the launch speed of game balls is 100 per minute, game balls reach the normal power every 600 msec, so it is possible to win on the normal power five times during the first half of the 3000 msec opening, and after the 60,000 msec interval, it is possible to win on the normal power five times during the second half of the 3000 msec opening. The special chart 2 reserves accumulated during the first half of the opening can be consumed during the 60,000 msec interval when the normal power is closed, reducing the number of special chart 2 reserves to 0, and the maximum number of special chart 2 reserves (here, four) can be accumulated during the subsequent second half of the opening.

If, during the normal power interval (closed state), the number of times the Special Chart 2 variable display game has been executed after the end of the jackpot state reaches the time-saving count, the specific game state (time-saving state, normal chart high probability state, state with support) ends and the normal chart low probability state (transition state) begins. The Special Chart 2 reserves accumulated during the first half of the opening but consumed after the time-saving state ends become remaining reserves, and in addition, the Special Chart 2 reserves accumulated by winning on the normal power during the 3000 msec second half of the opening also become remaining reserves. In this way, even in the normal chart low probability state, it is possible to accumulate more remaining reserves by opening the second half.

As described above, by deriving a single normal win (specific result) in the normal win display game, the normal win device 37 can be converted to the open state multiple times, and the normal win device 37 can be converted to the open state in both a high probability state where the probability of the normal win in the normal win display game is high, and a low probability state where the probability is low. Therefore, even if the probability of a normal win is low, the normal win device 37 can be converted to the open state and special win 2 can be accumulated, which pleases the player and increases the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the first half of normal power is released, special chart 2 reserves can be accumulated and consumed at intervals, and when the second half of normal power is released, special chart 2 reserves can be accumulated again and consumed after normal power operation ends. This means that the remaining reserves can be increased beyond the upper limit of 4 for special chart 2 reserves, and by making the number of time-saving cycles variable, the number of remaining reserves can also be made variable.

[Timing chart]
Figures 74-76 are timing charts showing the game state, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol state, normal power state, number of reserved special symbols 2, and special symbol change display game (special symbol change) after a jackpot. The further to the right on the timing chart, the more time passes. Figure 74 is after a jackpot with symbol A, Figure 75 is after a jackpot with symbol B, and Figure 76 is after a jackpot with symbol F.

Regarding what happens after a jackpot for patterns B-F, only the timing of the change from the normal high probability state (specific game state) to the normal low probability state differs depending on the number of time-saving rounds and the specified remaining reserve number, so only patterns B and F are shown as examples. Apart from the game state and normal probability, the rest of the situation is the same for all patterns B-F.

Figures 74-76 also show pulses indicating the passage of the game ball through the normal map start gate 34 (normal map gate) (detection by gate switch 34a) and the entry of the game ball into the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) (detection by start gate 2 switch 37a). In Figures 74-76, the appearance and changes of the game ball passing through the normal map gate, the normal map state, the normal power state, and the normal power winning (winning into the normal power) are the same, and explanations will be omitted where appropriate.

In Figures 74-76, the jackpot round (during jackpot) and jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. During the jackpot ending where the ending performance is executed, when the player hits the right hand, as prompted by the right hand instruction display, the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 (normal symbol gate) (shown by the first pulse in Figure 74), the normal symbol (normal symbol) changes on the normal symbol display 53, and the normal symbol change display game is executed, which then stops. Here, because the normal symbol probability state is in effect when the normal symbol starts to change, the game stops with a miss.

Here, when the normal symbol misses and stops, the jackpot ending ends, and the normal symbol probability enters a high probability state, and the game enters a right-hand hit state with support, corresponding to the specific game state (time-saving mode #1) of Figure 71A. At the beginning of the right-hand hit state with support (normal symbol high probability state), the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 34, and the normal symbol begins to change. Then, because the normal symbol probability is 100%, a normal symbol is hit, the normal symbol operation begins, and the normal symbol is opened as the first half is opened. In the open state where the normal symbol is opened, the game ball that passes through the normal symbol start gate 34 goes straight into the normal symbol (indicated by a pulse). As soon as one special symbol 2 reserve is generated, the special symbol 2 reserve is consumed, the special symbol 2 variation display game begins, and the number of special symbol 2 reserves becomes 0.

As mentioned above, the gaming control device 100 controls the fluctuation time (execution time) and stop display time of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game based on the number of special chart 2 fluctuations (number of times the special chart 2 fluctuation display game has been executed) since the end of the jackpot state (the fluctuation start information setting process in FIG. 32 and the special chart fluctuation processing in FIG. 33). The gaming control device 100 sets the fluctuation time and stop display time of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game to be different for three types: after the end of a jackpot for pattern A, after the end of a jackpot for patterns B-F, and after the end of a jackpot for pattern G.

After a jackpot for pattern A in Figure 74, the fluctuation time is set long enough so that the first special chart 2 variable display game continues at least until the end of normal power operation, i.e., the end of the second half opening. The fluctuation time of the first special chart 2 variable display game is approximately the same as the normal power operation time (66,000 msec, 66 seconds) in Figure 74, but it may also be the normal power operation time with a margin (several seconds to several tens of seconds) added to it. In this way, the first special chart 2 variable display game is executed in response to (in conjunction with) the normal power operation, which includes two open states, and the special chart 2 reserve is accumulated to the maximum value of four during the execution of this special chart 2 variable display game.

Since the time-saving mode is activated once after a jackpot for symbol A, when the first special symbol 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode) ends, the game enters a low probability normal symbol state, and the game transitions to a transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode). In the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), a special symbol 2 variable display game based on the four remaining special symbol 2 reserves is executed four times with a significantly shorter fluctuation time than the first time (second to fifth special symbol 2 variable display games). These second to fifth special symbol 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed fluctuation time.

After a jackpot for pattern B in Figure 75, the first special chart 2 variable display game begins at least before the end of the first half of the normal power release and continues until after it ends. Also, the fluctuation time of the first special chart 2 variable display game is approximately the same as the normal power release time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in Figure 75, but it may be longer than the normal power release time. Corresponding to (in conjunction with) the first half of the normal power release, the first special chart 2 variable display game is executed, and the maximum number of special chart 2 reserves, four, is accumulated during the execution of this special chart 2 variable display game. All four accumulated special chart 2 reserves are consumed during the interval in which the normal power is closed, and during the interval, the special chart 2 variable display game is executed four times (second to fifth special chart 2 variable display games) with a fluctuation time significantly shorter than the first time. These second to fifth special chart 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed fluctuation time.

Since the number of time-saving cycles after a jackpot on pattern B is five, when the fifth Special Chart 2 Variable Display game ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode) ends, the normal chart low probability state is entered, and the transition to the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) occurs. In the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), the normal power is opened as a second half release. As soon as one Special Chart 2 reserve is generated as a remaining reserve due to a win on an open normal power, the Special Chart 2 reserve is consumed, and the sixth Special Chart 2 Variable Display game begins, with the number of Special Chart 2 reserves becoming 0.

In response to (and in conjunction with) the opening of the second half of the regular power, the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is executed, and while this special chart 2 variable display game is being executed, the maximum number of special chart 2 reserves, four, is accumulated. The sixth special chart 2 variable display game begins at least before the end of the opening of the second half of the regular power, and continues until after it ends. The variable time of the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is approximately the same as the regular power opening time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in Figure 75, but may be longer than the regular power opening time.

After the sixth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game, four Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games based on the four remaining reserved Special Chart 2 reserves are executed with a significantly shorter fluctuation time than the first and sixth games (seventh through tenth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games). In this way, the specified remaining reserve number of five corresponding to the sixth through tenth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games can be achieved.

The seventh through tenth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games may all have the same fixed, short variable time, which may be the same as or shorter than the variable time of the second through fifth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games (particularly the variable time during the time-saving state). This allows the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games to be played at a consistent tempo and rhythm, and allows remaining reserves to be consumed quickly. Note that the seventh through tenth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games only consume the Special Chart 2 reserve and are not related to saving, so if the variable variable time is selected by allocating a variable pattern (lottery), the game will not be monotonous. Furthermore, the variable time of the seventh through tenth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games can be made longer than the variable time of the second through fifth Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games (particularly the variable time during the time-saving state), allowing for a slower response effect.

Furthermore, when the second half of the normal power release is complete, the normal winning state ends, and the normal power variation display game can be executed by the passage of the game ball through the normal power start gate 34 (normal power gate). However, since the normal power is in a low probability state with a normal power winning probability of 0%, no winning result occurs in the normal power variation display game. The pause after the normal power winning state ends corresponds to the normal power remaining ball processing time and the normal power ending time.

After a jackpot with pattern F in Figure 76, the state and changes of the game ball passing through the normal gate, the normal state, normal power state, normal power winnings, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the special pattern change display game (special pattern change) are the same as after a jackpot with pattern B in Figure 75. However, because the number of time-saving turns and the specified remaining number of reserved balls differ between pattern B and pattern F, the timing of the change from the specific game state (normal pattern high probability state) to the transition state (normal pattern low probability state, remaining reserve consumption mode) differs.

After a jackpot on pattern F, when the first Special Chart 2 Variable Display game ends, the special game state (time-saving mode) ends, the normal chart low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) is entered. After that, just like after a jackpot on pattern B, nine Special Chart 2 Variable Display games are played, achieving the specified number of nine remaining reserves.

As shown in Figures 75 and 76, the game control device 100 can execute the special chart 2 variable display game for a long period of time in response to the open state of the normal power, and can execute the special chart 2 variable display game for a short period of time in response to the closed state (interval) of the normal power. Therefore, special chart 2 reserves can be accumulated when the normal power is opened in the first half and consumed at intervals, and special chart 2 reserves can be accumulated again when the normal power is opened in the second half and consumed after the normal power operation ends. Therefore, the remaining reserves can be increased beyond the upper limit of four special chart 2 reserves, and the number of remaining reserves can also be made variable by varying the number of time-saving cycles.

Note that, although not shown, what happens after a jackpot for pattern G, for example, while repeating normal power operations, the special pattern 2 variable display game may be executed for only the number of time-saving rounds (99 rounds) and remaining reserved balls (4 balls) in a short, fixed variable time such as the 2nd to 5th and 7th to 10th rounds in Figures 74-76. Note that if the variable time for the special pattern 2 variable display game after a jackpot for pattern G is fixed, the special pattern 2 variable display game can be executed at a good tempo, but if the variable time is not fixed but variable, the game will not be monotonous.

The above describes the first embodiment, but the specific gaming state may be not only a time-saving state but also a probability variable state (excluding a latent probability variable state). Furthermore, the first embodiment may be applied not only to type 1/2 hybrid machines (type 1+2 machines), but also to a single type of gaming machine (so-called digital pachinko machines) that simply has a specific gaming state (time-saving state or probability variable state). For a single type of gaming machine that has a probability variable state, especially for machines (so-called mild digital pachinko machines and short-term pachinko machines) that have a high probability of winning even with a low probability of winning a special symbol after the probability variable state ends, the application of the first embodiment is highly effective because a jackpot can be expected based on the remaining reserved number.

[Actions and Effects of the First Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a special symbol variable display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (a normal variable winning device 37, a normal power supply) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state or a probability variable state). The game control means (e.g., the game control device 100) can execute a game (e.g., a special symbol 2 variable display game) based on a start memory (e.g., a special symbol 2 reserve) generated by winning the variable winning device. The game value (e.g., the number of time-saving or probability variable times) awarded to a player when a game results in a special result (e.g., a small win or a big win, including a big win due to a V win during a small win) in a specific gaming state differs from the game value awarded to a player when a special result is achieved after the specific gaming state ends.

In this type of gaming machine 10, there is a difference in the gaming value awarded for special game results during the specific gaming state and after the specific gaming state ends, so the player will be excited or depressed depending on the number of start memories that occur during the specific gaming state and result in the game being executed after the specific gaming state ends, which will increase the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control device 100) capable of executing a game (a normal map variable display game). The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a variable winning device (a normal variable winning device 37, a normal power supply) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state when the result of the game (a normal map variable display game) is a specific result (a normal map win). The gaming control means can convert the variable winning device to the open state multiple times by deriving a single specific result (a normal map win), and can convert the variable winning device to the open state in both a high probability state where the probability of the game achieving a specific result (a normal map win) is high, and a low probability state where the probability is low.

In this type of gaming machine 10, even if the probability of the game achieving a specific result (a normal winning), the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power) can be converted to an open state, and the start-up memory (e.g., special winning device 2 reserve) generated by winning the variable winning device can be saved, delighting the player and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment comprises a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a game, and an effect control means (e.g., an effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the game. The gaming machine 10 comprises a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state or a probability variable state). The game control means can generate a predetermined state (e.g., a right-hit state with a low probability of winning) in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state even after the specific gaming state has ended, and the effect control means differentiates the effect mode in the predetermined state from the effect mode outside the predetermined state.

In this type of gaming machine 10, after the specific game state ends, the predetermined state in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state, similar to the specific game state, can be distinguished from the specific game state in terms of presentation appearance. Furthermore, by making the presentation unique to the predetermined state, the excitement of the game can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special symbol variable display game) in response to the open state of the variable prize winning device. Therefore, when the variable prize winning device is open, the start memory (e.g., special symbol 2 reserve) that serves as the right to play the game (special symbol variable display game) can be accumulated by winning the variable prize winning device without consuming the start memory.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special symbol variable display game) for a long period of time in response to the open state of the variable prize winning device, and can execute the game for a short period of time in response to the closed state of the variable prize winning device. Therefore, during a specific game state, a large number of start memories (e.g., special symbol 2 reserve) can be accumulated when the variable prize winning device is in an open state (e.g., first half open), a large number of start memories (e.g., special symbol 2 reserve) can be consumed in the subsequent closed state (e.g., interval), and a large number of start memories (e.g., special symbol 2 reserve) can be accumulated when the device is again in an open state (e.g., second half open) after the specific game state ends. Therefore, the number of start memories (remaining reserves) consumed after the specific game state ends can be made greater than the upper limit for the number of start memories (e.g., four). Furthermore, the remaining reserves can be made variable.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes a game (special symbol variable display game) in accordance with the open state of the variable prize winning device for a period of time longer than the open state of the variable prize winning device. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the open state of the variable prize winning device and the execution period (variation time, variable period) of the game (special symbol variable display game), the discrepancy can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reserved items will exactly match the specified remaining number of reserved items.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special symbol variable display game) a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or more while the variable prize winning device is in a closed state. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the open state of the variable prize winning device and the execution period (variation time, variable period) of the game (special symbol variable display game), the discrepancy can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reserved balls will exactly match the specified remaining number of reserved balls.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the specific game state to end when the game (special symbol variable display game) has been played a predetermined number of times (e.g., the number of time-saving or probability variable times). After the specific game state ends, the number of times (a specified number of remaining reserves of 5 to 9) that a game based on a start memory generated by winning a prize in the variable prize winning device is played is changed according to the predetermined number (e.g., the number of time-saving or probability variable times). Therefore, if the predetermined number of times is selected by lottery, the number of remaining reserves is also random and variable, set by lottery, and the player's excitement or sorrow will increase as they play.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can set a predetermined number of times (e.g., the number of time-saving or probability-change times) as game value to be awarded to a player when a game (special symbol variable display game) results in a special result (small win or big win), and the predetermined number of times is set according to the type of special result (symbol). Therefore, the predetermined number of times a specific game state occurs after the special game state based on the special result ends is set by lottery (allocation) and is variable (e.g., 1 to 5) and changes randomly, increasing the excitement of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means sets a constant (e.g., 10) sum of the number of times (specified remaining reserve number) that a game (special chart variable display game) will be executed after the specific game state has ended and a predetermined number of times (e.g., the number of time-saving modes or the number of probability bonus modes). Therefore, the continuation rate of the specific game state can be kept the same, while the number of remaining reserves can be made variable. If the same presentation mode is executed while this fixed number of special chart 2 variable display games are executed during and after the specific game state has ended, it will be difficult for the player to tell whether the specific game state is in progress or has ended, and the player will be surprised when they win a jackpot on the remaining reserves after the specific game state has ended and gain significant game value, increasing their interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, the games include a first game (special chart 1 variable display game) and a second game (special chart 2 variable display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on a start memory generated by a game ball entering a predetermined winning area (e.g., the start winning port 36), and can execute the second game based on a start memory generated by a game ball entering a variable winning device. The second game (special chart 2 variable display game) can be executed in priority over the first game (special chart 1 variable display game), and when the first game is executed in a specific game state, it is executed in a shorter time than the second game.

As a result, the number of times the first game (special chart 1 variable display game) is played in the specific gaming state is reduced, and even if the first game (special chart 1 variable display game) is played in the specific gaming state, the start of the second game (special chart 2 variable display game) is not significantly delayed.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (normal map variable display game) and a second game (special map variable display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the passage of a game ball through a predetermined area (normal map start gate 34), and can execute the second game (special map variable display game) based on a start memory generated by winning a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power). In a specific game state, even if a game ball passes through the predetermined area (normal map start gate 34) during the execution of the first game or during a winning state generated by a specific result of the first game, a start memory (normal map memory) that constitutes the right to play the first game is not generated.

As a result, the first game (regular map variable display game) can only be started during the stopped display, and the regular map variable display game starts as soon as the game ball passes through a specified area (regular map start gate 34) during the stopped display. In this way, the start memory (regular map memory) of the first game (regular map variable display game) is not actually accumulated, so the first game (regular map variable display game) is executed at a good pace. For this reason, in a specific game state, the operation of the variable winning device due to a win in the first game (regular map variable display game) and the second game (special map variable display game) can easily be linked without any lag.

In the first embodiment, the game control means ends the specific game state when the open state of the variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, normal power) has ended a specified number of times (e.g., twice). This prevents situations where the specific game state is extended by stopping the shot and causing the number of wins in the variable prize winning device to fall below a specified number (e.g., the number of time-saving or probability-change wins). Furthermore, it prevents the open state of the variable prize winning device from being increased excessively due to a win in the first game (normal variable prize display game) in the extended specific game state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the game execution time (variation time) based on the number of times the game (special chart variable display game) has been executed since the end of the special game state. Therefore, the game (special chart variable display game) can be executed in response to the open state of the variable winning device, and when the variable winning device is open, a start memory (e.g., special chart 2 reserve) that serves as the right to execute the game (special chart variable display game) can be stored.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment is equipped with a gaming control means (gaming control device 100) that controls the progress of the game (variable display game). The gaming control means is equipped with a first counting means (e.g., a ball difference confirmation process) that can count the number of gaming media (gaming balls) paid out during a predetermined period (e.g., the period from power-on to the present) or the number of gaming media determined to be paid out during a predetermined period (e.g., the total number of winning balls during a predetermined period, the number of safe balls). The gaming control means is equipped with a second counting means (e.g., a ball difference confirmation process) that can count the number of usages (e.g., the number of balls fired or the number of balls discharged), which is the number of gaming media used during a predetermined period. The gaming control means is equipped with a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) that can generate a game-disabled state in which the game cannot be played based on the difference between the number of payment and the number of usages (e.g., the number of balls difference). The game control means can generate a specific game state (e.g., specific game state B, b time reduction) when the number of times a game is executed under specified conditions (e.g., a state with a low probability of special winnings) reaches a specified number (e.g., the ceiling number of times). When the power is turned on, the game control means initializes information (e.g., the safety device counter value) regarding the difference between the number of payouts and the number of balls used (e.g., the difference in number of balls), but does not initialize information regarding the number of times the game is executed (e.g., the ceiling counter value).

In such a gaming machine 10, the number of remaining games (up to a predetermined number) until a specific gaming state occurs does not change when the power is turned on, but the margin (tolerance, limit) before an unplayable state occurs regarding the difference between the payout number and the number used can be increased (maximized) by initialization when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player will not suffer any disadvantages when the power is turned on.

In the first embodiment, a gaming machine 10 capable of executing a game is equipped with storage means (e.g., RAM 111c) including a first area (intra-area work area) that can serve as a work area for game control, a second area (extra-area work area) different from the first area, and an unused area between the first and second areas. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with game stop means (e.g., a safety device) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which game execution is disabled upon the establishment of a predetermined condition (activation condition). The first area can store a flag (e.g., a safety device activated flag) that indicates the occurrence of a game-disabled state upon the establishment of the predetermined condition. The flag can be set based on information in a predetermined area within the second area (e.g., a safety device activation information area) and is not initialized when the power is turned on. The game stop means generates a game-disabled state based on this flag.

With this type of gaming machine 10, play is disabled when a predetermined condition is met, making it possible to implement measures to prevent fraud and also to prevent players from becoming addicted to gaming. Furthermore, because the flag that causes the game to be disabled (for example, a safety device activation flag) is not initialized when the power is turned on, the game-disabled state is not released except in special circumstances (for example, when RAM is cleared with a setting change). This allows for appropriate measures to be taken to prevent fraud and also makes it possible to appropriately prevent players from becoming addicted to gaming.

In addition, in such a gaming machine 10, the storage means (e.g., RAM 111c) includes a first area (in-area work area) and a second area (out-area work area) separated by an unused area. A flag (e.g., a safety device activation flag) is stored in the first area (in-area work area) and can be set based on information in a predetermined area (e.g., a safety device activation information area) within the second area (out-area work area). This makes it easy to initialize the flag separately from the initialization of information for setting the flag (information in the predetermined area). Furthermore, it becomes easier to separate the program for setting the flag (out-area program) from the game control program (in-area program), improving program development efficiency.

In the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of controlling presentations related to games. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a first counting means (e.g., the difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100) capable of counting the number of payouts, which is the number of gaming media (gaming balls) paid out during a predetermined period (e.g., the period from power-on to the present) or the number of gaming media determined to be paid out during a predetermined period (e.g., the total number of winning balls during a predetermined period, the number of safe balls). The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a second counting means (e.g., the difference ball confirmation process of the gaming control device 100 or the out ball detection switch 74) capable of counting the number of uses, which is the number of gaming media used during a predetermined period (e.g., the number of fired balls or the number of ejected balls). The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which game play cannot be performed based on the number of payouts and the number of uses. The presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can display a value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (for example, the difference in the number of balls or the safety device counter value) on the display means (for example, the display device 41) when that value is within a predetermined range (for example, a range corresponding to all of the activation notice state, activation warning state, and activation state).

Therefore, the value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses is displayed only when it is within a specified range, and is displayed only when this value is important, attracting the player's attention. When this value is not important, the value is hidden, making the display easier to see. Furthermore, because it is possible to create a state in which play cannot be carried out based on the number of payouts (number of safe balls, etc.) and the number of uses, it is possible to effectively prevent fraud when, for example, the value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (for example, the difference in number of balls or the safety device counter value) is large, and it also effectively prevents players from becoming addicted to the game.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 77 to 80. Note that the configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The second embodiment relates to a special chart variation display game after the end of a specific game state with normal power support.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Figure 77 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the second embodiment. Figure 77 is similar to Figure 71A, but differs from Figure 71A in that it includes the addition of specific game states (omitted in Figures 71A and 71B) in the case of ceiling time reduction due to reaching the ceiling number of times and sudden time reduction due to a time-saving symbol (support hit).

Specific game states include specific game state A, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a time-saving state immediately after a jackpot (time-saving a), specific game state B, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a ceiling time-saving state (time-saving b) without being caused by a jackpot, and specific game state C, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a sudden time-saving state (time-saving c) without being caused by a jackpot. Note that while in this embodiment the specific game state is a time-saving state, it is also possible to configure the specific game state as a probability-changing state (with normal power support/high probability of special chart) in which the probability of a jackpot is high.

In specific game states A-C, the probability of a jackpot is low, but there is normal power support. In specific game states A-C, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is more likely to open, so right-handed shots aimed at the normal variable winning device 37 are recommended as the game ball launch mode. Therefore, in specific game states, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning slot 36, so the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game.

The presentation modes for specific game state A are time-saving modes #1 and #2, as in Figure 71A. In this embodiment, the number of time-saving actions for time-saving mode #1 is a fixed value (here, 3) for simplicity, but it may also be a variable value, as in the first embodiment (Figure 72). The presentation mode for specific game state B is time-saving mode #3, and the presentation mode for specific game state C is time-saving mode #4. The presentation modes are different, and the player can distinguish between a time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving (b time-saving) and a time-saving state due to sudden time-saving (c time-saving) by the presentation. It is also possible to use the same presentation mode for specific game state B and specific game state C, thereby standardizing the presentation and reducing development costs.

In addition, time-saving modes #3 and #4 are presentation modes that are different from time-saving modes #1 and #2, and the presentation modes are different, allowing the presentation to distinguish between a time-saving state resulting from a jackpot (specific game state A) and a time-saving state not resulting from a jackpot (specific game states B and C). Furthermore, by making the presentation mode the same for specific game state A and specific game states B and C, it is possible to standardize the presentation and reduce development costs.

Furthermore, if a time-saving state due to ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction can be generated during specific gaming state A, time-saving modes #1 and #2 may be continued without changing to time-saving modes #3 and #4, in which case the player may be given the impression that specific gaming state A has been extended (the impression that the number of time-saving periods has increased). Of course, if a time-saving state due to ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction can be generated during specific gaming state A, time-saving modes #1 and #2 may be changed to time-saving modes #3 and #4 to notify the player that a ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction has occurred.

The contents of the normal game state and transition state (normal game state in which remaining reserves are consumed) are the same as in the first embodiment (Fig. 71A). The transition state presentation mode will be described as a single remaining reserve consumption mode without separating the mode before the end of normal power release and the mode after the end of normal power release, but they may also be separated.

Next, we will explain the transitions from each game state, particularly the transitions to and from specific game states B and C.

In normal gaming state, transition state, or specific gaming state A, if the number of times the special symbol variable display game is played after the jackpot state ends (excluding the number of times in the special symbol variable state) reaches the ceiling number of times, the game will enter ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) and transition to specific gaming state B (time reduction mode #3). Also, in normal gaming state, transition state, or specific gaming state A, if the result of the special symbol variable display game is a support hit result (time reduction result, time reduction symbol), the game will enter sudden time reduction (c time reduction) and transition to specific gaming state C (time reduction mode #4).

In addition, if the ceiling number of times is reached or a support hit occurs during specific game state A, the time-saving state may continue (overlap) through ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving, or it may not continue. Basically, regardless of the remaining number of time-saving times in specific game state A, if the conditions for transitioning to specific game state B or C (reaching the ceiling number of times or occurrence of a support hit) are met, the game will transition to specific game state B or C, but the decision on whether to transition may depend on the remaining number of time-saving times. For example, if the number of time-saving times in specific game state B (number of time-saving times b m3) is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times in specific game state A (number of time-saving times not yet consumed), the game will transition from specific game state A to specific game state B. If the number of time-saving times in specific game state C (number of time-saving times c m4) is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times in specific game state A, the game will transition from specific game state A to specific game state C. If the number of time-saving turns (m3, m4) in specific game states B and C is equal to or less than the number of time-saving turns remaining in specific game state A, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, specific game states B and C will not occur and there will be no transition from specific game state A to specific game states B and C. Note that the time-saving symbol does not have to be displayed in the case of ceiling time-saving.

In general, once the number of time-saving rounds in specific game states B and C has ended, the game will transition to the remaining reserve consumption mode, but if there are still number of time-saving rounds remaining in specific game state A, the game may return to specific game state A. In other words, if the number of time-saving rounds in specific game states B and C has ended but there are still number of time-saving rounds remaining in specific game state A, the game may return to specific game state A from specific game states B and C, which continue into specific game state A, and may not transition to the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode).

In addition, if the ceiling number of times is reached during specific game state A or a support hit occurs, it is possible to configure the system so that the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving does not occur at all, regardless of the relationship between the number of time-saving times in specific game states B and C and the number of time-saving times remaining in specific game state A. Even with this configuration, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, there will be no transition from specific game state A to specific game state B or C.

In this embodiment, it is preferable that during specific game state A, a time-saving state due to a sudden time-saving (c time-saving) state caused by a support hit result (time-saving symbol) is not generated (not overlapped). In other words, even in specific game state A, a support hit result may be won for the special symbol 2 variable display game, but even if the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary, it is preferable that a time-saving state due to a sudden time-saving (c time-saving) state is not generated. In this case, the display device 41 and the lamp display device 80 may display a losing symbol as a decorative special symbol for the presentation. Also, as explained in Figure 23 of the first embodiment, in this embodiment, it is preferable that a support hit result is not set for the special symbol 1 variable display game, and that a time-saving state due to a sudden time-saving (c time-saving) state is not generated even in normal mode (normal game state). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable that a transition to specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) is made only from the transition state for consuming remaining reserves (remaining reserve consumption mode). This will increase the value of the remaining reserve consumption mode, encouraging players to focus their expectations on the remaining reserve consumption mode and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Also, although not shown in Figure 77, if the ceiling number of times is reached or a support hit occurs during specific game states B and C, the time-saving state may continue (overlap) through ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving, or it may not continue. In other words, it is also possible to transition from specific game states B and C to specific game states B and C again.

When the transition conditions are met from specific game states B and C, the game transitions to a transition state (which may be included in the normal game state) in which the remaining reserved positions are consumed. The transition conditions for transitioning from specific game states B and C to a transition state may be the same as the transition conditions for transitioning from specific game state A to a transition state. The transition conditions are either (i) the number of times the special symbol 2 variable display game is executed in the specific game state exceeds the time-saving count m3, m4 (first predetermined number, the initial value of time-saving count 2), or (ii) the total number of times the special symbol 1 variable display game (special symbol 2 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state exceeds a second predetermined number (initial value of time-saving count 1) that is greater than the time-saving count m3, m4 (first predetermined number). In this embodiment, condition (iii) of the first embodiment (the normal power release having completed the predetermined number of releases) is not provided because it is not necessary. The second predetermined number of times may be the number of time-saving times plus the maximum number of reserved special charts 1 (for example, 4).

The time-saving counts m1-m4 and ceiling count m5 for time-saving modes #1-#4 can be adjusted appropriately to change the gameplay.

For example, to balance the profits of specific game state A with those of specific game states B and C, adjustments may be made to satisfy the relationship m1 (number of a time-saving times 1) < m4 (number of c time-saving times) < m2 (number of a time-saving times 2) < m5 (number of ceiling times) < m3 (number of b time-saving times).

Also, for example, adjustments may be made to satisfy the relationship m1 (number of a time reductions 1) < m2 (number of a time reductions 2) < m4 (number of c time reductions) < m5 (number of ceiling times) < m3 (number of b time reductions) so that ceiling time reductions (b time reductions) and sudden time reductions (c time reductions) are more advantageous than time reductions following a jackpot (a time reductions).

Also, for example, adjustments may be made to satisfy the relationship m1 (number of a time reductions 1) < m4 (number of c time reductions) < m3 (number of b time reductions) < m2 (number of a time reductions 2) < m5 (number of ceiling times) so that the profit from ceiling time reductions is reduced.

[Number of time-saving times and remaining reserved times corresponding to the pattern]
78 is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the prescribed remaining number of reserved times (prescribed remaining number of reserved times) corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol variable display game in this embodiment. The symbols are the symbols that result in a jackpot (including V winnings during small wins), and here they are determined by the jackpot symbol random number, and the time-saving symbols are excluded.

In this embodiment, the pattern A for the jackpot in the special chart 1 variable display game is the same as in the first embodiment, with the only difference being the number of time reductions. The pattern G for the jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game without normal power support (jackpot with remaining reserve) is the same as in the first embodiment. For the jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game with normal power support (including V winning with a small jackpot), the number of time reductions is fixed at three, so there is only one type of pattern, the S pattern.

In the normal game state (normal mode), if a jackpot (symbol A) occurs in the special symbol 1 variable display game, the game will transition to specific game state A (time-saving mode #1) after the jackpot state ends. In the specific game state A, if a jackpot (symbol S) occurs in the special symbol 2 variable display game, the game will return to specific game state A (time-saving mode #1) after the jackpot state ends. In the specific game states B and C, if a jackpot (symbol S) occurs in the special symbol 2 variable display game, the game will transition to specific game state A (time-saving mode #1) after the jackpot state ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in time-saving mode #1 of specific game state A, the number of time-saving plays is fixed at 3 and the specified remaining reserve number is fixed at 4.

[Features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation]
Figure 79 is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 79 (A), there is only one type of winning symbol (winning stop symbol, normal symbol winning symbol) in the normal symbol variable display game. In this embodiment, regardless of whether normal power support is provided or not, the normal symbol winning probability is always a constant value of 250/251, and unlike the first embodiment, it is not controlled to change between low probability (low normal symbol probability) and high probability (high normal symbol probability). Note that, as with the first embodiment, the probability may be lower than 250/251 in normal gameplay.

The starting memory number (number of reserved normal maps) for the normal map fluctuation display game is 4. The maximum count number (count upper limit) for normal power is 10.

The normal map fluctuation time FZ1, which is the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, is a fixed value of 500 msec. Note that in normal game mode, the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 may be set to a value longer than 500 msec. The normal map stop time FZ2 (normal map display time) is 600 msec. Note that although not shown in Figure 79, the sum of the normal remaining ball processing time and the normal map ending time FZ3 may be, for example, 700 msec, which is equal to or longer than the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 or the normal map stop time FZ2.

As shown in Figure 79 (B), for each win in the normal variable display game, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is opened only once, creating an easy-to-win state. However, the normal power opening time for one time is short (e.g., 48 msec) in states without normal power support, such as in normal game mode, and long (e.g., 3,400 msec) in states with normal power support, such as in time-saving mode, and the normal power opening pattern (normal power opening mode) differs depending on the game mode. As mentioned above, the probability of a normal win is always a constant value regardless of the game mode, so in this embodiment, the easy-to-win state with normal power support is achieved by making the normal power opening time longer than when there is no normal power support.

Furthermore, the normal power release time may be shorter than the sum of the normal map fluctuation time FZ1, normal map stop time FZ2, normal power remaining ball processing time, and normal map ending time FZ3 when there is no normal power support, and may be longer than the times FZ1-FZ3 related to the control of the normal map and normal power when there is normal power support.

[Timing chart]
Figure 80 is a timing chart showing the game state, special chart variable display game (special chart variable), normal chart state, normal power state, special chart 2 reserved number, etc. from the time-saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (which may be included in the normal game state). Note that in Figure 80, for simplicity, the timing of the end of the time-saving state and the start of the normal power release are aligned, but this is not limited to this and they may be offset.

Figure 80 (A) shows a situation in which time-saving modes #1 and #2 of specific game state A (first specific game state) following a jackpot end and transition to a transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode). In the case of Figure 80 (A), the stopped display time STP1 (first period) from the end of the final time-saving variation, which is the final special chart variation display game of time-saving modes #1 and #2, to the start of the next special chart variation display game is made longer than the long normal power open time OPN (third period, for example 3400 msec) that serves as normal power support. In other words, the relationship is set to STP1 > OPN.

The game control device 100 can set the stop display time corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 changes after a jackpot (the number of times the special chart 2 change display game is executed) (A4804), but in this embodiment, the stop display time of the final time-saving change is also set corresponding to the type of time-saving mode (specific game state). Corresponding to time-saving modes #1 and #2 (specific game state A), the stop display time STP1 of the final time-saving change is set longer than the long normal power open time OPN during which the normal power becomes prone to winning.

In Figure 80, the final time-saving variation is described as a variation in which the number of special chart 2 variations after the end of a jackpot becomes the number of time-saving variations (3 times). However, the final time-saving variation may also be a special chart 1 variation (special chart 1 variation display game), or the total number of times the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) is executed may be the second predetermined number of times described above.

If the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is at the maximum value of four before the start of the final time-saving variation, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 will decrease by one to three when the final time-saving variation of special chart 2 occurs, but when a game ball enters normal variation winning device 37 due to the normal power release of normal variation winning device 37, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 will again become four. If a game ball passes through normal chart start gate 34 just before the end of the final time-saving variation, normal power will be released even in the remaining reserve consumption mode after the end of the time-saving variation, depending on the winning result of the normal chart variation display game (normal chart variation) that started at this time.

If, for example, a change in the special chart 2 variable display game (special chart 2 remaining reserve change) begins during a long period of normal power open in remaining reserve consumption mode after the time-saving state has ended, the number of special chart 2 reserves will decrease by 1 to 3, and if a game ball enters the normal variation winning device 37 at this point, the number of special chart 2 reserves will again become 4, and the number of remaining reserves, which is the number of special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) that will be consumed after the time-saving state has ended, will become 5 (1 + 4). Note that if the special chart 2 variable display game starts changing twice during normal power open in remaining reserve consumption mode, it is possible that the number of remaining reserves will become 6 (greater than 5).

Specific game state A (time-saving modes #1 and #2) passes through a jackpot state, so the player receives significant rewards and game value in terms of the number of balls (number of balls acquired). Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of remaining reserves is set to no more than five, exceeding the specified remaining number of four, to avoid giving the player excessive rewards or game value. For this reason, as mentioned above, the stop display time STP1 for the final time-saving variation in specific game state A is set even longer than the long normal power open time OPN, which provides normal power support, to prevent the consumption of remaining reserves (execution of the special chart 2 variation display game) from starting during the normal power open time OPN (STP1 > OPN). This allows the number of remaining reserves to be maintained at the specified remaining number of four.

In addition, the normal power release time (e.g., 48 msec) resulting from a winning normal map variation in the remaining reserve consumption mode is significantly shorter than the normal power release time OPN (e.g., 3,400 msec) resulting from a winning normal map variation initiated in time-saving modes #1 and #2. For this reason, in the case of a short-term normal power release in the remaining reserve consumption mode (normal power release after a normal power release due to the normal power release time OPN), special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) are not accumulated and the number of remaining reserves does not increase, so the number of remaining reserves will be the specified number of remaining reserves, which is 4.

Note that taking into account the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 and normal map stop time FZ2, it is possible to set a stricter condition, such as STP1 > (OPN + FZ2) or STP1 > (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN), but since the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 and normal map stop time FZ2 are significantly shorter than the normal power release time OPN and can be ignored, setting the relationship STP1 > OPN will be sufficient to maintain the remaining reserve number at the specified remaining reserve number of four.

On the other hand, Figure 80 (B) shows a situation where time-saving modes #3 and #4 of specific game states B and C (time-saving state, second specific game state) due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving have ended and transitioned to a transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode). In the case of Figure 80 (B), the stop display time STP2 (second period) from the end of the final time-saving fluctuation, which is the final special chart fluctuation display game of time-saving modes #3 and #4, to the start of the next special chart fluctuation display game is set shorter than the long normal power open time OPN (third period, for example, 3400 msec) that becomes normal power support. In other words, the relationship is set to STP2 < OPN. Corresponding to time-saving modes #3 and #4 (specific game states B and C), the stop display time STP2 of the final time-saving fluctuation is set shorter than the long normal power open time OPN, where normal power becomes in a state where it is easy to win (A4804).

For this reason, when the special chart 2 variable display game (special chart 2 remaining reserve variation) starts to vary during normal power release in the remaining reserve consumption mode after the time-saving mode #3 or #4 has ended, the number of special chart 2 reserves will decrease by 1 to 3. If a game ball enters the normal variation winning device 37 during this normal power release, the number of special chart 2 reserves will again become 4, and the number of remaining reserves, which is the number of special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) that will be consumed after the time-saving mode ends, will become 5 (1 + 4). Furthermore, if the special chart 2 variable display game starts to vary twice during normal power release in the remaining reserve consumption mode, the number of remaining reserves will become 6 (greater than 5).

Specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) occur without going through a jackpot state, and the player's benefits and game value in terms of ball payout (number of balls acquired) are small. Therefore, in this embodiment, the likelihood that the number of remaining reserves will exceed the specified remaining number of four and reach five or more is increased, in order to provide the player with greater benefits and game value. For this reason, as mentioned above, the stop display time STP2 for the final time-saving variation in specific game states B and C is set shorter than the long normal power open time OPN, which provides normal power support, making it easier for the remaining reserves to be consumed (execution of the special chart 2 variation display game) during the normal power open time OPN (STP2<OPN).

Of course, if the game ball does not pass through the normal power start gate 34 immediately before the end of the final time-saving variation, the long normal power release with the normal power release time OPN will not occur in the remaining reserve consumption mode after the time-saving period ends, or this long normal power release will be brought forward and some of it will be released before the time-saving period ends. In this case, even if you set the relationship STP2<OPN, the number of remaining reserves may remain at the specified remaining number of four and not exceed five.

Note that taking into account the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 and normal map stop time FZ2, it is possible to set a more lenient condition such as STP2 < (OPN + FZ2) or STP2 < (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN), but by setting the stricter condition STP2 < OPN, which has a narrower range of STP2 values, the likelihood of the remaining reserved number being 5 or more is definitely increased.

In this embodiment, the relationship STP2 (second period) < OPN (third period) < STP1 (first period) holds, and the relationship STP2 < STP1 holds regardless of the length of the normal power open time OPN. In this way, the stop display time STP1 (first period) of the final time-saving fluctuation in specific game state A (time-saving modes #1, #2) is made longer than the stop display time STP2 of the final time-saving fluctuation in specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3, #4). Here, the stop display time of the final time-saving fluctuation is the same as the time from the end of the final special chart fluctuation display game in the specific game state to the start of the next special chart fluctuation display game if there are remaining reserved balls.

In addition, regardless of the normal power open time OPN, simply establishing the relationship STP2 < STP1 means that the start of the remaining reserve fluctuation after the end of the time-saving feature in specific game states B and C will be earlier than in specific game state A, increasing the likelihood that the number of remaining reserves will be greater in specific game states B and C than in specific game state A. This reduces the difference (difference in bonuses and game value) between specific game state A, which has a large number of balls released after passing through a jackpot state, and specific game states B and C, which have a small number of balls released without passing through a jackpot state. Therefore, even in specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving features, which have fewer balls released than specific game state A (time-saving modes #1 and #2) following a jackpot, bonuses and game value are compensated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if the conditions for generating specific game states B and C during specific game state A are met, i.e., if the ceiling number of plays is reached during specific game state A or a support hit occurs, the stop display time for the final time-saving fluctuation may be set to STP2 (second period), which is shorter than STP1, rather than STP1 (first period). In this case, after a jackpot, time-saving states (specific game states B and C) due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving may be continuously (overlappingly) generated from specific game state A. However, by setting the stop display time for the final time-saving fluctuation to the short STP2, additional benefits and game value can be provided through the small STP2 (second period) after the final time-saving fluctuations of the series of time-saving states (specific game state A and specific game states B and C) after a jackpot, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Basically, when the number of time-saving cycles in specific game states B and C continuing into specific game state A ends, the system transitions to remaining reserve consumption mode, and the final time-saving cycle changes in specific game states B and C. When specific game states B and C occur from specific game state A, the time-saving cycle change count 1 and 2 areas are overwritten with the number of time-saving cycles in specific game states B and C (the initial values of time-saving cycle change count 1 and 2), causing the remaining time-saving cycles in specific game state A to disappear. However, if the system is configured so that the remaining time-saving cycles in specific game state A are copied to another predetermined area and remain there even after the number of time-saving cycles in specific game states B and C continuing into specific game state A ends, the system returns from specific game states B and C continuing into specific game state A to specific game state A, and does not need to transition to the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode). In this case, the final time-saving cycle changes in specific game state A. The remaining number of time reductions is less than the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 for specific game state A and greater than zero.

Furthermore, even if a time-saving symbol (support hit result) that can trigger specific game states B and C is displayed during specific game state A, the display time for the final time-saving variation may be set to STP1, which is longer than STP2, rather than STP2. In a configuration (preferred configuration) that does not allow a time-saving state due to a time-saving symbol to continue from specific game state A even when a time-saving symbol is displayed, the long first period (STP1) maintains the remaining number of reserved balls consumed after specific game state A at the specified remaining number, as described above, preventing specific game state A following a jackpot from becoming too advantageous. Furthermore, even in a configuration in which a time-saving state due to a time-saving symbol continues to be generated from specific game state A, specific game states B and C can be prevented from becoming too advantageous because they are reached via specific game state A following a jackpot.

[Actions and Effects of Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes a game control device (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (e.g., a special symbol variation display game), and can generate a special game state (e.g., a jackpot state) advantageous to the player when the game results in a special outcome. The game control device can generate a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state A) advantageous to the player following the special game state, accompanied by the generation of the special game state, and can generate a second specific game state (e.g., specific game states B and C) advantageous to the player without the generation of the special game state. The game control device sets a first period from the end of the final game of the first specific game state to the start of the next game (e.g., a stop display time STP1 of the time-saving final variation) longer than a second period from the end of the final game of the second specific game state to the start of the next game (e.g., a stop display time STP2 of the time-saving final variation).

In this type of gaming machine 10, because the second period is shorter than the first period, the maximum accumulated starting memory (remaining reserves) in the second specific gaming state is consumed more quickly after the end of the second specific gaming state, potentially allowing for the accumulation of additional starting memory (remaining reserves). This reduces the difference in profit between a first specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state A) in which the profit of the special gaming state (e.g., ball payout) is obtained by passing through a special gaming state, and a second specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming states B and C) in which the profit of the special gaming state (e.g., ball payout) is not obtained without passing through a special gaming state. Therefore, even in a second specific gaming state that does not involve the occurrence of a special gaming state, profits are compensated, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is equipped with a variable winning device (e.g., a normal variable winning device 37) that can be converted between an easy-to-win state and a non-easy-to-win state and that is more likely to convert to the easy-to-win state in the first and second specific gaming states than in the normal gaming state. The third period (e.g., normal power open time OPN) during which the variable winning device is in the easy-to-win state is shorter than the first period (STP1) and longer than the second period (STP2). Therefore, the number of remaining reserved balls consumed after the end of the first specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state A) can be maintained at the specified number of remaining reserved balls, and the likelihood that the number of remaining reserved balls consumed after the end of the second specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming states B and C) will exceed the specified number of remaining reserved balls is increased. This ensures profits and enhances gaming interest even in the second specific gaming state, which does not involve the occurrence of a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming control means (e.g., the gaming control device 100) can set the period from the end of the final game in the first specific gaming state to the start of the next game as a first period (STP1), and can set the period from the end of the final game in the second specific gaming state to the start of the next game as a second period (STP2). If the conditions for generating the second specific gaming state are met during the first specific gaming state (e.g., when the ceiling number of plays is reached or a support win occurs), the gaming control means can set the period from the end of the final game in the specific gaming state as the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state to the start of the next game not to the first period but to a second period that is shorter than the first period.

In such a gaming machine 10, after a series of gaming states including a special gaming state, a first specific gaming state, and a second specific gaming state, additional bonuses and gaming value can be provided for a short second period (STP2), thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming control means (e.g., the gaming control device 100) can set the period from the end of the final game in the first specific gaming state to the start of the next game as the first period, and can set the period from the end of the final game in the second specific gaming state to the start of the next game as the second period. Even if a game result that could trigger the second specific gaming state (e.g., a time-saving symbol or a support win result) is displayed during the first specific gaming state, the gaming control means can set the period from the end of the final game in the first specific gaming state or the specific gaming state as the second specific gaming state to the start of the next game not as the second period, but as the first period (STP1), which is longer than the second period (STP2).

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the result of a game that could cause a second specific gaming state to occur is displayed, if the configuration does not allow the second specific gaming state to occur continuously (overlap) from the first specific gaming state, the long first period (STP1) can prevent the first specific gaming state following the special gaming state from becoming too advantageous. Furthermore, even if the configuration allows the second specific gaming state to occur continuously (overlap) from the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state passes through the first specific gaming state following the special gaming state, so the second specific gaming state can be prevented from becoming too advantageous.

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 81 to 98. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first or second embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first or second embodiment, and redundant descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to a variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variation pattern group) for selecting a variation pattern for a variation display game.

[Game board]
Referring to Figure 81, the game board 30 in the third embodiment will be described. The game board 30 in Figure 81 differs from the game board 30 in Figure 2 in that another normal map start gate 34 is added near the normal winning opening 35 in the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40. Two normal map start gates 34 exist in the game area 32, one on the right side of the center case 40 and one at the lower left. The function and configuration of the normal map start gate 34 itself are the same as those in the first embodiment. Specifically, a gate switch 34a is provided inside the normal map start gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34. When a game ball shot into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34 and is detected by the gate switch 34a, a normal map change display game is executed.

Because there is a normal map start gate 34 in the lower left playing area 32, even if a left-handed hit (normal hit) is used to send the game ball down the left side of the playing area 32, the normal map change display game is executed when the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34. If the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state (a state where winning is easy), allowing the game ball to win into the normal change winning device 37 (normal power). However, in order to have the game ball win into the normal change winning device 37 in the right playing area 32, the player is required to have the skill to quickly switch the game ball's launch mode (hitting style) from a left-handed hit to a right-handed hit immediately after the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34 in the lower left. Therefore, even if a gaming ball passes through the normal start gate 34 on the lower left and the normal variable winning device 37 in the right-hand gaming area 32 is converted to an open state, it does not necessarily mean that the gaming ball will successfully enter the normal variable winning device 37.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Figure 82 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the third embodiment. Figure 82 is similar to Figure 77, but differs from Figure 77 in that the normal power support becomes high support in the specific game state B (time-saving mode #3) that occurs when the ceiling number of times is reached, and the normal power support becomes medium support in the specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) that occurs due to the time-saving pattern. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure some or all of the specific game state to be a probability variable state (with normal power support/special pattern high probability) in which the jackpot probability is a high probability state.

In medium support, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than in the normal game state without normal power support (electric support), but is more difficult to convert to the open state than in high support. For this reason, the player's profit increases in the order of no electric support (no normal power support) < medium support < high support. Furthermore, in specific game state C, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than in the normal game state, but is more difficult to convert to the open state than in specific game state B.

In addition, in specific game state A (time-saving modes #1 and #2) that occurs following a jackpot, the normal power support may be the same type of high support as in specific game state B, or a different type of high support. In this other type of high support, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than in specific game state C, and is either more difficult or easier to convert to the open state than in specific game state B. If the high support in specific game state A and specific game state B is the same type, control is easier, while if they are different types, gameplay becomes more varied.

In specific game states A and B, the normal variable winning device 37 is more likely to open, so right-handed shots aimed at the normal variable winning device 37 are recommended as the game ball launch mode. Therefore, in specific game states A and B, the primary starting area is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning port 36, so the primary variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game.

As mentioned above, winning the first start winning slot 36 or the occurrence of the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory, special chart 1 reserve) is the first start condition that enables the special chart 1 variable display game to be played. Winning the normal variable winning device 37 or the occurrence of the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory, special chart 2 reserve) is the second start condition that enables the special chart 2 variable display game to be played.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, although the center support makes it slightly easier for the normal variable winning device 37 to open in specific game state C than in the normal game state, the disadvantage of not winning in the starting winning slot 36 becomes greater if you continue to hit right during specific game state C. For example, if the number of winnings in the starting winning slot 36 per unit number of balls fired when hitting left is greater than the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 per unit number of balls fired when hitting right, the disadvantage of hitting right will be greater than the disadvantage of hitting left.

For this reason, in this embodiment, in specific game state C, the recommended method of launching the game ball (hitting style) is basically a left-handed shot aimed at the start winning hole 36. Therefore, in specific game state C, the main starting area is the first start winning hole 36 and the secondary starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, so the main variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game.

The presentation modes for specific game state A are time-saving modes #1 and #2, as in Figures 71A and 77. In this embodiment, the number of time-saving times m1 and m2 for time-saving modes #1 and #2 are fixed values of 4 and 30, respectively, but may be variable to increase gameplay variety. For example, the number of time-saving times m2 may be selected by lottery to be 20, 30, or 50. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the probability of a small win in the special chart 2 variable display game is 1/15.79, and the number of time-saving times m2 is small. For this reason, time-saving mode #2 does not necessarily result in a small win (a big win state where a V passes), and therefore does not become a next-time continuation confirmed mode (confirmed mode).

The presentation mode for specific game state B is time-saving mode #3, and the presentation mode for specific game state C is time-saving mode #4. The presentation modes are different, allowing the player to distinguish between the time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving (time-saving b) and the time-saving state due to sudden time-saving (time-saving c). It is also possible to standardize the presentation and reduce development costs by using the same presentation mode for specific game state B and specific game state C. In this embodiment, the number of time-saving occurrences m3 and m4 for time-saving modes #3 and #4 are fixed at 251 and 30, respectively, but may be variable to increase gameplay variety. For example, multiple time-saving symbols, such as a time-saving symbol for 50 times, a time-saving symbol for 30 times, and a time-saving symbol for 20 times, may be provided, and a random number for the support symbol may be selected at 10%, 70%, and 20%, respectively, to set the average number of time-saving occurrences m4 to 30.

In addition, time-saving modes #3 and #4 are presentation modes different from time-saving modes #1 and #2, and the presentation can distinguish between a time-saving state resulting from a jackpot (specific game state A) and a time-saving state not resulting from a jackpot (specific game states B and C). Furthermore, by using the same presentation mode for specific game state A and specific game states B and C, it is possible to standardize the presentation and reduce development costs.

Next, we will explain the transitions from each game state.

In this embodiment, the ceiling number of times m5 is 580, and during specific game state A and the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), the number of special chart variable display games executed under specified conditions (special chart low probability state, not in the special chart variable state) after the jackpot state ends will never reach the ceiling number of times. Therefore, during specific game state A and from the remaining reserve consumption mode, there will be no transition to specific game state B.

In this embodiment, when the number of special chart variable display games executed under predetermined conditions after the end of the jackpot state reaches the ceiling number in the normal game state or specific game state C, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) is activated and the game transitions to specific game state B (time reduction mode #3).

In addition, in this embodiment, the results of the special chart 2 variable display game do not include support hits (time-saving results, time-saving symbols), and only the results of the special chart 1 variable display game include support hits. To achieve this, the support hit determination process (A3607-A3609) is executed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (Figure 23), and conversely, the support hit determination process, etc. (A3707-A3709) is not executed in the jackpot flag 2 setting process (Figure 24). Therefore, basically, there is no transition to specific game state C from specific game state A, the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), and specific game state B, where the main variable display game becomes the special chart 2 variable display game.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state where the main variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game, if the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is a support hit result (time-saving symbol), the game will suddenly transition to special game state C (time-saving mode #4) with time-saving (c time-saving). In this way, in the normal game state where the player's profit is small and the presentation tends to be monotonous, a bonus that results in a support hit result (time-saving symbol) can be provided, increasing the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, if a transition condition is met in specific game states B and C without a small win or a big win occurring, the system transitions to a transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) in which the remaining reserves are consumed. The transition conditions for transitioning from specific game states B and C to a transition state may be the same as those in FIG. 77 of the second embodiment. That is, the transition condition is met when either (i) the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed in the specific game state exceeds the time-saving count m3, m4 (first predetermined count), or (ii) the total number of times the special chart variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game and special chart 2 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state exceeds a second predetermined count that is greater than the time-saving count m3, m4 (first predetermined count). Note that the second predetermined count may be the number of times the time-saving count is added to the maximum value of the special chart 1 reserve count or the special chart 2 reserve count (e.g., 4). Furthermore, condition (i) for transitioning from specific gaming state C to the transition state may be that the number of times the special chart 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is executed in specific gaming state C exceeds the time-saving count m4.

[Number of time-saving times and remaining reserved times corresponding to the pattern]
83 is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the number of remaining reserved times corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol variable display game in the third embodiment. The symbols are the symbols that result in a jackpot (including a jackpot due to a V prize), and here, the time-saving symbols are excluded.

As shown in (A), in this embodiment, when there is no normal power support, the jackpot symbol for the special chart 1 variable display game is only symbol A1 (which mainly results in a jackpot in normal game mode). Symbol A1 is the same as symbol A in the first and second embodiments, with the only difference being the number of time-saving cycles (here, four). Also, when there is normal power support, the jackpot symbol for the special chart 1 variable display game is only symbol P1 (which mainly results in a jackpot in specific game mode C). For symbol P1, the number of time-saving cycles is 30 (m2), and the specified remaining number of reserved symbols is four. The jackpot symbols A1 and P1 are not jackpots due to V winning, and are stopping symbols determined by the jackpot symbol random number. It is also possible to configure pattern A1 and pattern P1 as the stopping patterns for a big win related to a V win in a small win of the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game, but in this case, if there is a small win random number in addition to the big win random number, it is also possible to configure pattern A1 and pattern P1 as the stopping patterns for a small win determined by the small win random number.

When there is no normal power support, the only symbol that will be used when the special chart 1 variable display game is a jackpot is the A1 symbol, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special chart 1 variable display game, which is a main variable display game, is a jackpot in normal game mode, the game will transition to time-saving mode #1 (4 time-saving cycles) of specific game mode A after the jackpot state. It is also possible to provide a symbol P1 in addition to the A1 symbol, and transition to time-saving mode #2 of specific game mode A after the jackpot state of the special chart 1 variable display game (such as the dotted line in Figure 82). Alternatively, it is also possible to provide a symbol P1 instead of the A1 symbol, and transition from the normal game mode to time-saving mode #2 of specific game mode A after the jackpot state of the special chart 1 variable display game is a jackpot in normal game mode, via the jackpot state.

When normal power support is enabled, the only symbol that will be used when the special chart 1 variable display game is a jackpot is symbol P1, with a 100% allocation. Therefore, when the special chart 1 variable display game, which is a main variable display game, is a jackpot in specific game state C, the game will transition to time-saving mode #2 (30 time-saving cycles) of specific game state A after the jackpot state. It is also possible to provide symbol A1 in addition to symbol P1, and transition to time-saving mode #1 of specific game state A after the jackpot state of the special chart 1 variable display game. Alternatively, symbol A1 may be provided instead of symbol P1, and when the special chart 1 variable display game is a jackpot, the game will transition from specific game state C, via the jackpot state, to time-saving mode #1 of specific game state A.

As shown in (B), for a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game with normal power support, there is only one type of symbol, symbol S1, which results in the number of time-saving times m2 awarded after the jackpot ends being 30, and the allocation is 100%. In this embodiment, a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game is achieved by a V win on a small jackpot, but this is not limited to this. When a jackpot occurs in the special chart 2 variable display game of the main variable display game in specific game states A-C with normal power support, the game transitions to time-saving mode #2 in specific game state A. In addition to symbol S1, two other symbols with time-saving times m2 of 20 and 50 may be set, and the number of time-saving times m2 may be selected from 20, 30, or 50 by drawing lots for the symbols allocated.

In this embodiment, the probability of a small hit differs between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, and the upper limit judgment value for a small hit (A3900) differs between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game. The probability of a small hit in the special chart 2 variable display game is 1/15.79, while the probability of a small hit in the special chart 1 variable display game is 1/199.80. Therefore, in specific game state A, specific game state B, and transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), where the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game, small hits, and therefore jackpots due to V winning on small hits, are more likely to occur than in the normal game state and specific game state C, where the main variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game.

The G1 symbol for a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game without normal power support (a jackpot resulting from a V win on a small jackpot in the remaining reserve) is the same as the G symbol in the first embodiment. There is only one type of symbol, G1, which results in a time-saving count m2 of 30 times after the jackpot, and the allocation is 100%. Therefore, when the special chart 2 variable display game of the main variable display game wins in the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), the game transitions to time-saving mode #2 in specific game state A. Since the G1 and S1 symbols transition to the same time-saving mode after the jackpot, the G1 and S1 symbols may be the same symbol. In addition to the G1 symbol, two other symbols may be provided, one with a time-saving count m2 of 20 times and the other with a time-saving count m2 of 50 times, and the time-saving count m2 of 20 times, 30 times, or 50 times may be selected by drawing lots for the symbols allocated. Additionally, in addition to the G1 symbol, the A1 symbol may be provided to transition to the time-saving mode #1 of the specific gaming state A (dotted line in Figure 82).

As shown in Figures 82 and 83, the normal gaming state, transition state, specific gaming state A, specific gaming state B, and specific gaming state C occur based on individual occurrence conditions (transition conditions), and the occurrence conditions (transition conditions) may be different from one another.

In particular, in this embodiment, if the special symbol 1 variable display game results in a jackpot in specific game state C, just as in the case of a special symbol 2 variable display game resulting in a jackpot (in the case of symbols S1 and G1), the game will transition to time-saving mode #2 after the jackpot ends, and 30 time-saving cycles at high support will be obtained. Therefore, even if specific game state C is medium support rather than high support, it is extremely advantageous for the player and increases the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, specific game state C in medium support remains a state with normal power support, so it is treated as a consecutive win in which the jackpot state and specific game state continue without going through normal mode (or normal game state).

As shown in the pie chart of the ratio of upper round limit values in (C), when there are multiple upper round limit values (number of jackpot rounds), there may be a jackpot symbol corresponding to each upper round limit value. For example, as in (C), when there are three upper round limit values for jackpots in the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game (9R, 6R, and 3R), there may be symbols corresponding to the upper round limit values, such as the S1-9R symbol (15% allocation), the S1-6R symbol (10% allocation), the S1-3R symbol (75% allocation), the G1-9R symbol (15% allocation), the G1-6R symbol (10% allocation), and the G1-3R symbol (75% allocation). In the case of a jackpot resulting from a V win on a small jackpot, the small jackpot may be counted as one round and included in the upper round limit value, or the small jackpot may not be included in the upper round limit value.

[Working hours reduction status]
84 is a table summarizing the operation status of the time-saving function when a new time-saving operation trigger occurs from each game state. The time-saving operation trigger is a jackpot in the case of a time-saving function via a jackpot (time-saving function a), reaching the upper limit number of times in the case of a ceiling time-saving function (time-saving function b), or setting or derivation (display) of a time-saving symbol in the case of a sudden time-saving function (time-saving function c).

As mentioned above, when a jackpot occurs in the normal game mode (including the remaining reserve consumption mode) or in specific game modes A-C, the game will transition through the jackpot state, and then immediately after the jackpot ends, the time-saving feature A will be activated, causing a transition to specific game mode A.

In the normal gaming state (including the remaining reserve consumption mode), specific gaming state A, and specific gaming state C, when the ceiling number of plays is reached, which triggers the b time reduction, the b time reduction is activated and a transition to specific gaming state B is possible. However, in specific gaming state B, even if the ceiling number of plays is reached, which triggers the b time reduction, a new ceiling time reduction activation flag (A5115) is not generated, and a new b time reduction cannot be activated. In this way, the b time reduction is prohibited from occurring twice in specific gaming state B, preventing a situation in which the specific gaming state B is effectively extended and giving the player an excessive advantage. Note that in this embodiment, because the ceiling number of plays cannot be reached in specific gaming state A and the remaining reserve consumption mode, there is effectively no transition to specific gaming state B from specific gaming state A or the remaining reserve consumption mode of the normal gaming state. This prevents an excessive advantage from being given to the player.

As mentioned above, when the ceiling number of times is reached and the game transitions from medium support specific game state C (c time reduction) to high support specific game state B (b time reduction), the presentation mode switches from time reduction mode #4 to time reduction mode #3, and the presentation changes. In this case, the way the game ball is hit switches from a left-hit state, in which hitting with the left is recommended, to a right-hit state, in which hitting with the right is recommended, and the main variation display game switches from a special chart 1 variation display game to a special chart 2 variation display game.

Furthermore, in the normal gaming state (excluding the remaining reserve consumption mode), when a time-saving symbol is derived as a trigger for the c time-saving feature with a support hit, the c time-saving feature is activated, resulting in a transition to the specific gaming state C. However, in the specific gaming state A, the specific gaming state B, and the remaining reserve consumption mode of the normal gaming state, the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game, and as described above, a support hit (time-saving symbol) does not occur in the special chart 2 variable display game, so the c time-saving feature is not activated and the game does not transition to the specific gaming state C. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a time-saving symbol is derived as a trigger for the c time-saving feature by the special chart 1 variable display game in the specific gaming state C, the activation of the c time-saving feature is prohibited, and new c time-saving features cannot be activated, for example, by not executing the setting of the initial value for the number of time-saving fluctuations (A5126) and the support activation setting process (A5127). In this way, overlapping occurrences of c time reductions in specific gaming state C are prohibited, preventing specific gaming state C from being effectively extended and preventing excessive advantages for the player. It is also possible to configure a system where, when a time-saving symbol is derived in specific gaming state C, the initial value of the number of time-saving variations is reset and the support activation setting process is executed to activate a new c time reduction. However, even with this configuration, if the remaining number of time-saving variations is greater than the initial value of the number of time-saving variations (the number of time-saving variations for the new c time reduction), the remaining number of time reductions will suddenly decrease, and the new c time reduction may be disabled and canceled.

In addition, in specific game states A and B, if a win is made in the start winning slot 36 and there is no special symbol 2 start memory, the special symbol 1 variable display game may be executed, but it is also possible to forcibly prohibit the operation of time reduction c to prevent transition to specific game state C. To achieve this, in specific game states A and B, even if the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game is a support win (time-saving symbol), the setting of the initial value of the time-saving variable count (A5126) and the support operation setting process (A5127) are not executed.

[Display on collective display device]
Fig. 85 is a diagram illustrating the display of the collective display device 50 according to the third embodiment. Note that the display of the collective display device 50 other than that shown in Fig. 85 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, there is no special high probability state, so unlike the first embodiment, LED lamp D9 (third game state display unit 59) indicates whether a right-handed or left-handed hit (normal hit) is occurring by lighting up or off, just like LED lamp D7 (first game state display unit 57).

When there is no normal power support (no power support), i.e., when the game is in normal play mode or transition mode, the LED lamps D7 and D9 on the collective display device 50 are off, indicating that the game is in left-handed play mode (normal play mode), and the LED lamp D17 on the collective display device 50 is also off, indicating that the variable time reduction function is not activated (i.e., the non-time reduction mode).

In specific game state C, which is time-saving mode c, LED lamps D7 and D9 are off, indicating the left-hand hit state (normal hit state), while LED lamp D17 is on, indicating the variable time reduction function is active (i.e., time-saving mode). However, exceptionally, if a win (normal hit) occurs in the normal symbol variable display game during time-saving mode c (specific game state C), LED lamps D7 and D9 as right-hand hit LEDs will light up when the winning symbol stops, indicating a right-hand hit state in which the normal power is released. Therefore, when the normal symbol variable display game is executed by the game ball passing through the normal symbol start gate 34 in the lower-left game area 32 in left-hand mode, resulting in a win, and the normal symbol variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state by the center support, the player will be instructed (suggested) to hit right.

In addition, in specific gaming state C, a left-hit instruction display instructing a left hit and a right-hit instruction display instructing a right hit may be displayed on display device 41, corresponding to the left-hit and right-hit states indicated by LED lamps D7 and D9 on collective display device 50. This makes it easier for even inexperienced players to understand that they are hitting right, making it easier for them to benefit from the normal power release due to the center support. To benefit the player, the right-hit instruction display on display device 41 may be displayed not when LED lamps D7 and D9 light up, but when the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) actually opens. In addition, in specific gaming state C, if the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is a normal win that occurs within a short time (for example, 50 msec or less) (in the case of normal power release pattern H1, described below), the right-hit instruction display does not need to be displayed on display device 41 to avoid disappointing the player.

In addition, since right-hitting states in which right-hitting is recommended occur exceptionally in specific gaming state C, the left-hitting instruction display may always be displayed on the display device 41, regardless of the left-hitting state or right-hitting state indicated by LED lamps D7 and D9. In this way, skilled players will hit right in response to normal power release, making it easier for them to benefit from the center support, and as players try to increase their skill level, the operation of the gaming machine 10 may improve.

Furthermore, since left-hitting is the normal state in specific gaming state C, the left-hitting instruction display may not be displayed on the display device 41 to avoid discomfort to the player, or the left-hitting instruction display may be displayed on the display device 41 only for a specified period when transitioning to specific gaming state C.

Furthermore, in specific game state A, which is time-saving mode a, and specific game state B, which is time-saving mode b, LED lamps D7 and D9 light up to indicate that the right-hand hit state is active, and LED lamp D17 lights up to indicate that the variable time reduction function is active.

During the jackpot state and small jackpot game state, LED lamps D7 and D9 will light up to indicate the right-hand hit state, and LED lamp D17 will be off to indicate that the variable time reduction function is not activated (i.e., not in the time-shortened state). As an exception, in a specific game state, during a short period of small jackpot gameplay without a V win due to a small jackpot result in the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game (during the small jackpot opening in Figure 98), the variable time reduction function is not turned off (the no-time-shortened flag is not saved) and remains activated, so LED lamps D7 and D9 will light up to indicate the right-hand hit state, and LED lamp D17 will light up to indicate that the variable time reduction function is activated (i.e., in the time-shortened state). Furthermore, since a V win is guaranteed to occur during a long period of small win play due to a small win result in the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game (during the small win opening in Figure 98), resulting in a big win, the variable time shortening function is turned off (the no time shortening flag is saved) and deactivated, and LED lamp D17 is turned off to indicate that the variable time shortening function is not activated (i.e., the non-time shortening state).

[Features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation]
Figures 86 and 87 are diagrams showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation in the third embodiment.

As shown in Figure 86, there are three types of winning symbols (winning stop symbols, normal symbol winning symbols) in the normal symbol variable display game. In this embodiment, regardless of whether normal power support is present or not, the normal symbol winning probability is always a constant value of 250/251, and is not controlled to change between low probability (low normal symbol probability) and high probability (high normal symbol probability). Note that the probability may be lower than 250/251 in normal game mode or specific game mode C with medium support.

The starting memory count (number of reserved normal maps) for the normal map change display game is 4. The maximum count number for normal power (count upper limit) is 5. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 600 msec regardless of the game status.

The normal map fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, is 5,000 msec in the normal game state and transition state without normal power support (electric support), 4,900 msec in specific game state C with time reduction c, and 200 msec in specific game state A with time reduction a and specific game state B with time reduction b. The normal map fluctuation time becomes shorter in the following order: no electric support (normal game state, transition state) > medium support (specific game state C) > high support (specific game states A and B). Thus, compared to the state without normal power support (low support) in the normal game state and transition state, in specific game state C with medium support, it is slightly more likely to enter a state where normal power is easy to win (open state), and in specific game states A and B with high support, it is extremely likely to enter a state where normal power is easy to win. The normal map fluctuation time is set during normal map processing based on the support state corresponding to each game state (i.e., no electric support, medium support, high support) (A7920 in Figure 46).

As shown in Figure 87 (A), by allocating 65,521 possible random numbers for normal winning symbols (A7710), a lottery is drawn to determine winning stop symbol number 1 corresponding to winning symbol 1 with a probability of 65,321/65,521, winning stop symbol number 2 corresponding to winning symbol 2 with a probability of 100/65,521, and winning stop symbol number 3 corresponding to winning symbol 3 with a probability of 100/65,521 (A7912).

Depending on the on/off combinations of LED lamps D8, D10, and D18 on the variable display unit 53 for the normal symbol variable display game, the winning symbol 1 is displayed as (off, on, off), the winning symbol 2 is displayed as (off, off, on), and the winning symbol 3 is displayed as (off, on, on). Note that the losing symbol for the losing symbol number (A7909), which is stop symbol number 0, is displayed as (off, off, off).

The normal power release pattern is the manner in which the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) opens when a normal symbol is hit once. During normal play, that is, in normal play mode and transition mode, the normal power release pattern is pattern H1, which releases normal power once for a short period of time for all winning symbols 1 to 3, and pattern H1 is selected with a 100% probability, so there is no normal power support (no power support). Also, in specific play mode A (time-shortened a) and specific play mode B (time-shortened b), the normal power release pattern is pattern H3, which releases normal power once for a long period of time for all winning symbols 1 to 3, and pattern H3 is selected with a 100% probability, so there is high support.

On the other hand, in specific gaming state C (c time reduction), the normal power release pattern is pattern H1 for the winning symbol 1, and pattern H2, which releases normal power twice, for winning symbols 2 and 3, with patterns H1 and H2 coexisting. Pattern H1, which releases normal power once for a short period of time, is selected with a probability of 65321/65521 x 100%, and pattern H2, which releases normal power twice, is selected with a probability of 200/65521 x 100%. Thus, in specific gaming state C, the probability of selecting pattern H1, which releases normal power for a shorter period of time than pattern H2, is much higher than the probability of selecting pattern H2, resulting in medium support. By making medium support (specific gaming state C) slightly more advantageous than no electric support (normal gaming state), the interests of the player and the gaming parlor are adjusted to prevent the player's profit from becoming too great.

As mentioned above, the patterns corresponding to hits 2 and 3 are the same in each game state, so hits 2 and 3 may be combined into one hit.

As shown in Figure 87 (B), in short-time opening pattern H1, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened only once for a short time. The normal power opening time (A8407) for pattern H1 is 36 msec, the normal power remaining ball processing time (A8708) is 600 msec, the normal map ending time (A8903) is 100 msec, and the recovery time after the normal map ending until the next normal map variable display game is possible is 4 msec (the interrupt period of the timer interrupt processing).

In pattern H2, which opens twice on normal power, the normal variable winning device 37 opens twice, with the normal power opening time being 36 msec for the first opening and 1624 msec for the second opening. The normal power opening time for the first opening (A8407) is the same as the normal power opening time of 36 msec for pattern H1. While pattern H2 is indistinguishable from pattern H1 in the first opening, the second opening surprises the player and increases their interest in the game. The normal power opening time for the second opening (A8704) is significantly longer than the normal power opening time for the first opening. Furthermore, the normal power opening time for the second opening of pattern H2 (1624 msec) or the total opening time of the first and second openings (36 msec + 1624 msec) is longer than the normal power opening time of 36 msec for pattern H1. Furthermore, the normal power remaining ball processing time, normal power ending time, and recovery time for pattern H2 are the same as those for pattern H1, simplifying normal power control.

Furthermore, in pattern H2, the wait time (A8702) between the first and second releases is longer than the time between the first and second normal power releases, for example, 3000 msec. This long wait time allows the player, who has confirmed the passage of the game ball through the normal power start gate 34 in the lower left and the first normal power release, time to switch from hitting left to hitting right, allowing them to hit right in time for the second discharge release. The total time from the start of the normal power release to the end of the recovery time in pattern H2 (36 msec + 3000 msec + 1624 msec + 704 msec) is longer than the total time in pattern H1 (36 msec + 704 msec) and the total time in pattern H3 (2800 msec + 704 msec).

In the long-time opening pattern H3, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened only once for a long time. The normal power opening time (A8407) of pattern H3 is 2800 msec, longer than the normal power opening time of 36 msec of pattern H1, and longer than the normal power opening time of the second opening of pattern H2 (1624 msec) or the total opening time (36 msec + 1624 msec). Therefore, pattern H3 makes it easier to win the normal variable winning device 37 than patterns H1 and H2. The normal power remaining ball processing time, normal power ending time, and return time of pattern H3 are the same as patterns H1 and H2, making normal power control easier.

As described above, the total open time of normal electricity increases in the order of pattern H1 < pattern H2 < pattern H3, and the selection probability of pattern H1, which has the shortest total open time, decreases in the order of no electric support (normal gaming state, transition state) > medium support (specific gaming state C) > high support (specific gaming states A, B). Furthermore, without electric support, the selection probability of pattern H1 is 100%, and with high support, the selection probability of pattern H3 is 100%. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the normal fluctuation time decreases in the order of no electric support > medium support > high support. Therefore, the player's profit increases in the order of no electric support < medium support < high support.

In this embodiment, the normal power release time, winning start pointer value, and winning end pointer value are set in accordance with the normal power stop symbol information (winning symbols 1-3) and the support state (no electric support, medium support, high support) corresponding to each game state (A8405-A8407 in Figure 49, A8704 in Figure 51). Therefore, the normal power release time is set for each pattern H1-H3 for the normal power release of pattern H1, the first and second normal power releases of pattern H2, and the normal power release of pattern H3. For patterns H1 and H3, the winning start pointer value and winning end pointer value are set to the same value (0 in this case), and normal power is released only once. Furthermore, for pattern H3, the winning start pointer value and winning end pointer value are set to different values (0 and 2 in this case), and normal power is released twice.

In this embodiment, since only pattern H2 has a second normal power release, the wait time and normal power release time for the second normal power release are set in the normal power operation transition setting process only for the normal stop symbol information for hits 2 and 3 and the support state (medium support) corresponding to specific game state C, i.e., only for pattern H2 (A8702 and A8704 in Figure 51).

The normal electric remaining ball processing time and normal symbol ending time are set to the same value regardless of the normal symbol stopping symbol information (winning symbols 1-3) and the support state corresponding to each game state (no electric support, medium support, high support), i.e., regardless of pattern H1-H3 (A8708 in Figure 51, A8903 in Figure 52). However, these may also be set according to the normal symbol stopping symbol information and support state.

[Special drawing information setting process]
Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special chart information setting process according to the third embodiment. The special chart information setting process is executed in the special chart 1 variation start process and the special chart 2 variation start process (A3404, A3504). Note that in the process of Figure 88, unlike Figure 28 of the first embodiment, for simplicity, the distinction between the first half variation and the second half variation is eliminated, but it may be distinguished.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection pointer table (A14201), and then uses this variable group selection pointer table to obtain a variable group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A14202). As shown in Figure 82, presentation modes such as normal mode, remaining reserve consumption mode, and time-saving modes #1-#4 each correspond to a respective game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state A-C). Therefore, by processing step A14202, a variable pattern table is set according to each game state, as described below.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a variable group selection offset table (A14203) and uses this variable group selection offset table to obtain offset data corresponding to the variable pattern discrimination flag and the stopping pattern pattern (A14204).

The variable symbol discrimination flag indicates the symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the variable symbol that will start, and determines whether the special symbol variable display game that will start is the special symbol 1 variable display game or the special symbol 2 variable display game. Therefore, by processing step A14204, it is possible to make the variable pattern table different for the special symbol 1 variable display game and the special symbol 2 variable display game, as described below. In addition, the stopping symbol pattern corresponds to the result of the special symbol variable display game (big hit, small hit, support hit, miss). Therefore, by processing step A14204, it is possible to make the variable pattern table different depending on the result of the special symbol variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A14205) and saves the value obtained by the addition as variable allocation information in the variable allocation information area (A14206).

[Variation pattern setting process]
Figure 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the variation pattern setting process according to the third embodiment. The variation pattern setting process is executed in the special chart 1 variation start process and the special chart 2 variation start process (A3406, A3506). Note that in the process of Figure 89, unlike Figure 29 of the first embodiment, for simplicity, there is no distinction between the first half variation and the second half variation, but they may be distinguished. Also, for simplicity, only one variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 2) is used among the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable selection address table (variation group table) (A14301). Then, it obtains and prepares the address of the variable pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variable selection table) corresponding to the variable allocation information (A14206) (A14302). Here, the variable pattern table is a variable pattern group consisting of a collection of one or more variable patterns (variation numbers), and is set by obtaining its address (e.g., the first address). As described above, in the special symbol information setting process (Figure 88), the variable allocation information is set based on the presentation mode, variable symbol discrimination flag, and stop symbol pattern corresponding to the game state. Therefore, a variable pattern table (variation pattern group) can be set corresponding to each game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state A-C), special symbol type (type of special symbol: special symbol 1 or special symbol 2), and the result of the special symbol variable display game (jackpot, small hit, support hit, miss).

Then, the variable pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) for the target (special chart 1 or special chart 2) and prepared (A14303). Then, an allocation process (A14304) is performed, and the variable number obtained as a result of the allocation is obtained and saved in the variable number area (A14305). The variable number is associated with a predetermined variable pattern and indicates the predetermined variable pattern (for example, a normal reach miss A, an SP3 reach jackpot B, etc.). In this way, in the variable pattern setting process, a variable number is set as a variable pattern by a lottery-based allocation process based on the variable pattern table.

[Variable start information setting process]
Figure 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting fluctuation start information according to the third embodiment. The fluctuation start information setting process is executed in the special chart 1 fluctuation start process and the special chart 2 fluctuation start process (A3407, A3507). In Figure 90, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to those in Figure 32 of the first embodiment, and explanations are omitted. In the process of Figure 90, unlike Figure 32 of the first embodiment, for simplicity, the distinction between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation is eliminated, but it may be distinguished.

If the result of the special chart 2 variation display game is neither a small win nor a big win (the result of A4600b is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether it is in time-saving mode #1 or remaining reserve consumption mode (A4600c). If it is in time-saving mode #1 or remaining reserve consumption mode (the result of A4600c is "Y"), it saves the variation time value corresponding to the number of special chart 2 variations after the end of the big win (the number of times the special chart 2 variation display game is executed) in the special chart game processing timer area (A4615). As a result, in time-saving mode #1 or remaining reserve consumption mode, if there is a miss (no support win), the variation time value of the special chart 2 variation display game is set for each number of special chart 2 variations after the end of the big win, and the number of rotations is controlled. Controlling the number of rotations in time-saving mode #1 or remaining reserve consumption mode may increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in step A4600c, it may instead be determined whether the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1, #2) or remaining reserve consumption mode is in effect, and in the case of a loss in the specific game state A or remaining reserve consumption mode, the rotation speed of the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game may be controlled. Alternatively, in step A4600c, it may only be determined whether the remaining reserve consumption mode is in effect, and in the case of a loss only in the remaining reserve consumption mode, the rotation speed of the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game may be controlled. In step A4600c, it may only be determined whether the time-saving mode #1 is in effect, and in the case of a loss only in time-saving mode #1, the rotation speed of the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game may be controlled.

The game control device 100 executes steps A14601-A14605 if the variable display game to be started is not the special chart 2 variable display game but the special chart 1 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (the result of A4600b is "Y"), or if the mode is neither time-saving mode #1 nor remaining reserve consumption mode (the result of A4600c is "N").

The game control device 100 clears the random number storage area for the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 (A14601). Then, it sets a fluctuation time value table (A14602) and uses the fluctuation time value table to obtain a fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation number indicating the fluctuation pattern (A14603). This obtains a fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Next, it saves the fluctuation time value in the special game processing timer area (A14604). After that, it prepares a fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the fluctuation number (i.e., the fluctuation pattern) as a presentation command (A14605). As a result, the next presentation command setting process (A4610) sends the fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) to the presentation control device 300.

In addition, in Figure 90, the processing of steps A4600a, A4600b, A4600c, A4615, and A4616 may be eliminated, and the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation number (fluctuation pattern) may be obtained in all cases (A14603).

[Fluctuation pattern table setting status]
91 is a table showing the setting status of the fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern selection table, fluctuation selection table, fluctuation pattern group) (A14302) set based on the processing of Figures 88 and 89, etc., for each game state and special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2). As described above, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern table is set to select the fluctuation pattern of the special chart 1 fluctuation display game (first fluctuation display game) by lottery, and the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern table is set to select the fluctuation pattern of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game (second fluctuation display game) by lottery.

The same special chart 1 variation pattern table A is set for the special chart 1 variation display game in the normal game state (normal mode) with no electric support, the specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) with medium support, and the specific game state B (time-saving mode #3) with high support (A14302). Then, with reference to this variation pattern table A, the variation pattern (variation number) of the special chart 1 variation display game is selected by lottery in the allocation process (A14304).

In the normal game state, the special chart 2 variation pattern table for the special chart 2 variation display game is set to variation pattern table A, the same as the special chart 1 variation pattern table. However, unlike the normal game state, in specific game state C and specific game state B, the special chart 2 variation pattern table is set to the same common variation pattern table C.

As shown in Figure 82, when transitioning from specific game state C to specific game state B due to reaching the ceiling number of plays, the time-saving state (time-saving mode) remains the same, so if the fluctuation pattern table is left the same for variable display games of the same special symbol type (special symbol 1 variable display game or special symbol 2 variable display game), there will be less sense of incongruity and it will not violate game rules, etc. Furthermore, if the fluctuation pattern table is the same, the fluctuation pattern or variable time value of the variable display game will be standardized, reducing the sense of incongruity.

For this reason, in specific game state C and specific game state B, the same common variation pattern table A is set as the special chart 1 variation pattern table (first variation pattern group), and the same common variation pattern table C is set as the special chart 2 variation pattern table (second variation pattern group). Also, when transitioning from the normal game state to specific game state C, the main variation display game remains the special chart 1 variation display game in the left-hand hit state, so to minimize any sense of incongruity, the same common variation pattern table A is set as the special chart 1 variation pattern table in both the normal game state and specific game state C.

When transitioning from specific game state C to specific game state B, the type (state) of normal power support transitions from medium support to high support, resulting in a significant change in the game content. Therefore, it is preferable to clearly switch the type of fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation display game (special chart 1 fluctuation display game in specific game state C, special chart 2 fluctuation display game in specific game state B) in accordance with the change in normal power support. Therefore, in both specific game state C and specific game state B, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern table (first fluctuation pattern group) and the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern table (second fluctuation pattern group) are set differently, like fluctuation pattern table A and fluctuation pattern table C.

Also, although not shown in Figure 91, in specific game state A (a time reduction, time reduction modes #1, #2), the special chart 1 variation pattern table may be variation pattern table A, like specific game states B and C, to ensure commonality of presentation through a common variation pattern and to reduce development costs, or it may be a variation pattern table other than A to increase presentation variation. Similarly, in specific game state A, the special chart 2 variation pattern table may be variation pattern table C, like specific game states B and C, to ensure commonality of presentation and to reduce costs, or it may be a variation pattern table other than C to increase presentation variation.

Alternatively, in time-saving mode #2 of specific game state A, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern table may be fluctuation pattern table A, like specific game states B and C, to ensure commonality in presentation using a common fluctuation pattern and reduce development costs, or in time-saving mode #1, since the number of time-saving periods is extremely small compared to time-saving mode #2 and specific game states B and C, a fluctuation pattern table other than A may be used to distinguish presentation. Similarly, in time-saving mode #2, the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern table may be fluctuation pattern table C, like specific game states B and C, to ensure commonality in presentation and reduce development costs, or in time-saving mode #1, a fluctuation pattern table other than C may be used to distinguish presentation.

In addition, the settings of the fluctuation pattern table in Figure 91 may be the same regardless of the result of the fluctuation display game. Alternatively, the settings of the fluctuation pattern table in Figure 91 may change depending on the result of the fluctuation display game (jackpot, small hit, support hit, miss). For example, if the result of the fluctuation display game is a miss, it will be as shown in Figure 91, but if it is a small hit or big hit, a common fluctuation pattern table D may be used regardless of special chart 1, special chart 2 or the game status, and the fluctuation pattern or fluctuation time value may be made common regardless of special chart 1, special chart 2 or the game status.

[Example of a production screen]
92 is a diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 according to the third embodiment. (A) shows the display screen of the normal mode, which is the display mode for the normal game state without normal power support, and (B) shows the display screen of the time-saving mode #4, which is the display mode for the specific game state C with medium support.

In Figure 92 (A), the mode display 679 corresponding to normal mode displays "High School Mode" or "High School Stage," and a background image modeled after a school is displayed. Here, the mode display 679 and background image are still images, but they may also be videos. The number of variations display 677 is "95G," indicating that the number of times the special chart variation display game has been played (excluding the number of times in the special chart state) since the end of the jackpot is 95. The number of variations display 677 may also indicate the number of games remaining until the ceiling number is reached (ceiling number - number of plays). The special chart 1 reserve number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reserve number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen respectively display the number "4" indicating the special chart 1 reserve number (special chart 1 start memory number) and the number "0" indicating the special chart 2 reserve number (special chart 2 start memory number).

On the display screen, the left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and center pattern 611c can be displayed as changing decorative special patterns (large patterns). The changing displays of the left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and center pattern 611c are displayed in the left changing display area 610A, right changing display area 610B, and center changing display area 610C, respectively. Furthermore, the changing display of the decorative reduced patterns (small patterns) is executed in the changing display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

The left and right symbols 611a and 611b are displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of seven symbols (decorative identification symbols) corresponding to the numbers 1 through 7 appear in sequence on the display screen, move vertically (up and down) across the display screen, and then disappear from the display screen. To conserve display space, the middle symbol 611c is displayed in a different direction from the vertical scrolling of the left and right symbols 611a and 611b, and is displayed in a rotational manner that is perceived by the player as rotating around an axis. Note that instead of a rotational movement, a forward and backward movement (forward and backward scrolling) may be performed, in which a series of overlapping symbols appear to move forward and backward using perspective or the like. The middle symbol 611c may also be vertically scrolled, just like the left and right symbols 611a and 611b.

The left design 611a is composed of a character image 612a (character component, character portion) showing a character and a letter image 613a (letter component, letter portion) showing a number (character). To shorten the overall horizontal width of the left design 611a, the character image 612a and the letter image 613a are arranged so that their centers are roughly aligned in the scrolling direction (vertical direction), and the letter image 613a is located on the central axis of the character image 612a. Similarly, the right design 611b is composed of a character image 612b showing a character and a letter image 613b showing a number. To shorten the overall horizontal width of the right design 611b, the character image 612b and the letter image 613b are arranged so that their centers are roughly aligned in the scrolling direction (vertical direction), and the letter image 613b is located on the central axis of the character image 612b. Furthermore, to conserve display area, the middle design 611c is composed only of a letter image 613c showing a number.

In normal mode, the multiple numbers from 1 to 7 used as identification information are not all the same color, such as 1 (green), 2 (blue), 3 (orange), 4 (blue), 5 (green), 6 (blue), and 7 (orange), but at least one number is a different color from the others. Even numbers may be the same color (cool colors). Odd numbers may be a different color from the even numbers, and may include multiple colors such as green (neutral colors) and orange (warm colors). In this embodiment, when the special decorative pattern includes characters and numbers, the characters correspond one-to-one to the numbers and are different for each number, but this is not limited to this, and the same character may be used for different numbers.

Four hold displays 682a (first hold displays) are displayed in the first hold display section 630a (waiting area), which displays the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as the first hold display. The hold displays 682a have a display format resembling playing cards. In addition, in the hold consumption area 640, a variable hold display 682b, which indicates the variable hold related to the currently executed special chart 1 variable display game (the start memory that was the right to execute this special chart variable display game), is displayed in a display format resembling a turned-over playing card. The hold consumption area 640 may be represented by a base. In addition, nothing is displayed in the second hold display section 630b, which displays the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as the second hold display (second start memory display).

In Figure 92(B), a background image (background movie) of the video (movie) is displayed across the entire screen of the display device 41. Additionally, mode indicators 679 corresponding to the medium support time-saving mode #4 are displayed in two opposing locations, the upper left and lower right corners, such as "Super Mode" and "Super Area." Because multiple mode indicators 679 are displayed in a layer behind the hold indicator 682a, the mode indicator 679 in the lower right corner is hidden by the hold indicator 682a in the front layer. However, the mode indicator 679 in the upper left corner, which is not hidden by the hold indicator 682a, allows the player to fully recognize the current presentation mode. The mode indicator 679 is displayed diagonally, unlike the horizontal orientation in Figure 92(A), and may move diagonally across a strip-shaped area as part of the video of the background image or independently of the video. In this way, the appearance of the mode indicator 679 is clearly different between time-saving mode #4 and normal mode, making time-saving mode #4 easier to distinguish and visually identify from normal mode.

The number of times the special chart variable display game has been played since the jackpot ended is "124G," indicating that 124 times the special chart variable display game has been played. The remaining number of times the game has been played 696 in the upper right corner of the display screen shows the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is active, i.e., the number of times the variable display game can be played in time-saving mode #4. The special chart 1 reserve number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reserve number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen respectively show the number "4" indicating the number of special chart 1 reserves and the number "0" indicating the number of special chart 2 reserves. Note that because this is a medium support, it is often the case that the number in the special chart 2 reserve number display section 660 will be other than "0" due to a win in the normal variable winning device 37.

In time-saving mode #4 for medium support in Figure 92(B), as with the normal mode in Figure 92(A), the left and right patterns 611a and 611b are displayed in a changing manner by vertical scrolling, and the middle pattern 611c is displayed in a changing manner by rotation. However, to make it clear that Figure 92(B) is a medium support, the changing pattern may be different from that in Figure 92(A). For example, the middle pattern 611c may be displayed in a changing manner by vertical scrolling, and the left and right patterns 611a and 611b may be displayed in a changing manner by rotation.

In the medium support time-saving mode #4 of Figure 92(B), as in the normal mode of Figure 92(A), the left pattern 611a and right pattern 611b are composed of a character image showing a character and a letter image showing a number. The middle pattern 611c is composed only of a letter image 613c showing a number. However, to clearly indicate that it is a medium support in Figure 92(B), the decorative special pattern may be composed in a different manner from that of Figure 92(A). For example, the middle pattern 611c may be composed of a character image and a letter image, and the left pattern 611a and right pattern 611b may be composed only of a letter image. Note that when the same characters are used for the same numbers in time-saving mode #4 and normal mode, the display manner may be different as long as they are recognizable as the same character based on their common characteristics.

In addition, in the time-saving mode #4 with medium support, the multiple numbers from 1 to 7 used as identification information are the same warm color (here, red), such as 1 (red), 2 (red), 3 (red), 4 (red), 5 (red), 6 (red), and 7 (red). The color of the characters is also the same color (red) as the numbers. This makes it easy for players to understand that the time-saving mode #4 with medium support is different from the normal mode without normal power support. To make it easier to understand that it is time-saving mode #4, the LEDs of the board decoration devices 46, such as the upper presentation unit 40c and the side presentation unit 40d, and the LEDs of the frame decoration devices 18, such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b, may also emit the same color (red) as the numbers. Note that time-saving mode #4 and normal mode are both in the left-handed state, and the special chart 1 variable display game is the main variable display game, so it is important to make time-saving mode #4 visually easy to distinguish from normal mode.

In addition, in time-saving mode #4, four hold displays 682a (first hold displays) are displayed in the first hold display section 630a (waiting area), which displays the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as the first hold display. However, unlike the normal mode in Figure 92 (A), the hold displays 682a have a star-shaped display pattern. This also makes it easier to distinguish time-saving mode #4 from the normal mode. In addition, in the hold consumption area 640, a variable hold display 682b, which indicates a variable hold related to the currently executed special chart 1 variable display game, is displayed in a star-shaped display pattern.

In addition, if a win occurs in the normal variable winning device 37 due to the medium support, the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the variable display game is executed may be displayed as a second hold display (second start memory display) in the second hold display section 630b. Also, the distinction between the second hold display section 630b and the first hold display section 630a may be eliminated, and the second hold display may be displayed together with the first hold display in a common hold display section (waiting area).

Furthermore, in time-saving mode #4 with medium support, unlike normal mode without normal power support, the upper presentation unit 40c operates as a movable device (movable member) that vibrates slowly, repeatedly moving up and down along the display screen in front of the player on the display screen of the display device 41. This increases the player's expectations for time-saving mode #4, which is medium support and can transition to time-saving mode #2 with 30 time-saving cycles, and enhances the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by providing a presentation (the action presentation of the upper presentation unit 40c) that can appear in time-saving mode #4 but not in normal mode, it is possible to easily distinguish time-saving mode #4 from normal mode. Furthermore, in games with special symbol variation, the upper presentation unit 40c may operate from the start of the variation of the decorative special symbol, and stop operating when the variation ends or when a predetermined presentation occurs.

Furthermore, in the medium support time-saving mode #4, some of the effects (pre-announcement effects) that can appear in normal mode do not appear. Effects that can appear in normal mode but do not appear in time-saving mode #4 include hold change announcements that change to a specific hold display, pre-reading effects using the movement of movable role objects, specific types of dialogue announcements, and specific types of step-up effects.

The above explains the differences in presentation between medium support time-saving mode #4 and normal mode, but further differences in presentation may be added between medium support time-saving mode #4 and high support time-saving modes #2 and #3 to make time-saving mode #4 easier to distinguish from time-saving modes #2 and #3. For example, the display mode of the mode display 679, background image, configuration and variation of the decorative special symbols, color of the numbers and characters of the decorative special symbols, and possible presentations may be different between time-saving mode #4 and time-saving modes #2 and #3.

[External information editing processing]
Figure 93A is a flowchart showing the procedure for the latter half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment. The external information editing process is executed in the timer interrupt process (A1319). Note that in Figure 93A, the same steps as those in Figure 54B of the first embodiment are assigned the same step numbers and their explanations are omitted.

If the time-saving signal control timer is not 0, the gaming control device 100 updates it by -1 (A9527), and then determines whether or not it is in time-saving mode #3 (time-saving mode b, specific gaming state B) (A9528a). Note that the initial timer value of the time-saving signal control timer is the value set in the time-saving signal control timer area in step A5302 of the support operation setting process (Figure 37) described above (e.g., a fixed time of 128 msec). If the gaming control device 100 is not in time-saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "N"), it proceeds to processing of step A9528c.

When the game control device 100 is in time-saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "Y"), it determines whether the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (A9528b). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9528b is "Y"), it ends the external information editing process. If the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9528b is "N"), it saves the on data of the jackpot 3 signal in the external information output data area (A9529), and ends the external information editing process.

As a result, when the ceiling time reduction (time reduction b) begins due to reaching the ceiling number of plays, the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is output to an external device such as the amusement facility's internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. After that, the output of the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal continues for the duration of the timer initial value set in the time reduction signal control timer area (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec).

If the game control device 100 is not in time-saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "N"), it determines whether it is in a mode other than time-saving mode #4 (c time-saving mode, specific game state C) (A9528c). If the game state is other than time-saving mode #4 (specific game state C) (the result of A9528c is "Y"), it ends the external information editing process. If the game is in time-saving mode #4 (specific game state C) (the result of A9528c is "N"), it saves the on data of the jackpot 4 signal in the external information output data area (A9530) and ends the external information editing process.

As a result, when a sudden time-saving (c time-saving) effected by a time-saving symbol (support hit) begins, the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal is output to an external device such as the gaming facility's internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. After that, the output of the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal continues throughout time-saving mode #4 (specific gaming state C).

In addition, the game control device 100 may also determine whether the time-saving signal control timer is at 0 in step A9528c. That is, in step A9528c, it may determine whether the mode is other than time-saving mode #4 or whether the time-saving signal control timer is at 0. In this way, the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal is output only from the start of time-saving mode #4 (specific gaming state C) until the timer initial value (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec) is reached.

[Output of jackpot signal (external information)]
Figure 93B is a time chart showing the on/off states of the jackpot 1 to 4 signals as external information. (I) shows the state before and after entering the b time-saving mode (i.e., before and after the ceiling number of times is reached). (II) shows the state before and after entering the c time-saving mode (i.e., before and after the time-saving symbol is derived).

The jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, and jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the machine type. In this embodiment, the jackpot 1 signal turns on at the start of a jackpot or small jackpot and turns off at the end of the jackpot or small jackpot. The jackpot 2 signal turns on at the start of a jackpot or small jackpot and turns off at the end of the jackpot or small jackpot. Furthermore, the jackpot 2 signal turns on at the start of the high support time reduction (excluding the medium support time reduction) and turns off at the end of the remaining reserve consumption mode (when the variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops).

The jackpot 3 signal turns on at the start of a jackpot or small jackpot, and turns off at the end of the jackpot or small jackpot. Furthermore, the jackpot 3 signal turns on at the start of b time reduction (ceiling time reduction) and turns off after a short fixed time (e.g., 128 msec) has passed. The jackpot 4 signal turns on at the start of medium support time reduction (excluding high support time reduction) and turns off at the end of medium support time reduction.

In Figure 93B (I), when the ceiling number of times is reached and time-saving mode b is entered, the game state changes from the normal game state to specific game state B. When high-support time-saving mode b is entered, on data for the jackpot 2 signal (jackpot 2 signal in on state) is output as a signal regarding the start of time-saving mode. The output of on data for the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long time until the remaining reserve consumption mode ends, that is, until the variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops.

Furthermore, when the b time reduction mode is entered, the processing of Figure 93A outputs the on data of the jackpot 3 signal to the external device for a short, fixed time (for example, 128 msec). This allows the external device to distinguish between the occurrence of the b time reduction mode (a time reduction mode) or the occurrence of the c time reduction mode due to a jackpot and to recognize the occurrence of the b time reduction mode or the reaching of the ceiling number of times. Furthermore, the external device can distinguish between cases where the jackpot 3 signal is generated by a jackpot or small jackpot (when it continues for a long time) and cases where the jackpot 3 signal is generated by the b time reduction mode (when it continues for a short time).

In Figure 93B (I), since no big hit, small hit, or c time reduction occurs, the big hit 1 signal and big hit 4 signal remain off.

In Figure 93B (II), when the time-saving symbol triggers the c time-saving mode (sudden time-saving mode), the processing in Figure 93A outputs ON data for the jackpot 4 signal to the external device. This allows the external device to distinguish between the occurrence of time-saving modes (a time-saving mode) and b time-saving mode due to a jackpot and recognize the occurrence of the c time-saving mode (specific game state C) or the derivation of a time-saving symbol. The output of ON data for the jackpot 4 signal continues for a long period of time until the c time-saving mode (specific game state C) ends.

In Figure 93B (II), since no jackpot, small jackpot, or b time reduction occurs, the jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, and jackpot 3 signal remain off. Even if the game enters the medium support c time reduction, the on data for the jackpot 2 signal (jackpot 2 signal in the on state), which occurs during the high support time reduction, is not output.

[Test signal output]
Figure 94A is a time chart showing the on/off output of the test signals output to the test firing test device, including the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal (1 bit), the normal electric device 1 open extension state signal (1 bit), the normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal (1 bit), the easy winning state signals 1 to 4 (4 bits), and the easy winning state confirmation signal (1 bit). Figure 94B illustrates the easy winning state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to the medium support and high support.

Normal power/normal symbol state signals, which indicate the state of normal power or normal symbol fluctuation, such as the normal electric device 1 extended opening state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, can turn on simultaneously with or after the easy win state signals 1-4, and the time difference between the on-timing of the normal power/normal symbol state signal and the easy win state signals 1-4 can be 0 msec or more. The easy win state confirmation signal can turn on simultaneously with or after the easy win state signals 1-4, and the time difference between the on-timing of the easy win state confirmation signal and the easy win state signals 1-4 can be 0 msec or more.

Figure 94A particularly illustrates a case where the game state transitions in the following order: normal game state → specific game state C (medium support, c time reduction) → specific game state B (high support, b time reduction) → jackpot state or transition state.

When a time-saving symbol is drawn during a support hit in the special symbol 1 variable display game during normal play, special play state C occurs, and the normal power support type becomes medium support (easier winning state 2). At this time, first, the 4-bit easy-to-win state signals 1-4 indicating the type of normal power support change from an indefinite state to 01H, corresponding to medium support, and are output to the test firing device. Next, an easy-to-win state confirmation signal, indicating that the normal power support state (easier winning state) has been confirmed, turns on for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, e.g., 32 msec), and is output to the test firing device. Next, the normal power release extension state signal, indicating that the normal power release time will be extended, and the normal symbol 1 variable time reduction state signal, indicating that the normal symbol variable time will be shortened compared to the normal play state, turn on as normal power normal symbol state signals indicating the normal power state and the normal symbol variable state, and are output to the test firing device. In Figure 94A, the order of changes is: easy win state signals 1-4 → easy win state confirmation signal → normal power normal map state signal.

After that, when the number of special symbol variation display games executed under predetermined conditions (special symbol low probability state) after the jackpot state ends in specific game state C reaches the ceiling number of times, specific game state B occurs, and normal power support becomes high support (easier winning state 1). At this time, the 4-bit easy winning state signal 1-4 indicating the type of normal power support changes from 01H corresponding to medium support to 00H corresponding to high support and is output to the test firing device. Next, the easy winning state confirmation signal indicating that the normal power support state (easier winning state) has been confirmed changes to ON for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and is output to the test firing device. Then, the normal electric device 1 opening extension state signal and the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal remain ON from specific game state C and are output to the test firing device.

After that, when the game transitions from specific game state B to the jackpot state or transition state, the winning probability state signals 1 to 4 become indefinite, and the normal electric device 1 opening extension state signal and the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal turn off.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 86, the probability of a normal hit does not change and is always a constant value of 250/251, so the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, which indicates that the normal hit probability is higher than normal, does not turn on. However, if the normal hit probability is high only during high support, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal turns on, as shown by the dotted line, and is output to the test firing device. If the normal hit probability is high during both medium support and high support, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal turns on and is output to the test firing device for the same period as the on period of the normal electric device 1 opening extension state signal and the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal.

Figures 95 and 96 are a table and a time chart showing the output of launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 as test signals output to the test firing device. Launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 are both signals indicating a right hit, which should launch the game ball into the right-hand game area 32.

As shown in Figure 95 (A), in the center support (specific game state C), when a normal win causes the normal power to be released in pattern H1, launch position designation signal 1 is output on, but launch position designation signal 2 is output off. On the other hand, in the center support, when a normal win causes the normal power to be released in pattern H2, both launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 are output on. As such, the output states of launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 differ between the normal power release in pattern H1 and the normal power release in pattern H2, so the test firing test device can distinguish between these two types of normal power release. To distinguish between normal power releases, it is also possible to configure the system so that only one of launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 is turned on when the normal power is released in pattern H1, and only the other is turned on when the normal power is released in pattern H2. Furthermore, even during periods when a normal win does not occur during center support or during normal game states, both launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 are turned off.

As shown in Figure 95 (B), during electric support other than medium support (high support, specific game state A and specific game state B), during a small hit, or during a big hit, the right-hand hit state is active, so launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 are both turned on and output.

For example, as shown in Figure 96, if a small win occurs during a normal power release of pattern H1, launch position designation signal 1 turns on at the start of the normal power release of pattern H1, launch position designation signal 2 turns on at the start of the small win, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the small win. If a normal power release of pattern H1 occurs during a small win, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the small win, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the small win. If a normal power release of pattern H1 occurs just before the end of a small win, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the small win, launch position designation signal 2 turns off at the end of the small win, and launch position designation signal 1 turns off at the end of the normal power release of pattern H1.

If a small win occurs during a pattern H2 normal power release, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the pattern H2 normal power release, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the small win. If a pattern H2 normal power release occurs during a small win, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the small win, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the small win. If a pattern H2 normal power release occurs just before the end of a small win, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the small win, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the pattern H2 normal power release.

[Operation of the main prize slot, lever solenoid, etc.]
Figure 97 is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 in the case of a small win result in the special chart 1 variable display game. (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error. The operation related to the opening and closing (closure) of the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 is controlled by the small win opening process (A2612). The on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, i.e., the opening/closing operation of the specific area 86, is controlled by the lever solenoid control process (A2618).

In Figure 97 (A), in the case of a small win result in the special chart 1 variable display game, unlike the case of a small win result in the special chart 2 variable display game, the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 is opened once for a short period of time. This short period of time is, for example, the shorter of the small win opening time (e.g., 1000 msec) and the time until the specified number of wins are made in the upper large winning port.

During this brief opening of the small jackpot at the upper large prize opening, the lever solenoid 86b turns on for an even shorter period (e.g., 100 msec), opening the specific area 86. However, because the opening of the specific area 86 (V prize opening) is so brief, it is almost impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area 86. Therefore, during the opening of the small jackpot as a result of the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game, a big jackpot due to a V prize entry almost never occurs.

A V-winning shot, as a ball entering the specific area 86, is detected by the specific area switch 72 of the specific area 86. The specific area switch 72 is enabled when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on, and is disabled when the processing of the remaining balls is completed. Also, while the specific area switch 72 is enabled, a test signal indicating that the special electric device is in operation is turned on and output to the test firing device.

When the upper large winning slot switch 39a (count switch) detects a gaming ball that has entered the upper large winning slot, it pulses on. Immediately afterwards, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects a gaming ball, so there is no remaining ball error. If the specific area switch 72 detects a gaming ball, irregular win information indicating a jackpot due to an unexpected, abnormal V-winning is sent to the presentation control device 300 along with an ending command at the end of the remaining ball processing. The presentation control device 300 then performs processing corresponding to the irregular win information, such as announcing that an abnormal V-winning has occurred.

The processing of remaining balls begins when the small win opening ends (when the upper large prize opening closes) and ends when the remaining ball counter reaches 0, whichever is later, or when the remaining ball processing time has elapsed. The remaining ball counter is incremented by +1 after a game ball passes through the upper large prize opening switch 39a, and is incremented by -1 when that game ball (remaining ball) is detected by the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72. In Figure 97 (A), the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball and the remaining ball counter has already reached 0 before the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed. Therefore, the small win remaining ball processing (A2613) ends when the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed, and the specific area switch 72 is disabled at this point.

In this embodiment, the small win ending occurs after the remaining balls are processed, but the special game processing (Figure 16) has a small win end process as the processing of game processing number "6", and the small win ending continues for the small win ending time (e.g., 2000 msec) set in the small win remaining ball processing (A2613). In the small win end process, the game processing number "0" for the special game normal processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area. When a jackpot occurs due to a V win, a fanfare effect (B2102) corresponding to the fanfare command (A5806) is executed for the fanfare time.

In Figure 97(B), as in Figure 97(A), the upper large prize opening is opened for only a short time, and during this short period of time when the upper large prize opening is opened for a small prize, the lever solenoid 86b is turned on for a short time (e.g., 100 msec), opening the specific area 86. The specific area switch 72 becomes active when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on. However, if there is a remaining ball error, the small prize remaining ball processing does not end even after the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed. Therefore, after a short on/off period in accordance with the on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (i.e., the opening pattern of the specific area 86), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again for a long time after an interval (e.g., 2900 msec) has elapsed, and then turned off in response to the release of the remaining ball error (end of remaining ball processing). Here, the interval time is the sum of the small win release time (e.g., 1000 msec) and the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec), but is not limited to this. The on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b is set to be the same for small wins in the special chart 1 variable display game and small wins in the special chart 2 variable display game (Figure 98).

After that, until the remaining ball error is released, the small win remaining ball processing continues, the lever solenoid 86b remains on, and the specific area switch 72 remains enabled. Then, while the specific area switch 72 is enabled, the special electric device operation signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing device. When the remaining ball error is released and the small win remaining ball processing is completed, the small win ending will occur as in Figure 97 (A).

In addition, when a game ball entering the upper large prize opening is detected and the upper large prize opening switch 39a (count switch) pulses on and off, and the remaining ball error monitoring time (e.g., 3000 msec) has elapsed, the remaining ball error flag, indicating that a remaining ball error is occurring, is set to on. After that, when the remaining ball counter reaches 0, the remaining ball error flag is turned off and the remaining ball error is canceled. For example, the timer measurement for the remaining ball error monitoring time and the on/off setting of the remaining ball error flag are performed by providing a remaining ball monitoring process within the prize opening switch/status monitoring process (A1308).

Figure 98 is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 in the case of a small win result in the special chart 2 variable display game. (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error.

In Figure 98 (A), in the case of a small win result in the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game, unlike the case of a small win result in the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game (Figure 97), the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 opens once for a short period of time (e.g., 48 msec), and then opens multiple times over a long period of time with an interval (e.g., 2,860 msec) in between. For example, the multiple openings consist of 48 msec x 19 openings and 424 msec x 18 closings, and this long period of time totals 8,544 msec, or the time until the specified number of wins are made at the upper large winning port. To achieve this opening pattern for the upper large winning port, for example, during processing during a small win opening, the opening and closing of the second special variable winning device 39 may be controlled by a control pointer, as with the normal power opening pattern.

Also, in Figure 98 (A), following the aforementioned on/off pattern of lever solenoid 86b, lever solenoid 86b turns on and off for a short time (e.g., 100 msec), followed by an interval (e.g., 2900 msec), after which lever solenoid 86b turns on again for a long time before turning off. The long time here is the shorter of 21000 msec or the time until the processing of the remaining balls is completed. Furthermore, in the case of a small win in the special chart 2 variable display game, the on/off pattern of lever solenoid 86b (i.e., the opening pattern of specific area 86) and the opening pattern of the upper large prize opening are the same until the upper large prize opening begins to open multiple times, and they are linked in approximately synchronized fashion (the lever solenoid 86b and upper large prize opening solenoid 39b are also linked in approximately synchronized fashion).

When the upper large winning slot switch 39a (count switch) detects a gaming ball that has entered the upper large winning slot, it pulses on. Immediately thereafter, or before the remaining balls are processed, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or specific area switch 72 detects the gaming ball, so there is no remaining ball error. Note that if the specific area switch 72 detects a gaming ball, it is a jackpot due to a normal V entry, so irregular win information is not sent to the presentation control device 300. When the processing of the remaining balls is completed, only the ending command is sent to the presentation control device 300.

The processing of remaining balls begins when the small win opening ends (when the upper large prize opening closes) and ends at the later of either the time the remaining ball processing time has elapsed or when the remaining ball counter reaches 0 (when the error is cleared). In Figure 98 (A), the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or specific area switch 72 detects a game ball and the remaining ball counter has already reached 0 before the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed, so the small win remaining ball processing (A2613) ends when the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed, and the specific area switch 72 becomes inactive at this point.

In this embodiment, the small win ending occurs after the remaining balls are processed, but the small win ending continues for the small win ending time (e.g., 4200 msec) set in the small win remaining ball processing (A2613). Note that the small win ending time for a small win using the special chart 2 variable display game is longer than for a small win using the special chart 1 variable display game.

In Figure 98(B), the upper large prize opening is opened in the same opening pattern as in Figure 98(A). The opening pattern of the upper large prize opening does not depend on whether or not there is a remaining ball error. Also, in Figure 98(B), the lever solenoid 86b operates in the same on-off pattern as Figure 98(A) until the small prize opening is complete, but because there is a remaining ball error, the lever solenoid 86b remains on for a long period of 21,000 msec, even after the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1,900 msec) has passed.

After that, small win remaining ball processing continues and the specific area switch 72 remains enabled until the remaining ball error is released. Then, while the specific area switch 72 is enabled, the special electric device operation signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing device. When the remaining ball error is released and the small win remaining ball processing is completed, the small win ending will occur as in Figure 98 (A). The occurrence and release of the remaining ball error is as explained in Figure 98 (B).

[Actions and Effects of the Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed. The game control means is capable of generating a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state B or specific game state A) that is advantageous to the player, and a second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C) whose generation conditions differ from those of the first specific game state. The game control means is capable of executing a first variable display game (e.g., a special symbol 1 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of a first start condition, and is capable of executing a second variable display game (e.g., a special symbol 2 variable display game) based on the establishment of a second start condition. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first group of variation patterns (e.g., special chart 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game is made different from a second group of variation patterns (e.g., special chart 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the second variation display game.

For example, the main variable display game may be different between the first and second specific game states, such as when the main variable display game becomes the second variable display game in the first specific game state and the first variable display game in the second specific game state. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by differentiating the first and second variable pattern groups in both the first and second specific game states, the type of variable pattern selected in the special chart variable display game can be clearly switched to match the type of specific game state. This allows for presentations that match the type of specific game state, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the first variation pattern group (e.g., special chart 1 variation pattern table) is set to the same as that in the normal game state in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. Therefore, the types of variation patterns selected in the first variation display game are common to the normal game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, reducing the sense of incongruity in the presentation and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, game control is simplified. Furthermore, there is no violation of game rules, etc.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the second variation pattern group (for example, the special chart 2 variation pattern table) is the same in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected in the second variation display game is common to both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, eliminating any sense of incongruity in presentation and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, game control is simplified. Furthermore, there is no violation of game rules, etc.

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information, and is capable of generating a special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a variable winning device (e.g., a normal variable winning device 37) that can convert the gaming ball between an easy-to-win state (e.g., an open state) in which it is easy to win and a difficult-to-win state (e.g., a closed state) in which it is difficult to win, and that is more likely to convert to the easy-to-win state in a specific gaming state than to the normal gaming state. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state B, b time reduction) without the occurrence of a special game state when the number of times the variable display game is executed under a predetermined condition (e.g., special symbol low probability) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., ceiling number of times), and can generate a second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C, c time reduction) without the occurrence of a special game state when the result of the variable display game results in a specific result (e.g., time-saving symbol) different from the special result. The game control means can execute a first variable display game (e.g., special symbol 1 variable display game) as the variable display game based on the establishment of a first start condition, and can execute a second variable display game (e.g., special symbol 2 variable display game) based on the establishment of a second start condition. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the first variation pattern group (e.g., special game state 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game is different from the second variation pattern group (e.g., special game state 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the second variation display game. In the second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C, time-saving c), the variable winning device (e.g., normal variable winning device 37) is more likely to convert to an easier-to-win state than the normal game state, but is more difficult to convert to an easier-to-win state than the first specific game state (e.g., specific game state B, time-saving b).

The main variable display game (e.g., special chart 1 variable display game in the second specific game state, special chart 2 variable display game in the first specific game state) and the type of normal power support (e.g., high support in the first specific game state, medium support in the second specific game state) may differ between the first and second specific game states. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by differentiating the first and second variable pattern groups in both the first and second specific game states, the type of variable pattern selected in the special chart variable display game can be clearly switched to match the type of specific game state, and therefore the type of normal power support. This allows for presentations that match the type of specific game state, and therefore the type of normal power support, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the game control means can generate a third specific game state (e.g., specific game state A, time-saving a) that is advantageous to the player following the special game state (e.g., jackpot state), in conjunction with the occurrence of the special game state. A variable winning device (e.g., normal variable winning device 37) is more likely to convert to a state in which it is easier to win in the first specific game state (e.g., specific game state B, time-saving b) and the third specific game state (e.g., specific game state A, time-saving a) than in the second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C, time-saving c).

Therefore, the normal power support in the second specific game state can be medium support, and the normal power support in the first and third specific game states can be high support. The second specific game state can be a distinctive specific game state that differs from the other multiple specific game states (the first and third specific game states) in the profits that the player can obtain and the way in which the game balls are launched, which adds variety to the game and increases the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is equipped with a variable winning device (e.g., a normal variable winning device 37) that can convert the game ball between an easy-to-win state where it is easier to win and a non-easy-to-win state where it is more difficult to win, and that makes it easier to convert to the easy-to-win state in a specific gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state, a special probability state, or a normal power support state) than in the normal gaming state. The gaming control means can generate a first specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state A or specific gaming state B) after the end of a special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot state), and can generate a second specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state C) without generating the special gaming state when the result of the variable display game results in a specific result (e.g., a time-saving pattern) that is different from the special result. The gaming control means makes it easier to convert the variable winning device to the easy-to-win state in the first specific gaming state than in the second specific gaming state. The game control means is capable of executing a first variable display game as a variable display game upon the establishment of a first start condition, and is capable of executing a second variable display game upon the establishment of a second start condition. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variable pattern group (e.g., special chart 1 variable pattern table, variable pattern table A) for selecting the variable pattern of the first variable display game is different from a second variable pattern group (e.g., special chart 2 variable pattern table, variable pattern table C) for selecting the variable pattern of the second variable display game.

For example, the main variable display game may differ between the first and second specific game states, such as when the main variable display game becomes the second variable display game in the first specific game state and the first variable display game in the second specific game state. However, the first and second variable pattern groups are different in both the first and second specific game states, and the type of variable pattern selected in the special chart variable display game can be switched according to the type of specific game state and, ultimately, the frequency with which the variable winning device enters a state where it is easy to win (for example, the type of normal power support). This allows for presentations that correspond to the type of specific game state and, ultimately, the frequency (degree) with which the variable winning device enters a state where it is easy to win, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game control means makes it easier to convert the variable winning device (e.g., the normal variable winning device 37) into an easy-to-win state in a first specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state A or specific gaming state B) than in a second specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state C), and as a variable display game, it is possible to execute a first variable display game based on the establishment of a first start condition, and a second variable display game based on the establishment of a second start condition, and in the second specific gaming state, it makes the first variable pattern group for selecting the variable pattern of the first variable display game the same as that in the normal gaming state.

A second specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state C), which is more difficult to convert to an easy-to-win state than a first specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state A or specific gaming state B), may have a frequency (degree) of conversion of the variable winning device to an easy-to-win state closer to the normal gaming state than the second specific gaming state. Therefore, if the first variable pattern group in the second specific gaming state is the same as that in the normal gaming state, the types of variable patterns selected in the first variable display game in the second specific gaming state will be the same as in the normal gaming state, reducing the sense of incongruity in the presentation, while the two specific gaming states with different frequencies of conversion to the easy-to-win state can increase the excitement of the game. Game control is also simplified. In particular, if the hitting method (right or left hit), which is the launch mode of the game ball, is the same in the second specific game state and the normal game state, and the main variable display game is the same as the first variable display game, there is a significant advantage to making the first variable pattern group the same in the second specific game state and the normal game state and standardizing the types of variable patterns in the first variable display game (otherwise, it would feel very strange).

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 107. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to third embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and redundant descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The fourth embodiment relates to the aspects of the presentation device (display aspect, light emission aspect, operation aspect) that correspond to the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (difference in number of balls + initial value). Presentation devices are devices that can execute presentations, such as the display device 41, decorative devices (board decoration device 46 or frame decoration device 18, etc.) that consist of presentation LEDs, and movable role objects (movable body, board presentation device 44, frame presentation device). The control performed by the game control device 100 is the same as in the other embodiments from the first to third embodiments.

[Aspects of performance-related devices according to the state of safety devices, etc.]
99 is a table showing the state of the performance device according to the state of the safety device. As shown in Fig. 99, the state of the performance device changes depending on the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (and therefore the difference in the number of balls).

As explained in the first embodiment, the safety device will be in an inactive state (activation notice state, activation warning state, or normal state where the safety device is not activated) in response to a safety device counter value of 0 to 189,999 (a difference in balls of -100,000 to 89,999). The safety device will be in an activation notice state where the safety device is about to activate in response to a safety device counter value of 190,000 to 194,999 (a difference in balls of 90,000 to 94,999). The safety device will be in an activation warning state where the safety device is about to activate in response to a safety device counter value of 195,000 (reaching a difference in balls of 95,000) or in an activated state where the safety device is activated (activated state).

When the safety device counter value is 195,000, the safety device will enter an activation warning state during a big win or small win, and will enter an activated state when there is neither a big win nor a small win. Therefore, if the safety device enters an activated state before a big win or small win occurs, a game stop state (game not possible state, game prohibited state) will occur immediately afterwards, and the activation warning state will not occur.

On the other hand, the activation warning state can occur when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 during a big win or small win. Therefore, when the big win or small win ends and the state is no longer either a big win or a small win, the safety device will transition from the activation warning state to an activated state (activated state).

When the safety device counter value is between 0 and 194,999 (-100,000 and 94,999 ball difference), and the safety device is in an inactive or activation warning state, the gaming machine's state (game state) is in play or waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer state). Furthermore, when the safety device counter value is 195,000 (reaching 95,000 ball difference), the gaming machine is in a small win or big win state when the safety device is in an activation warning state, but is in a game-stop state (unplayable state, game prohibited state) when the safety device is activated. The same game-stop state can also occur when a strong error 2 occurs.

When game play is stopped, games such as the special chart variable display game, the regular chart variable display game, and round play (play during a big win or small win) cannot be played. To achieve this, as in the first embodiment, when game play is stopped, game ball detection by the prize slot switch is disabled, and the prize slot (winning) is disabled ("Y" in A2201), the solenoids are stopped to close the large prize slot, specific area 86, regular variable prize slot 37, etc. ("Y" in A1602 and A1603), the launch of game balls from the ball launcher is stopped (prohibited) and launching is stopped ("Y" in A1611 and A1612), and the collective display device 50 is turned off (the results of A1610 and A1612 are "Y"). When game play is stopped, not only can the special chart variable display game and the regular chart variable display game not continue, but new special chart variable display games and new regular chart variable display games cannot be started. It is also possible to configure the system so that firing does not stop when the safety device is activated and game play is stopped (firing does not have to be stopped even when game play is stopped due to strong error 2). Also, as in the first embodiment, the payout command transmission process (A1307) does not stop when game play is stopped, and the payout of prize balls for winnings that occurred before the game stopped state continues.

When game play is stopped, a security signal is generated (A9322) and output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer, and a test signal is generated (A9323) and output as on data for a gaming machine error state signal to a test firing test device. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that a test signal (gaming machine error state signal) is not generated when game play is stopped due to the safety device being activated (even when a game play is stopped due to strong error 2, a test signal does not have to be generated).

When the safety device is not activated, the display device 41 generally does not display any safety device-related information. However, as an exception, while waiting for customers, the display device 41 may display a specific model display 541 (e.g., the words "Equipped with complete function") to indicate that the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a safety device. Players who see the specific model display 541 can recognize that the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a safety device (complete function).

When the safety device is in the activation warning state, the display device 41 displays the activation warning display 511 (for example, the text "Playing will end soon") as a safety device-related display (or safety device activation information display). To effectively display the activation warning display 511, the display mode of the activation warning display 511 may change depending on the game state, such as when waiting for customers or when a variable display is in progress (when a special chart variable display game is being played). At the start of the activation warning state, the performance control device 300 has received an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state as a safety device activation-related command, and therefore the activation warning display 511 is enabled on the display device 41 (safety device system processing of B1330).

The activation warning display 511 warns the player in advance of the possibility that they may be unable to play, urging them to end their game and preventing them from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. The activation warning display 511 can also surprise those who are cheating and urge them to stop cheating. The display mode of the activation warning display 511 can be changed depending on the game status (e.g., waiting for customers, during a variable display), allowing for appropriate warning displays.

When the safety device is in an activation warning state during a small win or a big win, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 512 (e.g., the text "Play will end after the win ends") as a safety device-related display. At the start of the activation warning state, the performance control device 300 receives an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state as a safety device activation-related command, enabling the display device 41 to display the activation warning display 512 (safety device processing of B1330).

When the safety device is activated (not during a small win or a big win), i.e., when game play is stopped, the display device 41 displays the activation indicator 513 (e.g., the text "Play Stopped") as a safety device-related display. At the start of the activation state, the presentation control device 300 receives an activation command corresponding to the activation state as a safety device activation-related command, enabling the activation indicator 513 to be displayed on the display device 41 (safety device system processing of B1330).

The performance control device 300 also constitutes a display control means capable of displaying on the display device 41, etc. (display means) an operation warning display 511 that warns of the safety device's upcoming activation, an activation warning display 512 that warns of the safety device's upcoming activation, and an activation display 513 that indicates that the safety device is currently activated.

The display device 41 can also display an error message even when the game is stopped due to the safety device being activated. For example, because payouts continue even when the game is stopped, a payout error may occur regarding the payout of game balls (game media), and the display device 41 can notify the user of the payout error by displaying an error message. Furthermore, if a strong error 2 occurs, the game will also stop and the game will be stopped (a state where play is not possible, a state where play is prohibited), but in a state where play is stopped due to a strong error 2, the display device 41 may be able to notify the user of a payout error by displaying an error message to make hall staff and players aware of the occurrence of an error, or may not be able to notify the user of a payout error so that it is not confused with a strong error 2.

In the game-stopped state, unlike the non-operational state, operation notification state, and operation warning state, all light-emitting elements (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and performance display device 152 are turned off (all off). Note that in the game-stopped state, all light-emitting elements (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and performance display device 152 may be lit (all on). In the game-stopped state, the ball lending button 27 remains enabled, and when a player operates it to borrow game balls, game balls may be dispensed from the payout device to the upper tray 21.

When game play is stopped, the presentation control device 300 receives an operating command and turns off (all off) or turns on (all on) all presentation LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs on the frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46. However, when an error occurs, some or all of the presentation LEDs may be lit in red. Also, when game play is stopped, the presentation control device 300 may stop audio output from the speaker 19 to silence the sound.

In addition, when game play is stopped, the presentation control device 300 does not execute the hall/player setting mode process (B0011), and even if the operation unit is operated, the brightness of the presentation LEDs and LCD (display device 41, etc.) and the volume of the speaker 19 may be made unadjustable, and the brightness and volume may be set to the default. For example, the default brightness may be zero or a predetermined value (all lights off or all lights on), and the default volume may be zero (silent). In addition, the hall/player setting mode process (adjustment process) can perform various adjustments, such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, of the gaming machine 10 in response to operations by the gaming facility manager or player on the operation unit (cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 451b, volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the gaming machine, etc.). In this way, when game play is stopped, various adjustments such as volume and brightness are not performed even if a player or other user operates the device, making it easier for players to recognize that game play is stopped. Also, if the default brightness and default volume are low, power can be saved when game play is stopped.

In another configuration, when play is stopped, the presentation control device 300 may execute the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) but not accept (ignore or disable) operation signals corresponding to operation of the operation unit, thereby setting the brightness and volume to a default even if an operation unit is performed by the gaming facility manager or a player. In this configuration, the presentation control device 300 may not accept (ignore or disable) operation signals corresponding to the first operation unit (cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 451b) that can be operated by the player, while accepting operation signals corresponding to the second operation unit (volume adjustment switch 335) that can be operated by a gaming facility manager, attendant, or other hall personnel. Then, when a player operates the first operation unit, the brightness and volume may be set to a default, and when a hall personnel operates the second operation unit, the volume and brightness of the gaming machine 10 may be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the second operation unit. The second operation unit (volume adjustment switch 335) is located on the performance control device 300 on the back of the gaming machine and can be operated by hall staff but not by players.

When a game stop state is initiated (when a safety device is activated) while a movable device (movable member, electric device, movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device) is in operation, if the movable device is in an operating position other than its initial position, the effect control device 300 may move the movable device from its operating position back to its initial position. This prevents the movable member from being maintained in its operating position in a non-playable state where game play is not possible, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstandings such as the movable member being broken. While the movable device (movable member) is returning from its operating position to its initial position, the effect LED of the movable device may be lit (operating state) or off (initial state). As mentioned above, in a game stop state, the effect LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 are either all off (all off) or all on (all on). Therefore, after the movable device returns to its initial position, the effect LED of the movable device will be turned off or on in accordance with the other LEDs.

Conversely, if a game stop state is initiated (a safety device is activated) while a movable device (movable member, electric device, movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device) is in operation, and the movable device is in an operating position other than its initial position, the effect control device 300 may maintain the movable device in the operating position rather than returning it to its initial position. In this case, the operating position at which the movable device stops and is maintained may be the operating position at the start of the game stop state, another operating position to which the movable device has moved slightly since the start of the game stop state due to a time lag, or another appropriate operating position different from the operating position at the start of the game stop state. As mentioned above, in a game stop state, the effect LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 are all turned off (all off) or all turned on (all on). Therefore, the movable device remains stopped in its operating position, and the effect LEDs of the movable device may be turned off or on in accordance with the other LEDs.

In this way, if the movable device does not return to its initial position but remains in its designated operating position after the game stop state begins (after the safety device is activated), this is unnatural and can emphasize to the player that the gaming machine 10 is not in a normal state (a state in which play is possible, a state in which play is possible). For example, if the movable device, such as the board presentation device 44 (upper presentation unit 40c), remains in an unnatural position, such as in front of the display screen of the display device 41, while the game is stopped, the player will feel uncomfortable and will be more likely to recognize that the gaming machine 10 is not in a normal state.

When the movable role device is a board presentation device 44 installed on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), the initial position of the movable role device is, for example, a position where the movable role device is off the front (forward) of the display device 41, and the operating position of the movable role device is, for example, a position where the movable role device overlaps the display device 41 in front of the display device 41 (see the position of the upper presentation unit 40c in Figure 103 (K3)). In this case, the initial position may also be a position in the storage space on the back (rear) side of the center case 40 where the movable role device is difficult to see from the front (player side) (a position where the movable role device is partially covered by the center case 40). Furthermore, if the movable prop is a frame effect device (for example, a decorative device 18a such as a top unit) installed in the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame), the initial position of the movable prop is, for example, a position in the storage space inside the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame) where the movable prop is difficult to see from the front (a position where the movable prop is recessed into the glass frame 15 and part of the movable prop is covered by the glass frame 15), and the operating position of the movable prop is, for example, a position where the movable prop protrudes forward, upward, or diagonally from the initial position.

When a strong error 2 occurs, a game stop state occurs, just as when the safety device is activated. However, if this game stop state begins while a movable device is in operation and the movable device is in an operating position other than its initial position, the presentation control device 300 may move the movable device from its operating position back to its initial position, or may maintain it in its operating position without returning it to its initial position. Returning the movable device to its initial position prevents unnecessary misunderstandings, such as that the movable component is broken. Not returning the movable device to its initial position would be unnatural, making it easier for the player to recognize that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 10.

As another example, in the game stop state, various game processing timers such as the special game processing timer, the bonus game processing timer, and the regular game processing timer are stopped, but the collective display device 50 may not be turned off and may continue to display as it did when the game stopped state was entered. Furthermore, if the collective display device 50 is displaying a variable value at the start of the game stop state, it may be turned off after this variable value display has ended. This prevents the variable value display on the collective display device 50 from suddenly ending. Furthermore, in the game stop state, the performance display device 152 may continue to display.

Note that when the gaming machine 10 is powered off and then powered on again, the safety device counter area, safety device activation information area, etc. are initialized by the safety device information initialization process (A1104-A1106), and safety device activation information such as safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3) is erased. As a result, safety device-related displays (activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, activation display 513, etc.) on the display device 41 may be erased and hidden. If the gaming machine 10 is powered off while a safety device is activated and then powered on again with the RAM initialization switch 112 on, the safety device activation flag area is also cleared to 0 (A1045), and the gaming machine 10 returns from a game-stopped state to a playable state.

[Screen transition example 1]
100A and 100B are an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in relation to the fourth embodiment.

In (A), after the power is turned on, the gaming machine 10 enters a waiting state and the display device 41 displays the waiting screen. Since play has not yet started, the safety device counter value is at its initial value (100,000). After that, a player seated in a chair in front of the gaming machine 10 rotates the operating handle 24, causing the ball launcher to launch a gaming ball, which then enters the starting winning slot 36, and the special chart change display game is executed.

(A) then shows a situation in which the special chart variation display game has been executed twice since the power was turned on. The safety device counter value has decreased from its initial value (100,000) to 99,920. Note that, because the total number of prize balls does not increase significantly until a jackpot occurs, the difference in the number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) tends to decrease by the number of discharged balls, and the safety device counter value (difference in number of balls + initial value) also tends to decrease. When a difference in ball command indicating the safety device counter value or difference in the number of balls is sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, the safety device counter value or difference in the number of balls (safety device counter value - initial value) may be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Since the machine is in normal game mode after power-on, the mode display 679 displays "A mode," which corresponds to the normal mode presentation mode. The number of variations display 677 indicates the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been played since power-on or after a jackpot has ended; here, "2G" indicates that the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been played since power-on is 2. Note that for machines capable of generating a special symbol variation state, the number of variations display 677 may indicate the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been played since power-on or after a jackpot has ended, excluding the number of times in the special symbol variation state, to make it easier to see that the ceiling number of plays is approaching. The number of variations display 677 may also indicate the number of games remaining until the ceiling (ceiling number of plays - number of plays).

The first predetermined image 675 is a "○" symbol indicating that the special symbol 1 variable display game is running (changing), and the second predetermined image 676 is an "×" symbol indicating that the special symbol 2 variable display game is stopped. The "○" symbol may be flashing to cause a fourth symbol change as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

On the display screen, the left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and center pattern 611c can be displayed as variable decorative special patterns (large patterns). The variable displays of the left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and center pattern 611c are displayed in the left variable display area 610A, right variable display area 610B, and center variable display area 610C, respectively, in the variable display area 610. In this embodiment, the left pattern 611a, right pattern 611b, and center pattern 611c are displayed as variable displays by vertical scrolling. Furthermore, the variable display of the reduced decorative patterns (small patterns) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

Four hold displays 682a (first hold displays) are displayed in the first hold display section 630a (waiting area), which displays the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as the first hold display. The hold displays 682a have a display format resembling playing cards. In addition, in the hold consumption area 640, a variable hold display 682b, which indicates the variable hold related to the currently executed special chart 1 variable display game (the start memory that was the right to execute this special chart variable display game), is displayed in a display format resembling a turned-over playing card. The hold consumption area 640 may be represented by a base. In addition, nothing is displayed in the second hold display section 630b, which displays the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as the second hold display (second start memory display).

The special chart 1 reserve number display section 650 and special chart 2 reserve number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen respectively display the number "4" indicating the special chart 1 reserve number (special chart 1 start memory number) and the number "0" indicating the special chart 2 reserve number (special chart 2 start memory number).

After (a), numerous jackpots occur, and at (c), the safety device counter value reaches 189,993 (difference in number of balls = 89,993), which is less than the warning start value of 190,000 (difference in number of balls = 90,000) at which the safety device begins to warn of activation, but is approaching the warning start value of 190,000.

In (C), a specific game state (time-saving state) is entered after a jackpot has ended or the maximum number of times has been reached, and the mode display 679 displays "Flower Mode" as the presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving mode. The number of times the special chart change display game has been played since the jackpot ended, as in "73G." Also, in response to the time-saving mode, a right-hit instruction display 502 is displayed instructing the player to hit right.

The special chart 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660 respectively display the number "0" indicating the number of reserved special chart 1 and the number "1" indicating the number of reserved special chart 2. The first predetermined image 675 is the symbol "X" indicating that the special chart 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the symbol "O" indicating that the special chart 2 variable display game is running.

In the second pending display section 630b, which displays the second start memory as the second pending display, one pending display 683a (second pending display) is displayed. The pending display 683a has a display form imitating a flower. In addition, in the pending consumption area 640, a changing pending display 683b, which indicates the changing pending related to the currently running special chart 2 changing display game (the start memory that was the right to play this special chart changing display game), is displayed in a display form imitating a flower. The pending consumption area 640 may be represented by a base. In addition, nothing is displayed in the first pending display section 630a, which displays the first start memory before the running of the changing display game as the first pending display.

Next, in (E), due to a win at the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port) by hitting from the right, the number "0" indicating the number of reserved special figures 1 and the number "4" indicating the number of reserved special figures 2 are displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, respectively. In the second reserved figure display unit 630b, four reserved figures 683a (second reserved figures) are displayed.

In (D), several prize balls are obtained by winning the normal variable winning device 37, and the safety device counter value becomes 190009, which is greater than the warning start value of 190000 at which the activation warning state begins (safety device counter value ≥ 190000). Then, an activation warning display 511 ("Playing will end soon") is displayed as a safety device-related display, warning of the activation of the safety device. Since the activation warning display 511 can be displayed in a small (short) display area, it may not be displayed all at once, but may be displayed as a scrolling display that moves across the screen. In this activation warning state, the activation of the safety device may be warned not only by the activation warning display 511, but also by sound from a speaker or by the illumination of a predetermined LED for effect.

The activation warning display 511 warns the player of the upcoming safety device activation, alerting them in advance that play may be halted, encouraging them to end their game and preventing them from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. Furthermore, warning the player of the upcoming safety device activation can surprise anyone cheating and encourage them to stop cheating.

Activation notice display 511 is displayed small so as not to overlap with other displays or image objects. This makes the other displays and image objects easier to see. Here, the other displays and image objects include decorative special patterns (large pattern in variable display area 610, small pattern in variable display area 615), first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, hold displays 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, hold number displays (numbers in special pattern 1 hold number display section 650 and special pattern 2 hold number display section 660), mode display 679, number of changes display 677, right-hit instruction display 502, and characters (not shown).

Note that even if the activation notice display 511 is displayed small so as not to interfere with other displays, it may be displayed in a swaying manner or moved by scrolling across the display screen to attract attention to a certain extent. Furthermore, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed near (to the left of) the right hit instruction display 502, facing (adjacent to) it, to attract attention to a certain extent. When the activation notice display 511 is displayed large, it may be overlapped with other displays or other image objects, but to make it more noticeable, it is displayed on a layer in front of other displays and other image objects.

Then, at (E), the player stops operating the operating handle 24 to take a break, etc., and the launch of the game ball ends. Then, the second start memory is consumed, the reserve display 683a in the second reserve display section 630b disappears, and the special chart 2 reserve number in the special chart 2 reserve number display section 660 becomes "0". Only the changing reserve display 683b is displayed.

The safety device counter value is 190055, which is greater than the warning start value of 190000 at which the activation warning state begins, and the safety device-related display, activation warning display 511 ("Playing will end soon"), continues to be displayed. The variation count display 677 shows "77G," which is the number of times the special chart variation display game has been played since the jackpot ended.

Next, in (K), the special symbol 2 variable display game in (E) ends, and the decorative stop symbols are displayed as "3, 7, 8" in the variable display area 610 and variable display area 615. The pending variable display 683b disappears, and the second predetermined image 676 becomes "X". The activation notice display 511 does not overlap with the decorative special symbol (here, the decorative stop symbol). The safety device counter value remains at 190055.

Next, at (G), the gaming machine 10 enters a waiting state (waiting state), and the display device 41 displays the waiting screen. While waiting, the safety device counter value is maintained at 190055. As mentioned above, the display mode of the activation warning display 511 ("Playing will end soon") may change depending on the game state, and the display mode of the activation warning display 511 may be larger during waiting than during variable display (when the special chart variable display game is being executed). This allows the activation warning display 511 to be displayed appropriately and effectively. In an activation warning state where the safety device is expected to activate soon and stop play, displaying the activation warning display 511 large and conspicuously while waiting can prevent new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10. To make the activation warning display 511 even more conspicuous, it may be moved or swayed during waiting. The activation warning display 511 may also be displayed as a scrolling display across the screen to make it more conspicuous.

Details of the customer waiting screen will be described later in Figure 104, but the operation warning display 511 is displayed on a layer in front of other displays and other image objects on the customer waiting screen (here, the model name display 519 "P Tora Tora Tora") to prevent the large operation warning display 511 from being obscured by other displays and other image objects on the customer waiting screen and becoming difficult to see.

After that, in (k), the player has just finished his break and resumed play. A win in the normal variable winning device 37 generates two second start memories (special symbol 2 start memories), and variable pending display 683b and pending display 683a are displayed. The special symbol 2 pending number in the special symbol 2 pending number display section 660 becomes "1." Then, the special symbol 2 variable display game begins in the variable display area 610 and variable display area 615, and the second predetermined image 676 becomes "○." The variable number display 677 displays "78G." The safety device counter value begins to change and is now 190057. After the customer waiting state ends, the operation notice display 511 ("Playing will end soon") returns to the same display mode as during the variable display before the customer waiting state began, and is displayed in a smaller size.

After (K), multiple jackpots occur without going through normal mode due to consecutive wins, etc., and at (K), the safety device counter value reaches 194,500 (difference in number of balls = 94,500). This is below the counter reference value of 195,000 at which the safety device can begin to operate, but is approaching the counter reference value of 195,000.

When a difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the difference ball number is sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, the presentation control device 300 can recognize that the safety device counter value has reached a predetermined value of 194,500, which is greater than the warning start value of 190,000 and slightly less than the counter reference value of 195,000. When the safety device counter value reaches this predetermined value of 194,500, the presentation control device 300 may flash the operation warning display 511 to notify that the safety device is about to start operating.

In (K), the changing pending display 683b and the four pending display 683a are displayed, and the number of pending special symbols 2 in the pending special symbol 2 display unit 660 becomes "4". The number of times of change display 677 shows "115G". Here, to notify the player that the second start memory will be wasted due to the stoppage of play caused by the activation of the safety device, the presentation control device 300 may flash some or all of the changing pending display 683b and the four pending display 683a.

In addition, from (I) onwards, when the safety device counter value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value of 194,500 (when the difference in balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value of 94,500), the presentation control device 300 may prohibit and not execute the hold change notice, which changes the display mode (color or shape) of hold displays 682a, 683a, etc. according to the expected probability of a jackpot, so as not to give the player unnecessary hope when the safety device is about to activate and stop play. On the other hand, even from (I) onwards, changes in the display mode of the variable hold displays 682b, 683b do not need to be prohibited, as they indicate the expected probability of the currently running variable display game resulting in a small jackpot or a jackpot. Furthermore, when the safety device counter value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value of 194,500, the presentation control device 300 may also prohibit pre-reading effects other than the hold change notice (pre-reading pre-reading effects such as continuous pre-reading effects and pre-reading zone effects), or may prohibit only some of the pre-reading effects (for example, the hold change notice). If only the hold change notice is prohibited as part of the look-ahead effect, the effect can be ensured without the player directly expecting the hold displays 682a and 683a themselves. It is also possible to configure the hold change notice and look-ahead effect to be prohibited and not executed in the operation notice state from (d) onwards.

In addition, once the safety device counter value reaches a predetermined value of 194,500 (after the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined value of 94,500), all or part of the look-ahead performance may be prohibited and not executed unless the power is turned on again after being cut off. Alternatively, if the safety device counter value once reaches the predetermined value of 194,500 and then falls below the predetermined value of 194,500 (or another smaller value of 194,000), all or part of the look-ahead performance may be allowed to be executed again without being prohibited.

The game control device 100 can execute a special symbol pending information determination process (pre-determination process) that can determine the outcome of the special symbol variation display game before it is executed based on the start memory, regardless of the safety device counter value (difference in number of balls), and can include the determination result in a look-ahead stop symbol command or a look-ahead variation pattern command and send it to the presentation control device 300. Unlike the above, the presentation control device 300 that receives the look-ahead stop symbol command or the look-ahead variation pattern command can execute a look-ahead presentation (look-ahead notice presentation) regardless of the safety device counter value (difference in number of balls). This allows the look-ahead presentation to be executed even when the safety device counter value (difference in number of balls) reaches the predetermined value of 194,500 (predetermined value of 94,500 for the number of balls), which is close to the occurrence of a non-playable state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine 10 is powered off (OFF) and then powered on again (ON) before the safety device is activated, the safety device activation information area will be initialized by the safety device information initialization process and the safety device activation warning information (value 1) will be erased, so the activation warning display 511 displayed in (D) to (K) will no longer be displayed.

After that, in (J), the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000 (difference in number of balls = difference in ball reference value 95,000), but since it is neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot, the safety device enters an activated state (in operation), and the gaming machine 10 immediately enters a game stop state. Even during a special symbol variation display game that results in a jackpot or small jackpot (which may include a stopped display), if the counter reference value reaches 195,000 (difference in ball reference value 95,000), the safety device enters an activated state, and the gaming machine 10 enters a game stop state. (Conversely, unlike this embodiment, it is also possible to configure the safety device not to enter an activated state during a special symbol variation display game that results in a jackpot or small jackpot.) Because game play has entered a game stop state (a state in which play is not possible, a state in which play is prohibited), the safety device-related display 513 ("Play Stopped") is displayed. The operating display 513 is larger and more noticeable than the operation warning display 511, and strongly suggests that the safety device is operating (play is stopped) to prevent the player from using the gaming machine 10. The operating display 513 ("play stopped") may be made to flash, shake, or move to stand out using an animation display, etc.

The in-operation display 513 notifies players that a game (especially a new game) is suspended, preventing them from using the gaming machine 10 and stopping any cheating. When the in-operation display 513 (the "Play Suspended" text image) is displayed, predetermined images that differ from the in-operation display 513 (first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, hold displays 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, hold number display, mode display 679, number of changes display 677, right-hit instruction display 502, decorative special symbols, characters, and other display images) are erased and hidden. This makes the in-operation display 513 easier to recognize by players, hall staff, and others. In contrast, the activation notice display 511 ("Play will end soon") may be displayed while displaying predetermined images (first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, hold displays 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, hold number display, mode display 679, number of changes display 677, right hit instruction display 502, decorative special symbols, characters, and other effect images), and the activation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the win ends" in Figure 101 described below) may also be displayed while displaying images such as the number of rounds and round effects (video).

In addition, if a special chart variable display game is being executed (displayed) in variable display area 610 and variable display area 615 when the game is stopped, the special chart variable display game may be forcibly stopped, or the special chart variable display game may be continued in a manner that makes it invisible on the back layer (behind the background, at the backmost side).

Next, in (K), immediately after (J), a payout error display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify of a payout error related to the payout of game balls. It is assumed that a payout error related to the payout of prize balls resulting from a win that occurred before the game was stopped continues when or after the game was stopped. Examples of payout errors include a chute ball shortage error, which corresponds to a lack of game balls before the payout, and an overflow error, which corresponds to the lower tray 23 being full. As mentioned above, these payout errors are included in weak errors.

In (K), the payout error displays include a ball out error display 520 (e.g., the text "ball out error") that indicates a shot ball out error, and an overflow error display 522 (e.g., the text "please remove balls") that indicates an overflow error. When each payout error is resolved, the corresponding payout error display may be erased. In this way, payout errors can be reported even when game play has stopped due to the safety device being activated, so no disadvantage or inconvenience is caused to players or hall personnel. The game control device 100, presentation control device 300, display device 41, etc. work together to constitute a reporting means that can report errors.

In addition, if an error or fraud other than a payout error (such as a slot open error or magnet fraud) occurs when or after the game has been stopped, an error message may be displayed to notify the player of the error or fraud so as to prevent any disadvantage or inconvenience to the player or hall staff. Furthermore, even if an error (particularly a payout error) or fraud occurs, if the safety device counter value is at the counter reference value of 195,000, the safety device will be activated and the game will be stopped.

In this embodiment, payout error displays such as the bulb out error display 520 and overflow error display 522 are displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation display 513 ("stopped") so that they do not overlap. The operation display 513 may be displayed in a layer (foreground layer) in front of the payout error display to make it stand out, and overlapped with the payout error display, or conversely, the payout error display may be displayed in a layer (foreground layer) in front of the operation display 513 to make it stand out, and overlapped with the operation display 513. Alternatively, only the payout error display may be displayed, and the operation display 513 may not be displayed, until the payout error is resolved.

In addition, error displays such as payout errors can be displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation notification display 511 ("Play will end soon") even in the operation notification state, and can be displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the win ends") even in the operation warning state (see Figure 101). The error display can be displayed on a layer in front of the operation notification display 511 and operation warning display 512 and overlapped on top of them to make it more noticeable.

When game play is stopped, each error (particularly each payout error) may be signaled by an error display, a sound being output from the speaker 19, or by the effect LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 lighting up in a specific lighting pattern. For example, this specific lighting pattern may involve some or all of the effect LEDs lighting up in red, and only the LED of the frame decoration device 18 (the frame LED) may light up, or only the LED of the board decoration device 46 (the game board 30 LED) may light up, or the LEDs of both the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 may light up.

For example, for shot ball out errors and overflow errors, an error message (ball out error message 520 or overflow error message 522) is displayed, and a sound indicating the error content is output from the speaker 19 (such as "ball out" or "remove the ball").

In both the game-stopped state and states other than the game-stopped state (in game or waiting for a customer, not yet activated, activation warning state, activation warning state), each error (especially each payout error) may be notified in the same notification manner (notification method) so that it is recognizable that it is the same error, or it may be notified in different notification manners (notification methods) so that the game-stopped state and states other than the game-stopped state can be distinguished and recognized, or so that they are appropriate for each state. Unlike the above, it is also possible to configure errors such as payout errors to be notified only by sound from the speaker 19 and/or illumination of the LED for presentation, without displaying an error on the display device 41.

When different notification modes are used, for example, with regard to a shot ball out error, in the game stop state, the error may be notified by the ball out error display 520 on the display device 41 and audio output from the speaker 19, and in states other than the game stop state, the error may be notified by the ball out error display 520 and illumination of the LED for effects. Also, for example, with regard to an overflow error, in consideration of the need for emergency response, the error may be notified by the overflow error display 522 and audio output in both the game stop state and states other than the game stop state, but the volume or pitch of the audio output may be different between these two states. Also, when different notification modes are used, in the game stop state, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 may be illuminated, and in states other than the game stop state, the LED of the board decoration device 46 may be illuminated.

The screen transitions have been explained above, but after the safety device counter value reaches 190,000 (a difference of 90,000 balls) and the safety device enters an activation warning state, if the safety device counter value decreases (if the difference of balls decreases), the activation warning display 511 ("Playing will end soon") may be erased and hidden. For example, if the safety device counter value reaches 190,000 and then decreases to 189,000, the activation warning display 511 may be hidden.

For example, in this case, if a safety device counter value or a ball difference command indicating the number of balls difference is sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, the presentation control device 300 will determine a safety device counter value of 189,000 and hide the activation notice display 511. Alternatively, in this case, a new safety device activation-related command corresponding to the non-activated state may be created and sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 with a safety device counter value of 189,000, causing the presentation control device 300 to hide the activation notice display 511. The safety device activation-related commands sent in the safety device-related processing described above include an activation notice command corresponding to the activation notice state, an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state, and an operating command corresponding to the activated state. However, the safety device-related processing can now send a safety device activation-related command (non-activated command) corresponding to the non-activated state to the presentation control device 300.

[Screen transition example 2]
101 is another example (Example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fourth embodiment. In FIGS. 100A and 100B, after (H), there is no small win or big win, and when the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000 at (J), the safety device is immediately activated and the game is stopped. However, in Example 2, after (H), there is a small win or big win, and during the small win or big win, the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000, entering the activation warning state, and after the end of the small win or big win state (end of the activation warning state), the game is stopped.

In (Ke1), after (K), the special chart variable display game (here, the special chart 1 variable display game) results in a small hit or a big hit, and a small hit or big hit pattern is displayed as a decorative stop pattern in variable display area 610 and variable display area 615. Note that here, an example is shown in which the big hit pattern "3, 3, 3" is displayed. The safety device counter value is 194278, which is greater than the warning start value of 190000 at which the activation warning state begins, and activation warning display 511 ("Playing will end soon") is displayed as a safety device-related display. Similar to (D) and (F) in Figure 100A, activation warning display 511 is displayed small so as not to overlap with other displays or other image objects.

The pending change indicator 682b disappears, and the first predetermined image 675 and second predetermined image 676 show "X". The mode indicator 679 shows "A mode", which corresponds to the normal mode as the presentation mode. The number of changes indicator 677 shows "170G". The special chart 1 pending number display section 650 and the special chart 2 pending number display section 660 show "3" and "0", respectively. Three pending indicators 682a are displayed in the first pending display section 630a, and nothing is displayed in the second pending display section 630b.

Next, in (Ke2), a round play of a small or big win (play during a big win or small win) is being played in the first round. In the case of a round play of a small win, a V win occurs here, and the big win state due to the V win begins from the next round, the second round. The round performance is being played in the form of a video on the display screen. Also, in response to the opening of the big prize opening, a right-hit instruction display 502 is displayed, instructing the player to hit to the right. Because the big prize opening is open, a large number of prize balls (number of balls won, number of safe balls) can be obtained by winning the big prize opening. The safety device counter value has increased from (Ke1) to 194318, and the activation warning display 511 ("Playing will end soon") continues to be displayed as a safety device-related display. The activation warning display 511 may or may not overlap the round performance to avoid interference.

In addition, in (Ke2), the display mode of the activation notice display 511 may change depending on the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation, from normal game play (normal game state, normal mode) in (Ke1) to round game play (special game state, round presentation), and may be different from (Ke1). For example, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed smaller than in (Ke1), in an inconspicuous color, or hidden (the display mode of the activation notice display 511 may include hiding) so as not to interfere with the round presentation. This allows the activation notice display 511 to be displayed appropriately in accordance with the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation. In particular, the display mode of the activation notice display 511 may be changed depending on the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display device 41, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Then, in (K3), the round effect is executed in the third round. Here, the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000, but because a jackpot is occurring, the safety device has not yet activated, and the activation warning state is entered, with activation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the jackpot ends") displayed on display device 41. Note that activation warning display 512 is larger and more noticeable than activation notice display 511, and more strongly suggests the possibility of the safety device being activated (occurrence of a game stop state) than the activation notice state. Activation warning display 512 does not have to overlap with the round effect so as not to be in the way, but it can overlap.

After that, in (Ke4), the safety device counter value remains at the counter reference value of 195,000, but the ending presentation for a big win is executed, and the activation warning display 512 is displayed, just as in (Ke3). The activation warning display 512 does not have to overlap with the ending presentation so as not to be a nuisance, but it can overlap. Furthermore, the ending presentation in the activation warning state differs from the ending presentation in states other than the activation warning state (non-activated state, activation warning state) in that it occurs just before the safety device is activated, and therefore may be a dedicated ending presentation that suggests the activation (end of play) of the safety device. Note that the same applies to (Ke4) when the ending presentation for a small win is executed in the activation warning state.

Furthermore, in (Ke4), the display mode of the activation warning display 512 may change in accordance with the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation from the round of play (round presentation) to the ending (ending presentation) in (Ke3), and may be different from (Ke3). For example, the activation warning display 512 may be displayed smaller than in (Ke3), in an inconspicuous color, or hidden (the display mode of the activation warning display 512 may include hiding) so as not to interfere with the ending presentation. This allows the activation warning display 512 to be displayed appropriately in accordance with the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation. In particular, the display mode of the activation warning display 512 may be changed in accordance with the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display device 41, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, the activation warning display 512 can notify the player in advance that play will be halted after a small win or a big win, warning the player that they will suffer a disadvantage, such as the end of a winning streak. The activation warning display 512 can also surprise those who are cheating, encouraging them to stop cheating.

Next, in (Ko1), the ending time has elapsed and the big win ending has ended, meaning the big win state has ended and the safety device has been activated, resulting in a game stop state (the same applies to a small win ending). In the game stop state, the presentation control device 300 displays an operation display 513 ("play stopped") on the display screen in response to receiving an operation command. The operation display 513 is larger and more noticeable than the operation notice display 511 and the operation warning display 512, strongly suggesting that the safety device is activated (game stop state) to prevent the player from using the gaming machine 10.

In (Ko1), a two-dimensional code 524 such as a QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the display screen. Furthermore, a reading recommendation display 525 (reading promotion display) recommending (encouraging) the player to read the two-dimensional code 524 with a camera-equipped information terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone, as well as text (e.g., "Please continue reading on your smartphone" or "Please scan with your camera"), are also displayed on the display screen. By reading and inputting the two-dimensional code 524 with the camera of the camera-equipped information terminal, this information terminal can access a server external to the gaming facility and store the results of the game on the server, allowing the player to use linked services (linked services) such as so-called smartphone-linked services (mobile-phone-linked services).

When play is halted due to the activation of a safety device (limit), the effect control device 300 may increase (add) the effect points by a larger amount than would be achieved with a normal effect in response to receiving an activation command or a special ending effect (Ke4) (B0012). This helps alleviate the player's discomfort at the end of play. Information about large effect points is encoded and incorporated into the two-dimensional code 524, and is stored on an external server. Note that the effect point information serves as limit information that indirectly indicates the limit, but the limit information itself may also be encoded and incorporated into the two-dimensional code 524. A player can access the external server at any time using an information terminal or the like to display the effect point information and limit information on the information terminal. This allows the player to show off the large effect point information and limit information to others, resulting in a sense of satisfaction.

Instead of the two-dimensional code 524, a one-dimensional code such as a barcode may be used. Also, the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed in the same way in (K) of Figure 100B.

Next, in (K), similar to (K) in Figure 100B, an error message such as a bulb out error message 520 or an overflow error message 522 is displayed. Note that the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., two minutes) and then erased from the display screen.

The order of (K1) and (K) may be reversed, with the two-dimensional code 524 displayed on the display screen after the error display. Alternatively, in (K1), both the error display and the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed on the display screen. In this case, the error display may be displayed in a layer (foreground layer) in front of the operation display 513 and the two-dimensional code 524 to make it stand out, and may be overlaid on the operation display 513 and the two-dimensional code 524. When the error display is displayed over the two-dimensional code 524 in a layer (foreground layer) in front of the two-dimensional code 524, the two-dimensional code 524 can be made unreadable to indicate that addressing the error is more important than reading the two-dimensional code 524. Note that the performance control device 300 may stop or suspend updating (updating the timer value) of the display timer that measures the predetermined time (e.g., two minutes) for displaying the two-dimensional code 524 while the error display is in progress. If the display timer update is interrupted, once the error is resolved, the display timer may resume measuring the specified time by restarting the update from the timer value at the time of interruption, or may restart measuring the specified time by starting the update from the initial timer value.

As shown above, with respect to Figure 101, the activation notice display 511 ("Play will end soon"), the activation warning display 512 ("Play will end after the win ends"), and the activation display 513 ("Play is currently stopped") are displayed in large letters in this order, and the displayed text is different, resulting in different display modes. The displayed text itself may also be included in the display mode. However, the display modes of the safety device-related displays (specific image, specific text image) for the activation notice display 511 (first display mode of specific image), the activation warning display 512 (third display mode of specific image), and the activation display 513 (second display mode of specific image) may be different overall but have commonalities. For example, the activation notice display 511, the activation warning display 512, and the activation display 513 share the character string "Play will end soon," are displayed in the same font (typeface), and share at least some of their display modes (the color and text size may be shared as part of the display mode). This allows the various safety device-related displays to have a common display style and be consistent to a certain extent, making it easier to impress upon people that they are all displays related to safety devices (complete function, stop function), and preventing them from being mistaken for other types of displays other than safety device-related displays. The activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, and activation display 513 may be displayed in a different font (typeface), character size, or color from the error displays to prevent them from being mistaken for error displays (burned-out error display 520 and overflow error display 522), and may be made different in display style from the error displays so that they do not have a common style.

[Example of different activation notice displays depending on the game status]
FIG. 102 illustrates, in the fourth embodiment, different activation notice displays 511a-511d depending on the game state. In FIGS. 100A and 100B, the display mode of the activation notice display 511 ("Playing will end soon") differs depending on the game state (G) waiting for customers and (H) or (K) during variable display. However, in FIG. 102, the display mode differs as shown in the activation notice displays 511a-511d so that the activation notice display can be displayed appropriately among (A) normal game state, (B) time-saving state, (C) probability variable state, and (D) special game state. Note that in FIGS. 102(A)-(D), the safety device counter value is greater than the notice start value 190,000 at which the activation notice state begins and less than the counter reference value 195,000 (e.g., 190,055).

Figure 102 (A) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in normal game mode (normal mode), and is the same as Figure 100A (B) except for the presence of the left-hit instruction indicator 503 and the activation notice indicator 511a, and the display content "170G" of the variation count indicator 677. In normal game mode, the number of winning balls (number of acquired balls, number of safe balls) is low, so the possibility of the safety device activating and stopping gameplay is low. For this reason, the activation notice indicator 511a in normal game mode is displayed small, for example, on the left edge of the display screen, so as not to interfere with other displays such as variation displays. When the left-hit instruction indicator 503 instructing the player to hit left is displayed, the activation notice indicator 511a may be displayed facing (adjacent to) the left-hit instruction indicator 503 in the vicinity (e.g., below) of the left-hit instruction indicator 503 to increase the opportunity for the player to notice it.

Figure 102 (B) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the time-saving state (time-saving mode), which is the same as (K) in Figure 100B. In the time-saving state, it is easier to obtain prize balls than in the normal game state due to the normal power support, and there is a higher possibility of hitting a jackpot and significantly increasing the number of safe balls than in the normal game state, making it more likely that the safety device will be activated. For this reason, the activation notice display 511b in the time-saving state is displayed larger and more conspicuously than the activation notice display 511a in the normal game state, more strongly warning of the possibility of the safety device being activated.

Figure 102 (C) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in a probability variable state (probability variable mode) when one exists, but is the same as Figure 100B (K) except for the activation notice display 511c, mode display 679, and variation count display 677. In a probability variable state, there is a higher chance of a jackpot being hit, a significant increase in the number of safe balls, and even an activation of the safety device, than in a time-saving state. For this reason, the activation notice display 511c for the probability variable state is displayed larger and more conspicuously than the activation notice display 511b for the time-saving state, more strongly warning of the possibility of the safety device being activated.

Figure 102 (D) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the special game state (during a big win or small win), with a round effect being executed on the display screen as in (K2) of Figure 101. In the special game state, the opening of the big prize opening significantly increases the number of safe balls, making the safety device more likely to activate than in the special game state. For this reason, the activation notice display 511d for the special game state is displayed larger and more conspicuously than the activation notice display 511c for the special game state, more strongly warning of the possibility of the safety device activating. The activation notice display 511d may be displayed facing (adjacent to) the right hit instruction display 502 in the vicinity (e.g., to the left) of the right hit instruction display 502 to increase the opportunity for the player to notice it.

As described above, in Figure 102, the size of the activation warning displays 511a-511d increases in the order of normal game mode, time-saving mode, probability variable mode, and special game mode, making them more noticeable. As another example, the color and font of the activation warning displays 511a-511d may differ depending on the game mode, so that they stand out in this order: normal game mode, time-saving mode, probability variable mode, and special game mode. In this way, the activation warning displays 511a-511d can effectively warn of the activation of the safety device.

[Example of activation warning display before and after reaching the limit]
Figure 103 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display 511 before and after a reach during a variable display in the fourth embodiment.

(K1) is the same as (K) in Figure 100B, but shows the state before the decorative special symbol reaches a reach state, and the activation notice display 511 is displayed from the bottom center to the bottom left edge of the display screen.

Next, in (Q2), the reach state begins, with the left symbol 611a temporarily stopping (e.g., oscillating) in the left variable display area 610A, and the right symbol 611b temporarily stopping (e.g., oscillating) in the right variable display area 610B. As a reach effect, the word "reach" may be displayed on the display screen, or the sound "reach" may be emitted from the speaker 19. The activation notice display 511 is displayed in a different manner than before the reach in (Q1), for example, moved to the left edge of the display screen and displayed vertically, smaller than before the reach, so as not to interfere with the temporarily stopped left symbol 611a or right symbol 611b, or with the reach effect that will be displayed large in the center of the display screen. At this stage, the SP reach state, in which a movie (video) is displayed or the upper effect unit 40c moves downward, has not yet been reached, and therefore the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner as in (Q1).

Next, in (Q3), the N Reach state of (Q2) progresses to an SP Reach. Here, the left and right patterns 611a and 611b are reduced in size and moved to the upper left and upper right corners, respectively. As part of the SP Reach effect, a large movie (video) is displayed in the center of the display screen. Also, as part of the SP Reach effect, the upper performance unit 40c, which serves as a movable role, moves downward from its initial position and is positioned in an operating position at the front of the display screen. Here, the activation notice display 511 is already displayed in a different manner from before the Reach of (Q1) at the (Q2) stage so as not to interfere with the movie in the center of the display screen or the upper performance unit 40c in its operating position; for example, it is moved to the left edge of the display screen and displayed vertically, smaller than before the Reach. Note that the activation notice display 511 may be hidden in (Q2) (the display mode of the activation notice display 511 may include not displaying it).

Note that, for the first time at the SP Reach stage of (K3), the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in a different manner than before the Reach. Furthermore, the display manner of the activation notice display 511 may change from before the SP Reach of (K2) to match the SP Reach performance. For example, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed even smaller than in (K2) or in an inconspicuous color so as not to interfere with the SP Reach performance. Note that, once the SP Reach performance appears in (K3), the activation notice display 511 may be hidden since it interferes with the SP Reach performance (the display manner of the activation notice display 511 may include not being displayed at all).

As shown in Figure 103, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may change and differ depending on the progress of the game (here, a variable display game) or the progress of the presentation. This allows the operation notice display 511 to be displayed appropriately in response to the progress of the game or the progress of the presentation. In particular, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed depending on the progress of the game so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display device 41, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Example of an operation warning display while waiting for passengers]
FIG. 104 is a screen transition diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display 511 during customer waiting in the fourth embodiment. The effect control device 300 may cyclically switch the customer waiting screens on the display device 41 during customer waiting in the following order: (K1) Stop Screen → (K2) Player Setting Screen → (K3) Customer Waiting Demo Movie Screen → (K4) Machine Name Display Screen → (K5) Caution Display Screen → (K1) Stop Screen → (K2) Player Setting Screen → (K3) Customer Waiting Demo Movie Screen, etc., using the customer waiting demo editing process (B0015) or the hall/player setting mode process (B0011). The customer waiting screens may also include a game explanation screen that explains the game and the effects, or a manufacturer display screen that displays the logo of the gaming machine 10 manufacturer.

The stop screen (K1) is the stage where the stop display time (set in the special game processing timer) during which the decorative stop pattern (Ka) is displayed as "3, 7, 8" has elapsed. At this point, the customer waiting demo flag is set (A3212), a customer waiting demo command is sent to the performance control device 300 (A3213, B1307), and the display device 41 switches to the customer waiting screen, but here it is the stop screen with no apparent change from (Ka). Note that the appearance may also be changed from (Ka), for example, by erasing the mode display 679 or the number of changes display 677. On the stop screen, the decorative stop patterns are displayed in the change display area 610 and the change display area 615, and the operation notice display 511 is displayed small so as not to interfere with the decorative stop patterns, etc.

Next, the player setting screen (K2) is displayed after the stop screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 20 seconds). The player setting screen displays a volume adjustment image 527, which is a meter image for adjusting the volume, and a brightness adjustment image 528 (light adjustment image), which is a meter image for adjusting the brightness (light intensity). The hall/player setting mode process (B0011) adjusts the volume of the speaker 19 in response to operation of the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, causing the meter in the volume adjustment image 527 to rise or fall, and adjusts the brightness of the LED for effects in response to operation of the cross key switch 450, causing the meter in the brightness adjustment image 528 to rise or fall.

On the player setting screen (K2), the volume adjustment image 527 and brightness adjustment image 528 may be displayed on a layer (frontmost layer) in front of the decorative stop symbols and operation notice display 511, superimposed on the decorative stop symbols and operation notice display 511 in the variable display area 610 and/or variable display area 615.

Next, on the customer waiting demo movie screen (K3), a customer waiting demo movie 535 that looks like a shooting star is displayed. Here, all other displays other than the customer waiting demo movie 535 (decorative stop symbols, special symbol 1 reserved number display section 650, special symbol 2 reserved number display section 660, first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, mode display 679, number of variations display 677, etc.) are erased and hidden. As a result, the operation notice display 511 does not interfere with other displays other than the customer waiting demo movie 535, so the display mode is changed so that it is larger than the stop screen (K1) and the player setting screen (K2).

Next, on the model name display screen (K4), the model name of the gaming machine 10 (for example, the model number (official name) "P Tora Tora Tora") is displayed as the model name display 519. Furthermore, the model name display screen may display that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function) by using a specific model display 541, for example, consisting of the text "Equipped with complete function." A player who sees the specific model display 541 as an indication that the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a safety device (complete function). The activation notice display 511 may be displayed on a layer (foreground layer) in front of the model name display 519 and the specific model display 541, superimposed on them. The specific model display 541 may also be displayed on the customer waiting demo movie screen (K3).

Next, on the warning display screen (K5), a warning display 543 to warn the player against addiction is displayed together with the activation notice display 511 and the specific machine model display 541. In (K5), the warning display 543 and the activation notice display 511 do not overlap, but if they do overlap, either the warning display 543 or the activation notice display 511 may be displayed on the front layer (frontmost layer).

After that, the customer waiting screen will again change to (K1) the stop screen, and then switch (transition) to (K2) the player setting screen and (K3) the customer waiting demo movie screen in that order.

As described above, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 while waiting for customers may be varied depending on the display state of images other than the operation notice display 511, i.e., the type of customer waiting screen that is cyclically switched (stop screen, player setting screen, customer waiting demo movie screen, model name display screen, warning display screen). Furthermore, while waiting for customers, the specific model display 541 on the display screen of the display device 41 may indicate that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function).

[Example of the setting confirmation screen]
FIG. 105 illustrates an example of the display screen of the display device 41 in the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in the fourth embodiment.

(A) is the display screen that is first displayed when the setting confirmation state is entered, and the effect control device 300 displays a setting confirmation display 545, which notifies the player that the setting is being confirmed, as the text display "Confirming settings" on the display screen (B1328). The effect control device 300 also displays the text display "Setting history list" and an operation prompt image 546 that resembles the operation unit (in this case, the effect button 25) on the display screen. The operation prompt image 546 prompts the player to operate the operation unit, and may resemble the cross key switch 450.

(B) is the display screen switched from (A) when the operation unit (in this case, the effect button 25) is operated, and displays a setting history list 548. The setting history list 548 displays the presence or absence of setting changes or setting confirmations, from past to present, and displays the probability setting value at the time of setting change or setting confirmation, as well as the duration of the changed probability setting value. An operation prompt image 546 is displayed, encouraging the user to return to screen (A) by performing a specified operation (pressing operation) on the operation unit (the effect button 25). In addition, an operation prompt image 547 is also displayed, encouraging the user to scroll through the setting history list 548 to view past history by performing another specified operation (swiping operation) on the operation unit (the effect button 25). Note that the operation prompt images 546 and 547 here may be designed to resemble the cross key switch 450.

In addition, in the setting history list 548, a predetermined mark (here, a star) is displayed in the same row as the probability setting value to identify the probability setting value when the safety device is activated and play is stopped. This allows hall staff to confirm whether a high probability setting value (e.g., 5 or 6), which increases the probability of winning a jackpot or small win, resulted in a large number of balls being released as intended (a large number of safe balls), causing the safety device to activate (play is stopped). The results of this confirmation can then be used to make future changes to the probability setting value.

[Example 1 of specific model display]
Fig. 106 is a diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a specific model display 541 (complete function display) displayed by something other than an image, in relation to the fourth embodiment. In Fig. 106, the specific model display 541 is displayed by printing, printing out, painting (painting), etc. Note that in Fig. 104, the specific model display 541 is displayed as an image on the display screen of the display device 41.

Figure 106 shows the collective display device 50 and its surroundings provided on the gaming board 30. Around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50, specification displays related to the gaming machine 10's specifications are displayed. Specifications include a low-probability jackpot probability display 85a ("1/300 and 1/200") for setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), a prize ball count display 85b ("3 & 2 & 10 & 14"), a round limit display 85c ("3, 6, 9"), a model (official name) display 85d ("Pxxxxx"), and, for machines with a special probability mode, a display 85e indicating whether or not there is a limit on special probability jackpots ("No limit" in this case).

The prize ball count display 85b displays the numbers of prize balls for the start winning slot 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning slot 35, and special variable winning device 39 in order, for example, 3, 2, 10, 14. The limit on special jackpots means that the number of consecutive special jackpots is limited to a specified number of times (a single jackpot can result in a specified number of consecutive jackpots).

In FIG. 106, the specific model display 541 always displays, in a fixed manner, that the gaming machine 10 is a model equipped with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function), for example, by printing, imprinting, or painting the words "Equipped with complete function." The specific model display 541 remains displayed even when the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, and is always displayed, even without being displayed as a video on a specific screen as in FIG. 104. For this reason, the specific model display 541 is always easily recognizable to players, and is therefore more convenient for players than the specific model display 541 displayed as a video. The specific model display 541 may be displayed in association with the display 85d of the model (official name) of the gaming machine 10, such as by displaying it next to the display 85d or displaying it opposite and nearby, in order to emphasize that the gaming machine 10 is a model equipped with a safety device.

Note that the specific model display 541 in Figure 106, which is printed, typed, painted, or the like, has the same text string "Complete function installed" (same display content) as the specific model display 541 in the image in Figure 104, but is not limited to this and may have a different text string (different display content). By shortening the text string in the specific model display 541 in Figure 106, for example, to "Complete function," it is possible to effectively use the limited free space around the all-in-one display device 50.

[Example 2 of specific model display]
107 is a diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a specific model display 541 (complete function display) displayed by something other than an image, in accordance with the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 107, the specific model display 541 is also displayed by printing, printing-out, painting, or the like.

In Figure 107, the specific model display 541 is displayed on the approximately flat front surface 456 of the decorative device 18a (top unit). The decorative device 18a protrudes diagonally upward and forward from the top of the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame). On the front surface 456, a model name display 456a indicating the model name (here, "Tora-Tora-Tora") is provided by printing, lettering, painting, etc. The model name display 456a may have a different display format or content from the model name display 519 displayed on the display screen as an image, and the model name display 456a may omit the letter "P" and not be the model type (official name). In addition, on the front surface 456, a character 456b related to the model name and which can also appear on the display screen of the display device 41 is provided by printing, painting, etc.

The specific model display 541 is provided by printing, imprinting, painting, etc. near the edge of the front surface 456, for example, in a position adjacent to or facing the character 456b.

The front surface 456 may be permanently fixed to the decorative device 18a, or may be detachable from the decorative device 18a for convenience and interchangeable depending on the model. The front surface 456 may also be capable of inserting a sheet or film onto which the model name display 456a, characters 456b, and specific model display 541 are fixedly displayed by printing or the like, and the sheet or film may be visible from the front through a transparent member (transparent plastic, etc.). The sheet or film is interchangeable depending on the model, providing excellent convenience.

[Other configuration examples]
In order to simplify the control of the performance control device 300, unlike Fig. 102, the operation notice display 511a-511d ("Playing will end soon") may be displayed in the same manner (same size and same font) during the normal game state, time-saving state, probability variable state, and special game state. Also, unlike Fig. 103, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner during the variable display, and unlike Fig. 104, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner during the waiting period.

The warning start value (190000 in the above example) at which the safety device activation warning state begins, i.e., the timing at which the activation warning display 511 begins to be displayed, may be changed. For example, in a normal power support state (probable hit state, time-saving state), the activation warning display 511 may begin to be displayed at a lower warning start value than in a normal game state, so that a warning can be given at an earlier timing in a game state where a jackpot is more likely to occur.

A switch that can be operated by hall personnel to turn the safety device (complete function) on and off can be provided on the back of the gaming machine 10, and the gaming control device 100 can be configured to activate the safety device only when this switch, connected to the gaming control device 100, is on.

[Actions and Effects of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which the game cannot be executed when a predetermined condition (operation condition) is met, and an alarm means (e.g., a game control device 100, a presentation control device 300, a display device 41, etc.) that can alarm an error related to the payout of gaming media in the game-disabled state.

With this type of gaming machine 10, appropriate measures against fraud can be taken by disabling play when certain conditions are met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large. Furthermore, by limiting the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls, it may be possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. Restricting addiction allows players to play with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making it possible to report an error even in a state where play cannot be carried out, appropriate measures against fraud can be taken while preventing any disadvantage or inconvenience to players or hall staff, etc.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing games, and is equipped with a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which game execution is disabled upon the establishment of a predetermined condition (activation condition), and a display control means (e.g., a presentation control device 300) that can display a warning display (e.g., an activation warning display 511) on a display means (e.g., a display device 41) that warns of the upcoming game-disabled state. The display control means changes the display mode of the warning display depending on the game status (e.g., waiting for customers, displaying a variable display).

In such a gaming machine 10, when certain conditions are met, such as when the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, it is possible to prevent players from playing and take appropriate measures against cheating, and it may also be possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. A warning display (e.g., operation warning display 511) can notify players in advance that they may be unable to play, urging them to end their game and preventing them from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. The warning display can also surprise those who are cheating and encourage them to stop cheating. Furthermore, the display mode of the warning display can be changed depending on the game status (e.g., waiting for customers, during variable display), allowing for effective warning displays.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment also includes a payout control means (e.g., a payout control device 200) capable of paying out gaming media, and a first counting means (e.g., a difference ball confirmation process in the gaming control device 100) capable of counting the number of payouts, which is the number of gaming media (gaming balls) paid out during a predetermined period (e.g., the period from power-on to the present) or the number of gaming media determined to be paid out during a predetermined period (e.g., the total number of winning balls during a predetermined period, the number of safe balls). The gaming machine 10 also includes a second counting means (e.g., a difference ball confirmation process in the gaming control device 100 or an out ball detection switch 74) capable of counting the number of uses, which is the number of gaming media used during a predetermined period (e.g., the number of fired balls or the number of ejected balls). The gaming machine 10 also includes a calculation means (e.g., a difference ball confirmation process in the gaming control device 100) capable of calculating a calculation value (e.g., a safety device counter value or a difference ball count) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses. When the calculated value reaches a reference value (e.g., counter reference value, ball difference reference value), the game stop means (e.g., safety device) can generate a game-unplayable state, assuming that a predetermined condition (activation condition) has been met. The display control means (e.g., performance control device 300) can display a predetermined display (e.g., operating display 513) on the display means to indicate that the game is unplayable.

With this type of gaming machine 10, it is possible to create a state where play is not possible based on a calculated value that is based on the number of gaming media paid out and the number of gaming media used (for example, the number of balls fired or ejected), and to display a predetermined display (for example, the in-operation display 513) indicating that play is not possible, thereby providing effective countermeasures against fraud and also effectively preventing players from becoming addicted to the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when a calculated value (e.g., a safety device counter value or a difference in the number of balls) reaches a predetermined value (notification start value) that is smaller than a reference value, the display control means can display a notifying display (e.g., an operation notifying display 511) on the display means. This effectively provides advance warning that a game will become unplayable.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, if a calculated value (e.g., safety device counter value or difference in number of balls) reaches a reference value but a predetermined condition (activation condition) is not met, the display control means (e.g., presentation control device 300) can display on the display means a display (e.g., activation warning display 512) that is different from the predetermined display (e.g., activation in progress display 513) and the advance notice display (e.g., activation advance notice display 511). Therefore, the player can be notified in advance that gameplay will be halted after a predetermined condition is met (e.g., after a small win or a big win has ended), warning the player that they will suffer a disadvantage.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the display control means (e.g., the presentation control device 300) may change the display mode of the warning display (e.g., the operation warning display 511) that warns of an upcoming unplayable state according to the progress of the game. This allows the warning display to be appropriately displayed on the display means (e.g., the display device 41) in accordance with the progress of the game. Furthermore, the display mode of the warning display can be changed according to the progress of the game so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is also equipped with an adjustment means (e.g., a presentation control device 300) that can adjust the gaming machine 10 (e.g., brightness adjustment or volume adjustment) in response to player operation. The adjustment means does not perform adjustments even if a player operates the device when the device is in a non-playable state. Therefore, since various adjustments such as volume adjustment or brightness adjustment are not performed even if a player operates the device when the device is in a game-stopped state, it is easier for players to recognize that the device is in a game-stopped state. Furthermore, since players cannot freely adjust the gaming machine 10, it may be possible to save power when the device is in a game-stopped state.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a game control unit (game control device 100) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control unit (presentation control device 300) that can control presentations related to the game. The game control unit includes a first counting unit that can count the number of payouts (e.g., the number of safe balls), which is the number of gaming media (gaming balls) paid out during a predetermined period (e.g., the period from power-on to the present) or the number of gaming media determined to be paid out during the predetermined period; a second counting unit that can count the number of uses (e.g., the number of fired balls or the number of discharged balls), which is the number of gaming media used during the predetermined period; and a game stop unit (e.g., a safety device) that can create a non-playable state in which the game cannot be played based on the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (e.g., the difference in the number of balls). The game control unit includes a start memory unit that can store a start memory as the right to play the game, and a pre-determination unit (e.g., a special symbol reservation information determination process) that can determine the outcome of the game before the game based on the start memory is played. When the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) receives the determination result of the advance determination means from the game control means (for example, information contained in a look-ahead stop symbol command or a look-ahead change pattern command), it can execute a preview effect (for example, a look-ahead effect, a look-ahead preview effect) based on the determination result, and if the difference between the payout number and the number used is a predetermined value (for example, 94,500) or more, it will not execute a preview effect even if it receives the determination result. This prevents the player from getting their hopes up when the difference between the payout number and the number used reaches a predetermined value that indicates an unplayable state is imminent, and reduces the player's discomfort caused by the unplayable state occurring.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the gaming control means (gaming control device 100) can determine the outcome of a game before the game is executed based on the start memory, regardless of the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (e.g., the difference in the number of balls), and send the determination result (e.g., information contained in a look-ahead stop symbol command or a look-ahead change pattern command) to the presentation control means (presentation control device 300). When the presentation control means receives the determination result from the gaming control means, it can execute a preview effect (e.g., a look-ahead effect, a look-ahead preview effect) based on the determination result. This allows preview effects (e.g., a look-ahead effect, a look-ahead preview effect) to be executed regardless of the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (e.g., the difference in the number of balls). Therefore, a preview effect can be executed even when the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 94,500), which is close to the occurrence of an unplayable state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment also includes a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of controlling presentations related to games. The gaming machine 10 includes movable members (movable gadgets) that can operate as presentations, and a game stop means (e.g., a safety device) that can create a play-disabled state (play stopped state, play prohibited state) in which the game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is met. After the play-disabled state is entered, if the movable member is in an operating position other than the initial position, the presentation control means returns the movable member from the operating position to the initial position. This prevents the movable member from being maintained in the operating position in a play-disabled state in which the game cannot be played, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstandings such as that the movable member is malfunctioning.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, if the movable member is in an operating position other than the initial position after the game is disabled, the presentation control means does not need to return the movable member from the operating position to the initial position. In this case, the movable member remains in an unnatural position, and the game is disabled (game stopped, game prohibited) in which game play cannot be performed, so it is possible to emphasize to the player that the gaming machine 10 is not in a normal state (a state in which game play is possible, a playable state).

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is equipped with a game stop means capable of generating a game-disabled state in which game play cannot be performed when a first condition (e.g., condition (1): the difference in the number of balls reaches a reference difference of 95,000 balls) and a second condition (e.g., condition (2): neither a big win nor a small win) are met. The presentation control means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., an activation notice display 511) on the display means to warn of the upcoming game-disabled state before the first condition is met. If the first condition is met but the second condition is not met, the presentation control means is capable of displaying a second display (e.g., an activation warning display 512) on the display means (e.g., the display device 41) that shares at least some of the display aspects with the first display. This makes it easier to impress upon the user that both the first display (e.g., the activation notice display 511) and the second display (e.g., the activation warning display 512) are related to the activation of the game stop means or the occurrence of a game-disabled state, and also prevents them from being mistaken for other types of displays other than safety device-related displays.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means capable of displaying a specific image (safety device-related display) on the display means, and is capable of generating a special game state (big win or small win) advantageous to the player when the game results in a special result. The game control means (game control device 100) is equipped with a game stop means (stop means) capable of generating a game-unplayable state in which the game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is met. The display modes of the specific image (safety device-related display) related to the operation of the game stop means include a first display mode (operation warning display 511) and a second display mode (operation in progress display 513). When the effect control means displays the second display mode of the specific image (operating display 513) in a game resulting in a special result, it hides predetermined images that differ from the specific image (first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, hold displays 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, hold number display, mode display 679, number of changes display 677, right-hit instruction display 502, decorative special symbols, characters, and other effect images).

In this type of gaming machine 10, when the second display mode of the specific image (operation display 513) is displayed, a predetermined image different from the specific image is hidden, making the second display mode of the specific image (operation display 513) more easily recognizable to players, hall staff, etc. Furthermore, even in games that result in a special result (win), the second display mode of the specific image (operation display 513) is preferably displayed when a predetermined condition for activating the game stop means is met, for example, before the special game state occurs (before the special result is derived).

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 108 to 140. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and redundant descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The fifth embodiment relates to instructions (codes) and programs.

[CPU Configuration]
108A is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the CPU 111a is shown as the CPU core 102. The CPU core 102 is configured as a Z80-based CPU.

The CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) shown in FIG. 108A has a W register 1201A, an A register 1202A, a B register 1204A, a C register 1205A, a D register 1207A, an E register 1208A, an H register 1210A, and an L register 1211A, each of which has a width of 8 bits.

These general-purpose registers can also be used as a 16-bit WA register 1203A (pair register, register pair) by combining the W register 1201A and A register 1202A. Similarly, it is also possible to use the BC register 1206A (pair register, register pair) by combining the B register 1204A and C register 1205A, the DE register 1209A (pair register, register pair) by combining the D register 1207A and E register 1208A, and the HL register 1212A (pair register, register pair) by combining the H register 1210A and L register 1211A.

The CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) also has an IX register 1231a and an IY register 1232a, each of which has a width of 16 bits. The IX register 1231a and IY register 1232a are used as indexes when the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 accesses data. The IY register 1232a can also be used as a top address specification register for setting the top address of RAM 111c (update information storage means) in the address space (or memory space).

Note that a register with a width (capacity) of 8 bits (1 byte) is sometimes called the first register. The pair of registers with a width (capacity) of 16 bits (2 bytes), the IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a, are sometimes called the second register.

These general-purpose registers form one general-purpose register group (register group of register bank 0) 1220A. Meanwhile, the CPU core 102 also has another general-purpose register group (register group of register bank 1) 1220B, which has the same (or similar) configuration as the general-purpose registers included in the register group of register bank 0 1220A.

Register bank 1's register group 1220B includes W register 1201B through L register 1211B, which have the same functions as register bank 0's W register 1201A through L register 1211A. Like register bank 0, these registers can be used as 16-bit registers, WA register 1203B through HL register 1212B. Register bank 1's register group 1220B also includes IX register 1231b and IY register 1232b, which have the same functions as register bank 1231a and IY register 1232a.

In addition, the CPU core 102 has a flag register 1200 that is 8 bits wide.

Flag register 1200 stores the results of operations using registers. Furthermore, a register bank selector (RBS), which is a bit in flag register 1200, selects which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B will be used as the target of the operation.

Each register belonging to the register group selected by the register bank selector (RBS) is used for calculations by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242. On the other hand, each register belonging to an unselected register group retains its value until the value of the register bank selector (RBS) is changed and it becomes the target for selection.

The CPU core 102 also includes a DP register 1230. The DP register 1230 can be used, for example, to store the starting address of the game control data area of ROM 111b in the address space (or memory space).

The CPU core 102 also has an SP register 1233 that functions as a stack pointer and a PC register 1234 that functions as a program counter, each of which has a width of 16 bits.

The stack pointer 1233 indicates the location of the stack area when storing data in (or retrieving data from) it. The program counter 1234 indicates the address where the instruction being executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 is stored.

The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 executes a program (in-area program or out-of-area program) and performs arithmetic processing using each register within the CPU core 102. Specifically, it reads data stored in ROM 111b at an address indicated by the program counter 1234, treats the read data as code, and executes the instruction corresponding to the code. The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 interprets and executes instructions included in a predetermined instruction set.

Thus, in this embodiment, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) itself is exemplified as the arithmetic processing means, but inside the CPU core 102, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 mainly performs the functions of the arithmetic processing means. The RAM 111c serves as an update information storage means that stores information updated by the arithmetic processing means (CPU 111a, CPU core 102), and also serves as a retention storage means that can retain stored information even in the event of a power outage due to a backup power source.

In addition, the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 may exchange data with ROM 111b, RAM 111c, and other circuits external to the CPU core 102 via the access circuit 1243, address bus 721, and data bus 722 in response to program instructions. The address bus 721 is composed of a 16-bit signal line, and the CPU core 102 outputs a specified address to the address bus 721 and inputs/outputs data stored at the specified address (such as an address in ROM 111b, RAM 111c, etc.) via the data bus 722.

Furthermore, each time the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 executes an instruction from ROM 111b, it stores the address where the next instruction is stored in the program counter 1234. By repeating this process of executing instructions and updating the program counter 1234, the program is executed sequentially. When an interrupt signal is received from the interrupt control circuit 724 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, the value of the program counter 1234 is switched to the value of a preset interrupt processing address.

Data is exchanged between this instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 and each register in the CPU core 102 via the internal bus 1235.

The initial value setting circuit 1241 is a circuit that sets initial values in hardware for each register in the CPU core 102.

When the built-in reset circuit 1240 receives a reset signal from the security circuit 725 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, it activates the initial value setting circuit 1241, sets initial values in each register provided in the CPU core 102, and then activates the command interpretation and execution circuit 1242.

When the initial value setting circuit 1241 starts operating, such as when the power is turned on or a reset signal is received, it sets an initial value (29FFh in this embodiment) to the stack pointer 1233, an initial value (the starting address of RAM 111c, 2800h in this embodiment) to the IY registers 1232a and 1232b, an initial value (the starting address of the data area of ROM 111b, 5000h in this embodiment) to the DP register 1230, a reset address (4000h in this embodiment) to the HL register 1212A, the reset address (the starting address of ROM 111b, 4000h in this embodiment) to the program counter 1234, and the value 00h to other registers (0000h for 16-bit registers). The reset address may also be 0000h.

[Flag register]
Fig. 108B is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a flag register 1200 according to the fifth embodiment. The value of each bit of the 8-bit flag register 1200 is set by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in Fig. 108A. The 8-bit data (value) stored in the flag register 1200 is called a program status word (PSW).

The interrupt master permission flag (IMF) 1300 is a flag that sets whether or not interrupt processing by an interrupt signal is permitted; when set (value is "1"), it is permitted; when cleared (value is "0"), it is prohibited.

The register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is a flag that selects which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B to use when the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in FIG. 108A performs arithmetic processing. When set (value is "1"), the register group 1220B of register bank 1 is selected, and when cleared (value is "0"), the register group 1220A of register bank 0 is selected.

The overflow flag (VF) 1302 is set (value "1") when a specific operation causes an overflow in the general-purpose register being operated on, and is cleared (value "0") otherwise.

The sign flag (SF) 1303 is set (value "1") when the most significant bit of the general-purpose register being operated on becomes "1" as a result of a specified operation, and is cleared (value "0") otherwise.

The half carry flag (HF) 1304 is set (value "1") when a carry or borrow occurs in the fourth bit of the general-purpose register being operated on as a result of an 8-bit operation, and is cleared (value "0") otherwise.

The carry flag (CF) 1305 is set (value "1") when a carry or borrow occurs in a specified operation, and is cleared (value "0") otherwise.

The zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set (value is "1") in certain cases, such as when the result of a certain operation is "0" or when the data (value) being transferred is "0", and is cleared (value is "0") in other cases.

The jump status flag (JF) 1307 is set (value "1") when at least one of the carry flag (CF) 1305 or the zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set. Therefore, the jump status flag (JF) 1307 can become the same value as the carry flag (CF) 1305 or the zero flag (ZF) 1306 through a specified calculation. Alternatively, even if no calculation processing is performed, the jump status flag (JF) 1307 is set (value "1") when the value of a general-purpose register becomes "00h". If none of these conditions are met, the jump status flag (JF) 1307 is cleared (value "0"). The jump status flag (JF) 1307 can be used to determine the operating conditions of branch instructions and call instructions, for example.

When the CPU core 102 is reset, all bits in the flag register are set to 0.

[Memory Map]
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a memory map (memory configuration) of the memory used by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) in the fifth embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the memory used by the CPU 111a includes a RAM 111c and a ROM 111b. In the memory address space, addresses are assigned serial numbers for each byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the starting address of the RAM 111c is "2800h," the starting address of the ROM 111b is "4000h," and the starting address of the data area of the ROM 111b is "5000h," but these addresses are merely examples and other addresses may be used.

Similar to the first embodiment, the address space is arranged in the following order starting from the starting address "2800h" of RAM 111c: in-area work area, unused area, in-area stack area, unused area, external work area, unused area, external stack area, unused area. The unused area between the in-area work area and in-area stack area, and the unused area between the external work area and external stack area, do not have to be present. The in-area work area, unused area, and in-area stack area, which are consecutive in the address space, become the first RAM area. The external work area, unused area, and external stack area, which are consecutive in the address space, become the second RAM area.

Starting from the starting address "4000h" of ROM 111b, the address space is arranged in the following order: an area for in-area programs (first ROM area, first program storage area), an unused area, an area for out-area programs (second ROM area, second program storage area), an unused area, and a program management area. The area for in-area programs includes a data area (area for game control data) at the starting address "5000h" and an area for game control programs other than the data area. An unused area may be sandwiched between the area for game control programs and the data area. The area for out-area programs may also include a data area. The program management area, located at the end of the address space of ROM 111b, stores hardware (HW) parameters, a vector table, etc. This vector table is a table used by the CALLT instruction (third call instruction) described below.

In this embodiment, the ROM's in-area program (first program) consists of game control programs and game control data, etc., and includes a main program corresponding to main processing (Figures 5A-5C) and a timer interrupt processing program corresponding to timer interrupt processing. Subroutines (including subroutines of subroutines, etc.) in the main program or timer interrupt processing program are generally in-area programs (unless otherwise specified), but may exceptionally be out-of-area programs. In this embodiment, the out-of-area program (second program) for non-game control not directly related to game control includes a safety device information initialization program corresponding to safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program corresponding to performance display editing processing, and an out-of-area integration processing program corresponding to out-of-area integration processing. In addition, the out-of-area program (second program) includes, as subroutines called from the out-of-area integration processing program, a test signal output processing program corresponding to test signal output processing, a performance display device control processing program corresponding to performance display device control processing, a ball difference confirmation processing program corresponding to ball difference confirmation processing, and a safety device activation monitoring processing program corresponding to safety device activation monitoring processing. Processing programs such as those described above that handle various cohesive processes are also called program modules.

[Instructions of the CPU of the gaming control device]
110 to 119 are instruction tables illustrating typical instructions (codes) in the instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) of the game control device 100. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes each instruction in the instruction table.

In the instruction table, instructions are represented by assembly language instructions (source code) compatible with the Z80 8-bit microprocessor, and correspond one-to-one to the machine language instructions (machine code) stored in ROM 111b. Instructions are divided into an "opcode" (or "mnemonic") that indicates the operation (calculation) and an "operand" that is the target of the instruction. There may be multiple "operands," such as a first operand, second operand, etc.

The instruction table also shows the flag changes that occur depending on the execution result of the instruction and the calculation result of the instruction, how many cycles of the CPU's operating clock it takes to execute the instruction (i.e., the number of operating clock cycles required to execute the instruction), and the word length of the instruction in machine language (instruction size, instruction length, number of bytes). The number of cycles corresponds to the execution time of the instruction, and the shorter the number, the shorter the instruction execution time and the faster the program execution speed. The shorter the instruction word length, the smaller the program capacity (size).

Note that there are special cases where the number of cycles and/or word lengths in the instruction table are exceptionally smaller than normal, as shown in parentheses, depending on the type of register or combination of registers used in the instruction. The more register types available for use in instructions, the easier it is to develop a program, but using as many instructions with small cycles and/or word lengths as possible in a program can increase the program's execution speed and/or reduce the program's size.

The instruction table also shows how flags change when instructions are executed, and the listing of the value Z of the zero flag (ZF), the value C of the carry flag (CF), the value H of the half carry flag (HF), the value S of the sign flag (SF), and the value V of the overflow flag (VF) indicates that these can change. Furthermore, "-" indicates that the flag remains unchanged, and "U" indicates that the value is undefined.

Instructions in the instruction table are written in a general format. In an instruction, n indicates an 8-bit (= 1 byte) immediate value. In some instructions, n exceptionally indicates a 4-bit immediate value. In an instruction, mn indicates a 16-bit (= 2 byte) immediate value. Note that in the program list below, the immediate values n and mn are represented by labels corresponding to their numerical values, hexadecimal numbers (such as h), or decimal numbers. d and k indicate 5-bit or 8-bit offset values (displacement values, immediate values) that can be used to specify memory addresses. vw indicates a 16-bit (= 2 byte) direct address value (immediate value) that can be used to directly specify memory addresses. ( ) indicates the memory area specified within the ( ), or the contents stored or to be stored in that address area (memory area). Note that if the area is 2 bytes, the ( ) indicates the starting address of the area. $ indicates the starting address of the instruction (i.e., the value of PC register 1234).

In the instructions, r, g, p, q, f, k, s, and t refer to 8-bit (1-byte) registers. For more details, as shown in Figure 110, r and g respectively refer to the W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, or L register. p refers to the W register or the A register. q refers to the B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, or L register. f refers to the W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, or E register. k refers to the H register or the L register. s refers to the A register. t refers to the W register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, or L register.

In the instructions, rr, gg, jj, uu, zz, ss, ff, and kk indicate 16-bit (2-byte) registers or pair registers (register pairs). For more details, as shown in Figure 110, etc., rr and gg indicate the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, or IY register, respectively. jj indicates the DE register, HL register, IX register, or IY register, respectively. uu and zz indicate the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register, SP register, or DP register, respectively. ss indicates the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register, or SP register. ff indicates the WA register, BC register, DE register, or HL register. kk indicates the IX register, IY register, SP register, or DP register.

[Transfer command (example 1)]
A transfer instruction (load instruction) is an instruction for transferring data. In this embodiment, the transfer instruction transfers (copies or loads) data (value, content) corresponding to a second operand to a corresponding first operand.

A transfer instruction can change the jump status flag (JF) and zero flag (ZF) of the six flags (flags other than RBS and IMF) in bits 2 through 7 of flag register 1200, but leaves the carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), and overflow flag (VF) unchanged. If the value transferred by a transfer instruction is "0," the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) becomes "1," and if the value transferred is not "0," the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) becomes "0." The jump status flag (JF) is then set to the same value Z (1 or 0) as the zero flag (ZF).

[Example 1-1]
Example 1-1 in Figure 110 is an instruction table illustrating an LD instruction, which is a transfer instruction that transfers one byte of data. Here, the LD instruction is written in assembly language as "LD first operand, second operand," and transfers (copies, loads) data (value, contents) corresponding to the second operand to the corresponding first operand. Note that LD is an opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand.

"LD r, g" is an instruction that transfers the value of the g register to the r register. The number of operating clock cycles required to execute the instruction is basically two cycles, and the instruction word length (instruction size) is basically two bytes. However, exceptionally, when the register combination (r, g) is a special combination of (W, A), (A, W), (A, B), (A, C), (A, E), (B, A), (C, A), (E, A), the number of instruction cycles is one cycle, the instruction execution time is shorter, and the instruction word length is one byte shorter.

"LD f,n" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value n (1 byte) to the f register. "LD k,n" is a three-cycle, three-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value n to the k register. "LD f,n" and "LD k,n" have different cycles and word lengths depending on the destination register. Using both instructions increases the number of destination registers, but using more "LD f,n" than "LD k,n" in a program can reduce the program size and increase the program execution speed.

"LD s, (vw)" is a 5-cycle, 3-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the direct address area (memory area) specified by the direct value vw (2 bytes) to the s register. "LD t, (vw)" is a 5-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the direct address area (address area corresponding to the direct value vw) specified by the direct value vw to the t register. Using both instructions increases the number of destination registers, but "LD s, (vw)" and "LD t, (vw)" have different word lengths due to the difference in the destination register. Using more "LD s, (vw)" than "LD t, (vw)" in a program can reduce the program size.

"LD r, (jj)" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the area (memory area) at the address specified by the jj register to the r register. The instruction cycle count is basically 3 cycles, and the instruction word length is basically 2 bytes. However, exceptionally, if the jj register is the DE register and the r register is the W register or the A register, or if the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W register, A register, B register, C register, or E register, the instruction cycle count is 3 cycles and the instruction word length is 1 byte.

"LD r, (jj+)" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register to the r register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the transfer. Since 1 byte of data is transferred to the 1-byte (8-bit) r register, the address is incremented by 1. Note that "JJ+" means that the address stored in the jj register is updated to the next address after the transfer. This instruction is basically 4 cycles and 2 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE register and the r register is the W register or A register, or if the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W register, A register, B register, C register, or E register, it will be 3 cycles and 1 byte long.

"LD r, (jj + d)" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the address area (memory area) specified by the jj register and an offset value (immediate value) to the r register. "jj + d" refers to the added address obtained by adding the offset value d (relative address) to the address (base address) value stored in the jj register. This instruction is generally four cycles and three bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE or HL register, the r register is the W or A register, and the value of d is between 1 and 7, it takes four cycles and two bytes. Also, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register and the W, A, B, C, or E register, it takes four cycles and two bytes.

"LD r, (jj+p)" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the address area specified by the jj and p registers to the r register. "jj+p" means the added address obtained by adding the address value stored in the jj register to the address (offset address) value stored in the p register. This instruction is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (vw), n" is an 8-cycle, 5-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value n (1 byte) to the area (in RAM) of the direct address specified by the immediate value vw (2 bytes).

"LD (jj), n" is an instruction that transfers the immediate value n to the address area (within RAM) specified by the jj register. This instruction is generally 6 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE register or HL register, it becomes 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+), n" is an instruction that transfers the immediate value n to the address area (within RAM) specified by the jj register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the transfer. Since 1 byte of immediate value n data is being transferred, the address is incremented by 1 and updated to the next address. This instruction is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+d),n" is an instruction that transfers the immediate value n to the address area (in RAM) specified by the jj register and an offset value (immediate value). "jj+d" means the added address obtained by adding the offset value d to the address value stored in the jj register. This instruction is generally 7 cycles and 4 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register, it will be 5 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"LD (jj+p),n" is an instruction that transfers the immediate value n to the address area (within RAM) specified by the jj and p registers. "jj+p" refers to the address value stored in the jj register plus the address value (offset address) stored in the p register. This instruction takes 7 cycles and is 3 bytes long.

"LD (vw), s" is a 5-cycle, 3-byte instruction that transfers the value of the s register to the direct address area (in RAM) specified by the immediate value vw. "LD (vw), t" is a 7-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the value of the t register to the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw. Using both instructions increases the number of source registers, but the number of cycles and word length for "LD (vw), s" and "LD (vw), t" differ depending on the source register. Using more "LD (vw), s" than "LD (vw), t" in a program can reduce the program's size and increase its execution speed.

"LD (jj), r" is an instruction that transfers the value of the r register to the address area (within RAM) specified by the jj register. This instruction is generally 5 cycles and 2 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE or HL register and the r register is the W or A register, it will be 4 cycles and 1 byte long.

"LD (jj+), r" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the r register to the address area (within RAM) specified by the jj register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the transfer. Since 1 byte of data is transferred from the 1-byte (8-bit) r register, the address is incremented by 1. This instruction generally takes 6 cycles and is 2 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE or HL register and the r register is the W or A register, it takes 4 cycles and is 1 byte long.

"LD (jj+d), r" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the r register to the area of the aforementioned added address "jj+d." This instruction is generally 6 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE or HL register, the r register is the W or A register, and the value of d is between 1 and 7, it takes 5 cycles and 2 bytes. Also, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register and the r register is the W or A register, it takes 5 cycles and 2 bytes.

"LD (jj+p), r" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the r register to the area of the aforementioned added address "jj+p." This instruction is 6 cycles and 2 bytes long.

[Example 1-2]
Example 1-2 in Figure 111 is an instruction table that illustrates the LD instruction, which transfers 2 bytes (16 bits) of data (value) among transfer instructions. Here, since this is a transfer instruction that handles 2 bytes of data, the address specified in ( ) indicates the starting address of the 2-byte area of the transfer destination or transfer source.

"LD uu,zz" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that transfers the value of the zz register to the uu register.

"LD ff,mn" is a three-cycle, three-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn (2 bytes) to the ff register. "LD kk,mn" is a four-cycle, four-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the kk register. "LD ff,mn" and "LD kk,mn" have different cycles and word lengths depending on the destination register. Using both instructions increases the number of destination registers, but using more "LD ff,mn" than "LD kk,mn" in a program can reduce the program size and increase program execution speed.

"LD ss, (vw)" is a 6-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw to the ss register. Here, the immediate value vw is the starting address of the 2-byte area where the 2-byte value to be transferred is stored.

"LD ss, (jj)" transfers the value stored in the area (memory area) at the address specified by the jj register to the ss register. This instruction is generally four cycles and two bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the HL register and the ss register is the WA register, it will be four cycles and one byte long.

"LD ss, (jj+)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register to the ss register, and after the transfer, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2. Since 2 bytes of data are transferred to the 2-byte ss register, the address is incremented by 2.

"LD ss, (jj+d)" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+d" to the ss register. This instruction is generally 5 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register and the ss register is the WA, BC, DE, or HL register, it will be 5 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD ss, (jj+p)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that transfers the value stored in the area at the added address "jj+p" to the ss register.

"LD (vw), ss" is an 8-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the value of the ss register to the direct address area (within RAM) specified by the immediate value vw.

"LD (jj), ss" is a 6-cycle, 2-byte instruction that transfers the value of the ss register to the address area (within RAM) specified by the jj register.

"LD (jj+), ss" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the ss register to the address area (within RAM) specified by the jj register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 2 after the transfer. Since 2 bytes of data are being transferred from the 2-byte ss register, the address is incremented by 2. This instruction takes 7 cycles and is 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+d), ss" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the ss register to the area (in RAM) at the added address "jj+d". This instruction is generally 7 cycles and 3 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register and the ss register is the WA, DE, or HL register, it will be 6 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"LD (jj+p), ss" is an instruction that transfers the value stored in the ss register to the area (in RAM) at the added address "jj+p." This instruction takes 7 cycles and is 2 bytes long.

"LD A,PSW" is an instruction that transfers the 8-bit data PSW stored in the flag register 1200 to the A register. "LD RBS,0" is an instruction that transfers the value "0" to the register bank selector (RBS), which is a bit in the flag register 1200. "LD RBS,1" is an instruction that transfers the value "1" to the register bank selector (RBS). These instructions are two cycles and two bytes long.

[Example 1-3]
Example 1-3 in Figure 112 is an instruction table illustrating an LDW instruction, which is a transfer instruction that transfers a two-byte (16-bit) immediate value. Since this is a transfer instruction that handles two bytes of data, the address specified in parentheses indicates the start address of the two-byte area of the transfer destination or transfer source. The LDW instruction is written in assembly language as "LDW first operand, second operand," and transfers (copies, loads) the data (value, contents) corresponding to the second operand to the one corresponding to the first operand. Note that LDW is an opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand.

"LDW (vw), mn" is a 10-cycle, 6-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn (2 bytes) to the area (within RAM) at the direct address specified by the immediate value vw.

"LDW (jj), mn" is an 8-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the address area (within RAM) specified by the jj register.

"LDW (jj+), mn" is a 9-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the address area (within RAM) specified by the jj register, and after the transfer, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2. Since 2-byte immediate value mn data is being transferred, the address is incremented by 2 and updated to the next address.

"LDW (jj+d), mn" is an instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the area (in RAM) at the added address "jj+d". This instruction is generally 9 cycles and 5 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register, it becomes 6 cycles and 4 bytes long.

"LDW (jj+p), mn" is a 9-cycle, 4-byte instruction that transfers the immediate value mn to the area (in RAM) at the added address "jj+p".

[Example 1-4]
Example 1-4 in FIG. 112 is an instruction table illustrating other transfer instructions (LDD instruction, LDY instruction).

"LDD HL, mn" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that transfers the sum of the value stored in the DP register and the immediate value mn to the HL register.

"LDY jj,n" transfers bits 8 to 15 of the IY register (IY[15:8]) to bits 8 to 15 of the jj register (jj[15:8]), and transfers the 8-bit immediate value n to bits 0 to 7 of the jj register (jj[7:0]). This instruction is generally three cycles and three bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE register or HL register, it becomes two cycles and two bytes long.

[Compare instruction (example 2)]
A compare instruction is an instruction for comparing multiple data (values) by subtraction or the like. In this embodiment, the compare instruction subtracts data (value) corresponding to a second operand from data (value) corresponding to a first operand and changes a flag according to the subtraction result. Conversely, the compare instruction can also be configured to subtract data (value) corresponding to the first operand from data (value) corresponding to the second operand and change a flag according to the subtraction result.

A comparison instruction can change all six flags (flags other than RBS and IMF) in bits 2 through 7 of flags register 1200, namely the jump status flag (JF), zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), and overflow flag (VF). Note that the half carry flag (HF) may become an undefined value (U) in a comparison instruction for two-byte data.

If the data (value) corresponding to the first operand and the data (value) corresponding to the second operand match, i.e., if the result of the subtraction is zero, the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is "1." If they do not match (if the result of the subtraction is not zero), the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is "0." If the result of the subtraction is less than zero (-, negative), the value C of the carry flag (CF) is "1." If the result is zero or greater (0 or + (positive)), the value C of the carry flag (CF) is "0." The jump status flag (JF) is generally set to the same value C (1 or 0) as the carry flag (CF). However, as an exception, in the case of a specific comparison instruction (the CPJ instruction described below), the jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value Z (1 or 0) as the zero flag (ZF).

[Example 2-1]
Example 2-1 in Figure 113 is an instruction table illustrating a CP instruction, which is a comparison instruction that compares one byte of data. The CP instruction is written in assembly language as "CP first operand, second operand," and subtracts the data (value) corresponding to the second operand from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand, and compares the two data (values). Note that CP is an opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand.

When the CP instruction is executed, the jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value C as the carry flag (CF). If the result of the subtraction by the CP instruction is less than zero (negative), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "1", and if the result is zero or greater (0 or positive), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "0". Therefore, the CP instruction is often used to determine the magnitude of a value immediately before a branch instruction is executed.

Note that the CP instruction and the LD instruction may have the same number of cycles and/or word length if the first and second operands are the same. This may make program design easier.

"CP r, g" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value of the g register.

"CP p,n" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value of the p register with the immediate value n (1 byte). "CP q,n" is a three-cycle, three-byte instruction that compares the value of the q register with the immediate value n. "CP p,n" and "CP q,n" have different cycle counts and word lengths due to the difference in the registers they compare to. Using both instructions increases the number of registers to compare to, but using more "CP p,n" than "CP q,n" in a program can reduce the program size and increase the program's execution speed.

"CP r, (vw)" is a 5-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw.

"CP r, (jj)" is a three-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register.

"CP r, (jj+)" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register, and increments the address stored in the jj register by 1 after the comparison. Since two 1-byte values are being compared, the address is incremented by 1. This instruction is 4 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CP r, (jj+d)" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the area of the aforementioned addition address "jj+d." This instruction is generally four cycles and three bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register and the r register is the W or A register, it becomes four cycles and two bytes long.

"CP r, (jj+p)" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the area of the aforementioned addition address "jj+p." This instruction is four cycles and two bytes long.

"CP (vw), n" is a 6-cycle, 5-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the direct address area specified by the direct value vw with the direct value n.

"CP (jj), n" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value n. This instruction is generally four cycles and three bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the HL register, it becomes three cycles and two bytes long.

"CP (jj+), n" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value n, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 1. Since two 1-byte values are being compared, the address is incremented by 1 and updated to the next address. This instruction takes 5 cycles and is 3 bytes long.

"CP (jj+d),n" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+d" with the immediate value n. This instruction is generally 5 cycles and 4 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the IY register, it becomes 4 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"CP (jj+p),n" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+p" with the immediate value n. This instruction is 5 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"CP (vw), r" is a 6-cycle, 5-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw with the value in the r register.

"CP (jj), r" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value of the r register. This instruction is generally four cycles and three bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE register and the r register is the W, A, B, C, H, or L register, or if the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W, A, B, C, D, or E register, it will be four cycles and two bytes long.

"CP (jj+), r" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value stored in the r register, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 1. Since two 1-byte values are being compared, the address is incremented by 1. This instruction generally takes 5 cycles and is 3 bytes long. However, as an exception, if the jj register is the DE register and the r register is the W, A, B, C, H, or L register, or if the jj register is the HL register and the r register is the W, A, B, C, D, or E register, it takes 4 cycles and is 2 bytes long.

"CP (jj+d),r" is a 5-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area at the added address "jj+d" with the value stored in the r register.

"CP (jj+p),r" is a 5-cycle, 3-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area at the added address "jj+p" with the value stored in the r register.

[Example 2-2]
Example 2-2 in Figure 114 is an instruction table illustrating a CP instruction that compares two bytes of data (values). Since this is a comparison instruction that handles two bytes of data, the address specified in parentheses indicates the start address of the two-byte area. Note that when a comparison instruction that compares two bytes of data is executed, the value of the half carry flag (HF) becomes the undefined value "U."

"CP rr,gg" is a two-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value in the gg register.

"CP rr, mn" is a 4-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the immediate value mn (2 bytes).

"CP rr, (vw)" is a 6-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw. Here, the immediate value vw is the starting address of the 2-byte area where the 2-byte value to be compared is stored.

"CP rr, (jj)" is a four-cycle, two-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register.

"CP rr, (jj+)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2. Since two-byte values are being compared, the address is incremented by 2.

"CP rr, (jj+d)" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the area at the added address "jj+d." This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 3 bytes long.

"CP rr, (jj+p)" is a 5-cycle, 2-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the rr register with the value stored in the area at the added address "jj+p".

"CP (jj), rr" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value in the rr register. This instruction is basically 5 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CP (jj+), rr" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the value stored in the rr register, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2. Since two-byte values are being compared, the address is incremented by 2. This instruction takes five cycles and is two bytes long.

[Example 2-3]
Example 2-3 in Figure 115 is an instruction table illustrating the CPJ instruction, which is one of the comparison instructions. The CPJ instruction is written in assembly language as "CPJ first operand, second operand," and subtracts the data (value) corresponding to the second operand from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand, and compares the two data (values). Note that CPJ is the opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand.

Note that the CPJ instruction and CP instruction have the same function and operation for comparison as long as the first and second operands are the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. For example, "CPJ r,g" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value of the g register, just like "CP r,g". Similarly, "CPJ p,n" is an instruction that compares the value of the p register with the immediate value n, just like "CP p,n". Similarly, "CPJ q,n" is an instruction that compares the value of the q register with the immediate value n, just like "CP q,n". Similarly, "CPJ r,(vw)" is an instruction that compares the value of the r register with the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw, just like "CP r,(vw)".

Similarly, with regard to the function of comparison itself and the operation of comparison itself, there are differences between "CPJ r,(jj)" and "CP r,(jj)", "CPJ r,(jj+)" and "CP r,(jj+)", "CPJ r,(jj+d)" and "CP r,(jj+d)", "CPJ r,(jj+p)" and "CP r,(jj+p)", "CPJ (vw),n" and "CP (vw),n", "CPJ (jj),n" and "CP (jj),n", "CPJ (jj+),n" and "CP (jj+),n", "CPJ (jj+),n" and "CP (jj+),n", "CPJ (jj+d),n" and "CP (jj+d),n", "CPJ (jj+p),n" and "CP (jj+p),n", "CPJ "CP rr,gg" and "CP rr,gg", and "CPJ rr,mn" and "CP rr,mn" are the same.

However, while execution of the CP instruction sets the jump status flag (JF) to the same value C as the carry flag (CF) and changes in the same manner, execution of the CPJ instruction sets the jump status flag (JF) to the same value Z as the zero flag (ZF) and changes in the same manner. Note that if the comparison results in a match with the CPJ instruction (if the subtraction result is zero), the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1," and if there is no match (if the subtraction result is not zero), the value Z of the zero flag (ZF) is not set to "0." Therefore, the CPJ instruction is often used to check whether the values match immediately before a branch instruction (jump instruction) is executed.

As such, even if the comparison result (subtraction result) is the same, the two types of comparison instructions, the CPJ instruction and the CP instruction, change the jump status flag (JF) in different ways. By providing two types of comparison instructions - the CPJ instruction that prioritizes the zero flag and the CP instruction that prioritizes the carry flag - and using them depending on the type of branch instruction (jump instruction) that follows the comparison instruction, program development becomes easier.

Furthermore, if the first and second operands are the same, the CPJ instruction and the CP instruction basically have the same number of cycles and the same word length. For example, "CPJ (vw), n" and "CP (vw), n" are both instructions that compare the value stored in the direct address area specified by the direct value vw with the direct value n, but both require six cycles and are five bytes long. Furthermore, for example, "CPJ r, (jj+p)" and "CP r, (jj+p)" are both instructions that compare the value of the r register with the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+p", but both require four cycles and are two bytes long.

However, as an exception, "CPJ r, (jj+d)" is different from "CP r, (jj+d)" in that it takes four cycles and is three bytes long regardless of the type of jj register.

[Example 2-4]
Example 2-4 in Figure 116 is an instruction table illustrating a CPW instruction, which is a comparison instruction that compares two bytes of data (values). The CPW instruction is written in assembly language as "CPW first operand, second operand," and subtracts the data (value) corresponding to the second operand from the data (value) corresponding to the first operand to compare the two bytes of data (values). Note that CPW is an opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand. Here, the address specified in parentheses indicates the start address of the two-byte area.

When the CPW instruction is executed, the jump status flag (JF) is set to the same value C as the carry flag (CF). If the result of the subtraction in the CP instruction is less than zero (negative), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "1", and if the result is zero or greater (0 or positive), the value C of the carry flag (CF) becomes "0". Therefore, the CPW instruction is often used to determine the magnitude of a value immediately before a branch instruction (jump instruction) is executed.

Note that the CPW and LDW instructions basically have the same word length if the first and second operands are the same. This may make program design easier.

"CPW (vw), mn" is an 8-cycle, 6-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the direct address area specified by the direct value vw with the direct value mn (2 bytes).

"CPW (jj), mn" is a 6-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value mn.

"CPW (jj+), mn" is a 7-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register with the immediate value mn, and after the comparison, increments the address stored in the jj register by 2.

"CPW (jj+d), mn" is an instruction that compares the value stored in the area of the added address "jj+d" with the immediate value mn. This instruction is 7 cycles and 5 bytes long.

"CPW (jj+p), mn" is a 7-cycle, 4-byte instruction that compares the value stored in the area at the added address "jj+p" with the immediate value mn.

The comparison instructions have been explained above, but the instruction "CP rr,gg" that compares the values of different 2-byte registers (different second registers) and the instruction "CP rr,mn" that compares the value of a 2-byte register with a direct value are sometimes called first comparison instructions. The first comparison instruction changes the jump status flag (JF) and carry flag (CF) to the same value.

The instructions "CPJ p,n" and "CPJ q,n" that compare a register value with a direct value (1 byte) and change the jump status flag (JF) and zero flag (ZF) to the same value are sometimes called second comparison instructions.

"CP p,n" and "CP q,n" are sometimes called third comparison instructions, as they compare a register value with a direct value (1 byte) and set the jump status flag (JF) and carry flag (CF) to the same value.

The instructions "CP r, (vw)", "CP r, (jj+d)", "CP rr, (vw)", and "CP rr, (jj+d)", which compare the value of a register with the value stored in a memory area (1 byte or 2 bytes) and change the jump status flag (JF) and carry flag (CF) to the same value, are sometimes called the fourth comparison instructions.

[Branch instruction (example 3)]
A branch instruction (jump instruction) is an instruction that causes the address of the instruction (process) to branch (jump, move) from the address of the branch instruction (branch source) to a predetermined address (in ROM) of the branch destination. In this embodiment, the branch instruction unconditionally causes the address of the instruction to be executed next to jump to the branch destination address (in ROM) corresponding to the operand, or, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is met, causes the address to jump to the branch destination address (in ROM) corresponding to the second operand. Note that, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is not met, the instruction proceeds directly to the instruction following the branch instruction (no branch).

A branch instruction sets the jump status flag (JF) to "1" out of the six flags (flags other than RBS and IMF) in bits 2 through 7 of flag register 1200, but leaves the zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), and overflow flag (VF) unchanged.

[Example 3-1]
Example 3-1 in FIG. 117 is an instruction table illustrating a JRR instruction, which, among branch instructions, causes processing to jump from the address of the branch instruction at the branch source to an address closer to the branch destination. The JRR instruction jumps to an address (location) closer in address space than the JR instruction, which will be described later. Here, the JRR instruction is written in assembly language as "JRR first operand, second operand," and if the condition corresponding to the first operand is met, processing (the next instruction to be executed) jumps (conditional branch) to the address corresponding to the second operand. Also, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is not met, processing proceeds directly to the instruction following the branch instruction (no branch). Note that JRR is an opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand. The branch conditions of the JRR instruction include only the condition regarding the state (T or F) of the jump status flag (JF), and do not include conditions regarding the states of the other flags: zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), and overflow flag (VF).

"JRR T, $+1+k" is a four-cycle, one-byte instruction. When the jump status flag (JF) is "1" (JF = 1 (true, T)), processing jumps to the jump destination address "PC+1+k." "PC+1+k" is the current value $ of the PC register, which serves as the program counter, plus 1+k. Here, the range of k in the JRR instruction is a narrow range (smaller absolute values) of -12 to -2 or +1 to +15, which is narrower than the range of k in the JR instruction (-128 to +127) described below. Therefore, the word length of this JRR instruction is one byte shorter. Note that because the word length is one byte, 1 is added to k in the jump destination address "PC+1+k."

"JRR F, $+1+k" is the same instruction as "JRR T, $+1+k", but if the jump status flag (JF) is "0" (JF = 0 (false, F)), processing jumps to the destination address "PC+1+k". Similarly, k is in a narrow range of -12 to -2 or +1 to +15.

As mentioned above, the range of k is -12 to -2 or +1 to +15, so with the JRR instruction, the jump destination address will be an address that is between -11 bytes and +16 bytes away from the address of the JRR instruction. Addresses outside this range can be jumped to using the JR instruction, described below.

[Example 3-2]
Example 3-2 in Figure 117 is an instruction table illustrating a JR instruction, which, among branch instructions, allows processing to jump from the address of the branch instruction at the branch source to an address farther away in the branch destination. The JR instruction allows jumping to an address farther away in the address space than the JRR instruction described above. Here, when the JR instruction is written in assembly language as "JR operand," processing (the next instruction to be executed) unconditionally jumps to the address corresponding to the operand (unconditional branch). When written as "JR first operand, second operand," processing jumps to the address corresponding to the second operand (conditional branch) if the condition corresponding to the first operand is met. Furthermore, if the condition corresponding to the first operand is not met, processing proceeds directly to the instruction following the branch instruction (no branch). JR is an opcode, and the operand before the comma is the first operand and the operand after the comma is the second operand. The branch condition for the JR instruction does not include a condition related to the state (T or F) of the jump status flag (JF).

"JR $+2+k" is a three-cycle, two-byte instruction that unconditionally jumps to the destination address "PC+2+k." "PC+2+k" is the current value $ of the PC register, which is the program counter, plus 2+k. The range of k for the JR instruction is a wide range from -128 to +127 (a range with a larger absolute value), which is wider than the range of k for the JRR instruction (-12 to -2 or +1 to +15). Therefore, this JR instruction can jump to addresses farther away than the JRR instruction, and the word length of this JR instruction is two bytes, longer than the JRR instruction. Note that because it is two bytes long, 2 is added to k.

"JR Z,$+2+k", "JR NZ,$+2+k", "JR C,$+2+k", and "JR NC,$+2+k" are three-cycle, two-byte instructions, and when a specific condition corresponding to the first operand (ZF=1, ZF=0, CF=1, CF=0, respectively) is met, processing jumps to the jump destination address "PC+2+k", just like "JR $+2+k".

"JR LE, $+3+k" "JR GT, $+3+k" "JR M, $+3+k" "JR P, $+3+k" "JR SLT, $+3+k" "JR SGE, $+3+k" "JR SLE, $+3+k" "JR SGT, $+3+k" "JR VS, $+3+k" "JR "VC, $+3+k" is a four-cycle, three-byte instruction, and when a specific condition corresponding to the first operand is met (respectively, CF=1 or ZF=1, CF=0 and ZF=0, SF=1, SF=0, the exclusive OR of SF and VF is 1, the exclusive OR of SF and VF is 0, the exclusive OR of SF and VF is 1 or ZF=1, the exclusive OR of SF and VF is 0 and ZF=0, VF=1, VF=0), processing jumps to the jump destination address "PC+3+k." "PC+3+k" is the current value $ of the PC register, which is the program counter, plus 3+k. Here, k has a large absolute value between -128 and +127, so these JR instructions can jump to addresses farther away than the JRR instruction, and the word length of these JR instructions is 3 bytes, which is longer than the JRR instruction. Note that because they are 3 bytes long, 3 is added to k.

The branch instructions have been explained above, but a two-byte JR instruction that can cause processing to jump to an address farther away from the address of the branch instruction is sometimes called a first branch instruction. A one-byte JRR instruction that causes processing to jump to an address closer to the address of the branch instruction is sometimes called a second branch instruction. The branch conditions are as follows: The first branch instruction (JR instruction) does not include a condition regarding the state of the jump status flag (T or F), but the second branch instruction (JRR instruction) does include a condition regarding the state of the jump status flag.

[Call command (example 4)]
A call instruction is an instruction that calls a subroutine at a specified address in a call destination program from a call source program. In this embodiment, the call instruction calls a subroutine at an address corresponding to an operand, or calls a subroutine at an address corresponding to a second operand when a condition corresponding to a first operand is met.

The call instruction leaves the six flags (flags other than RBS and IMF) in bits 2 through 7 of flag register 1200 unchanged.

[Example 4-1]
Example 4-1 in Figure 118 is an instruction table illustrating a CALL instruction, which can call a subroutine at any address (address in ROM), among the call instructions. Here, when the CALL instruction is written as "CALL operand" in assembly language, it unconditionally calls a subroutine at the address corresponding to the operand, and when written as "CALL first operand, second operand," it calls a subroutine at the address corresponding to the second operand when the condition corresponding to the first operand is met. Note that CALL is an opcode, and the part before the comma in the operand is the first operand, and the part after the comma is the second operand.

"CALL mn", "CALL rr", "CALL (vw)", "CALL (jj)", "CALL (jj+)", "CALL (jj+d)", and "CALL (jj+p)" are instructions that can call a subroutine unconditionally, and each of them sets the value of the address (starting address in ROM) of the called subroutine to the value stored in the immediate value mn, the value stored in the rr register, the value stored in the direct address area specified by the immediate value vw, the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register, the value stored in the address area specified by the jj register, the value stored in the area of the addition address "jj+d", or the value stored in the area of the addition address "jj+p". These CALL instructions are, in order, 7 cycles and 4 bytes long, 6 cycles and 2 bytes long, 9 cycles and 4 bytes long, 7 cycles and 2 bytes long, 8 cycles and 2 bytes long, 8 cycles and 3 bytes long, and 8 cycles and 2 bytes long.

"CALL T,mn", "CALL F,mn", "CALL Z,mn", "CALL NZ,mn", "CALL C,mn", and "CALL NC,mn" are instructions that call the subroutine at the address of the immediate mn when the following conditions are met: JF=1, JF=0, ZF=1, ZF=0, CF=1, and CF=0, respectively. The word length of these CALL instructions is 4 bytes. The number of cycles for these CALL instructions is 7 cycles when the condition is met, and 5 cycles when the condition is not met.

[Example 4-2]
Example 4-2 in Figure 118 is an instruction table illustrating CALLT and CALLR instructions, which cannot call a subroutine at an arbitrary address. The CALLT and CALLR instructions are written in assembly language as "CALLT operand" and "CALR operand," respectively, and unconditionally call a subroutine at an address derived based on the operand or corresponding to the operand. CALLT and CALLR are opcodes.

"CALLT n" is a 7-cycle, 1-byte instruction that unconditionally calls the subroutine registered (address registered) at the nth position in the vector table. Here, the immediate value n is a 4-bit value ranging from 0 to 15 (n = 0 to 15). The vector table is located in the program management area at the end of the address space of ROM 111b (see Figure 109). In the vector table, subroutine addresses (starting addresses) are registered (defined) and stored in order. Because the vector table can be used, the operand is the immediate value n (4 bits) instead of the immediate value mn, and the word length of "CALLT n" is a short 1 byte. However, there is an upper limit (16) to the number of addresses (subroutine addresses) that can be registered in the vector table.

"CALLR mn" unconditionally calls the subroutine at the address (address) of the immediate mn. The addresses of the subroutines that can be called with this instruction are limited to a certain range (for example, 4000h to 53FFh). For example, if the immediate mn ranges from 4000h to 4BFFh, "CALLR mn" takes 6 cycles and is 2 bytes long, and if the immediate mn ranges from 4C00h to 53FFh, it takes 7 cycles and is 3 bytes long. Thus, if the immediate mn is large, the number of cycles and word length of this instruction will increase. Note that if the immediate mn is large, it may also be possible to call a subroutine in a second ROM area (external program area) with a larger address.

When the operand related to the callee address is a direct value mn or direct value n, the CALLT instruction, CALLR instruction, and CALL instruction are 1 byte long, 2 bytes (or 3 bytes), and 4 bytes long, respectively. In other words, when the operand related to the callee address is a direct value, the smaller the number of addresses (subroutine addresses) that can be called (the more limited the number), the shorter the word length of the call instruction (the smaller the instruction size). Note that the CALLT instruction uses a vector table, the CALLR instruction is limited in the range of addresses that can be called, and the CALL instruction can call any address, so the number of addresses that can be called is CALLT instruction < CALLR instruction < CALL instruction.

The above explains call instructions, but certain CALL instructions (4-byte long "CALL mn," "CALL T,mn," "CALL F,mn," "CALL Z,mn," "CALL NZ,mn," "CALL C,mn," and "CALL NC,mn") that can call a subroutine at any address but have a large instruction size are sometimes referred to as first call instructions. In first call instructions, the address of the callee is specified by the literal value mn. Of these CALL instructions, only "CALL mn," which can call a subroutine unconditionally, can be considered the first call instruction. In addition, a 2-byte or 3-byte CALLR instruction, which has a shorter word length than the first call instruction but has limitations on the addresses of the subroutines (callees) that can be called, is sometimes referred to as a second call instruction. Furthermore, only subroutines registered (addresses registered) in the vector table can be called, and a 1-byte CALL instruction with a shorter word length than the second call instruction is sometimes called the third call instruction.

[Return command (Example 5)]
A return instruction is an instruction to return from a subroutine, an interrupt process, etc. In this embodiment, the return instruction returns unconditionally, or returns when a condition corresponding to an operand is met.

The return instruction either leaves the six flags (flags other than RBS and IMF) in bits 2 through 7 of flag register 1200 unchanged, or sets them to specified values.

[Example 5-1]
Example 5-1 in FIG. 119 is an instruction table illustrating a RET instruction, among the return instructions, that does not involve the restoration of the program status word PSW, which is data in the flag register 1200. Here, when the RET instruction is written as "RET" in assembly language, it returns from a subroutine unconditionally, and when written as "RET operand", it returns when the condition corresponding to the operand is met. RET is an opcode. When the condition is not met, it proceeds directly to the instruction following the return instruction (does not return).

"RET" is a 6-cycle, 1-byte instruction that unconditionally returns from a subroutine.

"RET T", "RET F", "RET Z", "RET NZ", "RET C", and "RET NC" return when a specific condition corresponding to the operand is met (JF=1, JF=0, ZF=1, ZF=0, CF=1, CF=0, respectively). The word lengths of these RET instructions are 2 bytes, 2 bytes, 1 byte, 1 byte, 1 byte, and 1 byte, in the order listed above. The number of cycles for "RET T" and "RET F" is 7 cycles if the condition is met, and 4 cycles if the condition is not met. The number of cycles for "RET Z", "RET NZ", "RET C", and "RET NC" is 6 cycles if the condition is met, and 3 cycles if the condition is not met.

[Example 5-2]
Example 5-2 in Figure 119 is an instruction table illustrating the RETI and RETN instructions, which are return instructions that involve restoring the program status word PSW. Here, the RETI and RETN instructions are written in assembly language as "RETI" and "RETN" without an operand, and return unconditionally. RETI and RETN are opcodes.

"RETI" and "RETN" are 7-cycle, 2-byte instructions. "RETI" restores the PSW from the stack and returns from interrupt processing or a subroutine of the CALLI instruction. Here, the CALLI instruction (not listed in the instruction table) is a call instruction that saves the PSW to the stack, disables interrupts (IMF = 0), and then calls a subroutine. "RETN" restores the PSW from the stack and returns from NMI interrupt processing. NMI interrupt processing (non-maskable interrupt processing) is an interrupt processing that cannot be disabled and is therefore forcibly executed.

[Output processing]
Fig. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output processing according to the fifth embodiment. The output processing according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the output processing according to the first embodiment (Fig. 10) except that the test signal output processing of steps A1619-A1623 has been deleted. In Fig. 120, the same steps as those in the output processing according to the first embodiment (Fig. 10) are assigned the same step numbers, and therefore their explanations are omitted. Note that the test signal output processing is executed in the outside-area integration processing other than the output processing.

[Out-of-area integration processing]
Fig. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the outside area integration processing according to the fifth embodiment. The outside area integration processing according to the fifth embodiment is obtained by adding a test signal output process (A10001) to the outside area integration processing (Fig. 57) of the first embodiment. In Fig. 121, the same processes as those in the outside area integration processing (Fig. 57) of the first embodiment are assigned the same step numbers, and descriptions thereof will be omitted. The outside area integration processing is an outside area processing like the first embodiment, and is executed as an outside area integration processing program that is part of the outside area program.

After switching the stack pointer (A9501 and A9502) and saving the register (A9503), the game control device 100 executes the test signal output processing program corresponding to the test signal output processing (A10001) as part of the out-of-area program. Calling the test signal output processing (A10001) as a subroutine from the out-of-area integration processing in this way saves the processing time required for switching the stack pointer and saving and restoring registers. Note that if the test signal output processing, which is an out-of-area program, is configured to be called as a subroutine from the output processing program, which is an in-area program, it may be necessary to save the flag register in the output processing, or to switch the stack pointer and save and restore the general-purpose register in the test signal output processing. Note that in the first embodiment, the test signal output processing is executed as part of the output processing program, which is an in-area program, so there is no need to save the flag register, switch the stack pointer, or save and restore the general-purpose register.

[Test signal output processing]
122 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the test signal output process according to the fifth embodiment. The test signal output process is executed as a subroutine of the outside-area integration process (FIG. 121).

The game control device 100 first loads and synthesizes the data to be output to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 (A10101). Then, it loads and synthesizes the data to be output to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 (A10102).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70, which outputs test signals to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 (A10103). Furthermore, it loads and combines data to be output to test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70, which outputs test signals to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 (A10104). Then, it loads and combines data to be output to test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70, which outputs test signals to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 (A10105).

The processing of steps A10101-A10105 is similar to steps A1619-A1623 of the output processing in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the test signal output processing is executed as a test signal output processing program, which is part of the outside-area program corresponding to the outside-area processing. On the other hand, the output processing is executed as an output processing program, which is part of the inside-area program corresponding to the inside-area processing. Note that in the processing of steps A10101-A10105, the data to be output to test terminal output ports 1-5 is read (loaded) from the inside-area work area of RAM.

[Program List]
123-139 are program lists illustrating the program structure of a program executed by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) of the game control device 100 according to the fifth embodiment. FIGS. 123-139 are merely examples of program structure, and can be modified as needed, such as by deleting or adding instructions (code). Each program list is a list of assembly language instructions (source code) compatible with the Z80 8-bit microprocessor, and, with the exception of pseudo-instructions (instructions for the assembler), corresponds one-to-one to the machine language instructions (machine code) stored in the ROM 111b. All instructions are included in the instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 as machine language instructions.

Each line in each program listing consists of, from the left, a "line number" added for convenience, an "assembly language instruction (code)," the "word length of the instruction (instruction size, instruction length)," and a "comment" added for ease of explanation. The number to the right of the semicolon ";" is the "word length," and to the right of that is the "comment." As mentioned above, an "assembly language instruction (code)" is divided into an "opcode" that indicates the operation (calculation) and an "operand" that is the target of the instruction. In assembly language instructions (code), labels and hexadecimal numbers (...h, ...h, etc.) represent the immediate value n or immediate value mn. Note that instructions in a program list are generally executed from top to bottom in order of line number (from lowest to highest line number), unless there is a call instruction that calls a subroutine or a branch instruction (jump instruction).

Note that the programs in Figures 123 to 135 are included in the in-area programs of the first ROM area (first program storage area), and the programs in Figures 136 to 139 are included in the out-area programs of the second ROM area (second program storage area).

[Main processing program]
FIG. 123 is a program list showing the program structure of a part of the main processing program corresponding to the main processing (FIG. 5A) according to the fifth embodiment.

On line 0510, interrupts are disabled (code "DI") in response to A1001 in the main process.

On line 0520, in response to A1002 in the main process, the value "29FFh" is transferred to the SP register as the stack pointer (code "LD SP, 29FFH").

On line 0530, in response to A1003 in the main process, 0 is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) (code "LD RBS, 0"). This sets register bank 0.

On line 0540, in response to A1004 in the main process, "2800h" is transferred and set as the starting address of RAM 111c in the IY register (code "LD IY, 2800H"). Note that in this embodiment, not only the upper address but also the entire starting address (including the lower address) is set.

Line number 0550 can be included in the processing of A1004 of the main processing, but it transfers and sets "5000h" as the starting address of the data area (for user programs) in ROM 111b to the DP register (code "LD DP, 5000H").

Lines 0560 and 0570 correspond to A1005 in the main process. In line 0560, the immediate value n (a number indicating firing has stopped) corresponding to the label C_SHOT_NG is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, C_SHOT_NG").

On line 0570, the value in the A register is output to port C_OUT01 (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to label C_OUT01) (code "OUT (C_OUT01), A").

On line 0580, corresponding to A1006 in the main process, a numerical value is input to the A register from port C_INPUT1 (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_INPUT1) (code "IN A, (C_INPUT1)"). This port is the first input port 122 that takes in a signal from the RAM initialization switch 112. Although omitted, on the next line 0590, similarly, corresponding to A1006 in the main process, a numerical value may be input to the B register, etc., from port C_INPUT2 (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_INPUT2), which is the second input port 123 that takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93.

On line 0610, in response to A1052 in the main process, the program status word PSW, which is the data (value) of flag register 1200, is pushed to the internal stack area (code "PUSH PSW").

On line number 0620, in response to A1053 in the main processing, a subroutine for safety device information initialization processing is called and executed to initialize safety device information related to the safety device (code "CALL P_SAFINI"). Note that the code described as "CALL label" corresponds to "CALL mn" in the instruction table. The subroutine for safety device information initialization processing is an external program, and has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the immediate value mn of label P_SAFINI in the second ROM area (external program area). In this way, when an external program is called from an internal program (main processing program), a specific CALL command is used to distinguish it from when an internal program is called.

On line 0630, the program status word PSW is restored (POPed) in response to A1054 in the main process.

Lines 0640 and 0650 correspond to A1055 in the main process. In line 0640, the address (label D_RNDSET) of the data table (RNDSET) required to start or use the random number generation circuit is converted to the relative address "D_RNDSET-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_RNDSET-5000H"). The relative address is an address in ROM relative to the starting address of the user program data area, "5000h." The code "LDD HL, D_RNDSET-5000H" corresponds to "LDD HL, mn" in the instruction table.

The LDD instruction uses a relative address (effectively 1 byte) as the second operand, rather than an absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space, so the word length of the instruction is reduced by 1 byte compared to a normal LD instruction ("LD ff, mn") (reduced from 3 bytes to 2 bytes).

Line number 0650 calls and executes a subroutine that sets up a device (here, a random number generator) (code "CALLR P_DEVSET"). Note that the code "CALR label" corresponds to "CALR mn" in the instruction table. This subroutine has an address in ROM (starting address) that corresponds to the immediate value mn of the label P_DEVSET.

On line 0670, interrupts are disabled (code "DI") in response to A1056 in the main process.

Line numbers 0680 and 0690 correspond to A1057 in the main process. Line number 0680 calls and executes a subroutine corresponding to the game stop determination process, which determines whether game play is stopped (code "CALLT P_MSSTA_CHK"). Note that the code written as "CALLT label" corresponds to "CALLT n" in the instruction table. The value of label P_MSSTA_CHK is n, and the address in ROM of the subroutine called here is registered as the nth in the vector table.

In line 0690, if the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0" (JF = 0: game play is stopped), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label MAIN80, and the instructions from line 0740 onwards are executed (code "JRR F, MAIN80"). The jump destination (label MAIN80) is a nearby address that is +9 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of code "JRR F, MAIN80". Note that the code written as "JRR F, label" corresponds to "JRR F, $+1+k" in the instruction table. If the jump status flag (JF) is set and is "1" (JF = 1: game play is not stopped), the program moves on to the instruction on the next line, 0700.

On line 0700, in response to A1058 in the main process, the program status word PSW, which is the data in flag register 1200, is pushed to the internal stack area (code "PUSH PSW").

On line 0710, in response to A1059 of the main processing, a subroutine for performance display editing processing that calculates performance information such as base values is called and executed (code "CALL P_SHKSHM"). The subroutine for performance display editing processing is an external program, and has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the immediate value mn of label P_SHKSHM in the second ROM area (external program area). In this way, when an external program is called from an internal program (main processing program), a specific CALL command is used to distinguish it from when an internal program is called.

On line 0720, the program status word PSW is restored (POPed) in response to A1060 in the main process.

On line 0740, an interrupt is allowed (code "EI") in response to A1061 in the main process.

On line 0750, the value of the W register is cleared and set to 0 by performing an exclusive OR on the values of the W register (code "XOR W, W").

Lines 0770 to 0830 correspond to A1062 in the main process, and determine whether a power outage has occurred. Line 0770 inputs a value into register A from port C_INPUT1, which receives the power outage monitoring signal (code "IN A, (C_INPUT1)").

Line number 0780 takes the logical AND of the value of the A register and the value C_PDWNSW (e.g., 00000001B in negative logic), which indicates that the power outage monitoring signal is off (code "AND A, C_PDWNSW"). The result of the logical AND operation on line number 0810 is zero if the power outage monitoring signal is on (e.g., 00000000B in negative logic), indicating a power outage. If the result is zero, the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1," and if the result is not zero, the zero flag (ZF) is not set and is set to "0" (NZ).

In line 0790, if the result of the operation in line 0780 is not zero but NZ (i.e., there is no power outage), a jump is made to the address in ROM (branch destination) corresponding to label MAIN70, and the instructions from line 0670 onward are executed (code "JR NZ, MAIN70"). The code "JR NZ, label" corresponds to "JR NZ, $+2+k" in the instruction table. The jump destination (label MAIN70) is a distant address, -17 bytes (less than -12 bytes) from the address of the code "JR NZ, MAIN70," which is an address that cannot be jumped to using the JRR instruction. However, this JR instruction can jump a greater distance in the address space than the JRR instruction (for example). If the result of the operation in line 0780 is zero (i.e., there is a power outage), the instruction in line 0810 is executed. If no jump occurs, the program proceeds to the next instruction at line number 0810.

Lines 0810 to 0830 determine whether the power outage monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks.

On line 0810, when the power outage monitoring signal is in the ON state (power outage has occurred), the value of the W register, which indicates the number of times the ON state has been detected, is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (code "INC W").

On line 0820, the value of the W register is compared with the check count of "2" (code "CP W,2"). Note that this code corresponds to "CP p,n" in the instruction table. If the value of the W register is less than the check count of "2", the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set to "1" as the result of the comparison.

On line 0830, if the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (the number of times the on state has been detected has not reached the check count), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label MAIN90, and the instructions from line 0770 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, MAIN90"). Note that the code written as "JRR T, label" corresponds to "JRR T, $+2+k" in the instruction table. If the jump status flag (JF) is not set to "0" (the number of times the on state has been detected has reached the check count), the program moves to line 0840. If no jump is made, the program moves to the instruction on the next line, 0840.

On line 0840, interrupts are disabled (code "DI") in response to A1063 in the main process.

Line number 0850 corresponds to A1064 of the main process, and calls and executes a subroutine that outputs off data to all output ports (code "CALLR P_OUTCLR"). This subroutine has an address in ROM (starting address) that corresponds to the label P_OUTCLR.

[Timer interrupt processing program]
FIG. 124 is a program list showing the program structure of a timer interrupt processing program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) according to the fifth embodiment.

On line 1000, in response to timer interrupt processing A1301, a 1 is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) (code "LD RBS, 1"). This sets register bank 1.

On line 1010, in response to A1302 of the timer interrupt process, the upper address (28h) of the RAM start address is set in a specific register (D register) (code "LD D, 28H").

On line 1020, as with line 0540, the entire starting address of RAM 111c, "2800h", is transferred and set into the IY register.

On line 1030, in response to A1303 of the timer interrupt process, a subroutine corresponding to input processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_INPUT"). The subroutine corresponding to input processing has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_INPUT.

Line numbers 1040 and 1050 correspond to A1304 in the timer interrupt process. In line number 1040, the value indicating that the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (the value stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_SETMODE") is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_SETMODE)"). The addition address "IY+R_SETMODE" is the sum of the value of the IY register, "2800h" (the starting address, base address of RAM 111c), and the offset value (immediate value, relative address) corresponding to the label R_SETMODE. Note that the addition address "IY+label" indicates an address within RAM. This code corresponds to "LD r, (jj+d)" in the instruction table. When the probability setting is not being changed or confirmed, a "0" is transferred to the A register and the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (JF = 1); when the probability setting is being changed or confirmed, a value other than "0" is transferred to the A register and the jump status flag (JF) is set to "0" (JF = 0).

In line 1050, the jump status flag (JF) is set to "1" (JF = 1: the probability setting is neither being changed nor being confirmed), and the program jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TINT10 and executes the instructions from line 1090 onwards (code "JRR T, TINT10"). Note that the code "JRR T, label" corresponds to "JRR T, $+1+k" in the instruction table. The jump destination (label TINT10) is a nearby address that is +5 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR T, TINT10". If the jump status flag (JF) is not set to "0" (JF = 0: the probability setting is being changed or confirmed), the program proceeds to the instruction on the next line, line 1060.

Lines 1060 and 1070 correspond to A1305 of the timer interrupt process. Line 1060 calls and executes a subroutine corresponding to the probability setting change/confirmation process (code "CALLR P_SET_DISP"). The subroutine corresponding to the probability setting change/confirmation process has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_SET_DISP.

On line 1070, an unconditional jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TINT30, and the instructions from line 1310 onwards are executed (code "JR TINT30"). Note that the code written as "JR label" corresponds to "JR $+2+k" in the instruction table. The jump destination (label TINT30) is a distant address that is +40 bytes (more than +17 bytes) away from the address of code "JR TINT30", and is an address that cannot be jumped to using the JRR instruction.

On lines 1090 to 1110, the subroutines corresponding to the output processing (A1306), payout command sending processing (A1307), and prize slot switch/error monitoring processing (A1308) in the timer interrupt processing are called and executed using the CALLR instruction (codes "CALLR P_OUTPUT", "CALLR P_PAYCOM", and "CALLR P_PRZERR").

Line numbers 1120 and 1130 correspond to A1309 of the timer interrupt process. Line number 1120 calls and executes a subroutine corresponding to the game stop determination process, which determines whether game play is stopped (code "CALLT P_MSSTA_CHK"). This subroutine has an address in ROM (the nth registered address) associated with the value n of label P_MSSTA_CHK in the vector table.

In line 1130, if the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0" (JF = 0: game play is stopped), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TINT20, and the instructions from line 1190 onwards are executed (code "JRR F, TINT20"). The jump destination (label TINT20) is a nearby address that is +9 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR F, TINT20". If the jump status flag (JF) is set and is "1" (JF = 1: game play is not stopped), the program moves on to the instruction on the next line, 1140.

On lines 1140 to 1170, the subroutines corresponding to the special game processing (A1310), the bonus game processing (A1311), the regular game processing (A1312), and the segment LED editing processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing are called and executed using the CALLR instruction (codes: "CALLR P_TGAMEPRC", "CALLR P_YGAMEPRC", "CALLR P_FGAMEPRC", and "CALLR P_SEGEDIT").

On lines 1190 to 1240, the subroutines corresponding to the safety device-related processing (A1314), magnet irregularity monitoring processing (A1315), panel radio wave irregularity monitoring processing (A1316), vibration irregularity monitoring processing (A1317), abnormal discharge monitoring processing (A1318), and external information editing processing (A1319) in the timer interrupt processing are called and executed using the CALLR instruction (codes: "CALLR P_SAFSET", "CALLR P_MAGERR", "CALLR P_JAMERR", "CALLR P_VIBERR", "CALLR P_PAYERR", "CALLR P_INFEDIT").

Lines 1250 and 1260 correspond to A1320 in the timer interrupt process. Line 1250 calls and executes a subroutine corresponding to the game stop determination process, which determines whether game play is stopped (code "CALLT P_MSSTA_CHK").

In line 1260, if the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0" (JF = 0: game play is stopped), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TINT30, and the instructions from line 1310 onwards are executed (code "JRR F, TINT30"). The jump destination (label TINT30) is a nearby address that is +9 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR F, TINT30". If the jump status flag (JF) is set and is "1" (JF = 1: game play is not stopped), the program moves on to the instruction on the next line, 1270.

On line 1270, in response to timer interrupt processing A1321, the program status word PSW is pushed to the internal stack area (code "PUSH PSW").

On line 1280, in response to A1322 of the timer interrupt process, a subroutine corresponding to the out-of-area integration process, which updates the safety device counter value (calculates the difference in balls) and controls the display of the performance display device 152, is called and executed (code "CALL P_OUTAREA"). The subroutine corresponding to the out-of-area integration process is an out-of-area program, and has an in-ROM address (starting address) corresponding to the immediate value mn of label P_OUTAREA in the second ROM area (out-of-area program area). In this way, when calling an out-of-area program from an in-area program (timer interrupt process program), a specific CALL command is used, distinguishing it from when calling an in-area program. This improves program development efficiency.

On line 0630, the program status word PSW is restored (POPed) in response to timer interrupt processing A1323.

Line 1310 returns from the timer interrupt processing program (code "RETI").

The numerous subroutines called from the timer interrupt processing program in Figure 124, including input processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing, output processing, payout command transmission processing, prize slot switch/error monitoring processing, game stop determination processing, special game processing, bonus game processing, regular game processing, segment LED editing processing, safety device related processing, magnet fraud monitoring processing, board radio wave fraud monitoring processing, vibration fraud monitoring processing, abnormal discharge monitoring processing, and external information editing processing, are in-area programs located in the first ROM area within the address space. These subroutines included in the in-area program are called from the timer interrupt processing program included in the in-area program by the CALLT or CALLR instruction, which has a short word length but is limited by the call destination address. This allows for a reduction in program size. Furthermore, by using a CALLR instruction (second call instruction) or a CALLT instruction (third call instruction) which has a shorter number of cycles or word length than the specific CALL instruction, rather than using a specific CALL instruction (first call instruction) which requires 7 cycles and is 4 bytes long and whose call destination address is specified by the immediate value mn, the process of calling these subroutines included in the program within the area is made more efficient and faster.

On the other hand, the subroutine that corresponds to the out-of-area integration process, which is a subroutine called from the timer interrupt processing program, is an out-of-area program located in the second ROM area within the address space. Subroutines that become out-of-area programs (subroutines for out-of-area integration processing) are distinguished from subroutines that become in-area programs, and are called from in-area programs (here, the timer interrupt processing program) by a specific CALL instruction (first call instruction). This improves the efficiency of program development.

As will be explained later, when a subroutine included in an out-of-area program (out-of-area integrated processing program) calls a subroutine included in an out-of-area program (test signal output processing program, performance display device control processing program, differential ball confirmation processing program, safety device operation monitoring processing program), only the CALL instruction is used, without the CALLT and CALLR instructions, to distinguish it from a call to a subroutine included in an in-area program. This also improves the efficiency of program development.

[Special game processing program]
125 is a program list showing the program structure of the special game processing program corresponding to the special game processing (FIG. 16) according to the fifth embodiment. The special game processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TGAMEPRC, and is called by the CALLR instruction (line number 1140) in step A1310 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

On lines 1510 to 1530, the subroutines corresponding to the start gate switch monitoring process (A2600), specific area switch monitoring process (A2601), and upper large prize gate switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special game processing are called and executed using the CALLR command (codes "CALLR P_SIDOSW", "CALLR P_VSW", and "CALLR P_CNTUSW").

Lines 1540 and 1550 correspond to A2603 in the special game processing. Line 1540 transfers "R_TGAME+1" (the direct value n) as the lower address and the 8th to 15th bits of the IY register as the upper address (28h) to the HL register (code "LDY HL, R_TGAME+1"). The code "LDY HL, R_TGAME+1" corresponds to "LDY jj, n" in the instruction table. Here, the label R_TGAME indicates the offset address (offset value based on 2800h) of the special game processing number area that stores the special game processing number (A2606). The address "R_TGAME+1," obtained by adding 1 to this address, indicates the starting address of the special game processing timer area, a 2-byte area (here, offset value based on 2800h). Therefore, the value of the HL register is the absolute address of the special game processing timer area.

On line 1550, a 2-byte decrement subroutine is called and executed (code "CALLT P_DECWORD"). This 2-byte decrement process subtracts 1 from the value of the address area specified by the HL register (the special game processing timer area) if it is not 0. In this way, if the special game processing timer has not timed out and is not 0, it is updated by -1. The address in ROM of the subroutine called here is registered as the nth address in the vector table, with the value of label P_DECWORD being n.

In line 1560, corresponding to A2604 of the special game processing, if the jump status flag (JF) is not set and is "0" (JF = 0: the special game processing timer has not timed out and is not 0), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TGAMEPRC10 and executes the instructions from line 1620 onwards (code "JRR F, TGAMEPRC10"). The jump destination (label TGAMEPRC10) is a nearby address that is +6 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR F, TGAMEPRC10". If the jump status flag (JF) is set and is "1" (JF = 1: the special game processing timer is 0), it proceeds to the instruction on the next line, 1570.

In line 1570, in response to A2605 of the special game processing, the start address D_TGAMEPRC of the special game sequence branch table is transferred to the HL register (code "LD HL, D_TGAMEPRC"). This code corresponds to "LD ff, mn" in the instruction table. The special game sequence branch table is an address table that registers (lists) branch destination addresses.

The code from line number 1580 to line number 1600 corresponds to A2606 and A2607 in the special game processing.

On line 1580, the value (special game processing number) stored in the special game processing number area (in RAM) at the added address "IY+R_TGAME" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_TGAME)"). The label R_TGAME is the offset address of the special game processing number area based on the IY register value "2800h".

On line 1590, a subroutine for retrieving 2-byte data is called and executed (code "CALLT P_GETWORD"). The address in ROM of the subroutine called here is registered as the nth address in the vector table, with n being the value of label P_GETWORD. This 2-byte data retrieval process obtains the branch destination address from the value of the HL register (the starting address of the special game sequence branch table) and the value of the A register (the special game processing number), and stores it in the HL register. In other words, the HL register stores the branch destination address obtained from the special game sequence branch table corresponding to the special game processing number.

On line 1600, a subroutine call is made to the subroutine at the branch destination address stored in the HL register, which is then called and executed (code "CALL HL"). This subroutine call executes one of the processes A2608 to A2613 in the special game processing.

In line 1620, in response to A2614 of the special chart game processing, the address of the special chart 1 variation control table (label D_TZ1CTL) used to control the variation of the special chart 1 display 51 is converted to the relative address "D_TZ1CTL-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_TZ1CTL-5000H").

Line number 1630 corresponds to A2615 of the special symbol game processing, and calls and executes a subroutine for symbol change control processing, which controls the changes in symbols on the special symbol display (code "CALLR P_ZGRCTL"). The subroutine for symbol change control processing has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to label P_ZGRCTL.

In line 1640, in response to A2616 of the special chart game processing, the address of the special chart 2 variation control table (label D_TZ2CTL) for controlling the variation of the special chart 2 display 52 is converted to the relative address "D_TZ2CTL-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_TZ2CTL-5000H").

On line 1650, in response to A2617 of the special game processing, the symbol change control processing subroutine (the address in ROM corresponding to the label P_ZGRCTL) is called and executed (code "CALL P_ZGR_CTL").

Line number 1660 corresponds to A2618 of the special game processing, and calls and executes a lever solenoid control processing subroutine that controls the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b (code "CALLR P_LEV_SOL"). The lever solenoid control processing subroutine has an address in ROM (starting address) that corresponds to the label P_LEV_SOL.

On line 1660, the special game processing program returns to the timer interrupt processing program (code "RET").

[Special Game Sequence Branching Table]
The lower part of Figure 125 is a program list explaining the special game sequence branch table according to the fifth embodiment. As described above, the special game sequence branch table has a starting address in ROM corresponding to the label D_TGAMEPRC and is referenced for calling the subroutine for special game processing. Branch tables used in conjunction with the in-area program (here, the special game processing program), such as the special game sequence branch table, are treated as programs and are located in the game control program area outside the data area within the in-area program area (first ROM area). Branch tables used in the regular game processing and bonus game processing are also located in the game control program area outside the data area.

The code contains the mnemonic "DW," which is a pseudo-instruction that tells the assembler that each row in the table contains two bytes of data.

The special game sequence branch table is shown as a set of pseudo-instructions for associating subroutine names (labels) with branch destination address values, but in reality, the special game sequence branch table is a list of branch destination address values (subroutine start addresses) that are set (stored) in order in ROM 111b by these instructions. In other words, the special game sequence branch table in ROM 111b is created by replacing the labels (P_TUSUL, P_TSTOP, P_TDISPLY, P_TSFAN, P_TSOPEN, P_TSZAN) with branch destination address values.

The pseudo-instruction on line 2010 corresponds to setting the branch destination address value of the A2608 subroutine (normal special symbol processing) of the special symbol game processing, and the pseudo-instruction on line 2020 corresponds to setting the branch destination address value of the A2609 subroutine (processing during special symbol fluctuation). Furthermore, the pseudo-instruction on line 2030 corresponds to setting the branch destination address value of the A2610 subroutine (processing during special symbol display), and the pseudo-instruction on line 2040 corresponds to setting the branch destination address value of the A2611 subroutine (pre-small symbol release processing). Furthermore, the pseudo-instruction on line 2050 corresponds to setting the branch destination address value of the A2612 subroutine (processing during small symbol release), and the pseudo-instruction on line 2060 corresponds to setting the branch destination address value of the A2613 subroutine (remaining small symbol ball processing).

[2-byte decrement processing program]
126 is a program listing showing the program structure of a 2-byte decrement processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the 2-byte decrement processing program is registered as the nth subroutine in the vector table (n=value of label P_DECWORD) and is called by the code "CALLT P_DECWORD" at line number 1550, for example.

On line 2110, the value stored in the address area (2-byte area) specified by the HL register is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL)").

On line 2120, if the value transferred to the WA register is "0" and the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1" (if ZF = 1), the 2-byte decrement processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET Z").

On line 2130, the value of the WA register is decremented by 1 (the code "DEC WA"). This code is executed if the value of the WA register is not "0".

On line 2140, the value of the WA register is transferred to the address area (2-byte area) specified by the HL register (code "LD (HL), WA"). As a result, the value stored in the address area specified by the HL register is updated by subtracting 1 from the value before the 2-byte decrement process. The address specified by the HL register is the starting address of the 2-byte area. Furthermore, if the value stored in this 2-byte area is "0", the zero flag (ZF) is set to "1".

On line 2150, the 2-byte decrement processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET"). The zero flag returned to the calling processing program makes it possible to determine whether the value stored in the 2-byte area whose starting address is the address specified by the HL register is "0."

[2-byte data acquisition processing program]
126 is a program listing showing the program structure of a 2-byte data acquisition processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the 2-byte data acquisition processing program is registered as the nth subroutine in the vector table (n=value of label P_GETWORD), and is called by the code "CALLT P_GETWORD" at line number 1590, for example.

On line 2210, the value in the A register is doubled and stored in the WA register (code "MUL A, 2").

On line 2220, the value of the WA register is added to the value of the HL register (code "ADD HL, WA"). As a result, if the value of the HL register is the starting address of a data table (e.g., a special game sequence branch table) when the 2-byte data acquisition process begins, the added value of the HL register functions as a pointer to the data in the data table (e.g., the address value).

On line 2230, the value stored in the address area specified by the HL register is transferred to the HL register (code "LD HL, (HL)"). As a result, one of the data (e.g., the value of the branch destination address) registered (defined) in the data table (e.g., the special game sequence branch table) is ultimately stored as 2 bytes of data in the HL register.

On line 2240, the 2-byte data acquisition processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET").

The reason why the value of the A register is doubled in line number 2210 is that when the value of the HL register is the starting address of an address table (for example, a special game sequence branch table), the address value registered (defined) in the address table (for example, the value of the branch destination address) is 2 bytes, so an even value must be added (for example, the special game processing number includes an odd value).

[1-byte data acquisition processing program]
126 is a program listing showing the program structure of a 1-byte data acquisition processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the 1-byte data acquisition processing program is registered as the nth subroutine in the vector table (n=value of label P_GETBYTE), and is called by the code "CALLT P_GETBYTE" at line numbers 6350 and 7570, which will be described later, for example.

On line 2310, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register (code "ADD HL, A"). The value of the HL register after the addition functions as a pointer to the address.

On line 2320, the value stored in the address area specified by the HL register is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (HL)"). This causes the 1 byte of data that will ultimately be used to be stored in the A register.

On line 2330, the 1-byte data acquisition processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET").

[Special drawing status check processing program]
The fourth row of Figure 126 is a program list showing the program structure of the special drawing status check processing program (subroutine) according to the fifth embodiment. The subroutine of the special drawing status check processing program is registered as the nth subroutine in the vector table (n = the value of the label P_TGMCHK) and is called by the code "CALLT P_TGMCHK" such as line numbers 2540 and 4080 described below.

On line 2410, bit 0 of the address area (R_TGMFLG area) corresponding to label R_TGMFLG is copied to the carry flag (CF) (code "LD CF, (R_TGMFLG).0"). This code causes the inverse of the value of CF to be stored in the jump status flag (JF). For example, if bit 0 of the R_TGMFLG area is "1", CF = 1, and since the value transferred is "1", JF = 0. For example, if bit 0 of the R_TGMFLG area is "0", CF = 0, and since the value transferred is "0", JF = 1.

As a result of executing the subroutine for the special chart status check process, if CF = 0 and JF = 1, it can be determined that the time is not reduced (no time reduction), and if CF = 1 and JF = 0, it can be determined that the time is reduced (time reduction). The determination itself can be made using either CF or JF.

On line 2420, the special chart status check processing program returns to the calling processing program (code "RET").

[Start switch monitoring processing program]
127 is a program listing showing a part of the program structure of the start port switch monitoring processing program corresponding to the start port switch monitoring processing (FIG. 17) according to the fifth embodiment. The start port switch monitoring processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SIDOSW, and is a subroutine called by the CALLR command (line number 1510) in step A2600 of the special game processing (FIG. 16).

In line 2510, in response to A2701 of the start port switch monitoring process, the address of the start port 1 winning monitoring table (label D_SIDCHK1) is set to the relative address "D_SIDCHK1-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_SIDCHK1-5000H"). This prepares the start port 1 winning monitoring table.

On line 2520, in response to A2702 of the start port switch monitoring process, the subroutine for hard random number acquisition processing is called and executed using the CALLR instruction (code "CALLR P_HRNDGET"). The subroutine for hard random number acquisition processing has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_HRNDGET.

In line 2530, in response to A2703 of the start port switch monitoring process, if there is no start port winning in the target start port 36 (start port 1) and the carry flag (CF) is not set (in the case of NC), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOSW20 (code "JR NC, SIDOSW20"). The code written as "JR NC, label" corresponds to "JR NC, $+2+k" in the instruction table. Note that the carry flag (CF) is set to "1" if there is a start port winning in the hardware random number acquisition process. If it does not jump, it proceeds to the instruction on the next line 2540.

Line numbers 2540 and 2550 correspond to A2704 of the start port switch monitoring process. Line number 2540 calls and executes the special symbol state check process subroutine to determine whether the game state is for right-hitting (code "CALLT P_TGMCHK"). In this embodiment, the game state for right-hitting is the time-saving state (specific game state A-C). However, if specific game state C (c time-saving) is set as the medium support as shown in Figure 82, specific game state C may be excluded from the game state for right-hitting. If the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1) by executing the special symbol state check process subroutine, the game state is the time-saving state, i.e., the game state for right-hitting.

In line 2550, if the game is in a right-hit mode, i.e., if the special time-saving feature is active, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOSW10, and the commands from line 2590 onwards are executed (code "JR C, SIDOSW10"). If no jump is made, the program moves on to the command in the next line, 2560.

Line number 2560 corresponds to A2705 of the start port switch monitoring process, and transfers the right-hit instruction notification command to the BC register (code "LD BC, C_RIGHTCOM"). The right-hit instruction notification command is represented by a number corresponding to the label C_RIGHTCOM.

Line number 2570 corresponds to A2706 of the start port switch monitoring process, and calls and executes the subroutine for the effect command setting process (code "CALLT P_COMSET"). The subroutine for the effect command setting process is registered as the nth subroutine in the vector table (n = value of label P_COMSET).

Line number 2590 corresponds to A2707 of the start port switch monitoring process, and converts the address (label D_T1HOINF) of the table that sets the hold information for start winning port 36 (start port 1) to the relative address "D_T1HOINF-5000h" and transfers it to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_T1HOINF-5000H").

Line number 2600 corresponds to A2708 of the start port switch monitoring process, and calls and executes the subroutine for the special chart start port switch common processing (code "CALLR P_TSIDOSW"). The subroutine for the special chart start port switch common processing has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_TSIDOSW.

[Hardware random number acquisition processing program]
128 is a program listing showing the program structure of a hard random number acquisition processing program corresponding to the hard random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710) according to the fifth embodiment. The hard random number acquisition processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_HRNDGET, and is a subroutine called by the CALLR command (line number 2520) in step A2702 of the start port switch monitoring processing, for example.

On line number 3010, the carry flag (CF) is cleared to zero (code "CLR CF") as information indicating no winning at the starting port, indicating that there was no winning at the starting port.

Lines 3020 to 3040 determine whether an input has been made to the target switch. In line 3020, the value currently stored in the address area specified in the HL register (for example, in the ROM data area) is transferred to the A register, and the address in the HL register is then updated to the next address (code "LD A, (HL+)"). The code "LD A, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+)" in the instruction table.

The address currently stored (memorized) in the HL register is set at line number 2510 of the start port switch monitoring process program. The value stored in this address area is the switch bit data (a non-zero determination value) of the target switch, for example, "00000001B." Note that the target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

In line 3030, rising edge information is obtained from the area (in RAM) at the addition address "IY+R_SWCTL3+2" where rising edge information is stored in the switch control area that stores information about the target switch. This information is ANDed with the switch bit data (determination value) in the A register to determine whether the switch is on (code "AND A, (IY+R_SWCTL3+2)"). The addition address "IY+R_SWCTL3+2" is the sum of the IY register value "2800h" and the offset value corresponding to R_SWCTL3+2. The switch control area is a storage area that stores the detection status of various switches installed in the gaming machine for each timer interrupt, and in this embodiment is provided in RAM 111c. The rising edge information is information indicating that the target switch has changed from off to on.

R_SWCTL3 is the starting address of the switch control area (a relative address from the starting address "2800h" of RAM 111c), with logic level information stored in the first address from the starting address, R_SWCTL3+1, and rising edge information stored in the second address from the starting address, R_SWCTL3+2. When the target switch changes from off to on, the target bit of the 8-bit data at address R_SWCTL3+2 changes from 0 to 1.

If there is no winning (ball entry) in the target start port (start port 1 or start port 2) and the target switch is off, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the target switch is zero, the calculation result (logical product) is zero, and the zero flag is set (ZF = 1). If the rising information is the same as the switch bit data (determination value) (for example, "00000001B" and the bit of the target switch is on), the calculation result (logical product) will be other than zero (for example, "00000001B") and the zero flag (ZF) will not be set (ZF = 0).

On line 3040, if the calculation result is zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine ends and the program returns from the hardware random number acquisition processing program to the start port switch monitoring processing program (code "RET Z"). In other words, if there is no winning entry in the target start port (start port 1 or start port 2) and the target switch is off, the program returns to the start port switch monitoring processing program.

On line 3050, the random number latch register status is input to the A register from port C_HRDCNT (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_HRDCNT) (code "IN A, (C_HRDCNT)").

Lines 3060 and 3070 determine whether the target random number latch register contains latched data. Line 3060 performs a logical AND operation on the judgment value (judgment data) currently stored in the HL register's address area (e.g., in the ROM data area) and the value in the A register (code "AND A, (HL+)"). The address in the HL register is then updated to the next address ("HL+"). The judgment value is non-zero, e.g., "00000010B." The result of the operation (logical AND) in line 3060 is zero if the random number latch register status (the value in the A register) does not match the judgment value, and the zero flag (ZF) is set. If the random number latch register status matches the judgment value, the result is non-zero (e.g., "00000010B") and the zero flag (ZF) is not set. Furthermore, if there is no latched data in the target random number latch register, the bit of the random number latch register status corresponding to the target random number latch register is 0, the random number latch register status does not match the judgment value, and the operation result (logical product) is zero.

In line 3070, if the calculation result in line 2060 is zero (Z) (i.e., there is no latched data in the target random number latch register), the subroutine ends and the program returns from the hardware random number acquisition processing program (code "RET Z").

On line 3080, in order to prepare the address of the target hard random number latch register, the value (address of the target hard random number latch register) currently stored in the address area stored in the HL register (for example, in the ROM data area) is transferred to the E register (code "LD E, (HL)").

On line 3090, the value stored in the 2-byte area from the address stored in the E register (the address of the target hard random number latch register) (the 2-byte jackpot random number, 16-bit fixed-length random number #0) is input into the WA register (code "INW WA, (E)").

On line 3100, the value of the WA register (a 2-byte jackpot random number) is transferred to the IX register (code "LD IX, WA").

On line number 3110, the carry flag (CF) is set as starting gate winning information indicating that a starting gate winning has occurred (code "SET CF").

Line number 3120 ends the subroutine and returns from the hardware random number acquisition processing program (code "RET").

[Special diagram start switch common processing program]
129 is a program list showing the program structure of a special start port switch common processing program corresponding to the special start port switch common processing (FIG. 18) according to the fifth embodiment. The special start port switch common processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TSIDOSW, and is a subroutine called by the CALLR instruction in, for example, step A2708 (line number 2600) or A2715 of the start port switch monitoring processing.

In line 3510, in response to A2901 of the special chart start port switch common processing, the start port signal output count stored in the start port signal output count field at the addition address "IY+R_SIDOSIG" is transferred to the A register (code LD A, (IY+R_SIDOSIG))).

On line 3520, in response to A2902 of the special chart start port switch common processing, the value of register A (number of start port signal outputs) is incremented by 1 (code "INC A") to update by +1.

In line 3530, corresponding to A2903 of the special chart start port switch common processing, if the number of start port signal outputs in the A register has overflowed and returned to zero (ZF = 1), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TSIDOSW10, and the instructions from line 3560 onwards are executed (code "JR Z, TSIDOSW10"). Note that the code written as "JR Z, label" corresponds to "JR Z, $+2+k" in the instruction table. If a jump is not made, the program moves on to the instruction on the next line, line 3540.

In line 3540, in response to A2903 of the special chart start port switch common processing, if the start port signal output count in the A register has not overflowed, the updated value of the A register (start port signal output count) is transferred to the start port signal output count field at the addition address "IY+R_SIDOSIG" (code "LD (IY+R_SIDOSIG), A").

Lines 3560 to 3590 correspond to A2905 in the special start port switch common processing. In line 3560, the value stored in the reservation information table (the address area specified in the current HL register) is transferred to the W register as the offset address of the reservation number area (code "LD W, (HL+)"). Note that the code "LD W, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+)" in the instruction table. The address in the current HL register is then updated by +1 to the next address. For example, if the target start port is start port 1, the address in the current HL register (e.g., in the ROM data area) is the value loaded (transferred) in line 2590. The pending information table (A2707, A2714) is a table (for example, in the data area of the ROM) that contains information regarding pending (start memory) due to winning at the starting winning slot 36 (starting slot 1) or the second starting winning slot (normal variable winning device 37, starting slot 2).

In line 3570, the value (reserved number) stored in the area at the addition address "IY+W" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+W)"). The addition address "IY+W" is the sum of the value stored in the W register (offset address of the reserved number area) and the value stored in the IY register (RAM start address "2800h"). The addition address "IY+W" becomes the absolute address of the reserved number area. In other words, in line 3570, the current reserved number in the reserved number area is stored in the A register, but the current reserved number (starting memory number) is the reserved number before it was updated by +1 due to this winning in line 3600 (A2906).

On line 3580, the reserved number in the A register is compared with the upper limit (here, 4). If it is less than the upper limit, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1); if it is greater than or equal to the upper limit, the carry flag (CF) is not set (CF = 0) (code "CP A, 4").

In line 3590, if the number of reserved items reaches the upper limit and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the special chart start port switch common processing program returns to the start port switch monitoring processing program (code "RET NC").

Line number 3600 corresponds to A2906 of the special chart start port switch common processing. In line number 3600, the reserved number, which is the value in the reserved number area corresponding to RAM address "IY+W," is updated by +1 to determine the target special chart reserved number (special chart 1 reserved number or special chart 2 reserved number) (code "INC (IY+W)"). RAM address IY+W is the address obtained by adding the value stored in the IY register and the value stored in the W register.

Lines 3610 to 3640 correspond to A2907, the common processing for the special chart start port switch. In line 3610, the reserved number stored in register A (the reserved number before updating by +1) is transferred to register C (code "LD C, A").

On line 3620, the value (starting gate winning flag) stored in the current HL register address area is transferred to the B register (code "LD B, (HL+)"). Note that the code "LD B, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+)" in the command table. In other words, the starting gate winning flag (value indicating special chart 1 or special chart 2) is obtained from the pending information table. Then, the value in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address.

On line number 3630, the value stored in register B (starting gate winning flag) is transferred to the area (within RAM) of the addition address "IY+R_SIDOFLG" (code "LD (IY+R_SIDOFLG), B"). The addition address "IY+R_SIDOFLG" is the value stored in register IY (RAM starting address "2800h") plus the value corresponding to label R_SIDOFLG. Note that the addition address "IY+label" indicates an address within RAM.

On line 3640, the value of the BC register is saved to the stack area in RAM (code "PUSH BC").

Lines 3650 to 3690 correspond to A2908, the special chart start port switch common processing. Line 3650 transfers the value stored in the address currently stored in the HL register (the number of bytes for one hold (8)) to the W register (code "LD W, (HL+)"). In other words, the number of bytes for one hold (8) is obtained from the hold information table. The address in the HL register is then updated by +1 to the next address.

In addition, the random number storage area for each reserve in the special chart 1 reserve memory area or special chart 2 reserve memory area stores a 2-byte jackpot random number, a 1-byte jackpot pattern random number, a 1-byte support pattern random number, a 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1, a 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 2, and a 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 3, and the number of bytes (reserved bytes) allocated to each special chart reserve (each start memory) is 8 bytes.

On line 3660, the number of reserved bytes (8) stored in the W register is multiplied by the reserved number stored in the A register (the reserved number before the +1 update, which is 0 to 3), and the result (reserved number x reserved number of bytes (8)) is stored in the WA register (code "MUL W, A"). Since the result is 0 to 24, the result is effectively stored in the lower byte of the A register.

On line 3670, the value stored in the address currently stored in the HL register (the address of the random number storage area) is transferred to the L register (code "LD L, (HL)"). In other words, the address (starting address) of the random number storage area is obtained from the reserved information table. For example, the starting address of the random number storage area (reserved memory area) is 2830h in the special chart 1 reserved memory area and 2850h in the special chart 2 reserved memory area.

On line 3680, the value stored in the A register (reserved number x reserved bytes) is added to the starting address of the random number storage area stored in the L register (code: "ADD L, A"). As a result of the addition, the value of the L register becomes the address of the area corresponding to the reserved number (reserved number before updating by +1), i.e., the starting address of the random number storage area for the reserved number created by this win. For example, if the reserved number created by this win is reserve 3, the address of the area corresponding to the reserved number for the special chart 1 reserve memory area is the offset address (lower byte) from the starting address "2800h" of RAM 111c, which is 30h + 2 x 8 = 40h. For the special chart 2 reserve memory area, the offset address (lower byte) from "2800h" is 50h + 2 x 8 = 60h.

On line 3690, the number "28h" is transferred to the H register as the upper address of the area corresponding to the reserved number (code "LD H, 28H").

In line 3700, in response to A2909 of the special chart start switch common processing, the 2-byte jackpot random number stored in the IX register is transferred to the address area (in RAM) specified by the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +2 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), IX"). Note that the code "LD (HL+), IX" corresponds to "LD (jj+), ss" in the instruction table.

Lines 3710 and 3720 correspond to A2910 in the special symbol start port switch common processing. Line 3710 inputs a 1-byte jackpot symbol random number (8-bit variable-length random number #0) from port C_RNSV0 (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RNSV0) into register A (code "IN A, (C_RNSV0)").

On line 3720, the jackpot symbol random number in the A register is transferred to the address area (in RAM) specified by the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), A"). Note that the code "LD (HL+), A" corresponds to "LD (jj+), r" in the instruction table.

Lines 3730 and 3740 correspond to A2912 of the special symbol start port switch common processing. In line 3730, a 1-byte symbol random number per support (8-bit variable-length random number #1) is input into register A from port C_RDSV1 (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RDSV1) (code "IN A, (C_RDSV1)").

On line 3740, the random number for the support symbol in the A register is transferred to the address area (in RAM) specified by the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +1 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), A").

Lines 3750 to 3780 correspond to A2913, the special start port switch common processing. In line 3750, a 2-byte variable pattern random number 1 (16-bit fixed-length random number #1) is input to the WA register from port C_RDLF1 (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RDLF1) (code "INW WA, (C_RDLF1)").

On line 3760, the variable pattern random number 1 in the WA register is transferred to the address area (in RAM) specified by the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated by +2 to the next address (code "LD (HL+), WA"). Note that the code "LD (HL+), WA" corresponds to "LD (jj+), ss" in the instruction table.

On line 3770, 1-byte variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 (8-bit variable-length random numbers #2 and #3) are input to the WA register from port C_RDSV2 (i.e., the port with the numerical number corresponding to label C_RDSV2) (code "INW WA, (C_RDSV2)").

On line 3780, the variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3 in the WA register are transferred to the address area (in RAM) specified by the HL register (code "LD (HL), WA"). Note that the code "LD (HL), WA" corresponds to "LD (jj), ss" in the instruction table.

On line 3790, in response to A2914 of the special chart start port switch common processing, a subroutine for special chart reservation information determination processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_THOINF"). The subroutine for special chart reservation information determination processing has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_THOINF.

Lines 3800 to 3820 correspond to A2915, the common processing for the special chart start port switch. Line 3800 restores the value of the BC register from the RAM stack area (code "POP BC"). The value of the B register is the start port winning flag (a value indicating special chart 1 or special chart 2), and the value of the C register is the reserved number (the reserved number before updating by +1).

On line 3810, the value of register B is added to the value corresponding to label C_THOMD (the value indicating special chart hold mode) (code "ADD B, C_THOMD").

On line 3820, 2 is added to the value of the C register (code "ADD C, 2").

On line 3830, in response to A2916 of the special chart start port switch common processing, the effect command setting processing subroutine (P_COMSET) is called and executed (code "CALLT P_COMSET"). The effect command setting processing subroutine is registered as the nth subroutine in the vector table (n = value of label P_COMSET). The effect command setting processing is executed based on the values of registers B and C.

On line 2840, the subroutine ends and returns from the special chart start port switch common processing program (code "RET").

[Special drawing reservation information determination processing program]
130 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special drawing reservation information determination processing program corresponding to the special drawing reservation information determination processing according to the fifth embodiment. The special drawing reservation information determination processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_THOINF, and is a subroutine called by a CALL command in, for example, A2914 (line number 3790) of the special drawing start port switch common processing.

On line 4010, the address (label R_T2HORYU) corresponding to the reserved number storage area for Special Chart 2 reserved numbers is transferred to the DE register (code "LDY DE, R_T2HORYU"). R_T2HORYU is an offset address based on the value "2800h" of the IY register, so it is sufficient to specify only the lower address of the reserved number storage area as R_T2HORYU.

In line number 4020, the value "R_T2RNDMEM-8" obtained by subtracting 8 (the number of reserved bytes for Special Chart 2 Reserve) from the starting address (label R_T2RNDMEM) of the random number storage area for Special Chart 2 Reserve (Special Chart 2 Reserve Memory Area) is transferred to the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area for Special Chart 2 Reserve (code "LDY HL, R_T2RNDMEM-8").

On line 4030, the number of reserved bytes for Special Chart 2, "8", is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, 8").

On line 4040, the starting gate winning flag stored in the area (in RAM) at the added address "IY+R_SIDOFLG" is compared with the value indicating special chart 1 (label C_SIDO1) (code "CPJ (IY+R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1"). Note that the code "CPJ (IY+R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1" corresponds to "CPJ (jj+d), n" in the command table. If the starting gate winning flag indicates special chart 1 and the comparison results are a match, the zero flag is set (ZF = 1); if the starting gate winning flag indicates special chart 2 and the comparison results are not a match, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF = 0).

On line 4050, if the starting gate winning flag indicates special number 2 and the zero flag is not set (NZ), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label THOINF10, and the instructions from line 4150 onwards are executed (code "JR NZ, THOINF10"). In other words, a branch is made if starting gate 1 is not won. If no jump is made, the program moves on to the instructions on the next line, 4060.

On line 4060, the address of the reserved number storage area for Special Chart 1 reserved number (label R_T1HORYU) is transferred to the DE register (code "LDY DE, R_T1HORYU").

On line 4070, the value "R_T1RNDMEM-8" obtained by subtracting 8 (the number of reserved bytes for Special Chart 1) from the starting address (label R_T1RNDMEM) of the random number storage area (Special Chart 1 reserved memory area) for Special Chart 1 reserved is transferred to the HL register as a value (reference value) related to the address of the random number storage area for Special Chart 1 reserved (code "LDY HL, R_T1RNDMEM-8").

In line 4080, just like line 2540, the subroutine for special symbol state check processing is called and executed to determine whether the game state is for right-hand play (code "CALLT P_TGMCHK"). In this embodiment, the game state for right-hand play is considered to be a time-saving state (specific game state A-C). If the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1) by executing the subroutine for special symbol state check processing, the game state is a time-saving state, i.e., a game state for right-hand play.

In line 4090, if the game state is right-hitting (if CF = 1), the subroutine ends and the program returns from the special chart pending information determination processing program (code "RET C"). As a result, in right-hitting game states, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is not pre-determined. Note that the code in line 4050 branches when the starting gate winning flag indicates special chart 2, and the commands from line 4060 to line 4130 are not executed, so the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is pre-determined even in right-hitting game states.

In line number 4100, the special game processing number stored in the special game processing number area (area at added address "IY+R_TGAME") (in RAM) is compared with the value of label C_TSFAN, which indicates that a small win is occurring (code "CP (IY+R_TGAME), C_TSFAN"). Here, the offset address corresponding to label R_TGAME indicates the special game processing number area, based on the IY register value "2800h". The value of label C_TSFAN is the special game processing number "3" for the pre-processing of the small win release. Note that the code "CP (IY+R_TGAME), C_TSFAN" corresponds to "CP (jj+d), n" in the command table. If there is a small win and the special game processing number is 3 or greater, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0); if there is no small win and the number is less than 3, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1).

In line 4110, if a small win is occurring and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0), the program returns from the special chart pending information determination processing program (code "RET NC"). As a result, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is not determined in advance during a small win.

Line number 4120 compares the bonus game processing number stored in the bonus game processing number area (addition address "IY+R_YGAME") area (in RAM) with the value of label C_YFAN, which indicates a jackpot (code "CP (IY+R_YGAME), C_YFAN"). Here, the offset address corresponding to label R_YGAME indicates the bonus game processing number area, based on the IY register value "2800h." The value of label C_YFAN is the special game processing number "1" for fanfare processing. If a jackpot is occurring and the bonus game processing number is 1 or greater, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0); if it is not occurring and the number is less than 1, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1).

In line 4130, if a jackpot is occurring and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0), the program returns from the special chart pending information determination processing program (code "RET NC"). As a result, the results of the special chart 1 variable display game are not determined in advance during a jackpot.

On line 4150, the reserved number (special figure 1 reserved number or special figure 2 reserved number) stored in the reserved number memory area corresponding to the address in the DE register is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (DE)"). Note that the code "LD A, (DE)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj)" in the instruction table.

On line 4160, the number of reserved bytes (8) stored in the W register is multiplied by the reserved number (Special Chart 1 reserved number or Special Chart 2 reserved number) (here, 1 to 4) stored in the A register, and the result (reserved number x reserved bytes) is stored in the WA register (code "MUL W, A"). Since the result is 8 to 32, the result is effectively stored in the lower byte of the A register.

On line 4170, the most recently reserved jackpot random number, which is the value of the area (2 bytes) corresponding to the addition address "HL+A," is transferred (loaded) into the IX register (code "LD IX, (HL+A)"). Note that the code "LD IX, (HL+A)" corresponds to "LD ss, (jj+p)" in the instruction table. The value of this addition address is the sum of the value of the HL register and the value of the A register (reserved number x reserved bytes). The value of the HL register is the value obtained by subtracting the reserved bytes from the starting address of the random number storage area, and is a value related to the random number storage area. The value of the A register is reserved number x reserved bytes, and is a value based on the product of the reserved number (number of starting memories) and the number of bytes allocated per reserve.

It is also possible to configure the value of the HL register as the starting address of the random number storage area, and the value of the A register as (reserved number - 1) x reserved byte count.

Here, the addition address "HL+A" becomes the starting address of the most recently generated latest reserved random number storage area. The area corresponding to the addition address "HL+A" stores the most recently reserved jackpot random number, which is then retrieved (read) into the IX register.

Line number 4180 calls and executes the jackpot determination process subroutine (code "CALLR P_BHITJUD"). The jackpot determination process subroutine has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_BHITJUD. The jackpot determination process determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the most recent reserved jackpot random number.

In line 4190, if the result of the jackpot determination process is not a jackpot (if the carry flag is not set (NC)), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label THOINF30 (code "JR NC, THOINF30") to perform the processing from line 4300 onwards. If no jump is made, the program proceeds to the next instruction in line 4200.

In line 4200, the address D_ZCHKTBL1 (starting address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table for Special Chart 1 is transferred to the DE register (code "LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL1").

Line number 4210 is the same code as line number 4040, and compares the starting gate winning flag stored in the area (in RAM) of the added address "IY+R_SIDOFLG" with the value indicating special chart 1 (label C_SIDO1) (code "CPJ (IY+R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1").

In line 4220, if the starting gate winning flag indicates special number 1 and the jump status flag (JF) is set (if JF = 1, if T), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label THOINF20 and executes the instructions from line 4250 onwards (code "JRR T, THOINF20"). In other words, if starting gate 1 is won, it branches. The jump destination (label THOINF20) is a nearby address that is +4 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of code "JRR T, THOINF20". If the starting gate winning flag does not indicate special number 1, it moves on to the instructions on the next line, 4230.

In line 4230, the address D_ZCHKTBL2 (starting address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table for Special Chart 2 is transferred to the DE register and overwritten (code "LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL2").

On line 4250, 2 is added to the value in the A register (code "ADD A, 2"). The value stored in the A register is (reserved number x reserved bytes) plus "2".

In line 4260, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the addition address "HL+A" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (HL+A)"). The code "LD A, (HL+A)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+p)" in the instruction table. The current value of the addition address is the sum of the value of the HL register (the starting address of the random number storage area minus the number of reserved bytes) and the value of the A register (number of reserved bytes x number of reserved bytes + 2). The value of the HL register is a value related to the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is a value based on the product of the number of reserved bytes and the number of bytes allocated to each reserved number. Here, the value of the addition address is the starting address of the most recently generated random number storage area for the latest reserved number plus "2." The area corresponding to this addition address stores the most recently generated jackpot symbol random number, and the most recently generated jackpot symbol random number is retrieved into the A register.

In line number 4270, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the added address "DE+A" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (DE+A)"). Note that the code "LD A, (DE+A)" corresponds to "LD r, (jj+p)" in the instruction table. The value of the added address is the sum of the value stored in the DE register (the top address of the jackpot random number check table) and the value in the A register (the value of the jackpot random number). The area corresponding to this added address value stores the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot random number, so the most recently reserved stop symbol information is retrieved into the A register. In this way, stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot random number is retrieved.

On line 4280, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label THOINF100 (code "JR THOINF100").

[Jackpot determination processing program]
131 is a program list showing the program structure of the jackpot determination processing program corresponding to the jackpot determination processing (FIG. 25A) according to the fifth embodiment. The jackpot determination processing program has a leading address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_BHITJUD, and is a subroutine called by a call instruction such as a CALL instruction in, for example, the special chart reservation information determination processing (line number 4180), the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, etc.

On line 4510, the value of the HL register is saved to the stack area in RAM (code "PUSH HL").

Lines 4520 to 4540 correspond to A3800 in the jackpot determination process. In line 4520, the address of the data table to be used (label D_BHITJUD) is converted to the relative address "D_BHITJUD-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_BHITJUD-5000H"). This data table also contains data for each probability setting value (equivalent to the upper limit determination value in Figure 25A plus 1).

On line 4530, the probability setting value stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_SETNUM" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_SETNUM)").

On line 4540, the 2-byte data acquisition subroutine is called and executed (code "CALLT P_GETWORD"). This 2-byte data acquisition process obtains data from the data table using the value in the HL register (the address of the data table) and the value in the A register (the probability setting value), and stores it in the HL register. Note that the data (value) obtained from the data table is the upper limit judgment value plus 1 (= upper limit judgment value + 1), which is stored in the HL register.

Line numbers 4550 and 4560 correspond to A3801 and A3802 in the jackpot determination process. Line number 4550 compares the jackpot random number in the IX register with the lower limit determination value (label C_BHIT_MIN) (code "CP IX, C_BHIT_MIN"). Note that the register in which the jackpot random number is stored can be a pair of registers instead of the IX register, as long as it has a width (capacity) of 16 bits. The code "CP IX, C_BHIT_MIN" corresponds to "CP rr, mn" (first comparison instruction) in the instruction table, and can properly determine the magnitude relationship between the jackpot random number and the lower limit determination value. If the jackpot random number in the IX register is less than the lower limit judgment value C_BHIT_MIN, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF = 1, JF = 1 (T)); if the jackpot random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value C_BHIT_MIN, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF = 0, JF = 0 (F)).

In line 4560, if the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (in the case of T), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label BHITJUD10, and the instructions from line 4600 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, BHITJUD10"). The jump destination (label BHITJUD10) is a nearby address that is +4 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR T, BHITJUD10". If the jackpot random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, the program moves on to the instruction on the next line, 4570.

Lines 4570 and 4580 correspond to A3803 in the jackpot determination process. Line 4570 compares the jackpot random number in the IX register with the value currently stored in the HL register (= upper limit determination value + 1) (code "CP IX,HL"). The code "CP IX,HL" corresponds to "CP rr,gg" (first comparison command) in the instruction table, and can properly determine the magnitude relationship between the jackpot random number and the upper limit determination value. If the jackpot random number in the IX register is less than the upper limit determination value + 1, i.e., if the jackpot random number is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF = 1, JF = 1 (T)). Here, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1) as jackpot information indicating a jackpot.

In line 4580, if the jackpot random number is less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (in the case of T), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label BHITJUD20, and the instructions from line 4620 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, BHITJUD20"). The jump destination (label BHITJUD20) is a nearby address that is +3 bytes (+16 bytes or less) away from the address of this code "JRR T, BHITJUD20". If the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value, the program moves on to the next instruction in line 4600.

On line 4600, the carry flag (CF) is cleared to zero (CF = 0) (code "CLR CF") to indicate a miss.

On line 4620, the value of the HL register is restored from the stack area in RAM (code "POP HL").

Line number 4630 returns from the jackpot determination processing program (code "RET").

The jackpot determination processing program described above is a subroutine that contains only the JRR instruction (second branch instruction) as a branch instruction. On the other hand, subroutines such as the special symbol pending information determination processing program, the special symbol normal processing program (described below), and the special symbol display processing program (described below) are subroutines that contain a mixture of the JR instruction (first branch instruction) and the JRR instruction (second branch instruction) as branch instructions. Furthermore, the jackpot determination processing program (second subroutine), which is 20 bytes in size, has a smaller program size than the first subroutines such as the special symbol pending information determination processing program (52 bytes or more in size), the special symbol normal processing program (59 bytes in size), and the special symbol display processing program (89 bytes or more in size). Furthermore, because the 1-byte JRR instruction has a shorter word length than the 2-byte JR instruction, the program size of the jackpot determination processing program can be rationally reduced. This allows for rational program design and improved program development efficiency.

The jackpot determination processing program (second subroutine) is commonly called by multiple processing programs, such as the special chart reserve information determination processing program, the jackpot flag 1 setting processing program, and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing program. This reduces the overall capacity (size) of the program.

[Special chart normal processing program]
132 is a program list showing the program structure of a special game game normal processing program corresponding to the special game game normal processing (FIG. 20) according to the fifth embodiment. The special game game normal processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TUSUL, and is a subroutine called by a CALL command at line number 1600 of the special game game processing program.

Lines 5010 to 5040 correspond to A3200 of the special game normal processing. In line 5010, the bonus game processing number stored in the area of the added address "IY+R_YGAME" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_YGAME)").

In line 5020, if the bonus game processing number is not "0", i.e., if bonus game normal processing is not in progress (NZ), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TUSUL30 and the instructions from line 5310 onwards are executed (code "JR NZ, TUSUL30"). If no jump is made, the program moves on to the instructions in the next line, 5030.

On line 5030, the value of the remaining ball counter stored in the area of the addition address "IY+R_ZANZON" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_ZANZON)").

In line 5040, if the value of the remaining ball counter is not "0", a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TUSUL30 and the instructions from line 5310 onwards are executed (code "JR NZ, TUSUL30"). If no jump is made, the program moves on to the next instruction in line 5050.

Lines 5050 and 5060 correspond to A3201 of the normal special chart processing. In line 5050, the number of reserved special charts 2 stored in the area of the added address "IY+R_T2HORYU" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_T2HORYU)").

On line 5060, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "0" (if T, JF = 1), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TUSUL10 and executes the instructions from line 5150 onwards (code "JRR T, TUSUL10"). The jump destination (label TUSUL10) is a nearby address that is +13 bytes (or less than +16 bytes) away from the address of this code "JRR T, TUSUL10". If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" (if JF = 0), it moves on to the instruction on the next line, 5070.

On line 5070, in response to A3202 of the special chart normal processing, the subroutine for special chart 2 variation start processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T2START"). The subroutine for special chart 2 variation start processing has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_T2START.

Lines 5080 to 5100 correspond to A3203, the normal special chart processing. In line 5080, the value corresponding to label C_THOMD2 (the value indicating the special chart hold mode) is transferred to register B (code "LD B, C_THOMD2").

On line 5090, the number of reserved special figures 2 stored in the area of the added address "IY+R_T2HORYU" is transferred to the C register (code "LD C, (IY+R_T2HORYU)").

On line 5100, the value of the C register is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (code "INC C").

On line 5110, in response to A3204 of the special chart normal processing, the effect command setting processing subroutine (P_COMSET) is called and executed (code "CALLT P_COMSET"). The effect command setting processing is executed based on the values of registers B and C.

In line number 5120, in response to A3205 of the normal special chart processing, the subroutine for setting the transition to processing during special chart fluctuations for special chart 2 is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T2HEN_SET"). The subroutine for setting the transition to processing during special chart fluctuations for special chart 2 has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_T2HEN_SET.

On line number 5130, the special chart normal processing program returns (code "RET").

Lines 5150 and 5160 correspond to A3206 in the normal special chart processing. In line 5150, the number of reserved special charts 1 stored in the area of the added address "IY+R_T1HORYU" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_T1HORYU)").

In line 5160, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "0" (for T, when JF = 1), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TUSUL20 and executes the instructions from line 5250 onwards (code "JRR T, TUSUL20"). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not "0", it moves on to the next line, 5170.

On line 5170, in response to A3207 of the special chart normal processing, the subroutine for special chart 1 variation start processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T1START"). The subroutine for special chart 1 variation start processing has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_T1START.

Lines 5180 to 5200 correspond to A3208 of the special chart normal processing. In line 5180, the value corresponding to label C_THOMD1 (the value indicating the special chart hold mode) is transferred to register B (code "LD B, C_THOMD1").

On line 5190, the number of reserved special figures 1 stored in the area of the added address "IY+R_T1HORYU" is transferred to the C register (code "LD C, (IY+R_T1HORYU)").

On line 5200, the value of the C register is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (code "INC C").

On line 5210, in response to A3209 of the special chart normal processing, the effect command setting processing subroutine (P_COMSET) is called and executed (code "CALLT P_COMSET").

In line number 5220, in response to A3210 of the normal special chart processing, the subroutine for setting the transition to special chart fluctuation processing for special chart 1 is called and executed (code "CALLR P_T1HEN_SET").

On line number 5230, the special chart normal processing program returns (code "RET").

Lines 5250 and 5260 correspond to A3211 in the special chart normal processing. In line 5250, the customer waiting demo in progress flag stored in the customer waiting demo in progress flag area (in RAM) at the added address "IY+R_DEMO" is compared with the value of the customer waiting demo that has already started (label C_DEMO) (code "CPJ (IY+R_DEMO), C_DEMO"). The customer waiting demo in progress flag indicates the value of the customer waiting demo that has already started. If the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1); if the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

In line 5260, if the customer waiting demo in progress flag indicates that the customer waiting demo has started and the jump status flag (JF) is set (if JF = 1, if T), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TUSUL30 and executes the instructions from line 5310 onwards (code "JRR T, TUSUL30"). If the customer waiting demo in progress flag does not indicate that the customer waiting demo has started, it proceeds to the next instruction in line 5270.

On line 5270, in response to A3212 of the special chart normal processing, the value corresponding to the label C_DEMO (the value indicating that the customer waiting demo has started) is transferred and set to the customer waiting demo in progress flag area at the added address "IY+R_DEMO" (code "LD (IY+R_DEMO), C_DEMO").

On line 5280, in response to A3213 of the special chart normal processing, the value corresponding to the customer waiting demo command (label C_DEMOCOM) is transferred to the BC register (code "LD BC, C_DEMOCOM").

On line 5290, in response to A3214 of the special chart normal processing, the effect command setting processing subroutine (P_COMSET) is called and executed (code "CALLT P_COMSET").

In line number 5310, corresponding to A3215 and A3216 of the special chart normal processing, the value of the label C_TUSUL is transferred as the special chart game processing number "0" to the special chart game processing number area (in RAM) at the added address "IY+R_TGAME" (code "LD (IY+R_TGAME), C_TUSUL").

On line number 5320, in response to A3217 of the special chart normal processing, "0" is transferred to the variable pattern discrimination flag area at the addition address "IY+R_TZINF" to clear it (code "LD (IY+R_TZINF), 0").

In line number 5330, in response to A3218 of the special chart normal processing, a value indicating the fraud monitoring period flag (label C_CNTNG) is transferred to the large prize slot fraud monitoring period flag area of the addition address "IY+R_DAIERR" (code "LD (IY+R_DAIERR), C_CNTNG").

On line number 5340, the special chart normal processing program returns (code "RET").

[Special drawing display processing program]
133A and 133B are program lists showing a part of the program structure of the special chart display processing program corresponding to the special chart display processing (FIGS. 36A and 36B) according to the fifth embodiment. The special chart display processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_TDISPLY, and is a subroutine called by a CALL command in line number 1600 of the special chart game processing program.

On line 6010, the value of the A register is cleared and set to 0 by performing an exclusive OR on the values of the A register (code "XOR A, A").

Lines 6020 and 6030 correspond to A5101 of the special symbol display processing. In line 6020, the variable symbol information (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) stored in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (in RAM) at the added address "IY+R_TZINF" is compared with the value indicating the variation of special symbol 1 (label C_TZ1HEN) (code "CPJ (IY+R_TZINF), C_TZ1HEN"). If the variable symbol discrimination flag area indicates special symbol 1 and the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1); if the comparison results in a mismatch, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

In line 6030, if the variable symbol discrimination flag area indicates special symbol 2 and the jump status flag (JF) is not set (if JF = 0, if F), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY10 and executes the commands from line 6090 onwards (code "JRR F, TDISPLY10"). If the variable symbol discrimination flag area indicates special symbol 1, it proceeds to the command in the next line 6040.

In line 6040, corresponding to A5102 and A5103 in the special chart display processing, the value stored in the jackpot flag 1 area at the addition address "IY+BHITFLG1" is exchanged with the value in the A register using the exchange command XCH, and loaded into the A register (code "XCH A, (IY+BHITFLG1)"). Before the exchange, the value in the A register was cleared to 0, so after the exchange, the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared to 0.

Lines 6050 to 6070 correspond to A5104 of the special chart display process. Line 6050 compares the value of jackpot flag 1 in register A with a numeric value indicating a jackpot (label C_BHIT (e.g., 1)) (code "CPJ A, C_BHIT"). Note that the code "CPJ A, C_BHIT" corresponds to "CPJ p, n" (second comparison command) in the instruction table, and can appropriately determine whether the value of jackpot flag 1 matches the numeric value indicating a jackpot. If jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot and the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1); if the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

In line 6060, if jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot and the jump status flag is set (T, JF = 1), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY20 and executes the instructions from line 6130 onwards (code "JRR T, TDISPLY20"). If jackpot flag 1 does not indicate a jackpot, it moves on to the instructions in the next line 6070.

On line 6070, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY40, and the instructions from line 6180 onwards are executed (code "JR TDISPLY40").

In line 6090, corresponding to A5107 and A5108 in the special chart display processing, the value stored in the jackpot flag 2 area at the addition address "IY+BHITFLG2" is exchanged with the value in the A register using the exchange command XCH, and loaded into the A register (code "XCH A, (IY+BHITFLG2)"). Before the exchange, the value in the A register was cleared to 0, so after the exchange, the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared to 0.

Lines 6100 and 6110 correspond to A5109 in the special chart display process. Line 6100 compares the value of jackpot flag 2 in register A with the value indicating a jackpot (label C_BHIT) (code "CPJ A, C_BHIT"). If jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot and the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1); if the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

In line 6110, if jackpot flag 1 does not indicate a jackpot and the jump status flag is not set (F, JF = 0), the program jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY40 and executes the instructions from line 6180 onwards (code "JRR F, TDISPLY40").

On line 6130, in response to A5105 and A5110 in the special chart display processing, the condition device operation information (value of label C_SADO) indicating that the condition device is operating is transferred to the condition device operation information area at the added address "IY+JOSADO" (code "LD (IY+JOSADO), C_SADO").

On line 6150, in response to A5106 of the special chart display processing, the subroutine for setting the transition to special chart normal processing is called and executed (code "CALLR P_TUSUL_SET"). The subroutine for setting the transition to special chart normal processing has an address in ROM (starting address) corresponding to the label P_TUSUL_SET.

Line number 6160 returns from the special chart display processing program (code "RET").

Line numbers 6210 and 6220 correspond to A5122 of the special chart display processing. Line number 6210 compares the value stored in the ceiling time-saving activation flag area (in RAM) at the added address "IY+R_TNJFLG" with the value of label C_TNJON (a value indicating that the ceiling time-saving activation flag is set (e.g., "1")) (code "CPJ (IY+R_TNJFLG), C_TNJON"). If the ceiling time-saving activation flag is set and the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1); if the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

In line 6220, if the ceiling time-saving activation flag is not set and the jump status flag (JF) is not set (if JF = 0, if F), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY70 and executes the instructions from line 6270 onwards (code "JRR F, TDISPLY70"). If the ceiling time-saving activation flag is set, it moves on to the instructions in the next line 6230.

Line numbers 6230 and 6240 correspond to A5123 in the special diagram display process. In line number 6230, the initial value of time reduction variation count 1, "704", is transferred to the time reduction variation count 1 area of the added address "IY+R_JTNCNT1" (code "LDW (IY+R_JTNCNT1), 704"). Note that the code "LDW (IY+R_JTNCNT1), 704" corresponds to "LDW (jj+d), mn" in the command table.

On line 6240, the initial value of time reduction variation count 2, "700", is transferred to the time reduction variation count 2 field at the addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT2" (code "LDW (IY+R_JTNCNT2), 700"). Note that the code "LDW (IY+R_JTNCNT2), 700" corresponds to "LDW (jj+d), mn" in the instruction table.

On line 6250, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY110, and the instructions from line 6530 onwards are executed (code "JR TDISPLY110").

Lines 6270 and 6280 correspond to A5124 in the special chart normal processing. In line 6270, the support hit flag 2 flag stored in the support hit flag 2 flag area at the added address "IY+R_SAPFLG2" is compared with the numerical value indicating a support hit (label C_SAPON) (code "CPJ (IY+R_SAPFLG2), C_SAPON"). Note that the code "CPJ (IY+R_SAPFLG2), C_SAPON" corresponds to "CPJ (jj+d), n" in the instruction table. If the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit and the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1); if the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

On line 6280, if the support hit flag 2 is a support hit and the jump status flag is set, it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY80 and executes the instructions from line 6320 onwards (code "JRR T, TDISPLY80"). If the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit, it moves on to the next instruction on line 6290.

Lines 6290 and 6300 correspond to A5125 in the special chart normal processing. In line 6290, the support hit flag 1 flag stored in the support hit flag 1 flag area at the addition address "IY+R_SAPFLG1" is compared with the numerical value indicating a support hit (label C_SAPON) (code "CPJ (IY+R_SAPFLG1), C_SAPON"). If the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit and the comparison results in a match, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF = 1 and JF = 1); if the comparison results in a mismatch, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

On line 6300, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit and the zero flag is not set (for NZ, ZF = 0), the program jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY120 and executes the instructions from line 6550 onwards (code "JR NZ, TDISPLY120"). If the support hit flag 2 is a support hit, the program proceeds to the instruction on the next line, 6320.

Lines 6320 to 6510 correspond to A5126 in the special chart normal processing. In line 6510, the address of the required data table (label D_SAPCNT) is converted to the relative address "D_SAPCNT-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_SAPCNT-5000H").

On line 6330, the time reduction judgment data stored in the area of the added address "IY+R_SAPNUM" is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (IY+R_SAPNUM)").

On line 6340, the time reduction determination data value in register A is multiplied by four and stored in register WA (code "MUL A, 4").

On line 6350, the subroutine for retrieving 1 byte of data is called and executed (code "CALLT P_GETBYTE"). As a result, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register, and the added value of the HL register functions as a pointer to the address of the storage area for the new time reduction variation count of 1 (initial value).

On line 6360, the time reduction variation count 2 stored in the time reduction variation count 2 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT2") is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT2)"). Here, time reduction variation count 2 is the remaining number of times the special chart 2 variation display game will be executed in the time reduction state.

Line number 6370 compares the time reduction variation count 2 in the WA register with the time reduction variation count 1 stored in the time reduction variation count 1 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT1") (code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1)"). Here, time reduction variation count 1 is the remaining number of executions of the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) in the time-saving state. Note that the code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1)" corresponds to "CP rr, (jj+d)" (fourth comparison command) in the command table. If time reduction variation count 2 is less than time reduction variation count 1, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF = 1, JF = 1 (T)). If time reduction fluctuation count 2 is equal to or greater than time reduction fluctuation count 1, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF = 0, JF = 0 (F)).

In line 6380, if time reduction variation count 2 is less than time reduction variation count 1 (in the case of T), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY90 and executes the instructions from line 6440 onwards (code "JRR T, TDISPLY90"). If time reduction variation count 2 is greater than or equal to 1, it moves on to the next instruction in line 6390.

In line 6390, the new time reduction variation count of 1 (initial value) stored in the area of the address set in line 6350 (value of the HL register) is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL)"). Note that the code "LD WA, (HL)" corresponds to "LD ss, (jj)" in the instruction table.

In line 6400, the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) in the WA register is compared with the time reduction variation count 1 (remaining count) stored in the time reduction variation count 1 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT1") (code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1)"). The code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT1)" corresponds to "CP rr, (jj+d)" (fourth comparison instruction) in the instruction table, and can appropriately determine the magnitude relationship of the time reduction variation count (number of games) that is used for various judgments and needs to be read directly from the RAM area. If the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) is less than the time reduction variation count 1 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF = 1, JF = 1 (T)). If the new time reduction change count 1 (initial value) is greater than or equal to the time reduction change count 1 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF = 0, JF = 0 (F)).

In line 6410, if the new time reduction change count 1 (initial value) is greater than or equal to the time reduction change count 1 (remaining count) (in the case of F), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY100 and executes the instructions from line 6480 onwards (code "JRR F, TDISPLY100"). If the new time reduction change count 1 (initial value) is less than the time reduction change count 1 (remaining count), it moves on to the instruction on the next line 6420.

On line 6420, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY120, and the instructions from line 6550 onwards are executed (code "JR TDISPLY120").

On line 6440, the new time reduction variation count of 2 (initial value) stored in the area at the addition address "HL+2" is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL+2)").

On line 6450, the new time-saving variation count 2 (initial value) in the WA register is compared with the time-saving variation count 2 (remaining count) stored in the time-saving variation count 2 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT2") (code "CP WA, (IY+R_JTNCNT2)"). If the new time-saving variation count 2 (initial value) is less than the time-saving variation count 2 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF = 1, JF = 1 (T)). If the new time-saving variation count 2 (initial value) is greater than or equal to the time-saving variation count 2 (remaining count), the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF = 0, JF = 0 (F)).

In line 6460, if the new time-saving change count 2 (initial value) is less than the time-saving change count 2 (remaining count) (in the case of T), the program jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label TDISPLY120 and executes the instructions from line 6550 onwards (code "JRR T, TDISPLY120").

On line 6480, the new time reduction variation count of 1 (initial value) stored in the area of the address (HL register value) set on line 6350 is transferred to the WA register, and the address stored in the HL register after the transfer is incremented by 2 (code "LD WA, (HL+)"). Note that the code "LD WA, (HL+)" corresponds to "LD ss, (jj+)" in the instruction table.

On line 6490, the new time reduction variation count 1 (initial value) in the WA register is transferred to the time reduction variation count 1 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT1") (code "LD (IY+R_JTNCNT1), WA"). Note that the code "LD (IY+R_JTNCNT1), WA" corresponds to "LD (jj+d), ss" in the instruction table. In this way, when a support hit occurs, if the new time reduction variation count 1 as the initial value is equal to or greater than the current remaining time reduction variation count 1, time reduction variation count 1 is updated to the new time reduction variation count 1 as the initial value. On the other hand, if the new time reduction variation count 1 is less than the current time reduction variation count 1, it is not updated. This prevents time reduction variation count 1 from suddenly decreasing.

On line 6500, the new time reduction variation count of 2 (initial value) stored in the area of the address (HL register value) updated on line 6480 is transferred to the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL)").

On line 6510, the new time reduction variation count 2 (initial value) from the WA register is transferred to the time reduction variation count 2 area (addition address "IY+R_JTNCNT2") (code "LD (IY+R_JTNCNT2), WA"). In this way, when a support hit occurs, if the new time reduction variation count 2 as the initial value is equal to or greater than the current remaining time reduction variation count 2, the time reduction variation count 2 is updated to the new time reduction variation count 2 as the initial value. On the other hand, if the new time reduction variation count 2 is less than the current time reduction variation count 2, it is not updated. This prevents the time reduction variation count 2 from suddenly decreasing.

On line 6530, in response to A5127 of the special chart normal processing, the support operation setting processing subroutine is called and executed (code "CALLR P_SAPSET").

Line number 6550 corresponds to A5128 of the special chart normal processing, and performs the special chart normal processing transition setting process (code "CALLR P_TUSUL_SET").

On line number 6560, the special chart display processing program returns (code "RET").

Note that in this embodiment, unlike A5126 in FIG. 36B, even if a support hit occurs, under certain circumstances, the time-saving fluctuation count 1 area and the time-saving fluctuation count 2 area are not updated to their initial values. Specifically, if the time-saving fluctuation count 2 as the remaining number of times is smaller than the time-saving fluctuation count 1 as the remaining number of times, and if the new time-saving fluctuation count 2 as the initial value is smaller than the time-saving fluctuation count 2 as the remaining number of times, the time-saving fluctuation count 1 area and the time-saving fluctuation count 2 area are not updated to their initial values, and the support activation setting process is not executed (A5126 and A5127 are not executed). In this way, when the time-saving fluctuation count 2 as the remaining number of times is smaller than the time-saving fluctuation count 1 as the remaining number of times (for example, in the case of high support), the special chart 2 fluctuation display game is being executed as the main fluctuation display game during the time-saving mode, so it is appropriate to compare the initial value of the time-saving fluctuation count 2 with the remaining number of times and determine whether to update the time-saving fluctuation count 1 area and the time-saving fluctuation count 2 area to their initial values.

More specifically, even if a support hit occurs, if the remaining number of times, Time Reduction Variation Number 1, is equal to or less than the remaining number of times, Time Reduction Variation Number 2, and if the new initial value of Time Reduction Variation Number 1 is smaller than the remaining number of times, Time Reduction Variation Number 1, then the Time Reduction Variation Number 1 area and Time Reduction Variation Number 2 area will not be updated to their initial values, and the support activation setting process will not be executed (A5126 and A5127 will not be executed). In this way, when the remaining number of times, Time Reduction Variation Number 1, is equal to or less than the remaining number of times, (for example, in the case of medium support), the special chart 1 variation display game is being executed as the main variation display game during the time reduction, so it is appropriate to compare the initial value of Time Reduction Variation Number 1 with the remaining number and determine whether to update the Time Reduction Variation Number 1 area and Time Reduction Variation Number 2 area to their initial values.

In order to reduce program size and simplify control, the commands at line numbers 6360, 6370, 6380, and 6420 can be eliminated, and time reduction variation count 1 as the remaining number does not need to be compared with time reduction variation count 2 as the remaining number. As a result, if either the new time reduction variation count 1 as the initial value is equal to or greater than time reduction variation count 1 as the current remaining number of time reductions, or the new time reduction variation count 2 as the initial value is equal to or greater than time reduction variation count 2 as the current remaining number of time reductions, the time reduction variation count 1 area and time reduction variation count 2 area will be updated to their initial values.

In addition, to reduce program size and simplify control, the instructions at line numbers 6360, 6370, and 6380 can be eliminated, and the code at line number 6410 can be set to "JRR F, TDISPLY90" with the jump destination being the address in ROM corresponding to TDISPLY90. As a result, if the initial value for new time reduction fluctuation count 1 is equal to or greater than the current remaining time reduction count of time reduction 1, and if the initial value for new time reduction fluctuation count 2 is equal to or greater than the current remaining time reduction count of time reduction 2, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation count 2 area will be updated to their initial values. This prevents a sudden decrease in both time reduction fluctuation count 1 and time reduction fluctuation count 2.

[Starting gate signal editing processing program]
134 is a program list showing the program structure of a start gate signal editing processing program corresponding to the start gate signal editing processing (A9324) according to the fifth embodiment. The start gate signal editing processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SIDOINF, and is a subroutine called in step A9324 of the external information editing processing.

On line 7010, the values of the W register are cleared and set to 0 (off data) by performing an exclusive OR on the values of the W register (code "XOR W, W").

On line 7020, the lower byte (R_SIDOSIG+1) of the address of the start port signal output control timer area is transferred to the E register (code "LD E, R_SIDOSIG+1"). The value of the DE register becomes the address of the start port signal output control timer area.

Line number 7030 calls and executes a subroutine that updates the start port signal output control timer, which is the value in the start port signal output control timer area, by -1 if it is not 0 (code "CALLT P_DECBYTE"). The subroutine that serves as the processing program for this -1 update process (countdown) is registered as the nth subroutine in the vector table (n = value of label P_DECBYTE). This subroutine stores the value of the start port signal output control timer after updating it by -1 in register A.

On line 7040, if the start port signal output control timer is 0 (T, ZF = JF = 1), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOINF10 and executes the instructions from line 7090 onwards (code "JRR T, SIDOINF10"). If the start port signal output control timer is not 0, it moves on to the next instruction on line 7050.

In line 7050, the value of the start port signal output control timer in register A is compared with a predetermined value (64/T+1) (code "CP A,64/T+1"). Here, T is 4, which corresponds to the timer interrupt period (4 msec). Therefore, the predetermined value (64/T+1) is 17. The code "CP A,64/T+1" corresponds to "CP p,n" (third comparison instruction) in the instruction table. If the countdown processing program (subroutine P_DECBYTE) is shared with other timer values and the start port signal output control timer value is updated and stored in register A, this code allows the start port signal output control timer to be properly compared with the predetermined value. If the start port signal output control timer is less than the predetermined value, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are set (CF = 1, JF = 1(T)). If the start port signal output control timer is equal to or greater than the specified value, the carry flag (CF) and jump status flag (JF) are not set (CF = 0, JF = 0 (F)).

On line 7060, if the start port signal output control timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (on timing) and the jump status flag (JF) is not set (if JF = 0, if F), the program jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOINF20 and executes the instructions from line 7160 onwards (code "JRR F, SIDOINF20").

On line 7070, a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOINF30, and the instructions from line 7180 onwards are executed (code "JR SIDOINF30").

On line 7090, the value of the DE register is decremented by 1 to obtain the address of the start port signal output count area (code "DEC DE").

On line 7100, the value of the start gate signal output count field (start gate signal output count) at the address currently specified in the DE register is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (DE)").

On line 7110, if the number of transfer start port signal outputs is "0" because there is no output request (when ZF = JF = 0, when T), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOINF30 and the instructions from line 7180 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, SIDOINF30").

On line 7120, the number of times the start port signal has been output is decremented by 1 (code "DEC (DE)").

On line 7130, the value of the DE register is increased by 1 to obtain the address of the start port signal output control timer area (code "INC DE").

On line 7140, the initial value (128/T + 64/T) is transferred to the start port signal output control timer area at the address currently specified by the DE register (code "LD (DE), 128/T + 64/T"). The initial value (128/T + 64/T) is 48.

On line 7160, the start gate signal on data (value of label C_SIDO_INF) is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, C_SIDO_INF").

On line 7180, the on or off data of the start gate signal is transferred as the value of the W register to the external information output data area (addition address "IY+R_SIDOSIG+2") (code "LD (IY+R_SIDOSIG+2), W"). As a result, the on or off data of the start gate signal is output from the external information terminal 71 to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Line number 7190 returns from the start gate signal editing processing program (code "RET").

The above start gate signal editing processing program sets the start gate signal output control timer to its initial value unless the number of start gate signal outputs reaches zero, and during the on-timing period from the initial value (128/T + 64/T) to the predetermined value (64/T + 1), the on-data of the start gate signal is output from the external information terminal 71 to an external device (such as a hall computer).

[Safety device related processing program]
135 is a program listing showing the program structure of a safety device-related processing program corresponding to the safety device-related processing (FIG. 56) according to the fifth embodiment. The safety device-related processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SAFSET, and is a subroutine called by the CALLR instruction (line number 1190) in step A1314 of the timer interrupt processing.

Lines 7510 and 7520 correspond to A9401 of the safety device-related processing. Line 7510 compares the safety device activation flag in the safety device activation flag area (addition address "IY+R_SAFFLG") included in the in-area work area with the value (label C_SAFON) indicating that the safety device is activated (code "CPJ (IY+R_SAFFLG), C_SAFON"). If the safety device activation flag indicates that the safety device is activated and the comparison results in a match, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF = 1); if the comparison results in a mismatch, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF = 0).

On line 7520, if the safety device activation flag indicates that the device is activated and the comparison result is a match (Z), the subroutine ends and the safety device-related processing program returns (code "RET Z").

Lines 7530 to 7550 correspond to A9402 and A9403 of the safety device-related processing. In line 7530, the safety device activation information and old activation information are transferred to the WA register from a 2-byte area (with the starting address of label R_SAFINF1) included in the external work area and containing the safety device activation information area and old activation information area (code "LD WA, (R_SAFINF1)"). The old activation information is transferred to the W register, and the safety device activation information is transferred to the A register. Note that the code "LD WA, (R_SAFINF1)" corresponds to "LD ss, (vw)" in the instruction table.

On line 7540, the safety device activation information in the A register is compared with the old activation information in the W register (code "CPJ A,W"). Note that the code "CPJ A,W" corresponds to "CPJ r,g" in the instruction table. If the safety device activation information is the same value as the old activation information and remains unchanged, and the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1); if the comparison results in a mismatch, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

On line 7550, if the safety device activation information is the same value as the old activation information and the jump status flag (JF) is set (if JF = 1, if T), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label SAFSET10 and executes the instructions from line 7640 onwards (code "JRR T, SAFSET10"). If the safety device activation information has changed and is no longer the same value as the old activation information, it proceeds to the next instruction on line 7560.

On line 7560, in response to A9404 of the safety device-related processing, the address (label D_SAFCOM) of the safety device activation-related command table, which associates safety device activation information with commands, is set to relative address "D_SAFCOM-5000h" and transferred to the HL register (code "LDD HL, D_SAFCOM-5000H").

On line 7570, in response to A9405 of the safety device-related processing, a subroutine for retrieving 1 byte of data is called and executed (code "CALLT P_GETBYTE"). As a result, the value of the safety device activation information in the A register is added to the address of the safety device activation-related command table in the HL register, and the value stored in the address area specified in the HL register after the addition is transferred to the A register. Therefore, the command (ACTION section) retrieved from the safety device activation-related command table corresponding to the safety device activation information is stored in the A register.

Lines 7580 and 7590 correspond to A9406, a safety device-related process. Line 7580 compares the command (ACTION section) in the A register with a value (label C_NONCOM) indicating no command definition (code "CPJ A, C_NONCOM"). If the command (ACTION section) is no command definition and the comparison results in a match, the jump status flag is set (T, ZF = 1 and JF = 1); if the comparison results in a mismatch, the jump status flag is not set (F, ZF = 0 and JF = 0).

On line 7590, if the safety device activation information does not contain a command definition and the jump status flag (JF) is set (JF = 1, T), a jump is made to the address in ROM corresponding to label SAFSET10, and the instructions from line 7640 onwards are executed (code "JRR T, SAFSET10").

On line 7600, the command (ACTION part) in the A register is transferred to the C register (code "LD C, A").

On line 7610, in response to A9407 of the safety device-related processing, the value of the safety device activation-related command (MODE section) (label C_SAFMD) is transferred to register B (code "LD B, C_SAFMD") to prepare the safety device activation-related command (MODE section) as a performance command.

On line 7620, in response to A9408 of the safety device-related processing, the subroutine for the effect command setting processing is called and executed (code "CALLT P_COMSET"). The effect command setting processing is executed based on the values of registers B and C.

Lines 7640 and 7650 correspond to A9409 of the safety device-related processing. Line 7640 compares the safety device activation information in the safety device activation information area (address R_SAFINF1) with the safety device activation information (value 3) at label C_SAFSADO (code "CPJ (R_SAFINF1), C_SAFSADO"). Note that the code "CPJ (R_SAFINF1), C_SAFSADO" corresponds to "CPJ (vw), n" in the instruction table. If the safety device activation information is safety device activation information (value 3) and the comparison results in a match, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF = 1); if the comparison results in a mismatch, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF = 0).

On line 7650, if the safety device operation information is not safety device operation information (value 3) and the zero flag (ZF) is not set (in the case of NZ), the safety device-related processing program returns (code "RET NZ").

On line 7660, in response to A9410 of the safety device-related processing, a value indicating that the safety device is in operation (label C_SAFON, for example, "1") is transferred to the safety device operation flag area (addition address "IY+R_SAFFLG") and saved as the safety device operation flag (code "LD (IY+R_SAFFLG), C_SAFON").

Line number 7670 returns from the safety device-related processing program (code "RET").

As described above, in FIGS. 123 to 135, the in-area program (first program) allocated in the first ROM area (first program storage area) in the address space has been described.
In the in-region program, a 4-byte specific CALL instruction (first call instruction, specific call instruction) whose callee address is specified by the immediate mn appears to call an out-of-region program at three locations: line number 0620, line number 0710, and line number 1280. The number of times that specific CALL instructions appear in the in-region program is fewer than the number of specific CALL instructions (four or more) that appear in the out-of-region program (FIGS. 136 to 139) described below.

As such, because this particular CALL instruction has a large word length of 4 bytes, it is used less in the first ROM area (area for in-area programs, first program storage area) which has a smaller address than in the second ROM area (area for out-area programs, second program storage area). This allows for more capacity in the first ROM area, improving the development efficiency of game control programs, which are in-area programs.

In addition, a subroutine can be called from a specified processing program that is part of the program within the area using either the CALLR instruction (second call instruction) or the CALLT instruction (third call instruction), and the subroutine executes at least a JRR instruction (specified branch instruction, second branch instruction). The JRR instruction does not branch to another subroutine called from the specified processing program. In this way, the boundary between the subroutine and other subroutines is clearly defined, improving program development efficiency.

An example of a combination of a predetermined processing program and a subroutine is the combination of a timer interrupt processing program and a special symbol game processing program, and the JRR command (line number 1560) of the special symbol game processing program does not branch into the other subroutines of the timer interrupt processing program, the bonus symbol game processing program or the regular symbol game processing program. Another example of a combination of a predetermined processing program and a subroutine is the combination of a special symbol start port switch common processing program and a special symbol hold information determination processing program, and the JRR command (line number 4220) of the special symbol hold information determination processing program does not branch into the effect command setting processing program (P_COMSET), another subroutine of the special symbol start port switch common processing program. Another example of a combination of a predetermined processing program and a subroutine is the combination of a special symbol hold information determination processing program and a jackpot determination processing program, and the JRR command (line number 4560 and line number 4580) of the jackpot determination processing program does not branch into the special symbol status check processing program, another subroutine of the special symbol hold information determination processing program.

[Out-of-area integrated processing program]
136 is a program listing showing the program structure of an outside-area integration processing program corresponding to the outside-area integration processing (FIG. 121) according to the fifth embodiment. The outside-area integration processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_OUTAREA, and is a subroutine called by the CALL instruction (line number 1280) in step A1322 of the timer interrupt processing.

On line 8010, in response to A9501 of the out-of-area consolidation process, the value of the stack pointer in the SP register is transferred to the stack pointer storage area in the out-of-area work area (address labeled R_ESTCKPT) (code "LD (R_ESTCKPT), SP"). Note that the code "LD (R_ESTCKPT), SP" corresponds to "LD (vw), ss" in the instruction table.

On line 8020, in response to A9502 of the out-of-area consolidation process, the top address value (label C_S_STKTOP) indicating the top of the out-of-area stack area is transferred to the stack pointer of the SP register as the value of the out-of-area stack area (code "LD SP, C_S_STKTOP"). Note that the last address (maximum address) of the out-of-area stack area is the top address (start address), and the out-of-area stack area ranges from the maximum address to the minimum address.

Lines 8030 to 8060 correspond to A9503, an out-of-area merge process. In line 8030, to select register bank 0, the value "0" is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) bit of flag register 1200 (code "LD RBS,0").

On line 8040, the values of all general-purpose registers in register bank 0 (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) are pushed to the external stack area (code "PUSH WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, IY").

On line 8050, to select register bank 1, the value "1" is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) bit of flag register 1200 (code "LD RBS,1").

On line 8060, the values of all general-purpose registers in register bank 1 (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) are pushed to the external stack area (code "PUSH WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, IY").

Lines 8070 to 8100 call and execute subroutines (out-of-area programs) corresponding to test signal output processing (A10001), performance display device control processing (A9504), ball difference confirmation processing (A9505), and safety device activation monitoring processing (A9506). The calls are executed by a specific 4-byte CALL instruction (first call instruction) in which the address of the called subroutine is specified by the direct value mn (label) (codes: "CALL P_SOUTPUT", "CALL P_SHYMT", "CALL P_DEFCHK", "CALL P_SAFCHK").

When calling the test signal output process, the CALL instruction (1 byte long) or CALLR instruction (2 or 3 bytes long), which have a smaller cycle count or word length than the specific CALL instruction, is not used; instead, a specific CALL instruction (4 bytes long) that can call a subroutine at any address is used. This allows for versatility when calling the test signal output process, independent of the address of the test signal output processing program, and makes it easier for developers to understand.

Lines 8110 to 8130 correspond to the out-of-area consolidation process A9507 and restore the saved registers. Line 8110 restores (POPs) the values of all general-purpose registers in register bank 1 (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) from the out-of-area stack area (code "POP WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, IY").

On line 8120, to select register bank 0, the value "0" is transferred to the register bank selector (RBS) bit of flag register 1200 (code "LD RBS,0").

On line 8130, the values of all general-purpose registers in register bank 0 (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, IY register) are restored (POP) from the external stack area (code "POP WA, BC, DE, HL, IX, IY").

On line 8140, in response to the out-of-area integration process A9508, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer storage area of the out-of-area work area (address labeled R_ESTCKPT) is transferred to the SP register (code "LD SP, (R_ESTCKPT)").

Line number 8150 returns from the out-of-area integration processing program (code "RET").

The above describes the out-of-area integration processing program. However, the subroutines called from the out-of-area integration processing program, including the test signal output processing, performance display device control processing, ball difference confirmation processing, and safety device activation monitoring processing, are out-of-area programs located in the second ROM area within the address space. When calling these subroutines contained in out-of-area programs from an out-of-area integration processing program contained in an out-of-area program, only a specific CALL instruction is used, without using the CALLT and CALLR instructions, to distinguish them from calls to subroutines contained in in-area programs. This improves program development efficiency.

Even if a subroutine contained in a program within a domain is called from a program outside the domain, the program outside the domain can be distinguished from the program within the domain by using only the CALL instruction and not using any other calling instructions other than the CALL instruction, thereby improving program development efficiency.

Furthermore, even when calling a subroutine included in an outside program from a subroutine (part of an outside program) corresponding to test signal output processing, performance display device control processing, ball difference confirmation processing, or safety device activation monitoring processing, this is distinguished from calling a subroutine included in an inside program, and program development efficiency can be improved by using only the CALL command, without using the CALLT and CALLR commands.

[Test signal output processing program]
137 is a program list showing the program structure of a test signal output processing program corresponding to the test signal output processing (FIG. 122) according to the fifth embodiment. The test signal output processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_SOUTPUT, is a subroutine called by the CALL command (line number 8070) in step A10001 of the outside-area integration processing (FIG. 121), and is included in the outside-area program.

Lines 8510 to 8560 correspond to A10101 and A10102 in the test signal output process. Line 8510 transfers the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+0" to the A register (code "LD A, (R_SKNBF+0)"). Note that the code "LD A, (R_SKNBF+0)" corresponds to "LD s, (vw)" in the instruction table.

On line 8520, the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+1" and the value in the A register are combined by taking the logical OR and stored in the A register (code "OR A, (R_SKNBF+1)").

On line 8530, the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+2" and the value in the A register are combined by taking the logical OR and stored in the A register (code "OR A, (R_SKNBF+2)").

On line 8540, the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+3" is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, (R_SKNBF+3)"). Note that the code "LD W, (R_SKNBF+3)" corresponds to "LD t, (vw)" in the instruction table.

On line 8550, the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+4" and the value in the W register are combined by taking the logical OR and stored in the W register (code "OR W, (R_SKNBF+4)").

On line 8560, the value in the WA register is output to port C_OUT05 (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to label C_OUT05) (code "OUTW (C_OUT05), WA"). This causes the value in the WA register to be output to test terminal output ports 1 and 2 on the relay board 70.

Lines 8570 to 8620 correspond to A10103 and A10104 in the test signal output process. In line 8570, the value stored in the area at address "R_TZ1STP" is transferred to register A (code "LD A, (R_TZ1STP)"). The area at address "R_TZ1STP" stores the bit signal of the pattern data for Special Chart 1.

On line 8580, the value stored in the area at address "R_T1HENSKN" and the value in the A register are combined by taking the logical OR and stored in the A register (code "OR A, (R_T1HENSKN)"). The area at address "R_T1HENSKN" stores the special symbol 1 changing signal, which is a signal related to the start of the special symbol 1 changing display game.

On line 8590, the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+5" and the value in the A register are combined by taking the logical OR and stored in the A register (code "OR A, (R_SKNBF+5)").

On line 8600, the value stored in the area at address "R_TZ2STP" is transferred to the W register (code "LD W, (R_TZ2STP)"). The area at address "R_TZ2STP" stores the bit signal of the pattern data for Special Chart 2.

On line 8610, the value stored in the area at address "R_T2HENSKN" and the value in the W register are combined by taking the logical OR and stored in the W register (code "OR W, (R_T2HENSKN)"). The area at address "R_T2HENSKN" stores the special symbol 2 changing signal, which is a signal related to the start of the special symbol 2 changing display game.

On line 8620, the value in the WA register is output to port C_OUT07 (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to label C_OUT07) (code "OUTW (C_OUT07), WA"). This causes the value in the WA register to be output to test terminal output ports 3 and 4 on the relay board 70.

Lines 8630 to 8660 correspond to A10105 of the test signal output process. Line 8630 transfers the value stored in the area at address "R_FZSTP" to the A register (code "LD A, (R_FZSTP)"). The area at address "R_FZSTP" stores the bit signal of the regular pattern data.

On line 8640, the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+6" and the value in the A register are combined by taking the logical OR and stored in the A register (code "OR A, (R_SKNBF+6)").

On line 8650, the value stored in the area at address "R_SKNBF+7" and the value in the A register are combined by taking the logical OR and stored in the A register (code "OR A, (R_SKNBF+7)").

On line 8660, the value in the A register is output to port C_OUT09 (i.e., the port with the number corresponding to label C_OUT09) (code "OUT (C_OUT09), A"). This causes the value in the A register to be output to test terminal output port 5.

Line number 8670 returns from the test signal output processing program (code "RET").

[Difference ball confirmation processing program]
138 is a program list showing the program structure of a part of the difference ball confirmation processing program corresponding to the difference ball confirmation processing (FIG. 59) according to the fifth embodiment. The difference ball confirmation processing program has a leading address (in ROM) corresponding to the label P_DEFCHK, and is a subroutine called by the CALL command (line number 8090) in step A9505 of the outside area integration processing (FIG. 121), and is included in the outside area program.

Lines 9010 and 9020 correspond to A9701 in the ball difference confirmation process. Line 9010 compares the safety device activation flag in the safety device activation flag area (address R_SAFFLG) included in the in-area work area with the value indicating that the safety device is activated (label C_SAFON) (code "CPJ (R_SAFFLG), C_SAFON"). Unlike in-area programs, the address of the safety device activation flag area in the out-area program (here, the ball difference confirmation process program) is indicated as an absolute address rather than using the offset value d (relative address). This increases the independence of out-area programs, making them easier to use across various gaming machines and increasing versatility. If the comparison results in a match, indicating that the safety device activation flag is activated, the zero flag is set (Z, ZF = 1). If the comparison results in a mismatch, the zero flag is not set (NZ, ZF = 0).

In line 9020, if the comparison result in line 7510 is a match (Z) (i.e., if the safety device is activated), the subroutine ends and the program returns from the difference ball confirmation processing program (code "RET Z").

Lines 9030 and 9040 correspond to A9702 of the difference ball confirmation process. Line 9030 compares the value of the old operation information stored in the old operation information area (address R_SAFINF2) with the value of label C_SAFWRN (2) (code "CP (R_SAFINF2), C_SAFWRN"). If the value of the old operation information is 2 or greater, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0); if it is less than 2, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1).

On line 9040, if the value of the old operation information is 2 or greater and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the program returns from the difference ball confirmation processing program (code "RET NC"). If the value of the old operation information is less than 2 and the carry flag (CF) is set, the program proceeds to the next instruction on line 9050.

Line numbers 9050 and 9060 correspond to A9703 in the difference ball confirmation process. Line number 9050 obtains the rising edge information of the out ball detection switch 74 from address "R_SWCTL4+2" and performs a logical AND with the switch bit data (determination value) corresponding to label C_OUTSW to determine whether the switch is turned on (code "TEST (R_SWCTL4+2), C_OUTSW"). The area at address "R_SWCTL4+2" stores the rising edge information from the switch control area that stores information about the out ball detection switch 74.

When no game ball passes and the out ball detection switch 74 is off (when no game ball is detected), the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the out ball detection switch 74 is zero, the calculation result (logical product) is zero, and the zero flag (ZF) is set. When the rising information is the same as the switch bit data (determination value) (for example, when the switch bit is on with "00001000B"), the calculation result (logical product) is other than zero (for example, "00001000B") and the zero flag (ZF) is not set.

In line 9060, if the out ball detection switch 74 is off and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the program jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label DEFCHK10 and executes the instructions from line 9150 onwards (code "JR Z, DEFCHK10"). If a game ball passes and the out ball detection switch 74 is on (if a game ball is detected), the program proceeds to the instruction in the next line 9070.

Lines 9070 to 9130 correspond to A9704 and A9705 in the difference ball confirmation process. Line 9070 transfers the lower two bytes of the safety device counter value stored in the safety device counter area (address R_SAFCNT) to the HL register (code "LD HL, (R_SAFCNT)"). As mentioned above, the safety device counter area is a 3-byte area (3-byte size), and the safety device counter value consists of the lower two bytes and the upper byte. The starting address of the lower two bytes is the value of label R_SAFCNT, and the starting address of the upper byte is R_SAFCNT+2.

On line 9080, the most significant byte of the safety device counter value is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_SAFCNT+2)").

On line 9090, the value of the lowest 2 bytes of the safety device counter (value of the HL register) is subtracted by 1 and updated by -1 (code "SUB HL, 1").

On line 9100, the value of the carry flag corresponding to the borrow resulting from the subtraction of the lower two bytes is subtracted from the value of the upper byte (the value of the A register) (code "SBC A,0").

In line 9110, if the subtraction result in line 9100 is negative and the carry flag is "1" (CF=1), i.e., if the safety device counter value becomes negative (if it reached the lower limit of "0" before being updated by -1), it jumps to the address in ROM corresponding to label DEFCHK10 and executes the instructions from line 9150 onwards (code "JR C, DEFCHK10"). If the safety device counter value is not negative, it proceeds to the next instruction in line 9120.

On line 9120, the updated value of the lower two bytes (the value of the HL register) is transferred back to the lower two bytes of the safety device counter area (code "LD (R_SAFCNT), HL").

On line 9130, the updated value of the most significant byte (the value of register A) is transferred back to the most significant byte of the safety device counter area (code "LD (R_SAFCNT+2), A").

[Safety device operation monitoring processing program]
139 is a program list showing the program structure of a safety device operation monitoring processing program corresponding to the safety device operation monitoring processing (FIG. 60) according to the fifth embodiment. The safety device operation monitoring processing program has a starting address (in ROM) corresponding to label P_SAFCHK, is a subroutine called by a CALL instruction (line number 8100) in step A9506 of the outside-area integration processing, and is included in the outside-area program.

Lines 9510 and 9520 correspond to A9801 of the safety device activation monitoring process. Line 9510 compares the value of the safety device activation information in the safety device activation information area (address R_SAFINF1) with the value of label C_SAFWRN (2) (code "CP (R_SAFINF1), C_SAFWRN"). If the value of the safety device activation information is 2 or greater, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0); if it is less than 2, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1).

On line 9520, if the value of the safety device activation information is less than 2 and the carry flag (CF) is set (C), the safety device activation monitoring processing program returns (code "RET C").

Lines 9530 to 9560 correspond to A9802 of the safety device activation monitoring process. Line 9530 compares the special game processing number stored in the special game processing number area (address R_TGAME) area (in RAM) with the value of label C_TSFAN, which indicates a small win (code "CP (R_TGAME), C_TSFAN"). The value of label C_TSFAN is the special game processing number "3" for the pre-processing before the small win is released. Note that, unlike programs within the area, the address of the special game processing number area is indicated as an absolute address in programs outside the area (here, the safety device activation monitoring process program), rather than using the offset value d (relative address). This increases the independence of programs outside the area, making them easier to use across a variety of gaming machines and increasing versatility. If there is a small win and the special game processing number is 3 or greater, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0); if there is no small win and the number is less than 3, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1).

On line 9540, if a small win is occurring and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0), the safety device activation monitoring processing program returns (code "RET NC"). If a small win is not occurring and the carry flag (CF) is set, the program proceeds to the next command on line 9550.

Line number 9550 compares the bonus game processing number stored in the bonus game processing number area (address R_YGAME) area (in RAM) with the value of label C_YFAN, which indicates a jackpot (code "CP (R_YGAME), C_YFAN"). The value of label C_YFAN is the special game processing number "1" for fanfare processing. Note that unlike programs within the area, the address of the bonus game processing number area in programs outside the area (here, the safety device activation monitoring processing program) is indicated as an absolute address rather than using the offset value d (relative address). This increases the independence of programs outside the area, making them easier to use on a variety of gaming machines and increasing versatility. If there is a jackpot and the bonus game processing number is 1 or greater, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0); if there is no jackpot and the number is less than 1, the carry flag (CF) is set (CF = 1).

In line 9560, if a jackpot is occurring and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC, CF = 0), the safety device activation monitoring processing program returns (code "RET NC"). If a jackpot is not occurring and the carry flag (CF) is set, the program moves on to the next command in line 9570.

Lines 9570 and 9580 correspond to A9803 in the safety device activation monitoring process. In line 9570, the safety device activation information in the safety device activation information area (address R_SAFINF1) is transferred to the A register (code "LD A, (R_SAFINF1)").

On line 9580, the safety device activation information in register A is transferred to the old activation information area (address R_SAFINF2) (code "LD (R_SAFINF2), A").

On line 9590, in response to A9804 of the safety device activation monitoring process, the safety device activation information (value 3) with label C_SAFSADO is transferred to the safety device activation information area (address R_SAFINF1) (code "LD (R_SAFINF1), C_SAFSADO").

Line number 9600 returns from the safety device activation monitoring processing program (code "RET").

As described above, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the out-of-area program (second program) allocated in the second ROM area (second program storage area) within the address space has been described.
In the out-of-area program, a specific CALL instruction whose callee address is specified by the literal mn appears in four places: line numbers 8070, 8080, 8090, and 8100. Of course, the specific CALL instruction may appear in more than four places in the out-of-area program. Thus, the number of specific CALL instructions (first call instruction, specific call instruction) appearing in the out-of-area program (four or more) is greater than the number of specific CALL instructions appearing in the aforementioned in-area program (Figures 123 to 135) (three). Because the specific CALL instruction has a large word length of four bytes, it is used more frequently in the second ROM area (second program storage area), which has a larger address, than in the first ROM area (first program storage area). This allows for more capacity in the first ROM area, improving the development efficiency of the in-area program, which is the game control program. In addition, by using only specific CALL commands in out-of-area programs that can call subroutines at any address without being affected by the placement of various processing programs (program modules) in the address space, it becomes easier to share out-of-area programs between different models of gaming machines, improving program development efficiency.

As shown in Figure 109, there is a large unused area between the second ROM area and the program management area on the higher address side of the second ROM area, so there is no problem using many specific CALL instructions with long word lengths. Also, commands such as CALLR, which have an upper limit on the address of the called subroutine, may be difficult to use within the second ROM area when calling a subroutine in the second ROM area with a higher address.

Furthermore, the out-of-area program described in Figures 136 to 139, the out-of-area integration processing program and its subroutines (e.g., test signal output processing, performance display device control processing, differential ball confirmation processing, safety device activation monitoring processing), are subroutines called by the CALL instruction (e.g., line number 1280, line numbers 8070-8100). In these subroutines, a JRR instruction (second branch instruction) whose branch condition includes a condition related to the state of the jump status flag is not executed, and a JR instruction (first branch instruction) whose branch condition does not include a condition related to the state of the jump status flag is executed. In the example program listing, the JR instruction is executed in the differential ball confirmation processing (line numbers 9060 and 9110), but the JR instruction may also be executed in the out-of-area integration processing program itself, the performance display device control processing, etc.

The meaning of the jump status flag changes depending on the situation, matching either the zero flag or the carry flag depending on the instruction used. However, because the out-of-area integration processing program and its subroutines called by this CALL instruction do not use the JRR instruction, which contains a branch condition related to the state of the jump status flag, they are easier for multiple developers to understand. This makes it easier to share the out-of-area integration processing program and its subroutines across multiple models, improving program development efficiency. Furthermore, it is easier to distinguish between subroutines called by the CALL instruction and subroutines called from other call instructions (for example, the CALLR instruction) by whether only the JR instruction is present or a mixture of JR and JRR instructions, improving program development efficiency.

[Instructions from the CPU of the performance control device]
140 is an instruction table illustrating comparison instructions from a set of instructions (instruction set) that are used in a program and that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit in the CPU 311 of the performance control device 300. A dedicated logic circuit for executing each comparison instruction may be provided in the CPU core (instruction interpretation and execution circuit). Note that in this embodiment, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 may be combined into a single VDP.

The CPU 311 has 15 4-byte (32-bit) general-purpose registers (R0 to R14).

The number of operating clock cycles required for CPU 311 of the presentation control device 300 to execute a comparison command is one cycle, and the word length (instruction size) of the comparison command is a fixed length of two bytes. The comparison commands executable by CPU 311 of the presentation control device 300 are simpler, with fewer cycles and shorter word lengths than the comparison commands executable by CPU 111a of the game control device 100. Also, because they are of fixed length, CPU 311 does not need time to determine the instruction length, and the time required to execute processing corresponding to the presentation command is short. Because the number of cycles is one, the comparison command can be executed quickly, and the time required to execute processing corresponding to the presentation command is short.

The comparison instructions executable by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 allow all six flags (JF, ZF, CF, HF, SF, VF) in bits 2 to 7 of the flag register 1200 to be changed, whereas the comparison instructions executable by the CPU 311 of the presentation control device 300 are simplified in that only the TF flag in bit 0 of the 32-bit flag register can be changed.

The comparison instructions in the instruction table are divided into an "opcode" (or "mnemonic") that indicates the operation (calculation) and an "operand" that is the target of the instruction. There may be multiple "operands," such as a first operand, a second operand, etc.

"CMP/EQ #imm,R0" compares the value of the R0 register with the immediate imm value, and if the two values match, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/EQ Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register, and if the two values match, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/HS Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register, and if the unsigned (absolute value) value of the Rn register is greater than or equal to the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/GE Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register. If the value of the Rn register is signed and greater than or equal to the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/HI Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register. If the value of the Rn register is unsigned (absolute value) and greater than the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1". Otherwise, the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/GT Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register. If the value of the Rn register is signed and greater than the value of the Rm register, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/PL Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with zero, and if the value of the Rn register is greater than zero, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/PZ Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with zero, and if the value of the Rn register is greater than or equal to zero, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

"CMP/STR Rm,Rn" compares the value of the Rn register with the value of the Rm register, and if any bytes are equal, the TF flag is set to "1", otherwise the TF flag is set to "0".

Of the comparison instructions that differ in machine language instructions, there are at least 47 types (= 18 + 9 + 15 + 5 types) of comparison instructions that can be executed by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, as listed in the instruction table (Figs. 113 to 116). In contrast, there are only 9 types of comparison instructions that can be executed by the CPU 311 of the presentation control device 300, as listed in the instruction table (Fig. 140), which is fewer and simpler than the CPU 111a, making program development easier and simplifying the circuit configuration within the CPU.

For example, CPU 311 has only one comparison instruction, "CMP/EQ #imm,R0," that compares any immediate value with a register value, which is simpler than the six instructions available in CPU 111a. Furthermore, CPU 311 does not have any comparison instructions that directly reference data (values) stored in memory and compare them with immediate values or register data (values).

Another feature of the programs executed by the CPU 311 of the presentation control device 300 is that the program size of the safety device processing program corresponding to the safety device processing (B1330) is smaller than the total program size of the safety device processing programs executed by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 (safety device information initialization processing program, safety device-related processing program, outside-area integration processing program, difference ball confirmation processing program, and safety device activation monitoring processing program). This is because the safety device processing (B1330) of the presentation control device 300 only needs to execute processing related to the display of safety device-related displays (activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, and activation in progress display 513). In this way, because much of the safety device-related processing is executed by the game control device 100, the burden of safety device-related processing on the presentation control device 300 is reduced.

Conversely, the processing related to the safety devices executed by the presentation control device 300 may be increased to reduce the burden of processing related to the safety devices on the game control device 100. In this case, the program capacity of the safety device processing program executed by the CPU 311 of the presentation control device 300 may be larger than the program capacity of the safety device processing program executed by the CPU 111a of the game control device 100.

[Actions and Effects of Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment includes a game control unit (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (e.g., a variable display game) and can award a game value to a player based on the outcome of the game. The game control unit includes a program storage unit (e.g., a ROM) for storing a program, a processing unit (e.g., a CPU) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing according to the program, a plurality of registers for storing values when performing the arithmetic processing, and an update information storage unit (e.g., a RAM) for storing information updated by the processing unit. The plurality of registers include a first register (e.g., a 1-byte register) and a second register (e.g., a 2-byte register: a pair register, an IX register, and an IY register) having twice the capacity of the first register. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute a first comparison instruction (e.g., "CP rr,gg" or "CP rr,mn") that can change a carry flag by comparing different second register values or by comparing a second register value with an immediate value, and a second comparison instruction (e.g., "CPJ p,n" or "CPJ q,n") that can change a zero flag by comparing a first register value with an immediate value. The first comparison instruction can determine a random number value related to the game result (e.g., a jackpot random number) (line number 4550 or line number 4570), and the second comparison instruction can determine a flag value corresponding to the game result (e.g., 6050).

In this type of gaming machine 10, when determining a random number value related to a game outcome, the carry flag can be changed by the first comparison instruction, making it possible to properly determine the magnitude relationship between the random number value and the lower limit judgment value or the upper limit judgment value. When determining a flag value corresponding to a game outcome, the zero flag can be changed by the second comparison instruction, making it possible to properly determine whether the flag value corresponding to the game outcome matches a predetermined value. Therefore, by effectively combining the first comparison instruction or the second comparison instruction with a conditional branch instruction executed after the first comparison instruction or the second comparison instruction, programs such as game control programs can be properly configured, and program capacity (program size) can be reduced.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can generate specific game states different from special game states advantageous to the player depending on the game results. The arithmetic processing means (e.g., a CPU) is configured to execute a third comparison instruction (e.g., "CP p,n" or "CP q,n") that compares the value of the first register with a direct value and changes the carry flag, and a fourth comparison instruction (e.g., "CP r,(vw)", "CP r,(jj+d)", "CP rr,(vw)", or "CP rr,(jj+d)") that compares the value of the first register with a value stored in the update information storage means (e.g., RAM). The third comparison instruction can determine the magnitude relationship between the timer value (or counter value) and a predetermined value (e.g., line number 7050). The fourth comparison instruction can determine the magnitude relationship between the remaining number of games in the currently occurring specific game state and the number of games (initial value) of a new specific game state that can be generated (e.g., line number 6400 or line number 6450). A comparison instruction is not used to determine whether the timer value (or counter value) is zero (for example, determining whether the special game processing timer has timed out (line numbers 1550 and 1560)).

Therefore, the third comparison instruction can be used when determining whether a timer value or counter value (e.g., 1 byte) stored in the first register, which is updated using a common countdown or countup processing program, is larger or smaller than a predetermined value. Furthermore, the fourth comparison instruction can be used when determining whether the number of games played is larger or smaller and needs to be read directly from an area in the update information storage means (e.g., RAM), which is used for various determinations. This allows programs such as game control programs to be appropriately configured, reducing program size. Furthermore, because the process of determining whether a timer value (or counter value) is zero can be replaced with a process other than a comparison instruction, program development can be flexible.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the program storage means (e.g., ROM) includes a first program storage area (e.g., a first ROM area), a second program storage area (e.g., a second ROM area), and an unused area between the first and second program storage areas. The arithmetic processing means uses a first call instruction (e.g., a specific CALL instruction in which the callee's address is specified by a direct value mn, or a specific CALL instruction of 4 bytes) when calling a second program in the second program storage area (e.g., a subroutine for out-of-area integration processing included in an out-of-area program) from a first program in the first program storage area (e.g., an in-area program). The arithmetic processing means uses only the first call instruction (e.g., CALL) when calling a subroutine from the second program in the second program storage area, and does not use a second call instruction (e.g., CALLR) or a third call instruction (e.g., CALLT), which have a smaller instruction size than the first call instruction.

In such a gaming machine 10, a first call instruction (e.g., a specific CALL instruction) is used when calling a second program from a first program, and since the second program does not have any call instructions other than the first call instruction that call subroutines, the second program can be distinguished from the first program, improving program development efficiency.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the program storage means (e.g., ROM) includes a first program storage area (e.g., a first ROM area), a second program storage area (e.g., a second ROM area), and an unused area between the first program storage area and the second program storage area. The number of specific call instructions (e.g., three) that appear in the program in the first program storage area and call subroutines is less than the number of specific call instructions (e.g., four or more) that appear in the program in the second program storage area and call subroutines.

In such a gaming machine 10, specific call instructions (e.g., first call instructions, specific CALL instructions) are used less frequently in the first ROM area (first program storage area) than in the second ROM area (second program storage area). This improves program development efficiency. In particular, when the word length (instruction size) of a specific call instruction is large, the first ROM area can have more capacity, improving program development efficiency.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (e.g., a CPU) does not use a specific call instruction (e.g., a first call instruction, a specific CALL instruction) that can call a subroutine at any address when calling processing related to game execution (e.g., special game processing, bonus game processing, regular game processing) (line numbers 1140-1160). The arithmetic processing means does not use a specific call instruction when calling processing related to the output of external information to the outside of the gaming machine (e.g., external information editing processing) (line number 1240). The arithmetic processing means uses a specific call instruction when calling processing related to the output of a test signal related to the gaming machine (e.g., test signal output processing) (line number 8070).

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the word length or cycle count of a specific call instruction is large because it can call a subroutine at any address, the specific call instruction is not used to call processing related to game execution or processing related to the output of external information, but is used to call processing related to the output of test signals. This enables more efficient and faster program processing. Furthermore, when calling processing related to the output of test signals related to the gaming machine (for example, test signal output processing), a specific call instruction that can call a subroutine at any address is used. This makes calling processing related to the output of test signals versatile, independent of the address of the subroutine related to that processing, and makes it easier for developers to understand.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute a first branch instruction (e.g., a JR instruction) and a second branch instruction (e.g., a JRR instruction) that jump the address of the instruction to be executed in the program storage means, and in a subroutine called by a specific call instruction (e.g., a first call instruction, a specific CALL instruction), the second branch instruction (e.g., a JRR instruction) is not executed, but the first branch instruction (e.g., a JR instruction) is executed. For example, the subroutine called by the specific call instruction is the out-of-area integration process, which is an out-of-area program, and its subroutines (e.g., test signal output process, performance display device control process, difference ball confirmation process, safety device activation monitoring process) (line number 1280, line numbers 8070-8100).

This type of gaming machine 10 improves program development efficiency. For example, if the branch condition of a second branch instruction (e.g., a JRR instruction) includes a condition related to the state of the jump status flag (JF), not using the second branch instruction in a subroutine called by a specific call instruction prevents reference to a jump status flag whose meaning changes depending on the situation (e.g., it may match the zero flag or the carry flag depending on the instruction used), preventing confusion when multiple developers view the program. This makes it easier to share subroutines called by specific call instructions across multiple models, improving program development efficiency. It also makes it easier to distinguish between subroutines called by specific call instructions (e.g., a first call instruction, a specific CALL instruction) and subroutines called by other call instructions (e.g., a CALLR instruction) based on whether only the first branch instruction is present or whether both the first and second branch instructions are present, improving program development efficiency.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, one subroutine can be called from a predetermined processing program (e.g., part of a program within an area) by one of multiple call instructions (e.g., the second call instruction and the third call instruction), and the one subroutine executes at least a predetermined branch instruction (e.g., the second branch instruction (JRR instruction)), and does not branch to another subroutine called from the predetermined processing program by the predetermined branch instruction. For example, combinations of a predetermined processing program and one subroutine include a combination of a timer interrupt processing program and a special symbol game processing program, a combination of a special symbol start port switch common processing program and a special symbol hold information determination processing program, and a combination of a special symbol hold information determination processing program and a jackpot determination processing program.

With this type of gaming machine 10, the division between one subroutine and another is clearly defined, improving program development efficiency.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the program includes a first subroutine (e.g., a special chart normal processing program, a special chart display processing program, a special chart hold information determination processing program) that contains a mixture of first branch instructions (e.g., a JR instruction) and second branch instructions (e.g., a JRR instruction) as branch instructions, and a second subroutine (e.g., a jackpot determination processing program) that contains only second branch instructions as branch instructions. Of the first and second subroutines, the second subroutine has a smaller program capacity.

In this type of gaming machine 10, the second subroutine, which has the smaller program capacity (program size) of the first and second subroutines, contains only the second branch instruction. Therefore, when the word length of the second branch instruction is shorter than the word length of the first branch instruction, programs can be designed more rationally, improving program development efficiency.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the second subroutine (e.g., the jackpot determination processing program) is called from multiple processing programs (e.g., the special chart reserve information determination processing program, the jackpot flag 1 setting processing program, and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing program). This reduces the overall capacity (size) of the program.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and variations are possible within the scope of its technical concept, and it is clear that these also fall within the technical scope of the present invention. For example, it is possible to replace the time-saving state with a probability variable state. For example, the presentation control device can execute part of the processing executed by the game control device, or conversely, the game control device can execute part of the processing executed by the presentation control device. For example, multiple embodiments and multiple modified examples can be combined in various ways. Furthermore, for example, the present invention can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, and it is intended to include all modifications that are equivalent in meaning and content to the claims.

For example, when the above-described embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the gaming media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of gaming balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced by the number of medals paid out. The number of gaming media used is the number of medals inserted into the slot machine. In a slot machine, the payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the bonus ratio is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out through various bonuses to the total number of medals paid out over a specified period.

10 gaming machine 25 effect button 30 gaming board 32 gaming area 34 normal start gate 36 first start winning port (first start winning area)
37 Normal variable winning device (second start winning area)
38 First special variable prize winning device 39 Second special variable prize winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific area (V winning entrance)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Performance control device (sub-board)
511 Operation notice display 512 Operation warning display 513 Operation display 520 Bulb burnout error display 522 Overflow error display 524 Two-dimensional code 541 Specific model display (complete function equipped display)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means capable of executing a game,
The game control means
a first storage means for storing a first program for game control in a first program storage area and a second program for non-game control in a second program storage area ;
a second storage means including a first working area that is readable and writable by the first program and readable and unwritable by the second program, and serves as a working area for game control; a second working area that is readable and unwritable by the first program and readable and writable by the second program; and an unused area;
an arithmetic processing means configured to be able to execute predetermined arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program , and to be able to execute a first branch instruction and a second branch instruction that cause an address of an instruction to be executed in the first storage means to jump;
a plurality of registers in which values are stored when the arithmetic processing is performed;
the first branch instruction is a branch instruction of a predetermined instruction length,
the second branch instruction is a branch instruction that has a limited range of addresses that can be branched to, has a shorter instruction length than the first branch instruction, and performs branching by determining a specific flag,
the first program includes a first processing routine and a first specific subroutine called from the first processing routine;
the second program includes a second processing routine,
the first processing routine is located in an area including a first address and a second address;
the second address is an address subsequent to the first address,
the second branch instruction capable of jumping processing to the second address is placed at the first address;
a first call instruction for calling the first specific subroutine is placed between the first address and the second address without a save instruction for saving a predetermined register and a restore instruction for restoring the predetermined register ;
the second processing routine has a second call instruction for calling a second specific subroutine located between a third address where the save instruction is located and a fourth address after the third address where the restore instruction is located;
the second storage means allocates the unused area between the first working area and the second working area;
Gaming machine.